TS?«rPf?J*^w^f^ -^ m f^,:.< i m Tim^^r Class Book. GoipglitN^^V - -<- ^ / COPntlGHT DEPOSIT. WORKS OF PROF. WM. H. BURR PUBLISHED BY JOHN WILEY & SONS, Inc. Ancient and Modern Engineering and the Isthmian Canal. XV +476 pages, 6 by 9, profusely illustrated, including many half-tones. Cloth, $3.50 net. Elasticity and Resistance of Materials of Engi- neering. For the use of Engineers and Students. Containing the latest engineering experience and tests. Seventh Edi- tion, revised. 946 pages, 6 by 9. Cloth, $5.50 net. Suspension Bridges— Arch Ribs and Cantilevers. xi+417 pages, 6 by 9, 68 figures, and 6 full-page and folding plates. Cloth, $4.50 net. BY PROF. BURR and DR. FALK The Graphic Method by Influence Lines for Bridge and Roof Computations. xi +253 pages, 6 by 9, 4 folding plates. Cloth, $3.00. The Design and Construction of Metallic Bridges. xiii +532 pages, 6 by 9, many figures in the text and 4 folding plates. Cloth, $^.00. BY DR. MYRON S. FALK PUBLISHED BY MYRON C. CLARK PUBLISHING CO., 355 DEARBORN ST., CHICAGO, ILL. Cements, Mortars and Concretes— Their Physical Properties. Containing the results of late investigations upon these materials. 176 pages, 6 by 9. Cloth, $2.50. THE ELASTICITY AND RESISTANCE OF THE MATERIALS OF ENGINEERING. BY WM. H. BURR, C.E., PROFESSOR OF CIVIL ENGINEEKING IN COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK? CONSULTING engineer; MEMBER OF THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS; MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTION OF CIVIL ENGINEERS OF GREAT BRITAIN. SEVENTH EDITION, THOROUGHLY REVISED TOTAL ISSUE, SEVEN THOUSAND NEW YORK JOHN WILEY & SONS, Inc. London: CHAPMAN & HALL, Limited 191S Copyright, 1883, 1903. IQIS, BY WM. H. BURR. Copyright renewed, 191 1, BY WM. H. BURR. OCT I9I9I5 ro^ CI,A416001 'VVO- \ • PREFACE TO SEVENTH EDITION. The rapid development which has characterized all branches of engineering construction during the past decade carries with it corresponding advances in experi- mental and analytic work in that field of engineering science known as the Elasticity and Resistance of Mate- rials. In the present edition of this book, prepared to meet the advancing requirements of the profession, it will be observed that much of the older matter has been canceled and displaced by many new topics now become of practical importance, so that new material constitutes probably not less than three-quarters of the volume. These new parts will readily be discovered by a glance at the contents. It may be well, however, to state that the treatment of reinforced concrete, the general analysis of which as a development of the common theory of flexure was first given in a prior edition of this book, has been extended to cover substantially all the principal features of that special field. The analysis given is general, but simple and free from the superfluous and labor- increasing accretions which, for some not obvious reasons, have found place in some of the commonly used formulae. Results of the most recent experimental investigations have been used for the requisite empirical data, so as to make the book a real work on the Elasticity and Resist- ance of the Materials of Engineering rather than a mere matter of applied mechanics. W. H. B. Columbia University, Oct. 1,1915. CONTENTS. PART I. ANALYTICAL. CHAPTER I. ELEMENTARY THEORY OF ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. ART. PAGE 1 . General Statements i 2. Coefficient or Modulus of Elasticity 4 3. Direct Stresses of Tension and Compression. . . .- 7 4. Lateral Strains 9 5. Relation between the Coefficieilts of Elasticity for Shearing and Direct Stress in a Homogeneous Body 11 6. Shearing Stresses and Strains 13 7. Relation between Moduli of Elasticity and Rate of Change of Volume 18 8. All Stresses Parallel to One Plane — Resultant Stress on any Plane Normal to the Plane of Action of the Stresses 21 Sum of Normal Components 24 9. The Ellipse of Stress — Greatest Intensity of Shearing Stress — Equivalence of Pure Shear to Two Principal Stresses of Opposite Ednds but Equal Intensities — Greatest Obliquity of Resultant Stress on any Plane 26 Greatest Intensity of Shearing Stress 29 Equivalence of Pure Shear to Tico Principal Stresses of Opposite Kinds but Equal Intensities 30 Greatest Obliquity of Resultant Stress on any Plane 31 10. Ellipse of Stress and Resulting Formulas for the Special Case of Zero Intensity of One of the Known Direct Stresses. ..,..■ 33 1 1 . General Condition of Stress — Ellipsoid of Stress 36 Principal Stresses and Ellipsoid of Stress 40 vii VIU CONTENTS. ART. PAGE 12. Ellipse and Ellipsoid of Strain ' 43 13. Orthogonal Stresses 43 CHAPTER II. FLEXURE. 14. The Common Theory of Flexure 49 15. The Distribution of Shearing Stress in the Normal Section of a Bent Beam 57 Distribution of Shear in Circular and Other Sections 62 16. External Bending Moments and Shears in General • 64 17. Intermediate and End Shears 68 18. Maximum Reactions for Bridge Floor Beams 74 19. Greatest Bending Moment Produced by Two Equal Weights 76 20. Position of Uniform Load for Greatest Shear and Greatest Bending Moment at any Section of a Non-continuous Beam — ^^Bending Moments of Concentrated Loads 79 21. Greatest Bending Moment in a Non-continuous Beam Produced by Concentrated Loads 83 22. Moments and Shears in Special Cases 94 Case 1 95 Case II 96 Case III 98 23. Recapitulation of the General Formulae of the Common Theory of Flexure 99 24. The Theorem of Three Moments 102 25. Short Demonstration of the Common Form of the Theorem of Three Moments 114 26. Reaction under Continuous Beam of any Number of Spans 118 27. Deflection by the Common Theory of Flexure 121 Deflection Due to Shearing 125 28. The Neutral Curve for Special Cases ; 126 Case I 126 Case II 129 Case III 131 Addendum to Art. 28 143 29. Direct Demonstration for Beam Fixed at One End and Simply Sup- ported at the Other under Uniform and Single Loads 144 Special Case, a = \ 149 30. Direct Demonstration for Beams Fixed at Both Ends under Uniform and Single Loads 150 31. Deflection Due to Shearing in Special Cases 153 32. The Common Theory of Flexure for a Beam Composed of Two Materials , 156 CONTENTS. ix ART. PAGE 33. Graphical Determination of the Resistance of a Beam 160 34. Greatest Stresses at any Point in a Beam 162 35. The Flexure of Long Columns 169 36. Special Cases of Flexure of Long Columns 175 Flexure by Oblique Forces • 175 Column Free at Upper End and Fixed Vertically at Lower End with either Inclined or Vertical Loading at Upper End 177 CHAPTER III. TORSION. 37. Torsion in Equilibrium 182 Twisting Moment in Terms of Horse-power H 188 Hollow Circular Cylinders 189 38. Practical Applications of Formulae for Torsion 190 Steel 190 Wrought Iron 192 Cast Iron 192 Alloys of Copper, Tin, Zinc and Aluminum 193 Other Sections than Circular 1-96 CHAPTER IV. HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES. 39. Thin Hollow Cylinders and Spher,es in Tension 197 40. Thick Hollow Cylinders 203 Case of Exterior Pressure Greater than Interior Pressure 211 41. Radial Strain or Displacement in Thick Hollow Cylinders — Stresses Due to Shrinkage of One Hollow Cylinder on Another. . . 212 Radial Strain or Displacement. 212 Stresses Due to Shrinkage 213 Inner Cylinder in Compression 217 Outer Cylinder in Tension ■ 218 Combined Cylinder under High Internal Pressure 219 42. Thick Hollow Spheres 224 Radial Displacement at any Point in the Spherical Shell 230 CHAPTER V. RESILIENCE. 43. General Considerations 231 44. The Elastic Resilience of Tension and Compression and of Flexure. 232 The Resilience of Bending or Flexure 233 X CONTENTS. ART. PAGE The Resilience Due to the Vertical or Transverse Shearing Stresses in a Bent Beam 236 The Total Resilience Due to Both Direct ajid Shearing Stresses . . . 239 45. Resilience of Torsion 240 46. Suddenly Applied Loads 242 CHAPTER VI. COMBINED STRESS CONDITIONS. 47. Combined Bending and Torsion 246 First Method 248 Second Method 250 48. Combined Bending and Direct Stress 254 49. The Eye-bar Subjected to Bending by Its Own Weight or Other Vertical Loading 255 Approximate Method 256 50. The Approximate Method Ordinarily Employed 258 5 1 . Exact Method of Treating Combined Bending and Direct Stress. . . . 263 52. Combined Bending and Direct Stress in Compression Members 268 Exact Method for Combined Compression and Bending 271 PART II. TECHNICAL, CHAPTER VII. TENSION. 53. General Observations. — Limit of Elasticity. — Yield Point 281 Yield Point 284 54. Ultimate Resistance 285 55. Ductility — Permanent Set 286 56. Cast Iron 286 Modulus of Elasticity and Elastic Limit 286 Resilience, or Work Performed in Straining Cast Iron 290 Ultimate Resistance 292 Effects of Remelting, Continued Fusion, Repetition of Stress, and High Temperature, 294 CONTENTS. XI ART. PAGE 57. Wrought Iron — Modulus of Elasticity — Limit of Elasticity . and Yield Point — Resilience — Ultimate Resistance and Ductility .... 295 Modulus of Elasticity 296 Limit of Elasticity and Yield Point Resilience 297 Ductility and Resilience 299 Ultimate Resistance 301 Ductility 302 Fracture of Wrought Iron 302 58. Steel 303 Modulus of Elasticity 303 Variation of Ultimate Resistance with A rea of Cross-section 308 Influence of Shortness of Specimen 309 Elastic Limit, Resilience, and Ultimate Resistance 310 Shape Steel and Plates 315 Carbon Steel for Towers 318 Carbon Steel for Suspended Structures 319 Nickel Steel for Stiffening Trusses 319 Steel Wire 320 Steel Castings 321 Rail Steel 323 Rivet Steel 324 Nickel Steel 325 Vanadium Steel 328 Effect of Low and High Temperatures 333 Hardening and Tempering. . .' 336 Annealing 338 Effect of Manipulations Common to Constructive Processes; also Punched, Drilled and Reamed Holes 339 Change of Ultimate Resistance, Elastic Limit and Modulus of Elasticity by Retesting 342 Fracture of Steel 343 The Effects of Chemical Elements on the Physical Qualities of Steel 343 59. Copper, Tin, Aluminum, and Zinc, and Their Alloys — Alloys of Aluminum — Phosphor-Bronze — Magnesium 346 Ultimate Resistance and Elastic Limit 348 Alloys of Aluminum 352 Alloys of Aluminum and Copper 357 Bronzes and Brass Used by the Board of Water Supply of New York City 359 Phosphor-Bronze 361 Bauschinger's Tests of Copper and Brass as to Effect of Repeated Application of Stress 361 XU CONTENTS. ART. PAGE 60. Cement, Cement Mortars, etc. — Brick 362 Modulus of Elasticity 363 Ultimate Resistance 365 Weight of Concrete 372 Adhesion between Bricks and Cement Mortar 373 The Effect of Freezing Cements and Cement Mortars 375 The Linear Thermal Expansion and Contraction of Concrete and Stone 377 61 . Timber in Tension 379 CHAPTER VIII. COMPRESSION. *» 62. Preliminary 385 63. Wrought Iron 387 Modulus of Elasticity 387 Limit of Elasticity and Ultimate Resistance .- 388 64. Cast Iron 388 65. Steel ; 389 66. Copper, Tin, Zinc, Lead, and Alloys 391 67. Cement — Cement Mortar — Concrete . 395 68. Bricks and Brick Piers 409 Brick Piers 413 69. Natural Building Stones 420 70. Timber 426 CHAPTER IX. RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. 7 1 . Riveted Joints 435 Kinds of Joints 435 72. Distribution of Stress in Riveted Joints 437 Bending of the Plates 437 Net Section of Plates 439 Bending of the Rivets 440 The Bearing Capacity of Rivets 441 Bending of Plate Metal in Front of Rivets 442 Shearing of Rivets. . .• 443 CONTENTS. xiii ART. PAGE 73. Diameter and Pitch of Rivets and Overlap of Plate. — Distance between Rows of Riveting 445 Diameter of Rivets 445 Pitch of Rivets 446 Overlap of Plate 447 Distance between Rows of Riveting 448 74. Lap-joints, and Butt-joints with Single Butt-strap for Steel Plates ' 448 75. Steel Butt-joints with Double Cover-plates 452 76. Tests of Full-size Riveted Joints 454 Efficiencies 461 77. Tests of Joints for the American Railway Engineering and Main- . . tenance of Way Association and for the Board of Consulting Engineers of the Queb^ Bridge 462 Friction of Riveted Joints 465 78. Riveted Truss Joints , 467 Diagonal Joints 469 Riveted Joints in Angles 469 Hand and Machine Riveting 470 79. Welded Joints 470 80. Pin Connections .,,,,,,., 470 CHAPTER X. LONGCOLUMNS. 81. Preliminary Matter 474 Principal Momejits of Inertia 477 82. Gordon's Formula for Long Columns 481 83. Tests of Wrought-iron Phoenix Columns, Steel Angles and Other Steel Columns 490 Steel Columns 496 Typical Formulce Now in Use 503 Details of Columns 505 84. Complete Design of Pin-end Steel Columns 506 85. Cast-iron Columns 520 86. Timber Columns 528 Formula of C. Shaler Smith 531 Tests of White Pine and Yellow Pine Full-size Sticks with Flat Ends 533 XIV CONTENTS. CHAPTER XI. SHEARING AND TORSION. ART. PAGE 87. Modulus of Elasticity 540 88. Ultimate Resistance '. 543 Wrought Iron 543 Cast Iron 544 Steel "545 Copper, Tin, Zinc, and Their Alloys 546 Timber 547 Natural Stones 549 Bricks 550 CHAPTER XII. BENDING OR FLEXURE. 89. Modulus of Elasticity 552 90. Formulae for Rupture 552 91. Beams with Rectangular and Circular Sections 554 High Extreme Fibre Stress in Short Solid Beams 556 Steel .558 Cast Iron 560 Alloys of Aluminum 560 Copper, Tin, Zinc, and their Alloys 561 Timber Beams 563 Failure of Timber Beams by Shearing along the Neutral Surface. 571 Influence of Time on the Strains of Timber Beams 574 Concrete Beams 575 Natural-stone Beams 586 CHAPTER XIII. CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. 92. Composite Beams or Other Members of Concrete and Steel 588 ■ 93. Physical Features of the Concrete-steel Combination in Beams 589 94. Rate at which Steel Reinforcement Acquires Stress 592 95. Ultimate and Working Values of Empirical Quantities for *Concrete- steel Beams 598 96. General Formulae and Notation for the Theory of Concrete-steel Beams according to the Common Theory of Flexure 600 CONTENTS. XV ART. PAGE 97. T-beams of Reinforced Concrete 604 Position of Neutral Axis 605 Balanced or Economic Steel Reinforcement 608 Formula to Locate Neutral Axis in T-beams 610 98. Bending Moments in Concrete-steel T-beams by Common Theory of Flexure 614 Neglect of Concrete in Tension 615 Special Case of Neutral Axis in under Surface of Flange 616 99. Concrete Steel Beams of Rectangular Section 616 FormulcB to Locate Neutral Axis in Beams of Rectangular Section 616 Bendijig Moments for Rectangular Sections 618 Neglect of Concrete in Tension 619 100. Shearing Stresses and Web Reinforcements in Reinforced Concrete Beams. . , 620 lOi. Working Stresses and Other Conditions in Reinforced Concrete Designs-Design of T-beams 629 Working Stresses '. 631 Working Compression in Extreme Fibre of Beam 631 Shear and Diagonal Tension 632 Bond or A dhesive Shear 633 Steel Reinforcement 633 Modulus of Elasticity 633 Design of T-beam for Heavy Uniform Load 634 Design of Continuous Floor- Slab for 6-foot Spans 639 102. Reinforced Concrete Columns 641 Lateral Reinforcement and Shrinkage 642 Longitudinal Reinforcement 644 Types of Columns 646 Working Stresses 650 103. Division of Loading between the Concrete and Steel under the Common Theory of Flexure 655 CHAPTER XIV. ROLLED AND CAST-FLANGED BEAMS. 104. Flanged Beams in General 659 105. Flanged Beams with Unequal Flanges 661 106. Flanged Beams with Equal Flanges : 665 107. Rolled Steel Flanged Beams 669 108. The Deflection of Rolled Steel Beams 677 109. Wrought-iron Rolled Beams 679 xvm CONTENTS. APPENDIX I. ELEMENTS OF THEORY OF ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. CHAPTER I. GENERAL EQUATIONS. ART. PAGE 1 . Expressions for Tangential and Direct Stresses in Terms of the Rates of Strains at Any Point of a Homogeneous Body 820 2. General Equations of Internal Motion and Equilibrium 826 3. Equations of Motion and Equilibrium in Semi-polar Co-ordinates. . . 832 4. Equations of Motion and Equilibrium in Polar Co-ordinates 839 CHAPTER II. THICK, HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES, AND TORSION. 5. Thick, Hollow Cylinders 847 6. Torsion in Equilibrium 853 Equations of Condition in Rectangular Co-ordinates 860 Solutions of Eqs. (13) and (21) 862 Elliptical Section about its Centre 863 Equilateral Triangle about its Centre of Gravity 866 Rectangular Section about an Axis Passing through its Centre of Gravity 869, 883 Square Section 878, 882 Greatest Intensity of Shear 880 Circular Section about its Centre. . 884 General Observations 885 7. Torsional Oscillations of Circular Cylinders 886 8. Thick, Hollow Spheres 892 CHAPTER III. THEORY OF FLEXURE. 9. General Formulae 897 CONTENTS. xix APPENDIX 11. Page CLAVARINO'S FORMULA 913 APPENDIX III. RESISTING CAPACITY OF NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL ICE 916 Index 921 ELASTICITY AND RESISTANCE OF MATERIALS. PART I.— ANALYTICAL CHAPTER I. ELEMENTARY THEOPY OF ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. Art. I. — General Statements. The molecules of all solid bodies known in nature are more or less free to move toward, or from, or among each other. Resistances are offered to such motions, which vary according to the circumstances under which they take place and the nature of the body. This property of resistance is termed the elasticity of the body. The summation of the displacements of the molecules of a body, for a given point, is called the distortion or strain at the point considered. The force by which the molecules of a body resist a strain, at any point, is called the stress at that point. This distinction between stress and strain is fundamental and important. Stresses are developed, and strains caused, by the application of force to the exterior surface of the material. 2 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. These stresses and strains vary in character according to the method of appHcation of the external forces. Each stress, however, is accompanied by its own characteristic strain and no other. Thus there are shearing stresses and shearing strains, tensile stresses and tensile strains, com- pressive stresses and compressive strains. Usually a number of different stresses with their corresponding strains are coexistent at any point in a body subjected to the action of external forces. It is a matter of experience that strains always vary continuously and in the same direction with the corre- sponding stresses. Consequently the stresses are con- tinuously increasing functions of the strains, and any stress may be represented by a series composed of the ascending powers (commencing with the first) of the strains multiplied by proper coefficients. When, as is usually the case, the displacements are very small, the terms of the series whose indices are greater than unity are ex- ceedingly small compared w4th the first term, whose index is unity. Those terms may consequently be omitted without essentially changing the value of the expression. Hence follows what is ordinarily termed Hooke's law: The ratio between stresses and corresponding strains, jot a given material, is constant. This law is susceptible of very simple algebraic repre- sentation. If a piece of material, whose normal cross- section is A, is subjected to either tensile or compressive stress, its length L will be changed by the amount JL. If P be the external force or loading which produces that deformation or change of length, the amount of force or stress, supposed to be uniformly distributed, acting on i square inch of normal cross-section of the piece, will be found by dividing the total force P by the area of cross- section A. This amount of uniformly distributed stress Art. I.] GENERAL STATEMENTS. 3 is called the ' ' intensity of stress, ' ' and it is a most impor- tant quantity. In dealing with the effects of forces or stresses in all engineering work, the amount of such force or stress on a square unit of area, usually a square inch in American practice, and called the intensity, is often the main object sought, for it determines the question whether material is carrying too much or too little load, as well as many other related questions. Again, the important consideration as to strain is the fractional change in length of the entire piece, and not the total change in length expressed in the unit adopted, ordi- narily an inch. This fractional change of length is the same as the amount of actual change of each linear unit of the piece, as found by dividing JL by L. Inasmuch as that fraction expresses the amount of change in length for each imit, it is frequently called the rate of change of length or rate of deformation. Hooke's law^ is to the effect that the intensity of stress is proportional to the rate of strain, and its analytic expression may readily be written. Let p represent the intensity of any stress and / the strain per unit of length, or, in other words, the rate of strain. If £ is a constant coefficient, Hooke 's law will be given by the following equation: P AL If the intensity of stress varies from point to point of a body, Hooke's law may be expressed by the following differential equation: ■§=^^ • ■ « If p and I are rectangular coordinates, eqs. (i) and (2) are evidently equations of a straight line passing through 4 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. the origin of coordinates. It will hereafter be seen that the line under consideration is essentially straight for comparatively small strains in any case, and for some materials it has no straight portions. Art. 2. — Coefficient or Modulus of Elasticity. In general the coefficient E in eq. (i) of the preced- ing article is called the coefficient of elasticity, or, more usually, modulus of elasticity. The coefficient of elasticity varies both with the kind of material and kind of stress. It simply expresses the ratio between the rates of stress and strain. The characteristic strain of a tensile stress is evidently an increase of the linear dimensions of the body in the direction of action of the external forces. Let this increase per unit of length be represented by /, while p and E represent, respectively, the correspond- ing intensity and coefficient. Eq. (i) of the preceding article then becomes p=El, or £=1 (i) E is then the coefficient of elasticity for tension. The characteristic strain for a compressive stress is evidently a decrease in the linear dimensions of the body in the direction of action of the external forces. Let l^ represent this decrease per unit of length, p^ the intensity of compressive stress, and E^ the corresponding coefficient. Hence />.=£,?, or £,= ! (2) E^ consequently is the coefficient of elasticity for compression. Art. 2.] COEFFICIENTS OF ELASTICITY, The characteristic strain for a shearing stress may be determined by considering the effect which it produces on the layers of the body parahel to its plane of action. In Fig. I let A BCD represent one face of a cube, another of whose faces is fixed along AD. If a shear acts in the face BC, whose plane is normal to the plane of the paper, all layers of the cube parallel to the plane of the shearing stress, i.e., BC, will slide over each other, so that the faces AB and DC will take the positions AE and DF. The amount of distortion or strain per unit of length will be represented by the angle EAB = (p. If the strain is small, there may be written ^, sin ^, or tan (f> indifferently. Representing, therefore, the intensity of shear, coeffi- cient, and strain by 5, G, and (f), respectively, eq. (i) of Art. I becomes S=G(l), or G S (3) It will be seen hereafter that there are certain limits of stress within which eqs. (i), (2), and (3) are essentially true, but beyond which they do not hold; this limit is called the limit of elasticity, and is not in general a well- defined point. The line Okghn exhibited in Fig. 2 represents the actual strains in a piece of structural steel i inch in length with I square inch of cross-section. is the origin- of coordi- nates, and the loads per square inch, i.e., intensities of stresses, are shown by the vertical ordinates drawn parallel to OC from OD to the strain curve, while the strains per unit of length, that is, per inch, are laid off as horizontal ordinates of the curve parallel to OD. If Op' is the in- 6 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. tensity of stress, p' corresponding to the point k of the strain curve, while 01' is the resulting strain per unit of length, then p' =EU. Again, if g is at the upper limit of the straight portion of the curve for which the intensity of stress and rate of strain are p and / respectively, the relation between those two quantities is shown by eq. (i). Since E, also as Fig. 2. shown by eq. (i), is equal to the quotient of p divided by /, Fig. 2 shows that it is equal to the tangent of the angle between OD and the straight portion Og of the strain curve, it being supposed that the rates of strain are laid down at their actual or natural sizes. If the strain line is curved, the first term of eq. (2) of Art. i, the differential ratio, w411 represent the tangent of the angle between the curve and the horizontal axis OD in Fig. 2. The point g, being at the upper limit of constant proportionality be- tween intensity of stress and rate of strain, is called the elastic Hmit, above which it is seen that the strains in- crease far more rapidly than the stresses until the point n is reached, where actual rupture takes place. The nearly horizontal portion of the curve between g and h and a little Art. 3.] STRESSES OF ThNSION AND COMPRESSION. 7 above g indicates the " yield point," an. intensity of stress where the material is said first to * ' break down ' ' or stretch rapidly under tensile stress without much increase of the latter. Art. 3. — Direct Stresses of Tension and Compression. The direct stresses of tension and compression always produce shearing stresses and strains on all planes in the interior of a body except those perpendicular and parallel to those direct stresses. If, in Fig. i, a straight piece of material CD is subjected to the tensile stress induced by the forces P equal and opposite to each other, there will be pure tension only on all planes or sections of the piece at right angles to the direction of the forces P, such as HK. On all planes passing through the longitudinal axis of the piece there will be no stress whatever, if, as is supposed, the forces P are uniformly distributed over the sections of application DF and BC. On every oblique plane or section in all parts of the piece as H'K\ supposed to be perpendicular to the plane of the diagram, there will be shear as well as direct stress of tension normal to it, the intensities of both the shear and the normal stress being dependent upon the angle a between HK and H^K\ The force P may be resolved by the triangle of forces into two components, one at right angles to H'K' , represented by A^, and the other along or tangential to H^K\ represented by 5. If 8 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. A represents the area of the normal section HK, the area of the obhque section H^K^ will be A sec a. The value of the noiTnal stress A^ will be N =P cos a, but S =P sin a. The intensity of the normal tensile stress on H^K' will be, therefore, N P cos a: , n=-, = -. =pcos^a. . . (i) A sec a A sec a ^ ^ ^ The intensity of shear on the same plane H^K^ will be S P sin a . s=-, =-. =p sm a cos a. . . (2) A sec a A sec a ^ ^ "VVnen the angle a is zero, 5 in eq. (2) becomes zero, while n in eq. (1) becomes equal to p, i.e., the intensity of direct tensile stress on the normal section. On the other hand, when the angle a has the value of 90°, both n and 5 become zero, i.e., there is no stress whatever on a longi- tudinal, axial plane. Inasmuch as the angle a may have any value w^hat- ever from zero to 90° on either side of HK, it is clear that both shearing and normal tensile stresses will be found concurrently on every oblique plane in the piece. As has been observed in the preceding article, these shearing stresses induce the lateral strains under which the normal cross-sections of a piece subjected to pure tension decrease in area \vhile they increase under the action of pure com- pression. Eqs. (i) and (2) have been written on the assump- tion that the external forces P produce tension in the material, but precisely the same equations apply to the condition of pure comxpression, the only difference being that in the latter case the external forces P w^ould be di- rected toward each other from the ends of the piece, in- stead of away from each other. Art. 4.] LATERAL STRAINS. Art. 4. — Lateral Strains. If a body, as indicated in Fig. i, be subjected to ten- sion, it .has been shown in Art. 3 that all of its oblique cross- sections, such as FE and GH, will sustain shearing stresses in consequence of the component of the tension tangential to those oblique sections. These tangential stresses will cause the oblique sections, in both directions, to slide over AGE c 'Ma' >-<^^•^ -P^ H Fig. 1 each other. Consequently the normal cross-sections of the body will be decreased; and if the norma] cross-sections of the body are made less, its capacity to resist the external forces acting on AB and CD will be correspondingly dimin- ished. If the body is subjected to compression, oblique sec- tions of the body will be subjected to shears, but in direc- tions opposite to those existing in the previous case. The effect of such shears will be an increase of the lateral dimensions of the body and a corresponding increase in its capacity of resistance. These changes in the lateral dimensions of the body are termed ''lateral strains"; they always accompany direct strains of tension and compression. It is to be observed that lateral strains decrease a body 's resistance to tension, but increase its resistance to com- pression. Also, that if they are prevented, both kinds of resistance are increased. Consider a cube, each of whose edges is a, in a body subjected to tension. Let r represent the ratio between lo . ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. the lateral and direct strains,* and let it be supposed to be the same in all directions. If Z, as in Art. 2, represents the direct unit strain, the edges of the cube will become, by the tension, a{i+l), a(i—lr), and a{i—rl). Consequently the volume of the resulting parallelopiped will be a\i+l){i-riy^a\i-\-l{i-2r)] . .. . (i) if powers of / higher than the first be omitted. With r be- tween o and i, there will he an increase oj vo!:i;ne, but not otherwise. If the body is subjected to compression, the edges of the cube become a(i— /J, a(i+r^/J, and a{i+rj^)] while the volume of the parallelopiped takes the value a\i-lj(i+r,l,r=a\i+l,(2r^-i)l . . (2) As before, the higher powers of l^ are omitted. If the volume of the cube is decreased, r^ must be found between o and J. If a be unity in eq. (i), it is then clear that the expres- sion l(i — 2r) is the change of volume of a unit cube, i.e., it is the rate of change of volume w^hen the intensity of stress is p=El. Hence if this rate of change of volume be mul- tiplied by a definite volume V the result will be the total change of that definite volume produced by the uniform intensity of stress p. If the intensity of stress varies from point to point the total change of volume will become : /!<■- "'■"'= (t)/^""- (3) Evidently the volume V must be expressed in the same independent variable, or variables, as p. The integral must then be made to cover the desired limits. * Frequently called Poisson's ratio. Art. 5.] RELATION BETIVEEN COEFFICIENTS OF ELASTICITY- Art. 5. — Relation between the Coefficients of Elasticity for Shearing and Direct Stress in a Homogeneous Body. A body is said to be homogeneous when its elasticity, of a given kind, is the same in all directions. Let Fig. I represent a body subjected to tension parallel to CD. That oblique section on which the shear has the f^ £ B greatest intensity will make an angle of 45° with either of those faces whose traces are CD or BD ; for if a is the angle which any oblique section "D makes with BD, P the total tension on BD, and A' the area of the latter surface, the total shear on any section whose area is A' sec a will be P sin a. Hence the intensity of shear is P sin a P . E>1>=/(! +r) (6) Substituting from eq. (3), as well as from eq. (i) of Art. 2, E ^^^+7) (^^ It has already been seen in the preceding article that r must be found between o and ^, consequently the coefficient of elasticity for shearing lies between the values of \ and \ of that of the coefficient of elasticity for tension. This result is approximately verified by experiment. Since precisely the same form of result is obtained by treating compressive stress, instead of tensile, there will be found, by equating the two values of G, E E, E, i-\- r, ' or 1=^=---' (8) I + r I + r/ E I + r Art. 6.J SHEARING STRESSES AND STRAINS. 13 It is clear, from the conditions assumed and operations involved, that the relations shown by eqs. (7) and (8) can only be approximate. Art. 6. — Shearing Stresses and Strains. In the preceding Arts, the more simple and ordinary relations between stress and strain are shown, but in this and follow^ing Arts, it is desirable to give a more extended treatment. Materials are rarely used in structures and machines under conditions in which the stress is wholly shear. The usual conditions are such as to produce shear concurrently with stresses of tension and compression. Even in the use of rivets, where shearing stress acts prominently, tension and compression in the form of flexure and direct com- pression are concurrent. Again in the case of flexure or the bending of beams, the shearing stress is sufficiently high in intensity in some cases to produce failure, but concurrently with relatively' high intensities of tension and compression. Figs. I and 2 show a rectangular parallelopiped of material of depth b at right angles to the plane ABCD firmly held on the face AD, while the intensities of shear s and s^ act on the faces AB, EC, CD, and AD. It is supposed that no other stresses act upon the exterior faces of the prism of material. Let the prism be imagined to be divided into indefinitely thin vertical slices at right angles to the face A BCD when in its original position shown by AB'C'D. Similarly let the prism be imagined to be divided into indefinitely thin horizontal slices at right angles to the same face. Before considering the distortion of the prism due to the action of the shearing stresses an important but simple principle must be established. As there are no stresses 14 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. acting upon the prism except the opposite pairs of shearing stresses whose intensities are 5 and s' as shown, it is clear that the prism must be held in equilibrium by the two couples acting in opposite directions whose lever arms are AB' and AD. Let / represent the length AB' of the Fig. Fig. 2. prism, while AD=d, as shown in Fig. 2. Then since the prism is in equilibrium there will result the equation, s'hl.d=shd.l (i) This equation shows that the intensities of two shears acting on planes at right angles to each other and parallel to a third plane at right angles to the other two must be equal. Furthermore, it is clear from Fig. 2 that the shears on the faces of the prism must act in pairs toward two of the corners of the prism diagonally opposite each other and away from the other diagonally opposite pair of corners. The rectangular prism of Figs, i and 2 may be con- sidered indefinitely small under ordinary conditions of Art. 6.] SHEARING STRESSES AND STRAINS. 15 stress in structural material in order to have the stress uniformly distributed on the four faces. Whatever may be the condition of stress at any point in the interior of a piece of material, the stresses acting upon the four faces of the rectangular prism, when all stress is parallel to one plane, may be resolved into normal and tangential components. The normal components will act opposite to each other producing no moments about any point, but the tangential components will produce precisely the moments shown in Figs, i and 2. The equilibrium, of the indefinitely small prism invariably requires there- fore the action of two pairs of shears of equal intensity, as established above. The complete distortion of the rectangular prism A BCD may be considered as produced first by the sliding over each other of the indefinitely thin vertical sections parallel to BC, so as to produce the oblique prism AB"C2D^ Fig. I, then by the subsequent sliding over each other of the indefinitely thin horizontal sections parallel to DC, so as to produce the oblique prism AB"C"D' . This last movement of the horizontal slices will bring the line AD into the position oi AD' , then swinging the latter line about A to the original position AD, the completely distorted prism will take the form A BCD. B'B", Fig. I, is the characteristic shearing strain pro- duced by the vertical shearing stress whose intensity is 5 acting in the planes parallel to BC. DD' is the character- istic shearing strain produced by the action of the hori- zontal shearing intensity s' in sliding the thin horizontal slices over each other. These detrusive movements are so small that B'B" may be considered at right angles to AB and DD' at right angles to AD. The total detrusive strain B'B is the sum of B'B" , due to the vertical shear, and B"B due to the horizontal shear, and B'B" =B"B, 1 6 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. if AB' =AD. The total shearing strain per unit of length of AB will therefore be, B'B ^ B'B"+B''B AB ' AB ^^^ This is the expression for the characteristic resultant shearing strain and it is seen to be measured at right angles to the original face AB' , i.e., it is a small arc measurement in radians. It is important to remember that this total detrusive strain due to shear is the sum of two equal effects, one of horizontal shear and the other of vertical shear, i.e., of the two shears on planes at right angles to each other. lib = 1 and if AB'C'D, Fig. 2, now be considered square so that AB=BC, then will the tension T acting perpen- dicular to the plane BD be equal to the sum of the com- ponents of the shear s=s', on the planes BC and DC, normal to the diagonal plane BD. Since the angle BCA is 45° and its cosine —/=-, the following equation at once V 2 results: r=25 cos 45° =5\/2 (3) Similarly the compression on the diagonal plane AC is: C=-s\/'2, (4) As the area of each diagonal plane section AC and BD is a/2, the intensity of the tension T and compression C on the planes AC and BD respectively will be: -r= — 7-=^ (5) V2 V2 Art. 6.] SHEARING STRESSES AND STRAINS. 17 Hence it is seen that when the stress it any point is wholly shear on two planes at ri'ght angles to each other and perpendicular to the plane to which the shearing stress is parallel, the stress on two planes at right angles to each other and making angles of 45° with the two planes on which the shears act, will be wholly tension on one and compression on the other, and both will have the same intensity as the two shears. Inasmuch as the prism whose section is shown in Fig. 2 is subjected to a normal stress of tension in the direction of ^C and an equal normal stress of compression in the direction BLl, it is obvious that there will be no change in volume due to those stresses, since the change in inten- sity caused by one stress will be exactly, neutralized by the other. Again the sliding over each other of the thin slices of the material will not change its density or volume, although a change of shape is produced. Hence it is to be carefully observed that shearing stresses produce no change of volume, but change of shape only. If cf) is the angle B'AB =C'DC, then in general, the resultant shearing strain B'B =C'C =AB' (t)=AB' sin = AB' tan 0, -since the angle is exceedingly small. If AB=BC = 1, B'B = 4) =sm 0=tan 0. In Fig. 2 if the total detrusive strain CC be projected on the diagonal AC the change CCi in length of that diagonal will result. As the angle C^CCi is 45°, the change of length CCi will be -7=, and the strain per unit V2 of length of the diagonal will be, -7^-7--- (6) V2V2 2 It is clear that the diagonal BD will be shortened by the same amount. Indeed Eq. 6 shows the tensile strain i8 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. in the diagonal AC, while the same value with a minus sign would show the coriipressive strain for the diagonal BD. If the diagonal AC were subjected to the tensile intensity 5 only the strain per unit of length would be — . If G is the modulus of elasticity for shearing, the intensity of shearing stress may be written, s=s'=G. ....... (7) Inasmuch as the total detrusive strain per linear unit is the sum of the equal effects of the shears on the two faces of the prism, it would be more rational to call — the detrusive strain per linear unit for the shear on one 2 face of the prism. This would make the modulus G of elasticity for shearing double the value usually employed, but it would represent accurately the rigidity of the material, since one half of the total shearing strain 0, Fig. 2, is pro- duced by a rotation of the prism as a whole. In other words the total strain is the sum of two separate but equal strains. This doubling of the value of G would obviously change no results of computation for practical purposes since the strain would be halved. It is interesting to observe in connection with this feature of the matter that the shearing rigidity of the material in this case, would become the same as the apparent rigidity in tension or compression. - Art. 7. — Relation between Moduli of Elasticity and Rate of Change of Volume. The preceding analyses yield some simple relations between the moduli of elasticity for tension, compression Art. 7.] RELATION BETWEEN MODULI OF ELASTICITY. 19 and shearing and the rate of change of volume z',* i.e., the change of unit volume for unit intensity of stress. In Fig. 2 of the preceding Art. CC shows the total shear- ing strain 0, and the elongation or strain CCil =— ^j of the diagonal AC. It has also been shown that the inten- sity of tension on BD or compression on AC is the same as the shear s=s'. Remembering that the compression s on AC will produce a unit positive lateral strain r — K parallel to AC, the two equal values of the unit strain of the diagonal AC may be written, 5 , 5 ' — Vf — 2 2G \E Ej Hence, E El 2(1 +r) 2(1 +ri)' (i) If the modulus of elasticity for compression, Ei, should be different from that for tension it4s evident that the third member of Eq. i would be required. If the value of r is J or J then will, G=iE or E (2) The relation between v and E can readily be written by considering a cube (indefinitely small if necessary) subjected to uniformly distributed tensile stress of inten- sity p normal to each of its six faces. Each edge of the cube, assumed to be of unit length, will be lengthened by the normal stress parallel to it to the extent ^, and it E * The reciprocal of what is sometimes called the volume or bulk modulus. 20 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. 1. will be decreased in length r ^ by each of the two normal / / stresses p acting at right angles to it. The resultant change in length of each edge will then be, |(i-2r). Hence the change of unit volume in terms of the unit rate v wdll be, pv=3^(i-2r). .-. E = ^-^^^^. ...... (3) If V be any volume, the total change of volume will be pvV. The equation preceding Eq. (3) show^s that the unit rate of change of volume v is simply the sum of the three linear rates of change of the edges of the cube, since — =^ K is the change of length of each edge of the cube for each / 1 — 2T\ unit of ^, i.e., ^ I — - — 1 is the change in length of each such edge under the action of the intensity of stress p. If the intensity of stress parallel to each edge of the cube should be different from the others the preceding analysis shows that the rate of variation of volume w^ould still be the sum of the three coordinate linear rates of variation. By the aid of Eq. (i), Therefore : E = 2G{i-\-r)=^^^^-^ (4) S —2Gv , . Art. 8.] ALL STRESSES PARALLEL TO ONE PLANE. Finally, placing r from Eq. (5) in Eq. (3), Z7_ *9^ 3-\-Gv' 21 (6) These simple relations will enable the various moduli to be determined with the least possible amount of experi- mental work. Art. 8. — All Stresses Parallel to One Plane — Resultant Stress on any Plane Normal to the Plane of Action of the Stresses. In Fig. I let XOY be the plane parallel to which all stresses act. Then OX and OY being any rectangular coordinate directions, consider the two planes OA and OB Fig. I. normal to each other and at right angles to the plane XOY and let the width of each of those planes at right angles to XOY be unity. Again let it be supposed that the normal stress on the plane AO has the intensity py and that the intensity of the tangential or shearing stress on the same plane is pyx- Similarly let it be supposed that the intensity of the normal stress on the plane OB is px, the intensity of the tangential 22 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. or shearing stress being pxy. It is known from the prin- ciples already established in the preceding articles that the two intensities of shear pyx and p^j, are equal to each other- The problem is to determine the intensity and direction of the resultant stress on any plane AB, taken at right angles to XOY. In general the resultant stress CD will make the angle with the normal CF to the plane AB, i.e., the resultant stress will have the obliquity . The direction of the plane AB wHll be fixed by the angle which its normal CF makes with the axis OX. In order that the stresses on the three planes in question may be taken as uniformly distributed let it be assumed that OA =dx and OB =dy. Then will AB = dy sec a = dx cosec a (i) If p is the intensity of the uniformly distributed result- ant stress on AB, then the equilibrium of the indefinitely small triangular prism OAB requires that the two following equations, representing the sums of all the forces acting upon it in the tw^o coordinate directions, shall be true. pxdy-\-pxvdx=p cos (a + 0). dy sec a . (2) pydx+pxydy =p sin {a-\-4>). dy sec a . (3) Fig. I shows that dy tdm a=dx. Hence Eqs. (2) and (3) become Eqs. (4) and (5), respectively: px cot a-\-pxv=p COS {a-\-4>) COSeC a . . (4) py-\-pxv <^0t a=p sin {a -\-4>) COSec a. . . (5) It is sometimes convenient to express the normal and tangential components of the resultant intensity p in terms of the known intensities px, py and pxy. If in Fig. i the stresses on the faces OA and OB be resolved into compo- Art. 8.] ALL STRESSES PARALLEL TO ONE PLANE. 23 nents normal and parallel to the plane AB the sum of the normal components will be equal to the normal stress on AB while the sum of the parallel components will be equal to the tangential or shearing stress on AB. This pro- cedure will give, pf4^ sin a-\-pyxdx cos a+pxdy cos a-^pxydy sin a = pdy sec a cos . pydx cos a—pyxdx sin a—pxdy sin a+pxydy cos a = pdx cosec a. sin 0. Using the values already given for dy and AB the fol- lowing expressions for the normal and tangential compo- nents of p (p cos (f) and p sin ) will result: py sin^ oi+px cos^ (x + 2pxy sin a cos a =;^ cos . (4a) (py—px) sin a cos a-{-pxy(cos^ a—sin^ a) =p sin 0. (5a) These two equations will be used in establishing the ellipse of stress in the next Art. If the stress ^ is a principal stress its obliquity , i.e., the angle between its direction and the normal to the plane on which it acts, will be zero. If 0=c Eqs. (4) and (5) become, p—px=pxv tan a, .... (6) p-py=pxv cot a (7) Subtracting Eq. 6 from Eq. 7, cot a — tan a 2 Px-py tan 2a Pxy 2pxy tan 2a = — ^— ^ fg) 24 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES [Ch. I. If the angle ai satisfies this equation, then will ai+go"^ also satisfy it. Hence, there will always be two prin- cipal planes at right angles to each other on each of which a normal stress only acts, i.e., there is no shearing stress on either principal plane. Eq. 8 will at once locate, by the two values of a, the two principal planes, w^hile the same two values of a intro- duced into either Eq. 6 or Eq. 7 will give the two intensi- ties of principal stresses to be called pi and p2, it being supposed that the normal and shearing stresses on the planes OA and OB are completely known. The two principal stresses can however readily be found without computing the angle a. Multiplying Eq. 7 by Eq. 6, P^-P{px+Pv)=pxy^-P.pu. The solution of this quadratic equation gives, 2 (9) The two roots of this equation will give the two prin- cipal intensities at any point in terms of the known inten- sities px, py and pxy. The two stress intensities px and py have been taken of the same kind, tension or compression, and considered positive. If one, as py, be considered compression or negative, its sign would be changed in the preceding equations, but there would be no other change. Sum of Normal Components. If any other plane be taken at right angles to XOY, Fig. I, and at right angles to the plane whose trace is AB, the preceding equations are made applicable to it by writing Art. 8.] ALL STRESSES PARALLEL TO ONE PLANE. 25 ()o°-{-a: for a in Eqs. (4a) and (5a), since the new plane is at right angles to that whose trace is AB. Then in Eqs. (4a) and (5a) there must be written, For sin a, sin (90+a) =cos a. For cos a, cos (qo+q;) = —sin a. Hence by Eq. (4a), writing p' and ' for p and <^; py COS^ a-\-pjc sin^ a — 2pxy sin a COS a=p' COS /V 1 + R W2 M Ws N //m''^ 1 Ml 1 7/////// 1 w, -R' (A/ 5. Fig. 3. If a beam carries a load of concentrations only its shear diagram will be illustrated by Fig. 3, in which there are five loads, the diagram being composed of rectangles only. If, again, the load is wholly uniform Fig. 4 w^ill represent the shear diagram composed of two triangles with their apices at C, the centre of the span and point of no shear. Any vertical ordinate drawn from MN in either figure M MTh^c N W////, 7 "^Li W W I ^<\\ HI Fig. 4. to the stepped line in the one case and to the straight line in the other will represent the shear at the section of beam from which the ordinate is drawn. Those diagrams repre- 74 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. sent completely the graphical treatment of shears in all cases. Art. i8.— Maximum Reactions for Bridge Floor Beams. Three transverse floor beams of a railroad bridge are represented in Fig. i separated by the two spans /^ and / which, in a bridge, represent the panel lengths. The members .-I B and BC supporting the weights IF^, W^, etc., indicate the stringers which carry the railroad track and the train. The two beams or stringers AB and BC are considered simple non-continuous beams resting on the floor beams, but not necessarily nor usually on their tops. The problem is to determine the position of the locomotive or other train loads on the adjacent two short 3pans l^ and /, so that the reaction R on the floor beam between shall have its greatest value. In Fig. I let a section of the beam be shown at R, and let X and xi be measured from the right ends of the two spans as shown in Fig. i, while Wi, W2, . . . 1^4 repre- Wo" R W3 W4 W5 -^--e-^--c^— {+ -x---^ h ^1' ~ ~~ ~ I2 Fig. I. sent a train of weights or wheel concentrations passing over the two spans from right to left. If R' and R are the reactions at A and B, respectively : h Art. i8.] MAXIMUM REACTIONS FOR BRIDGE FLOOR BEAMS. 75 Then if the moments of weights and reactions be taken about C at the right-hand end of span h : R\h +« - {Wia+{Wi -\-W2)x) - {Wi +W2) (b -xi) -(VVi-{-W2-{-W3)c-{Wi+. . .+W4)d -I Wx-\-Rl2=o. (2) Hence, since R'h is equal to the quantity within the second parenthesis of the first member of eq. (2) : (PFia + (P^i+Pi^2)^)r-(^i-i-W^2)(6-:^i)-(P^i+VF2+1^3)c -{yVi+. . .^W^)d-Twx+Rl2=o (3) In order that the reaction R may have its greatest value it must remain unchanged when a small move- ment of the train is made. If therefore x-\-^x and xi-\-^x be written for x and xi, respectively, in eq. (3) and if eq. (3) be subtracted from the result so obtained, the following equations will be found : h h W^i+W2+etc. h+h '/v . (4) Eq. (4) shows the position of loading for the greatest value of the reaction R. It means simply that the ratio between the amount of loading on span h and the total load on both spans shall be the same as the ratio between the span h and the sum of the two spans (/1+/2). Inas- much as the load may move in either direction h may 76 . . FLEXURE. [Ch. II. be written for h in the numerator of the first member of eq. (4). Clearly the two weights Wi and W2 in the preceding equations represent all the loads resting on span h whether there be two such weights or any number whatever. Sim- ilarly the weights indicated by the summation sign in the second member of eq. (4) represent the total load on both spans. If /i=/2, as is usually the case, the first m.ember of eq. (4) has the value of one-half. As in all such cases there may be more than one posi- tion of the loading which will satisfy the criterion eq. (4) ; in that case it is necessary to determine which- of those conditions will give the maximum of the ** greatest values " oiR. Inasmuch as the sum of the weights on the span h does not change for any value of xi equal to or less than b, it follows that a weight may be taken at the point of support B in satisfying eq. (4). This will simplify the use of eq. (3) in writing the expression for R. If xi=b there may at once be written from eq. (3) : -{Wia+{W, + W2)b)f-\-{Wi+W2 + Ws)c+{W,+ . . . +W,)d+ I Wx ^ = ' k ^ ^5) This equation gives the value of R desired, and it is so written that numerical values may readily be computed by the use of tables. If h^h, as is usual, the ratio of those two quantities becomes unity. Art. 19. — Greatest Bending Moment Produced by Two , Equal Weights. Fig. I represents a non-continuous beam with the span / supporting two equal weights P, P. These two weights or loads are to be kept at a constant distance apart denoted by a. Art. 19.] BENDING MOMENT PRODUCED BY TWO WEIGHTS. 77 It is required to find that position of the two loads which will cause the greatest bending moment to exist in the beam, and the value of that moment. The reac- tion R is to be found by the simple principle of the lever. Its value will therefore be l-(x + - R- \ ' .^P (i) Since the reaction. R can never be equal to 2P, IP, or the shear, must be equal to zero at the point of applica- tion of one of the loads P. In searching for the greatest j^ ^ — Tr)"'"ct) Fig. I. moment, then, it will only be necessary to find the moment about the point of application of one of the forces P. It will be most convenient to take that one nearest R. The moment desired will be M=Rx-=2P[x-j-—^] (2) dM ^/ 2X a = =2P I dx \ I 2lr 1 a .*. x = . 2 4 This value in eq. (2) gives ^^-^--i '> 78 FLEXURE, Since d'M 4P dx' ~ r [Ch. II. it appears that M^ is a maximum. The shear 5 in the section RP of the span will be the reaction R as given by eq. (i) : 2P/ a 5 = 2P-^(^^ + -) ; (4) Throughout the section a the shear 5' will be S'=5-P=P-f (.4-^). .■ . . . (5) Finally, between the right abutment and the nearest weight the shear 5^ will be 5,=5_,p=_,?^(, + |). .-. . ..(6) If the separating distance, a, between the two weights be increased a value may be reached so great as to make the bending moment of the pair of weights less than that produced by placing one of them at the centre of the span. This limiting value of a may easily be found. The moment at the centre of span produced by placing a single weight P there is P I PI 224 By using eq. (3) PI P M'=M,; .•.-=-(/-^). ... (7) Art. 20.] BENDING MOMENTS OF CONCENTRATED LOADS. 79 By solving this equation a=/(2-\/I)=.586Z (8) Whenever, therefore, the separating distance a is equal to or greater than .586 span length, the moment should be found by placing a single weight P at the centre of the span. Art. 20.— Position of Uniforn? Load for Greatest Shear and Greatest Bending Moment at any Section of a Non- Continuous Beam — Bending Moments of Concentrated Loads. A continuous load of uniform density is frequently employed in structural operations botli for beams and trusses, and it is essential to place such a load so as to produce the greatest effect both for shears and mom^ents. The position of loading for the greatest shear will first be found. A continuous train of any given uniform density ad- vances along a simple beam of span I. It is required to determine what position of loading will give the greatest shear at any specified section. In Fig. I, CD is the span /, and A is any section for m^, Fig. I. which it is required to find the position of the load for the greatest transverse shear. The load is supposed to ad- vance continuously from C to any point B. Let R be the 8o FLEXURE. [Ch. II. reaction at D, and IP the load between A and B. The shear S' at A will be R-IP=^S' (i) Let R' be that part of R which is due to IP, and R" that part due to the load on CA. ; evidently R' is less than IP. Then R'-\-R''-IP=S\ If .45 carries no load, R' and i'P disappear in the value of 5. Hence is the shear for the head of the. train at A. 5 is greater than S' because IP is greater than R\ But no load can be taken from AC without decreasing R'\ Hence the greatest shear at any section will exist luhen the load extends from the end of the span to that section, whatever he the den- sity of the load. In general, the section will divide the span into tw^o un- equal segments. The load also m.ay approach from either direction. The greater or smaller segment, then, may be covered, and, according to the. principle just established, either one of these conditions will give a maximmm shear. A consideration of these conditions of loading in connec- tion with Fig. I, however, will show that these greatest shears will act in opposite directions. When the load covers the greater segm.ent the shear is called a main shear ; when it covers the smaller, it is called a counter shear. The determination of the greatest bending moment at any section .4 of a beam or truss, exemplified b}^ Fig. i, traversed by a continuous train of unifonri density is a very simple matter. It is clear that every part of the Art. 20.] BENDING MOMENTS OF CONCENTRATED LOADS. 8i uniform load resting on the beam will produce bending at any section considered ; and it is further obvious that every part of that uniform loading will create a bending moment at A of the same sign. It follows, therefore, that the entire span should be covered by the uniform train in order to produce a maximum bending, moment at any section of the beam or truss, and that this single position of the train will give the maximum bending moment throughout the entire span. The preceding position of moving load is taken only for a train of uniform density or for a series of uniform con- centrations, each pair of which is separated by the same distance as every other pair, i.e., for a uniformly distributed system of uniform concentrations. The general case of a simple beam loaded with any system of weights may be represented by Fig. 2, in w^hich the beam carries three loads ]V\, W\, and W^, spaced as show^n. The reactions or supporting forces R and R^ are detemiined in the usual manner by the law of the lever. Hence „ ^^.d d + c d + c + b ^ ^ R = W,j + W,-j- + W, J . . . . (2) A similar value may be written for R', but it is simpler after having found one reaction to w^rite • R'^W\ + W, + W,-R (3) The beam itself being supposed to have no weight, the bending moments at the points of application of the loads will be M^=Ra, AI,=R{a + b)-Wfi, \ . . (4) Ad,=R(a + b + c)- ]]\ {b + c) - IT' V- 82 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. After substituting the value of 7^ from eq. (2) in eqs. (4) the moments in the latter equations will be com- pletely known. S=-R Fig. The bending moment produced by each weight will be represented by the ordinates of the triangles shown in Fig. 2, the resultant moments at the points of application of the weights being given by eqs. (4). The ordinate CD repre- sents J/j in eqs. (4) by any convenient scale. Similarly FH represents M.^ in eqs. (4), and KL, M^. The hues AC, CF, FK, and KB are then drawn. Any vertical inter- cept between AB and the polygon ACFKB, found in the manner explained, will represent the bending mom.ent at the point where the intercept is drawn, and to the scale at which M^, M^, and M^ are laid down. This intercept is simply the sum of the intercepts of the triangles, each representing the partial bending moment due to a single weight. Art. 21.] BENDING MOMENT IN A NON-CONTINUOUS BEAM. 83 Obviously the bending moments of any number of loads of any magnitude or of a uniform load, even, may be treated or represented in the same manner. The lower portion of Fig. 2 is the shear diagram drawn precisely as explained for Fig. 3 of Art. 17. Art. 21. — Greatest Bending Moment in a Non-Continuous Beam Produced by Concentrated Loads. The position of the moving load for the greatest bend- ing moment at any section of a non-continuous beam may be very simply determined. In Fig. i, let FG represent any such beam of the span /, and let any moving load what- ever, as W^ . . . Wn' . . . Wn advance from F toward G. Let G be the section at which it is desired to determine the maximum bending moment, and let n^ loads rest to the left of G, while n is the total number of loads on the span. Finally, let x' represent the distance of Wn' from G and to the left of that point, while x is the distance of Wn to the left of F. If a is the distance between W^ and W^_, b the distance between W., and IF3, c the distance between W^ and W4, etc., the reaction R at G will be ^^.a + b + c+ ... -{-X w^ 1 b + c + . . . +x ^ . . . , (i) R=-i + W, +11-;] The bending moment M about G will then take the value 84 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. M = Rr + VK,( 6 + C+ . .. +^0 Or, after inserting the value of R from above, M ^ ~[W,a + {W, + IF,)6 + (IF, + IF, + M/3)c + . . . +(H/, + IF, + IF3+ . . . ^Wn)x\ \, ^ (2) - W,a - (IF, + IF,)^ - (IF, + W, + IF3)c: If the moving load advances by the amount Ax, the moment becomes, since Ax = Ax\ Kae-^ (^ O (yfi) 0.0 C.G. Fig. I. M' = Af + y (IF, + I/F2 + I/Fg + . . . + IF J i^ (IF,+IF,+ ... +H^n')^^. (3) Hence, for a maximum, the following value must never be negative : M'-.U==Ja: jy(IF, + lF2 + PF3+ ... +IFJ -(M/, + IF,+ ... +IF,0! =0. (4) Or the desired condition for a maximum takes the form U__ n\-MF3+_^.^+I;F,,.__ /"IF, + IF, + IF3+'... +IFn' • • • ^5) Art. 21.] BENDING MOMENT IN A NON-CONTINUOUS BEAM. 85 It will seldom or never occur that this ratio will exactly exist if Wn' is supposed to be a whole weight; hence Wn' will usually be that part of a whole weight at C which is necessary to be taken in order that the equality (5) may hold. ■ , It is to be observed that if the moving load is very irregular,, so that there is a great and arbitrary diversity among the weights VV, there may be a number of positions of the moving load which will fulfil eq. (5), some one of which will give a value greater than any other; this is the absolute m.aximum desired. From what has preceded, it follows that Wn^ may always be taken at the point C in question; hence x^ in eq. (2) may always be taken equal to zero when that equation expresses the greatest value of the moment. The latter may then take either of the two following forms : M =j[W,a + (W, + W,)b + . . . + (W, + W, ^ + . . . + Wr,)x] - W,a - {W, + W,) b - ... -(I^, + T^3+ ... +iy .._,)(?) M=j[W,(a + b+ . . . +:r)+F/,(5 + c;+ . . . +x) + W,(c + d+ . . . +x)+ . . . +WnX] ^W,(a + b+ . . . +?)-W,{b+ ...+?) - ... -Wn'..(?) (6) (6a) In these equations x corresponds to the position of maximum bending, while the sign (?) represents the dis- tance between the concentrations Wn'-i and Wn'. The preceding equations give the greatest bending moments at any arbitrarily assigned points in the span. There remains to be determined the point at which the •greatesi! moment in 'the entire span exists, and the mag- nitude of that greatest moment. 86 FLEXURE. " [Ch. II. It has already been shown that for any given condition of loading the greatest bending moment in the beam will occur at that section for which the shear is zero. But if the shear is zero, the reaction R must be equal to the sum of the weights (I/F1+I/F2+. . .-\-Wn') between G and C, the latter now being the section at which the greatest moment in the span exists. Hence for that section eq. (5) will take the form /' R I Wi+W2-^Wz-{-. . .+Wn (7) Hence V R^j{Wi+W2+. . .+Wn). ... (8) The relations existing in eqs. (7) and (8) can obtain only if the centre of gravity CG in Fig. i is at the dis- tance V from F, showing that the centre of gravity of the load is at the same distance from one end of the beam as the section or point of greatest bending is from the other. In other words, the distance between the point of greatest bending for any given system of loading and the centre of gravity of the latter is bisected by the centre of span. If the load is uniform, therefore, it must cover the whole span. It is to be observed that eq. (6) is composed of the sums H^,, 1^1 + 14^2' ^"tc, multiplied by the distances a, 6, c, etc. Again, as in the equation immediately preceding eq. (2), the expression for the moment, M, may be taken as com- posed of the positive products of each of the single weights Wi, W2, etc., multiplied by its distance from any point distant x to the right of W„ and of the negative products similarly taken in reference to the section located by x', as shown byeq. (6a). Art. 21.] IMIII " 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n 1 1 r ! 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 240 7o.O 13 630^ lOJ.O 18 iiro . 13i.O 23 1860 lui.6 32 2485 . 174.0 37 3205. 193.0 431213.0 4Si22 4040 \m iM^ 4 5 6 7 8 9 ^ o'(R) 6' (^ 5-(JM) 24550 101 22910 17000 14^0 77 11G90 10190 8790 18 13 10 22420 411.0 9G 381.0 91 17980 351.0 86 15250 321.0 81 12670 291.0 ■ 10240 8830 £52.0 61 iJ 7530 391.5 91 301.5 80 18900 16170 331.5 81 13590 11160 271.5 67 252.0 8880 7570 232.0 50 6360 172.0 85 16670 342.0 80 312.0 75 14120 11720 232.0 70 9470 252.0 61 232.5 50 7370 6180 iiao 30 5090 ' 16^0 14910 J22.5 75 292.5 70 12500 102.50 262.5 65 8150 232.5 50 6200 213.0 51 5110 4120 13090 333.0 '71 11900 303.0 00. 9780 273.0 01 7800 243.0 56 5970 2ia0 47 4290 193.5 42 3370 174.0 30 i: 2.350 ' 318.0 74 11500 303.0 00 10400 73.0 01 8410 24a0 50 6580 U3.0 51 4900 183.0 42 103.5 37 3370 25.55 144.0 31 1- ia30 ■ 10060 273.0 01 9030 243.0 50 7200 213.0 51 183.0 46 5520 3990 153.0 37 2005 33.5 32 1885 114.0 26 1283 8770 243.0 50 7810 iliO 51 6130 183.0 40 153.0 4600 123,0 32 1992 103.5 1368 228.0 50 213.0 43 183.0 43 153.0 33 123.0 6950 6110 4670 3380 2240 33 93.0 24 73.5 19 54.0 13^34. 1248 780 409.5 I Loads and moments are for one raU Loads given in thousands of pounds Moments « » " " foot pounds Moments are expressed to a limit of error of 0.1 per cent LEI. I I I II II I I I I I 11 I I I I I I I I I I M I I I II I I I I riTl I I I II I ! 11 I I I I I I I I I 203.0 64 23S.0 69U13.0 74 34S.0 79 7740 ^1 9810^1 12030^ l^UOO^ 367.5 88 16100 7.0 93 17930. 19850 99 426.0 104 21900. 10-1 1© 11-2 12-3 13-4 14-5 30)) -'((30)) -'((30)) -/(l30} 15-6 16-7 17-8 18-9 300 340 >70 110 >40 550 >37 32 6310 213.0 43 5240 193.5 43 4280 174.0 37 3230 154.5 32 2460 1245 5514 (3.0 40 4524 159.0 29 2678 139.5 24 1980 120.0 ] 900 105.0 13 720 5.0 13 345 120 90.0 10 450 G0.0 150 4164 103.0 35 3325 2965 38.0 3( 2275 143.5 3J 113.5 2 1682 129.0 2 1808 109.5 19 1260 90.0 10 450 oao 150 690 00.0 150 1914 108.0 25 1374 982 518 270 1014 rao 10 624 53.5 11 331.5 )7.5 605 58.5 11 39.0 312 97.5 .10 5 292.5 97.5 1.0 6 117 MOMENT TABLE COOPER'S E-60 LOADING Two 213-ton Engines + 6000 lbs. p.l.ft. Scale: 1"=15' {To face page 87.) Art. 21.] BENDING MOMENT IN A NON-CONTINUOUS BEAM. 87 The practical application of the preceding formulae can therefore best be effected by means of a tabulation of moments like that shown in Table I, taken from the stand- ard specifications of the N. Y. C. R. R. Co. for 191 5. The wheel weights and train loads shown in the table are for one rail only, i.e., they are half those for one track. By comparing the weights and spacings with those in Fig. i and eq. (6) it will be seen that 1^1 = 15,000 lbs.; W2 = 30,000 lbs.; W3= 2,0,000 lbs., etc., and that a = 8 ft.; b = 5 ft. ; <: = 5 ft., etc. The arrangement of Table I essentially as shown has been used for a long time to expedite the computations of moments and shears produced by wheel concentrations, followed by a heavy uniform load. It will be noticed that the first line at the top of the diagram shows the progress- ive sums of the individual loads beginning at the left- hand end, i.e., at Wi, in connection with the progressive sums of the distances between the centres of each pair of wheels. The second line (in the larger figures) is the progressive sums of the moments of the wheel loads about the centre of Wi, i.e., i860 is the moment of W2, W3, Wa, and W5 about the centre of Wi. Each of the hori- zontal spaces below the heavy line on which the wheel concentrations rest contains one line of small figures and one line of large figures. The small figures are the pro- gressive sums of the distances from the head of the uniform moving load or from each successive wheel to each of the wheel weights in the series. The larger figures give the progressive sums of the moments of the wheel weights beginning with l^is about the head of the uniform load, i.e., 19.5 X5 =97-5. and 19.5 XioH-97.5 =292.5. Each hori- zontal space is seen to begin at the vertical heavy line under each weight taken in succession and to contain the progressive sums of the moments, weights, and distances 88 FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. about or from each such weight, as is clear on examining the diagram. At the left of each horizontal line there is found the number of the wheel load under which the right- hand end of the line begins. The diagrammatic exhibit of these various numerical quantities w^ll enable the reactions, shears, and greatest moments at any point in the span to be readily deter- mined. When a uniform train load is a part of the system of loading it is only necessary to consider any section of it as acting through its centre of gravity, i.e., through its mid-point. Taking that centre as its point of appli- cation the separating space is the distance from that point to the nearest concentration. If in Table II 20 ft. of train load be used, that train weight will be 60,000 lbs. applied at the distance 10 + 5=15 ft. from load 18. This simple operation is all that is needed for any uniform load or for a series of sections of uniform load. Table II is a table of maximum moments, end shears* and floor-beam reactions for girders having spans up to 125 ft., and it is taken from the New York Central Railroad Specifications for 191 5. The shears and floor-beam reactions, like the results shown in Table I, are given in thousands of pounds and are for one rail only. The moments are given in thousands of foot-pounds, like the moments shown in Table I. The loading is the same as that shown by the diagram in Table I, except that the results for spans up to a maximum of 11 ft. are found by using a special loading of two 72,000-lb. axle loads 7 ft. apart, or 36,000 lbs. for each rail. The maximum moments are found for the conditions of loading given by the criterion, eq. (5), of this article. The maximum floor-beam reactions are found by eq. (5) of Art. 18, in accordance with the criterion, eq. (4), of the same article. Art. 21.] BENDING MOMENT IN A NON-CONTINUOUS BEAM. 89 Table II. TABLE OF MAXIMUM MOMENTS, END SHEARS AND FLOOR- BEAM REACTIONS FOR GIRDERS. Moments in Thousands of Foot-pounds. Shears and Floor-beam Reactions in Thousands of Pounds. Loading Two E 60 Engines and Train Load of 6000 lbs. per Foot or Special Loading Two 72,000-lb. Axle Loads 7 Ft. C to C. Results for One Rail. Results from Special Loading Marked *. Span. Ft. Maximum Moments. 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 * 450 * 54-0 * 63.0 * 72.0 * 81.0 ■90.0 = 99.0 120.0 142.5 165.0 187.5 210.0 232.5 255.0 280.0 309 -5 339.0 368.5 398.2 427.8 457-5 487.2 516.9 548.3 582.0 615.8 649 -3 683 . 2 716.9 750.6 End Shear. Floor- beam Reaction. Span. *36.o *36.o 35 *36.o 40.0 36 38.6 47.1 37 41-3 52.5 38 *44 56.7 39 *46.8 60.0 40 49.1 65.5 41 52.5 70.0 42 55-4 73-9 43 57.8 78.2 44 60.0 82.0 45 63.8 85.3 46 67.1 88.2 47 70.0 91 .0 48 72.6 94-3 49 75 98.3 50 77.1 101.9 51 79.1 105.2 52 80.9 108.2 53 83.1 no. 9 54 ■85.2 II3-5 55 87.1 116. 6 56 .88.9 120. 1 57 90.6 123.4 58 92.3 126.5 59 94.6 129.4 60 96.6 132.7 61 98.6 136.5 62 100.4 140.0 63 102. 1 143-2 64 Maximum Moments. 784.5 823.0 861.6 900.0 940.0 983.4 1027.0 1070.4 1113.9 II57-4 1201 . I 1244.4 1287.9 1331-4 1378.3 1426.3 1474-7 1522.8 1571.0 1622.2 1675.2 1728.6 1781.9 1835- I 1891 .4 1949.4 2007 . 5 2065.4 2123.4 2183.3 End Shear. 103.8 105.9 107.8 109.7 III .4 113. 1 115. 2 117. 2 119. 120.8 122.5 124.2 125-9 127-5 129.2 130.8 132.5 134- 1 135-7 137-4 139.0 140.6 142.2 143-8 145-4 147.0 148.6 150.2 152.0 153.8 Floor- beam Reaction. 146.4 149-3 152.2 155.6 158.8 162.0 90 FLEXURE. Table U.—{Con.) [Ch. II. Span. Ft. Maximum Moments. End Shear. 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 2246.3 2309.3 2372.3 2435 -4 2498.4 2560.4 2624.5 2688.3 2750.9 2819.4 2888.6 2958.0 3028.6 3096.6 3168.2 3240.7 33II-4 3385-1 3459-6 3534-6 3610.4 3689.4 3766.5 3846.0 3924-3 4005 . 8 4084 . 4 4164.0 4246.6 4328.0 155-7 157-5 159.6 161. 7 163.8 165.8 167.7 170.0 172.2 174-4 176.5 178.6 180.6 182.5 184.4 186.3 188. 190. 192. 194. 196. 198. 200. 202. 204. 205.8 207.7 209.7 211 .6 213-5 Floor beam Reaction. Span. 95 96 97 98 99 100 lOI 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 no III 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 Maximum Moments. 4408 . 4 4490.7 4573-5 4659.8 4743-8 4830.0 4916.9 5004 . o 5115-5 5212.8 5306.5 5401.3 5499 • 2 5617.0 5727.6 5829.6 5937-4 6040 . o 6148.2 6258.0 6366 . 8 6478.0 6586.1 6696 . 6 6808 . 3 692 1 . 6 7030.5 7143-8 7260.1 7376.4 7495 - 2 End Shear. 215-4 217.2 219.2 221 .2 223.1 225.0 226.8 223.6 230.4 232.3 234-1 235-9 237-7 239-4 241.2 243.0 244.8 246.6 248-3 250.0 251-8 253-6 255-3 257.0 258.8 260.5 262.2 264.0 265.7 267.4 269.1 Floor. beam Reaction. Problem. Let a single-track railroad plate girder v/ith an effective span of 88 ft. be traversed from right to left by the moving load shown in Table I. It is required to find the greatest bending moments and shears at the centre Art. 21.] BENDING MOMENT IN A NON-CONTINUOUS BEAM. 91 and quarter-points of the span, the dead load or own weight of the girder, floor system and track being taken at 1800 lbs. per linear foot. Dead Load. By eq. (6) of Art. 22 the bending moments at the quarter-point and centre are, since the reaction R is 44X900 =39,600 lbs.; Quarter-point. Centre. X=jl = 22 it. X=^l = 44 ft. M ^-{Ix — x^) 654,000 ft. -lbs. 871,000 ft. -lbs. 2 By eq. (7) of Art. 22, the shears at end, quarter- point, and centre are: End. Quarter-point. Centre. X=0 X = 22ft. x=/[/\.ii. Shear = 39,600 lbs. 19,800 lbs. zero Moving Load. If weight W4. be placed at the quarter-point of the span, 14 wheel weights will rest on the girder with Wi4. I' 4 ft. from the right-hand end of the span. As j=\, 1/ ,. .^ . / \ • -^1 l^ 75,000 105,000 the criterion, eq. (s), gives either -r=-^ or, -—^ , I 367,500 367,500' the first being too small and the second too large. Hence W4: at the quarter-point is the proper position for the maximum bending moment. Wi will be 84 ft. from the right-hand end of the span. Taking moments of all the wheels about that point, by the aid of Table I, the reac- tion R at the left end of the span is : „ 14,830,000 .^ ., R= ^' = 168,500 lbs. 92 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. Eq. (6) will then give the bending moment at VF4, but having the reaction R and using Table I the bending moment becomes: M = 168,500 X22 —720,000 = 2,987,000 ft. -lbs. The end shear with the load placed so as to produce the greatest bending moment at the quarter-point is ob- viously the reaction i? = i68,5oolbs. The shear immedi ately at the left of the quarter-point will be 1-68,500 — 75,000 = 93,500 lbs. The greatest bending moment at the centre of span is similarly found. If Wo be placed at the centre of the span the wheel weights Wi . . . Wn will rest on the span, the latter being 3 ft. to the left of the right-hand end of the span. The ratio representing the criterion, eq. (s) is - = ^^ or — -. The first of these values is too / 258 258 large and the latter is too small, showing that W5 at the centre of the span is the correct position for the greatest bending moment at that point. The reaction R for this position of the load is at once written by the aid of Table I as follow. R = ^7y° + l5^X2 X 1000 = 108,000 lbs. The bending moment M for the centre of the span is as follow^s, using the preceding value of R and Table I : M = (108 X44 — 1245) Xiooo =3,059,000 ft. -lbs. The end shear for this position of the loading is the reaction R, i.e., 108,000 lbs. The shear indefinitely near to but at the left of the center is 108,000 — 105,000=3000 lbs. This small shear shows that the moment at the cen- Art. 21.] BENDING MOMENT OF A NON-CONTINUOUS BEAM. 93 tre of the span is the greatest in the entire span for this position of loading. Assembling the preceding results, the total dead and moving load moments and shears will be as follows : Moments. Quarter-point. Centre. Dead Load 654,000 ft. -lbs. 871,000 ft. -lbs. Moving Load. . . .2,987,000 ft. -lbs. 3,509,000 ft. -lbs. 3,641,000 ft. -lbs. 4,380,000 ft. -lbs. Shears. End. Quarter-point. Centre. Dead Load 39,600 lbs. 19,800 lbs. zero Moving Load. . . . 168,500 lbs. 93,500 lbs. 3000 lbs. Total.. 208,100 lbs. 113,300 lbs. 3000 lbs. The expression " equivalent uniform load," for moments or shears, as the case may be, is sometimes used. It simply means that the uniform load is such as to produce the moments or shears equivalent to those found under given conditions. A uniform load p per linear foot acting on the entire span / will produce a centre-moment of ^. 8 . pP Hence if there be written ^ =3,905,000, then, if / =88: p= X3, 509, 000 =3625 lbs. per linear foot. 7744 The equivalent uniform load therefore for the greatest bending moment at the centre of the span is 3625 lbs. per linear foot. Similarly as the bending moment at any 94 FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. distance x from one end of the span is -{lx—x^)/iix be made 2 2 2 in the present case, / being ^d> feet, there will be found by placing this expression equal to 2,987,000 ft. -lbs: p= \ =4.114 lbs. per linear foot. 726 The end shear for a uniform load over the whole span is equal to the load on half the span. Hence by placing ^ X44 = 108,000 lbs., there will result: 't) = '- = 2455 lbs. per linear foot. 44 This is the equivalent uniform load for the end shear with the load so placed as to give the greatest bending moment at the centre of the span. In the same way the equivalent uniform load for the end shear 168,600 lbs., with the load placed so as to give the greatest bending moment at the quarter-point, will be found to be 3830 lbs. per linear foot. These simple instances show that the equivalent uni- form load varies from one case to another according to the amount, distribution and position of the loading. Art. 22. — Moments and vShears in Special Cases. Certain special cases of beams are of such common occurrence, and consequently of such importance, that a somewhat more detailed treatment than that alread) given may be deemed desirable. The following cases are of this character:- Art. 22.] MOMENTS AND SHEARS IN SPECIAL CASES. 95 Case I. Let a non -continuous beam supporting a single weight P at any point be con- sidered, and let such a beam be represented in Fig. I. If the span RR' is represented by Fig I. l=a-\-h=RP-\-RT, the reactions i^ and R' will be R=^P, and R'^-^P (i) Consequently, if x represents the distance of any sec- tion in RP from R, while x' represents the distance of any section of R'P from R\ the general values of the bending moments for the two segments a and 6 of the beam will be M = Rx, and M^ =R'x' (2) These two moments become equal to each other and represent the greatest bending moment in the beam when x-=a and x' = b, or when the section is taken at the point of application of the load P. Eq. (2) shows that the moments vary directly as the distances from the ends of the beam. Hence HAP (nor- mal to RR^) is taken by any convenient scale to represent the greatest moment, ~r^, and if RAR^ is drawn, any intercept parallel to AP and lying between RAR and RR' will represent the bending moment for the section at its foot by the same scale. In this mariner CD is the bend- ing moment at D. The shear is imiform for each single segment; it is 96 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. evidently equal to R for RP and R^ for R^P. It becomes zero at P, where is found the greatest bending moment. Case II. Again, let Fig. 2 represent the same beam shown in Fig. I, but let the load be one of uniform intensity, /?, extending from end to end of the beam. Let C be placed at the centre of the span, and let R and R\ as before, represent the two reactions. Since the load is symmetri- cal in reference to C, R=R. For the same reason the moments and shears in one Fig. 2. half of the beam will be exactly like those in the other; consequently reference will be made to one half of the beam only. Let x and x^ then be measured fromi R toward C. The forces acting upon the beam are R and p, the latter being uniformly continuous. Applying the formula for the bending m.om.ent at any section x, re- membering that x^ has all values less than x, M=Rx-p / x;)dx^\ M = Rx- px' (3) If / is the span, at C, M becomes Rl pP But because the load is uniform 2 (4) Art. 22.] MOMENTS AND SHEARS IN SPECIAL CASES, 97 Hence if W is put for the total load. Placing in eq. (3), M=Hlx-x') (6) The moments M, therefore, are proportional to the abscissae of a parabola whose vertex is over C, and which passes through the origin of coordinates R. Let AC, then, normal to RR\ be taken equal to M^, and let the parabola RAR' be draAvn. Intercepts, as FH, parallel to AC, will represent bending moments in the sections, as H, at their feet. The shear at any section is s='^4^=R-p^=pi--^)' .... (7) dx or it is equal to the load covering that portion of the beam between the section in question and the centre. Eq. (7) shows that the shear at the centre is zero; it also shows that 5=i? at the ends of the beam. It further demonstrates that the shear varies directly as the distance from the centre. Hence, take RB to represent R and draw BC. The shear at any vsection, as H, will then be repre- sented by the vertical intercept, as EG, included between BC and RC. The shear being zero at the centre, the greatest bending moment will also be found at that point. This is also evident from inspection of the loading. Eq. (2) of Case I shows that if a beam of span / carries a 98 FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. W weight — at its centre, the moment M at the same point will be W I Wl M,= (8) The third member of eq. (8) is identical with the third member of eq. (5). It is shown, therefore, that a load concentrated at the centre of a non-continuous beam will cause the same moment, at that centre, as double the same load tmiformly distributed over the span. Eqs. (5) and (8) are much used in connection with the bending of ordinary non-continuous beams, whether solid or flanged; and such beams are frequently foimd. Case III. The third case to be taken is a cantilever imiformly loaded; it is shown in Fig. 3. Let X be measured from the free end A, and let the uniform intensity of the load be represented by p. The load px acts with its centre at the distance ^x from the section x. Hence the desired moment will be px^ M=-px--- 2 2 ^- . (9) Fig. 3. If AB = /, the moment at B is ^ 2 (10) The negative sign is used to indicate that the lower side of the beam is subjected to compression. In the two pre- ceding cases, evidently the upper side is in compression. The shear at any section is (11) Art. 23.) FORMULA OF COMMON THEORY OF FLEXURE. 99 Hence the shear at any section is the load between the free end and that section. Eq. (9) shows that the moments vary as the square of the distance from the free end; consequently the moment curve is a parabola with the vertex at .4, and with a vertical axis. Let BC, then, represent il/j by any convenient scale and draw the parabola CD A. Any ver- tical intercept, as DF, will represent the moment at the section, as F, at its foot. Again, let BG represent the shear pi at B, then draw the straight line AG. Any vertical intercept, as HF, will then represent the shear at the corresponding section F. Art. 23. — Recapitulation of the General Formulae of the Common Theory of Flexure. It is convenient for many purposes to arrange the formulse of the Common Theory of Flexure in the most general and concise form. In this article the preceding general formulse for shear, strains, resisting moments, and deflections will be recapitulated and so arranged. In order to complete the generalization, the summation sign 2 will be used instead of the sign of integration. In Fig. 1, let ^^C represent the centre line of any bent beam; y4/% a vertical line through A; C/%a horizontal line through C, while A is the section of the beam at which the deflection (vertical or horizontal) in reference to C, the bending moment, the shearing stress, etc., are to be deter- mined. As shown in figure, let x be the horizontal coor- dinate measured from A, and y the vertical one measured from the same point ; then let Xi be the horizontal distance from the same point to the point of application of any external vertical force P. To complete the notation, let D lOO FLEXURE. [Ch. II. be the deflection desired; Mi, the moment of the external forces about A\ S, the shear at A\ u, the strain (exten- FlG. I. sion or compression) per imit of length of a fibre parallel to the neutral surface and situated at a normal distance of imity from it ; /, the general expression of the moment of inertia of a normal cross-section of the beam, taken in reference to the neutral axis of that section ; E, the coeffi- cient of elasticity for the material of the beam ; and M the moment of the external forces for any section, as B. Again, let J be an indefinitely small portion of any normal cross-section of the beam, and let z be an ordinate normal to the neutral axis of the same section. By the " common theory " of flexure, the intensity of stress at the distance z from the neutral surface is (zP'E). Conse- quently the stress developed in the portion i of the sec- tion is EP'zA, and the resisting moment of that stress is EP'z'^-A. The resisting moment of the whole section will there- fore be found by taking the sum of all such moments for its whole area. Hence M = EuIz''^=EuI. Hence, also, M ''=EI' Art. 23.] FORMUL/E OF COMMON THEORY OF FLEXURE. 10 1 If n represents an indefinitely short portion of the neutral surface, the strain for such a length of fibre at unit's distance from that surface will be nu. If the beam were originally straight and horizontal, n would be equal to dx. u being supposed small, the effect of the strain mi at any section, B, is to cause the end A of the chord BA to move vertically through the distance nux. If BK and BA (taken equal) are the positions of the chords before and after flexure, mix will be the vertical distance between K and A. By precisely the same kinematical principle the ex- pression nuy will be the horizontal movement of A in reference to B. Let Inux and Imty represent summations extending from A to C, then will those expressions be the vertical and horizontal deflections respectively of A in reference to C. It is evident that these operations are perfectly general, and that x and y may be taken iii any direction whatever. The following general but strictly approximate equa- tions relating to the subject of flexure may now be written : S=IP (i) Mi=IPxi (2) ''=eT ..-.••• (3) Imi=In—-:. o (4) EI ^ Dr, = Inux=I^^^ (5) 102 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. D, = Snuy=l'^ (6) Dh represents horizontal deflection. The summation IPz must extend from A to a point of no bending, or from A to a point at which the bending moment is ill/. In the latter case M, = IPz-\-M,' (7) Ml may be positive or negative. Art. 24. — The Theorem of Three Moments. The object of this theorem is the determination of the relation existing between the bending mioments which are fotmd in any continuous beam at any three adjacent points of support. In the most general case to which the theorem applies, the section of the beam is supposed to be variable, the points of support are not supposed to be in the same level, and at any point, or all points, of support there may be constraint applied to the beam external to the load w^hich it is to carry ; or, what is equivalent to the last con- dition, the beam may not be straight at any point of sup- port before flexure takes place. Before establishing the theorem itself, some prelimi- nary matters must receive attention. If a beam is simply supported at each end, the reactions are foimd by dividing the applied loads according to the simple principle of the lever. If, however, either or both ends are not simply supported, the reaction in general is greater at one end and less at the other than would be found by the law of the lever ; a portion of the reaction at one end is, as it were, transferred to the other. The trans- Art. 24. THE THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. 103 ference can only be accomplished by the application of a couple to the beam, the forces of the couple being applied at the two adjacent points of support; the span, conse- quently, will be the lever-arm of the couple. The existence of equilibrium requires the application to the beam of an equal and opposite couple. It is only necessary, however, to consider, in connection with the span AB, the one shown in Fig. I. Further, from what has immediately preceded, Fig. it appears that the force of this couple is equal to the difference between the actual reaction at either point of support and that foimd by the law of the lever. The bending caused by this couple may evidently be of an opposite kind to that existing in a beam simply supported at each end. These results are represented graphically in Fig. i. A and B are points o^ support, and ^^ is the beam ; AR and BR' are the reactions according to the law of the lever; RF = R'F is the force of the applied couple ; consequently AF=AR + RF and BF =BR' - {R'F =RF) are the reactions after the couple is applied. As is well known, lines parallel to CK, drawn in the triangle ACB, 104 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. represent the bending moments at the various sections of the beam, when the reactions are AR and BR\ Finally, vertical lines parallel to AG, in the triangle QHG, will represent the bending moments caused by the force R'F. In the general case there may also be applied to the beam two equal and opposite couples having axes passing through A and B respectively. The effect of such couples will be nothing so far as the reactions are concerned, but the}^ will cause uniform bending between A and B. This Fig. 2. ^ V D * N C / V / "^ f H Q Fig. 3. miiform or constant moment may be represented by ver- tical lines drawn jjarallel to AH or LA" (equal to each other) between the lines AB and HQ. The resultant moments to which the various sections of the beam are subjected Avill then be represented by the algebraic sum of the three vertical ordinates included between the lines ACB and GQ. Let that resultant be called M. This composition of the resultant moment M will be made clearer by reference to Figs. 2 and 3. Fig. 2 shows the component moment. due to the single force F acting with Art. 24.J THE THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. 105 the lever-ami / so that its moment increases directly as the distance from B. Fig. 3, on the other hand, shows the component moment due to the two equal and opposite couples acting at the ends of the span. The resultant mom.ent M is the algebraic sum of the three component moments, shown combined in Fig. i. Let the moment GA be called Ma, and the moment BQ=^LN^HA=Ah. Also designate the moment caused by the load P, shown by lines parallel to CK in ACB, by M^. Then let x be any horizontal distance measured from A toward B; I the horizontal distance AB ; and z the distance of the point of application, K, of the force P from A. With this nota- tion there can be at once written A{=AIaC-^)+MJj)+AI, (i)* / / ' ^'^'\l Eq. (i) is simply the general form of eq. (2), Art. 23. It is to be noticed that Fig. i does not show all the moments Ma, Mb, and M^ to be the same sign, but for convenience they are so written in eq. (i). The formula which represents the theorem of three moments can now be written without difficulty. The method to be followed involves the improvements added by Prof. H. T. Eddy, and is the same as that given by him in the "American Journal of Mathematics," Vol. I., No. i. Fig. 4 shows a portion of a continuous beam, including two spans and three points of supports. The deflections will be supposed measured from the horizontal line NQ. The spans are represented by la and k; the vertical dis- * This equation is used in the next Art. for a short demonstration of the common form of the Theorem of Three Moments. o6 FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. tances of NQ from the points of support by c„, cj,, and c,; the moments at the same points by Ma, Mt, and M,, while the letters 5 and R represent shears and reactions re- spectively. In order to make the case general, it will be supposed that the beam is curved in a vertical plane, and has an N "I k- — ^ ^ 'Ma ^U Fig. 4. elbow at 6, before flexure, and that, at that point of sup- port, the tangent of its inclination to a horizontal line, toward the span la, is t, while f represents the tangent on the other side of the same point of support ; also let d and ~^pT ' Fig. 5 will make clear the corriponent parts of the value of D in the preceding equation. By the aid of eq. (i) this equation may be written: E{Ca — Cb — lat-d) Art. 24.] THE THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. 107 = /[{„,(t.>M.@.,,|f]. <., In this equation, it is to be remembered, both x and z (involved in M^) are measured from support a toward Fig, 5. support b. Now let a similar equation be written for the span /^, in which the variables x and z will be measured from c toward b. There will then result E{c^-c,-l/-d') =<[{«.(¥)-«'(f)+".ff]. « When the general sign of summation is displaced by the integral sign, n becomes the differential of the axis of the beam, or ds. But ds may be represented by udx, u being such a function of x as becomes unity if the axis of the beam is originally straight and parallel to the axis of x. The eqs. (2) and (3) may then be reduced to simpler forms by the following methods:* * These analytic transformations are of the nature of convenient but arbitrary notation and are not to any degree whatever analytic demon- strations. io8 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. In eq. (2) put 'Ul — x\xn I f'^ u(l^ — x)xdx Xa f'^ u(la — x)dx Also Xa f'' u{la-x)dx ia^a f" ,j , , ' , Also irJb '^^(^a-x)dx=—j^ / {Ia-X)dx= — . (6) In the same manner ^ x^n I f"^ ux^dx Xa /*^ uxdx Also Xa' fUixdx ia'xj C^ And "^a Xa I -J la Xa It. a I i ^n Xq ^o, 'a , \ — -, — / uxax= -J / xax= — . . (o) la J"^ la Jh 2 ^^^ Again, in the same manner, ^Isl xn 2 — 7— ^^i^aii^a^M^xAx (10) b 1 Using eqs. (4) to (10), eq. (2) may be written: E{Cu-C^-lat-d) =- (MaUaiaXa + Miflif^idXa') + li,ai^o ^l M^XJX. (11) Art. 24.] THE THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. 109 Proceeding in precisely the same manner with the span Ky ^^- (3) becomes c -{-UiJ^^I M^xJx. (12) b The quantities Xa and x^ are to be determined by apply- ing eq. (4) to the span indicated by the subscript ; while ^a, 4, ^^, and i^ are to be detennined by using eqs. (5) and (6) in the same way. vSimJlar observations apply to uj, 4', Xa, ^^/,%\ and x/ taken in connection with eqs. (7), (8), and (9). If / is not a continuous fiinction of x, the various inte- grations of eqs. (4), (5), (7), and (8) must give place to summation: (I) taken between the proper limits. Dividing eqs. (11) and (12J by la and l^ respectively, and adding the results, ^/Ca-Cb C^-Cb ^ d d\ (13) in which T = t + f. Eq. (13) is the most general form of the theorem of three moments if E, the coefficient of elasticity, is a con- stant quantity. Indeed, that equation expresses, as it stands, the ''theorem" for a variabL coefficient of elas- ticity if (ie) be written instead of i; e representing a quan- tity determined in a manner exactly similar to that used in connection with the quantity i. I lo FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. In the ordinary case of an engineer's experience T =o, d=d' =o, I = constant, u=u^^u^=etc., =c^ = secant of the inclination for which t = ~f is the tangent; consequently *^o "^a ^c c ^4a ^4C J' From eq. (4) From eq. (7) 2^a ^h The stimmation IM^xAx can be readily made by refer- ring to Fig. I. The moment represented by CK in that figure is l-z consequently the moment at any point between A and K^ due to Py is «,-p('-=-'),.f=p(ti).. Between K and B Using these quantities for the span /^, a f*z ria IM^xJx= / M,xdx+ / M,'xdx = lP{l^^-z^)z. Art. 24.] THE THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. in For the span l^ the subscript a is to be changed to c. Introducing all these quantities eq. (13) becomes, aftei providing for any number of weights, P: ■\-\^P{K'-z')z + }lP{i;-z')z. (14) Eq. (14), with d equal to imity, is the form in which the theorem of three moments is usually given; with c^ equal to unity or not, it applies only to a beam which is straight before flexure, since T = t-\-t'=o=a=d', If such a beam rests on the supports a, 6, and c, before bending takes place, a "c and the first member of eq. (14) becomes zero. If, in the general case to which eq. (13) applies, the deflections c^, c^, and c^ belong to the beam in a position of no bending, the first member of that equation disappears, since it is the sum of the deflections due to bending only for the spans l^ and /^, divided by those spans, and each of those quantities is zero by the equation immediately preceding, eq. (2). Also, if the beam or truss belonging to each span is straight between the points of support {such points being supposed in the same level or not) , u^ = uj =u^,^= constant, and u^=u/ =u^^= another constant. If, finally, / be again taken as constant, x^ and x^, as well as IM^xJx, will have the values found above. From these considerations it at once follows that the 1 12 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. second member of eq. (14), put equal to zero, expresses the theorem of three moments for a beam or truss straight between points of support, when those points are not in the same level, but when they belong to a configuration of no bending in the beam. Such an equation, however, does not belong to a beam not straight between points of support. The shear at either end of any span, as /^, is next to be found, and it can be at once written by referring to the observations made in connection with Fig. i. It was there seen that the. reaction found by the simple law of the lever is to be increased or decreased for the continuous beam, by an amount found by dividing the difference of the moments at the extremities of any span by the span itself. Referring, therefore, to Fig. 4, for the shears 5, there may at once be written: S. = ^P^j v^^ (15) a z , M-M Sj = jp +-^ K ..... (16) /. / a f„2 M-M S, = IPj + ^ ' (17) X-z M^-M, s:=ip^^—^. — \ .... (18) The negative sign is put before the fraction in eq. (15) because in Fig. i the moments M^ and Mj^ are represented opposite in sign to that caused by P, while in Art. 24-] THE THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. 113 eq. (i) the three moments are given the same sign, as has alreaci}^ been noticed. Eqs, (15) to (18) are so written as to make an upward reaction positive, and they may, perhaps, be more simply found by taking moments about either end of a span. For ' example, taking moments about the right end of /^, SJ^-IP{l^-z)+M^=M,. From this, eq. (15) at once results. Again, moments about the left end of the same span give This equation gives eq. (16), and the same process will give the others. If the loading over the different spans is of uniform intensity, then, in general, P =wdz, w being the intensity. Consequently IP{P-z'')z= f w{P-z')zdz=w—. Jo 4 In all equations, therefore, for chere is to be placed the term w^-^ ; and for -^IP{i;-z'')z I ^ the term w-^. The letters a and c mean, of course, that '4 reference is made to the spans l^ and /^. 114 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. From Fig. 4, there may at once be written: R =Sa'+Sa. ...... (19) R' =S,'+S, (20) R''=S/+Sc, ....... (21) etc.=etc. 4-etc. Art. 25. — Short Demonstration of the Conmion Form of the Theorem of Three Moments. The general demonstration of the Theorem of Three Moments given in the preceding article has the great advantage of showing the influence of all the elements which enter the complete problem, including variability of moment of inertia, lack of straightness of beam, and points of support not at the same elevation. An adequate con- ception of the influences of the assumptions made in estab- lishing the common or approximate form of the theorem can be obtained only by the employment of the general analysis, but it is convenient to establish the usual or approximate form of the theorem by a short direct method like the following. Eq. (i) of the preceding article gives the general value of the bending moment in any span whatever of a con- tinuous beam such as that shown in Fig. i. The notation given in that figure explains itself and is essentially the same as that already used. It should be remembered that each reaction R, R\ and R" is composed of two shears as indi- cated, one acting at an indefinitely short distance to the left of a point of support and the other at an indefinitely short distance to the right of the same support. It is supposed that one load acts in each span at the distance Art. 25.] COMMON FORM OF THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. 115 z from the left-hand end of the left-hand span, or from the right-hand end of the right-hand span. Using eq. (i) of the preceding article and representing the deflection at any point in the span h by w, eq. (i) may be at once written : ^^S^^«C-ir^)+^'^+^- ■ • • (X) The quantity /i is the moment of inertia of the cross- section of the beam about its neutral axis and E is the I A I M„ I B M C I Mc Fig. I. modulus of elasticity. It is assumed that the beam is straight and horizontal and that the moment of inertia does not vary in either span. If ti is the tangent of the inclination of the neutral surface of the beam at the right- hand end of the span h, then integrating eq. (i) between the limits of x and h eq. (2) will at once result: dx Ell \ h \ 2 2/2/1 The integration of Midx is indicated only in eq. (2) for the reason that in general Mi is a discontinuous func- tion. The double integral j ' ( Midx^ cannot therefore generally be completed by the usual procedures, but it ii6 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. must be taken as —r^InMicc, as given by eq. (5) of Art. 23. The value of this expression for a single load Pi is shown in detail on the lower half of page 1 10 of the preceding Art. as \Pi{li~ —z~)z, which appears in eq. (3). By integra- ting eq. (2) between the limits of h and 0, remembering that the points of support are supposed to be at the same elevation and hence that w = ior x = li\ w^ -^(Mali+2M,h+^(li'-z')z)+6h=^o. (3) An equation identical with eq. (3) may be written for the right-hand span h by simply changing the subscripts, remembering, however, that the origin from which z and x are measured is the point of support C, Fig. i , and that the tangent of the inclination of the neutral surface at the left-hand end of the span h will be —^1. Hence : w= -^(Mcl2-\-2M,l2+^(l2'-z'-)z) = -6h=o. (4) If eqs. (3) and (4) be added the usual and approximate form of the Theorem of Three Moments will at once result, except that the moments of inertia Ii and 1 2 are different. Assuming Ii^Io and writing the summation sign before Pi and P2 to indicate that any number of loads may act on every span, the Theorem of Three Moments as usually employed will at once result : MJi + 2M,(/i -I-/2) +Mc/2 = - r^Piili^ -z^)z n -~IP2(P2-Z')Z . . . . (S) h Art. 25.] COMMON FORM OF THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS. 117 It will be observed that eq. (5) is identical with the second member of eq. (14) of the preceding article, and it is the equation sought. The expressions for the shears com- posing each of the reactions may now easily be written. Taking moments about the right-hand end of the span /i : • Sah-^Pl(ll-z)-\-Ma=M, (6) Hence : ^ ^p h-z Ma-Mb , , ^'=^^'^, h~- ^^) Again taking moments about the left-hand end of the same span: S',h-IP,z+M,=Ma (8) Hence : ^ 6 = ^/^1^ + - -. (9) Eqs. (7) and (9) give the shears at the two ends of the span l\ and they also give the shears at the two ends of the span I2 by simply changing the notation so as to apply to the span I2 as shown in eqs. (10) and (11) : bi = 2F2-r^ -. (10) Sc = ^P2—, , .... (11) /2 12 Each reaction will be the sum of the appropriate pair of shears as shown by eqs. (19), (20), and (21) of the pre- ceding article. These equations are given in their most general forms; ii8 FLEXURE. . [Ch. 11. that is, for any disposition of loads of any magnitude. They may be adapted to uniform loading either partial or entire, as indicated on the lower half of page 113. Art. 26. — Reaction under Continuous Beam of any Number of Spans. The general value of the reactions at the points of support under any continuous beam have been given in eqs. (19), (20), (21), etc., of article 24. Before those equations, however, can be applied to any particular case, the values of the bending moments, which appear in the expressions Sa, Sb, 5^, etc., for the shears, must be deter- mined. In the application of the theorem of three mo- ments, it is usually assumed that the continuous beam before flexure is straight between the points of support, and that the latter belong to a configuration of no bending. The moment of inertia I is also assumed to be constant. This is frequently not strictly true, yet it will be assumed in what follows, since the method to be used in finding the moments is independent of the assumption, and remains precisely the same whatever form for the theorem of three moments may be chosen. Agreeably to the assumption made, eq. (5)* of the pre- ceding article takes the following form : Mala + 2M,{la+lc) +Mclc = -y^ PilJ" - Z^)z }sP{U^~z')z (i) Lc * Or eq; (14) of Art. 24. Art. 26.] REACTIONS UNDER ANY CONTINUOUS BEAM. 119 Let Fig. I represent a continuous beam of n spans equal or unequal in length. At the points of support, Fig. I. o, I, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., let the bending moments be represented by Mq, Mp ilf 2, M3, etc. The moment M^ is always known ; it is ordinarily zero, and that will be considered its value. An examination of Fig. i shows that, by repeated applications of eq. (i), the number of resulting equations of condition will be one less than the number of spans. If the two end moments are known (here assumed to be zero), the number of unknown moments will also be one less than the number of spans. Hence the number of equations will always be sufficient for the determination of the unknown moments. For the sake of brevity let the following notation be adopted : ^s--r^P(h'-z')z-YlP(l,^-z')z. etc. = etc. — etc. b,=l,; c, = 2(l, + l,)', d,=l,. c,=h\ d, = 2(l, + l,); f,=l,. I20 FLEXURE. ]Ch. II. i den'^ting any number of the series i, 2, 3, 4, , . . n. It is thus seen that, in general, qi = 2{pi + Si)\ also that a^=h^, c^=h^, d^=c^, etc. These relations can be used to simplify the final result. By repeated applications of eq. (i) the following n equations of condition, involving the notation given above, will result: alM^+hlM2 =ui ^ a2Ml+b2M2-\-C2M3 =U2 -\-b3M2-\-C3M3-i-d3M4: =U3 + C4iV/3+G^4M4+/4M5 =^4^* ^^^ -\-d5M4. +/5M5 +goM6 = U5 = Un These simultaneous equations may be treated in various ways in order to determine the values of the moments Mi, M2, M3, etc. The preceding notation 'is adapted to the method by determinants, which is probably as simple as any. As these procedures are purely algebraic they will not be further developed here. In American engineering practice, as exemplified in the theory of revolving-swing bridges, it is necessary to con- sider at most, two simultaneous equations of condition whose solution requires the simplest process of elimination only. Art. 27.] DEFLECTION BY THE COMMON THEORY. 121 This last case may be simply illustrated by referring to Fig. I, in which Mo =0. If there are three spans M3 =0 as one of the end spans. The first two of eq. (2) will be needed : aiMi+6iM2=wi, ..... (3) a2Mi+&2M2=W2 (4) Simple elimination will then give: ,^ b2Mi—biU2 J ,^ aiU2—a2Ui , . M\= — r r; and M2 = — r r-. . (5) ai02—a20i aib2—a20i Reactions. After the moments are found, either by the general or special method, for any condition of loading, the reactions will at once result from the substitution of the values thus found in the eqs. (15) to (21) of iVrt. 24, which it is not neces- sary to reproduce here. Art. 27. — Deflection by the Common Theory of Flexure. The deflection or sag of a beam subjected to loading at right angles to its axis is the displacement of the neutral surface in the direction of the loading. Ordinarily the beam is horizontal and the loading vertical, so that the deflection is also vertical. The entire deflection is due both to the lengthening and the shortening of the fibres on the two sides of the netural surface and to the action of the transverse shear throughout the beam. The equation leading directly to the former portion is eq. (7) of Art 14, but the equations of Art. 24 must be used to determine the deflection due to shear. Let xo be the coordinate of some point at which the 122 FLEXURE. tch. ii. tangent of the inclination of the neutral surface to the axis of X is known ; then from eq. (7) of Art. 14 dw dx dw -J- will be at once recognized as the general value of the tangent of the inclination just mentioned, or, in the case of curved beams, as approximately the difference between the tangent, before and after flexure. Again, let x^ represent the coordinate of a point at which the deflection w is known, then from eq. (i) : w= -^jdx' (2) Er The points of greatest or least deflection and greatest or least inclination of neutral surface are easily found by the aid of eqs. (i) and (2). The point of greatest or least deflection is evidently foimd by putting dw 5^=^ (3) dw and solving for x. Since -j- is the value of the tangent of the inclination of the neutral surface, it follows that a point of greatest or least deflection is found where the beam is horizontal. Again, the point at which the inclination will be great- est or least is found by the equation \dx J (Pw Art. 27.] DEFLECTION BY THE COMMON THEORY, 123 d^iv But, approximately, -t-t is the reciprocal of the radius of curvature; hence the greatest inclination will be found at that ■ point at which the radius of curvature becomes infi- nitely great, or, at that point at which the curvature changes from positive to negative or vice versa. These points are called points of "contra -flexure." Since: d'^w there is no bending at a point of contra-flexure. The moment of the external forces, M, will always be expressed in terms of x. After the insertion of such values, eqs. (i) and (2) may at once be integrated and (3) and (4) solved. The coefhcient of elasticity, B, is always considered a constant quantity ; hence it may always be taken outside the integral signs. In all ordinary cases, also, / is constant throughout the entire beam. In such cases, then, there will only need to be integrated the expressions: /x rx rx Mdx and / / Mdx' ^ Xi J Xa It is sometimes convenient to express the tangent of inclination of the neutral surface and the deflection in terms of some known intensity k^ of fibre stress at the distance d from the neutral surface and at a section of the beam where the known external bending moment is M^. The desired expressions may readily be written by simply transforming eqs. (i) and (2) to the proper shape. It has been shown by eq. (10) of Art. 14 that k^= — j- , and 124 FLEXURE, [Ch. II. hence that I = —r-. By substitution of this value of / k first. in eq. (i) and then in eq. (2), there will result: 0^*^ Xq and w = c^ f' r^dx' (6) EMJJxi Jxo Eqs. (5) and (6) give the desired expressions in which / and d are considered constant in accordance with all ordinary practice. In the use of these last two equations it is supposed that the conditions of any given problems will enable k^ and M^ to be computed as known quantities. The general form of the integral in the second member of eq. (6) is easily determined. The quantities M^^ and M are exactly similar expressions with the same number of terms and of the same degree. The effect of the inte- gration of M twice between the limits indicated is to raise the degree of each term of which it is composed by two, so that the double integration of Mdx^ divided by M^ will be a simple product aP, a being a numerical quantity depending upon the manner of loading, the condition of the ends of the beam, or other attendant circumstances of the same general character. Inserting these results in eq. (6), the expression for the deflection will become ^^ ""Ed ^ ^^ Eq. (6a) is not often used, but there are some practical applications of formulae in which it must be employed. Art. 27.] DEFLECTION DUE TO SHEARING. 12 5 Deflection Due to Shearing. That portion of the deflection due to transverse shear- ing may be determined as readily as that due to the length- ening and shortening of the fibres of the bent beam. In determining the requisite equations it is necessary to con- sider only the intensity of shear in the neutral surface, as it is the deflection of that surface which is sought. Let w' be the deflection due to shearing and let ^ repre- sent the transverse shearing strain for a unit of length of the beam. The transverse strain for an indefinitely short portion dx of the neutral surface will then be dw' = ^dx. If G represents the coefficient of elasticity for shear, while 5 represents the intensity of shear, eq. (3) of Art. 2 shows that 9^ =7^. There may then be written: dw^ = (j)dx = y^dx (7) By using the value of 5 given in eq. (7) of Art. 15? dw' =—f-^dx (8) The general expressions for the shearing deflection will, therefore, take the form: w The integration required in eq. (9) can be made with ease in any given case, as it is necessary only to express the value of the total transverse shear 5 in terms of x. The application of that equation to special cases will be 126 FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. made in a later article. Obviously the total deflection in any bent beam will be the sum : w-\-w'. . (lo) Art. 28. —The Neutral Curve for Special Cases. The curved intersection of the neutral surface with a vertical plane passing through the axis of a loaded, and originally straight, beam may be called the "neutral curve." The neutral curve is the locus of the extremities of the ordinates w of Art. 27; it therefore gives the deflec- tion at any point of the beam due to the direct stresses of tension and compression in it, but not due to the effect of transverse shear, which will be treated in a subsequent article. The method of finding the neutral curve for any par- ticular case of beam or loading can be well illustrated by the operations in the following three cases: Case I. This case is shown in the accompanying figure, which represents a cantilever carrying a uniform load with a i < -X- H I Fig. I single weight W at. its free end. As usual, the intensitv of the uniform loading will be represented by p. Art. 28.] THE NEUTRAL CURVE FOR SPECIAL CASES. 127 Measuring x and w from B, as shown, the general value of the bending moment is M-E,'>-W,,t^ (., Integrating between x and /, remembering that : dw dx for x = l: Hence ^^S=t(^^-^')+&*'-^'^- • • • w ^ '^(t^^.A ^1(^-1. -=£7lTly--^V+tU-^'^/'i- • • (3) The greatest deflection, w^, occurs for x = l. Hence I (WP pl<\ This value of w^ is the deflection of B below A. The general value of w in eq. (3) is the vertical distance (de- flection) of B below the point located by :^ ; as an ordinate it is measured upward from B as the origin of coordinates. The greatest moment, M^, exists at A, and its value is: M,^Wl + ^ (5) 128 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. These equations are made applicable to a cantilever with a uniform load by simply making W =o. They then become ^^=<-? (^) «^=;rl^r(^-^'*) (8) 6£/' M,=\ do) Again, for a cantilever with a single weight only at its free end, p is to be made equal to zero in the first set of equations. Those equations then become : M^El'^^.^Wx , . (ii) dw W WP . . M,=Wl (15) Art. 28.] THE NEUTRAL CURVE FOR SPECIAL CASES. 129 The general expressions for the shear and the intensity of loading are : S-EI^=W+px, (16) (17) Case II. This case, shown in the figure, is that of a non -continu- ous beam, supported at each end, and carrying both a Fig. 2 uniform load (whose intensity is p) and a single weight F/ at its middle point. The reaction R, at either end, will then be 2 R The general value of the moment will then be M=E1 d^ R.-^-^ (18) The origin of x and w is taken at A, Remembering that dw . / -T-=o for %=--. dx 2 130 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. and integrating between the limits x and -, Again integrating "^ EI I \R[x' xP\ p/x' xP\) , , The greatest deflection 7v^ occurs at the centre of the span, for which x=-. 2 Hence «''=-^/W + 8^^^ (^^) The greatest moment, also, is found by putting x=-. 2 It has the value M.=-i^'+f)' ..... (22) 4\ 2 These formulae are made applicable to a non-continuous beam carrying a uniform load only, by putting W = 6. They then become MORI'S -^^l-^h .... (23) Art. 2§.] THE UBUTkAL CUkvB FOR SpECML CASES. t^I EIt~= ( — ]» .... (24) ax 2 \ 2 3 12/ ^ ^^ P w^~^j{2xH-x'-Px), .... (25) Spl' 5 pi* '^''^ ~Js^^ ~s-4SE'r • • • • (26) pp M,=\ (27) The formulae for a beam of the same kind carrying a single weight at the centre are obtained by putting p =0 in the first set of equations. Those for the greatest deflec- tion and greatest moment, only, however, will be given. They are WP ^^=-^8£/' (^^) M, = ^ (29) The general values of the shear and intensity of loading are d'M , , 1^=-^ (3^^ Case 111, The general treatment of continuous beams requires the use of the theorem of three moments. The particular case to be treated is shown in Fiij. %. The beam covers the 132 . FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. three spans, DA, AB, and ^BC, and is continuous over the two points of support, A and B. Let DA =1^ '' AB=L - BC = l]i ■ Let I2 = n/j = n'/g. Let the intensity of the uniform load on AB he repre- sented by p and let the two single forces P and P' only, act in the spans DA and BC respectively. Also let the two distances DE =z^= al^ and CF = a'l^ be given. // is required to find the magnitudes of the forces P and P\ if the beam is horizontal at A and B. Since the beam is horizontal at A and B, the bending moments over those two points of support will be equal to each other, for the load on AB is both uniform and symmetrical. Let this bending moment, common to A and B, be represented by M^. As the ends of the beam simply rest at D and C, the moments at those two points reduce to zero. Because the four points D, A, B, and C are in the same level, the first member of eq. (14) of Art. 24 becomes equal to zero. If that equation be applied to the three points D, A, Art. 28.] THE NEUTR/IL CURVE FOR SPECIAL CASES. 133 and B, the conditions of the present problem produce the following results: . M,=o, M, = M^=M,. and llP(L'-z'')z = p 4 I ^ /' j~IP{l'-z''')z = p ' Hence the equation itself will become M,(2z.+3g+f(/.^-VK+/t=°- • • (32) '1 4 •• ^^^'- 4^.(2/, + 3y ' 2 1 4(2 + 3W) ^^^^ .-. Reaction at Z?=i?i=P^^ + ^l . . (34) As the origin of z^ is at D, x will be measured from the same point. Separate expressions for moments must be obtained for the two portions, DE and EA of /p because the law of loading in that span is not continuous. Taking moments about any point of EA EI^-R,x-P{z-z,) (35) Remembering that dw 134 FLEXURE, [Ch. II. for x = l^, and integrating between the limits x and l^ dw R P EI^^--f(x'-h')--{x^-l,')+PB,(x-l,). . (36) Again, remembering that w=o for x=-l^, and integrat- ing between the limits x and /^ EIu;=-^[--l,^x + -^)--[~-l,^x + -f) + P.,(^-/,^ + ^). (37) 2 \3 ^ 3 / 2^3 Taking moments about any point in DE E/jjj.K,«; (38) ••• ='S=«.7+<^- <3<.' Making i\:=;Si in eqs. (36) and (39), then subtracting /. EI^-=^(x^-h')-j{z,^-h')+Pz,(z,-l,). (40) Remembering that w = o for x=o, and integrating be- tween the limits x and o, EIw=^{- -l,'x) -^(z,'-l,')x + Pz,{z,-l,)x. (41) Making r^ = 2i in eqs. (37) and (41), then subtracting i^ --(/.»- V)+^a/-2/)=o. . . (42) 3 3 ^ Art. 28.] THE NEUTRAL CURVE FOR SPECIAL CASES, 13 S Putting the value of M^ from eq. {t^^) in eq. (34), then inserting the value of R^, thus obtained, in eq. (42), after making z^ =al^, L 2+sn ^ 2 ^ A 4(2+3^) • ' ^ 6a{i-a') 6aii-a'y ' ' ' ^^3; This is the desired value of P, which will cause the beam to be horizontal over the two points of support A and B when the span AB carries a uniform load of the intensity p. By the aid of eq. (43), eq. (^s) ^ow gives ^{2n^ + Sn^) pn\^ pl^ 2 -^ ^ 12(2 + 3^) 12 12 ^^^^ It is to be noticed that M^ is entirely independent of l^ or /g. Eq. (43) also gives ^=^ n\ (45) Hence PI M, = —f{i-a')a. ..... (46) Thus any of the preceding equations may be expressed in terms of p or P. R^ also becomes pnl, _pnl^ ^^~6a(i+a) ^7' W) or R,=P{i-a)[i-^a{i+a)] (48) 136 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. It is clear that there cannot be a point of no bending in DE. Hence the point of contra-flexure must lie between E and A, Fig. 3. In order to locate this point, according to the principles already established, the second member of eq. (35) must be put equal to zero. Doing so and solving for X, P ^=jrzR^^ (49) Since P is always greater than R^, there will always be a point of contra-flexure. All these equations will be made applicable to the span EC by simply writing a' for a, /g for Z^, and n' for n. As an example, let a=^ and n = i. Eqs. (43), (44), a^d (47) then give M.= P=Uh pP 3PI 12 16 ' after writing, In general, the span l^ is called " a beam fixed at one end, simply supported at the other and loaded at any point with the single weight, P." Let it, again, be required to find an intensity, '' p' ,'' of a uniform load, resting on the span l^, which will cause the beam to he horizontal at the points A and E. Art. 28.] THE NEUTRAL CURVE FOR SPECIAL CASES, 137 Since the load is continuous, only one set of equations will be required for the span. The equation of moments will be ^^~dx^ =^1^- — (50) Integrating between the limits x and Z^, ^^£4(^^-^>^)-f'(--^')- • • • (SO Integrating between the limits x and o, ^^-f (f -'■')-?(t-'>)- • ■ at A PP ! 36 ^TT- at centre Pl' 22. 5^^ at centre 16 16^ at 0.447 9-35 p/3 ^* at 0.42 15/ EI from B Q-=ry^ at centre hi 4.5^ at centre Point of Contra-flexure. j\lfTomB Reaction at B II from B Reaction at B -ipi \l from each end o. 2 1 1 / from each end 144 FLEXURE. [Ch. II. I is the length of beam or of span in jeet. E is the coefficient of elasticity in pounds per sq. inch. / is the moment of inertia of the normal section of the beam with all dimensions of section in inches. The " Max. Moments" will be in foot pounds, and the " Max. Deflections " will be in inches. In the use of flexure formulae, in many practical appli- cations, it is best to- have the moment M in inch-pounds, which will result from simply multiplying the " Max. Moments " of the preceding table by 12. Case I results from eqs. (14) and (15); Case II from eqs. (9) and (10); Case III from eqs. (28) and (29); Case IV from eqs. (26) and (27). In Case V the reaction is found by putting a = \ in eq. (48); the point of " Max. Deflection" is found by placing z^ =y in eq. (40), and the resulting value of -v- equal to zero and solving for x, which latter value in eq. (41) will give " Max. Deflection." Case VI results from treating eqs. (53), (51), and (52) in precisely the same manner. Case VII results directly from the formulae on page 142. Case VIII results directly from the equations on pages 140 and 141. The preceding cases are those which commonly occur with constant values of E and I. Other cases, such as a single load at any point, or partial uniform load over any part of span, are to be treated by the same general prin- ciples. Art. 29. — Direct Demonstration for Beam Fixed at One End and Simply Supported at the Other Under Uniform and Single Loads. A beam is said to be fixed at one end when it is under such constraint that the neutral surface does not change its direction at that end whatever may be the loading. Art. 29.] DEMONSTRATION FOR BEAM FIXED AT ONE END. 45 This fixedness, as has been fully shown in Art. 28, is equiv- alent to the application of a suitable constraining moment. Beams with one or both ends under such constraint have been fully treated in Art. 28, but it is desirable to establish the forniulae for such cases directly, i.e., without the employ- ment of the theorem of three m^oments. In Fig. I a beam is shown fixed at one end B and simply supported at the other end A, while it carries a uniform load p, per linear unit and the single load P at the distance at from A. The length of span is / and the coordinate x Fig. I. is measured horizontally to the right from A. The two reactions are R and R\ E is the modulus of elasticity, I the moment of inertia of the normal section of the beam, and w is the deflection at any point. The bending moment for any point in the segment al of the beam is : EI = Rx-.p— [^i) The bending moment for the section l—aloi the beam is EI^=Rx-p--P{x-al). ax"^ 2 (2) Integrating eq. (i) and representing by C the constant of integration: dx 2 P^+C. (3) 146 FLEXURE. [Ch. 11. Integrating eq. (3) between x and 0, remembering that "0^=0, when x =o', EIw = R--^ + Cx (4) 6 24 Integrating eq. (2) between x and /, remembering that dw , , — - = o wnen x = l, ax EI^ = R"^-^ -|(^3 _/3) _|(^2 _/2 _ 2al{x-l)) . (5) If x=al in eqs. (3) and (5), the first members of those equations will be equal, hence: (ei'^^)=R^-P O ^ 2 .go 5 -^ ^ JJ cn ■P3.g r— <1> O X 5 ^ u Si -2 = a -s o Art. 37.) TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 183 will be Pe and that of the second couple P^e\ and if pure torsion is to be produced these two moments must be equal, but opposite to each other. Inasmuch as the moment of a couple is the product of the force by the lever-arm, the forces and lever-arms of the two twisting couples may vary to any extent as long as the moments remain unchanged. Although the system of forces to which a bar in torsion is subjected is such as to be in equilibrium, any portion of the piece will tend to have its normal sections like those at CD rotated over each other, the result being a small sliding motion arotmd the axis of the piece. Hence a torsive stress is wholly a shearing stress on normal sections of the piece subjected to torsion. It is further important to observe that inasmuch as a couple produces the same effect wherever it may act in its own plane, the actual twisting moment need not be applied with its forces sym- metrically disposed in reference to the axis of the piece; indeed, both of those forces may be anywhere on one side of the piece without varying the conditions of torsion or torsive stress to any extent whatever. It is known from the general theory of stress m a solid body that although there can be no stresses of tension and compression parallel to the axis of a bar under torsion, or at right angles to it, there will be such stresses of varying intensities on oblique planes. Inasmuch as the result of torsion is to slide normal sections each past its neighbor, the elastic torsive shear Hke any other shear will not change the volume of the body. The principal shearing strains will produce deformation without changing the dimensions whose X)roduct gives the volume. The exact and complete mathematical theory of tor- sion deduced from the general equations of equilibrium of stresses in an elastic solid, without extraneous assump- tions, will be found in App. I. Those formulas show accu- r84 TORSION. [Ch. III. rately the state of torsive stress in bars of any elastic material and of various shapes of cross-section. For the general purposes of engineering practice that general demon- stration is rather complicated. Hence it is often avoided by making certain approximate assumptions based to some extent on experimental observations which lead to an approximate and simpler theory, yielding formulas accurate only for the circular normal section, but which are not materially in error for the square section. These formulae are, how^ever, far from accurate for certain other sections. In this article only the formulae of the simpler theory, called the common theory of torsion, will be given. Fig. 2 is supposed to represent the normal section of a bar of material of any shape, subjected, to torsion by the application of couples as shown in Fig. I. The fundamental assump- tions of the common theory of tor- ^^^- ^■ sion are that the intensity of shearing stress varies directly as the distance from a central point at which that intensity is zero, and that that central point is located at the centre of gravity or the centroid of the section. It is also implicitly assumed that the normal sections which are plane before torsion remain plane during torsion. In Fig. 2, A is sup- posed to be the centre of gravity of the section at which the intensity of shear, i.e., the shear per square unit of section, is zero. The distance from the centre A to any point of the section is represented by r, and to the mxost remote point in the perimeter of the section by r^. In accord- ance with the assumed law, the greatest intensity of shear Tm in the section will be found at the distance r^ from its centre. While this is accurately true for the circular sec- tion, it is quite erroneous for a number of other sections. Art. 37.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 1:85 Hence the intensity at the distance unity from the centre A will be -7", and at the distance r from the centre it will have the value s = ~Tm (i) The element of the section at the distance r from A will be rdoj.dr (2) Hence the shear on that element is r Tm dS = — T m-'rdiij.dr=- -^r^dr.dco. ... (3) ^0 ^0 - The direction of action of this torsive shear is around the circumference of a circle whose radius is r; hence if moments of all these small shears, dSy be taken about the centre or point of no shear, A, the lever-arm of each small force, dS, will be r, and the differential moment will be dM=rdS = —r'dr.daj. . . . . (4) The total moment of torsion therefore will be M = f^^ r ^r'dr.dco = ^ r r\'drdco= ^L. (5) Jo 7o r^ Tq Jo Jo Tq ^ ^^^ The quantity Ip is the polar moment of inertia of the section. For a circular section ^ TIT,' Tzd' ^, ^. ^ Ad"" /^ = -^ == -- ( J = diameter) = -g-. . . (6) 1 86 TORSION. [Ch. III. For a square section (6 = side of square) ^ b' Ab' ^^ = 6=^ (7) For a rectangular section {b = one side and c = the other side) , bc' + b'c A(b' + c') Ip = =-^ (8) ^ 12 12 • • V^/ For an elliptical section (a^ and 6^ being semi-axes) ;r(a,^^ + aA^) ;raA(a.H^^) /, = =— ^ . . . (9) Using the notation of Fig. i, the following equation of moments may be written, Pe being the moment of the external twisting couple and M the moment of the internal torsive shearing stresses in any normal section: Pe = M=^J, (lo) It is clear from Art. 2, if ^o is the shearing strain at the distance r^ from the centre, that T^,= (70 q, G being the coefficient of elasticity for shearing. Also, since the inten- sity of shearing varies directly as the distance from the centre A, it is equally clear that the shearing strain ^ varies directly as the distance from the centre, so that if a represents the shearing strain at unit's distance from A =ra and ^0=^0^ (11) Hence in general T ==Gra, (12) and as a maximum Tm=Gr^a (13) Art. 37.1 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM, 1S7 a is evidently the angle through which one end of a fibre of unit '5 length and at unit '5 distance from the centre or axis is turned. It is called the angle* of torsion. If / is the length of the piece twisted, the total angle through which the end of the fibre at unit's distance from the axis will be turned is Total angle of torsion = a,.. . . . (14) If the fibre is at the distance r^ from the axis one end will be twisted around beyond the other by an amoimt equal to Total strain of torsion =rf^aL . . . (15) By the aid of eq. (13) eq. (5) may be written Pe=M=GaI,=^I, (i6) If (f)Q is observed experimentally ^=^ ^''^ The angle through which a shaft will be twisted by the moment Pe, if the length is /, is If 6* is in pounds per square inch, as is usual, the pre- ceding formulae require all dimensions to be in inches, while a will be arc distance at radius of one inch. If 12/ is written for / the unit for the latter quantity must be the foot. By inserting the value of l^ from eq. (6) in eq. (5), * This small angle is measured in radians. Strictly speaking it is an indefinitely short arc with unit radians. 1 88 TORSION. [Ch. III. Pe = M= "^^ 2Tm 7:d^ r.Tmd 2 ^'2 P=-P ■rr /2 ri' 219 (8) .'2 h = P—T, + - (9) rr The two intensities p and k will be computed for six equidistant points, including those on the two cylindrical surfaces, by taking corresponding values of r. The results of these computations are given in the following tabulation and they are shown graphically in Fig. 2 , as will be explained further on. Pounds per Sq.In. r r't 7 rt P h I. -10.970 + 28,054 I.I .8264 - 7,543 + 25,093 1.2 .6944 - 4.937 + 22,486 1-3 •5917 - 2,908 + 20,459 1-4 .5102 - 1,299 + 18,848 1-5 •4444 + 17,552 Combined Cylinder under High Internal Pressure. The stresses induced by shrinkage in making the com- bined cylinder of two concentric shells have been explained and computed in the preceding sections; those stresses are permanent and they must be combined with stresses which may be produced usually temporarily by subjecting the combined cylinder to a high internal pressure such as that caused by the discharge of a gun. The internal pressure 220 HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES. [Ch. IV. produced by a modern high explosive may reach 50,000 or 60,000 lbs. per square inch, but as an illustration in this case the internal pressure will be taken as 40,000 lbs. per square inch. Hence the following data are required: ^'=40,000 lbs. per square inch: Ti =iS inches. pi=o; / =6 inches; As this case is similar to that expressed by eqs. (8) and (9), those equations will yield the results shown in the following tabulation when the above data are substituted in them. r r'2 r2 Pounds per Sq.In. r' P h I I — 40,000 + 50,000 I3 5625 -20,313 + 30,312 I^ 36 — 11,196 + 21,200 2 25 — 6,252 + 16,248 2i 1837 - 3.268 + 13,268 2f 1406 - 1,328 + 11,328 3 nil + 10,000 It will be observed that the intensities p and h have been computed at points 3 inches apart throughout the 12 -inch thickness of the combined cylinder wall. The results of computations shown in the three pre- ceding tabulations may now be shown graphically in Fig. 2. That figure shows part of a normal section of the two cylinders, C being the center and CD being the internal radius of 6 inches. The separate walls each 6 inches thick are shown by the parts of concentric circles with radii 6 inches, 12 inches, and 18 inches. The line ABD repre- sents the trace of a longitudinal diametral plane at right angles to which the intensities of the circumferential or hoop stresses showri in the preceding tabulations are laid off. Art. 41.] CYLINDER UNDER HIGH INTERNAL PRESSURE. 221 Tensile stresses indicated by the plus sign are laid off to the left oi AD and compressive stresses to the right of BD as indicated by the minus sign. Referring to the tabulated results for the inner cylinder in conipression, DQ represents 29,250 and BP 18,283, both pounds per square inch. Intermediate ordinates of the curved line PQ are laid off by the same scale to represent the other intensities h given in the table. The ordinate AL represents by the same scale the intensity 17,552 lbs. per square inch and MB the intensity 28,054 lbs. per square inch, both shown in the tabulation for the outer cylinder in tension. The other intensities laid off as ordinates give the curved line LM. The tensile intensities h for the combined cylinder under the internal pressure of 40,000 lbs. per square inch are shown by the ordinates to the curved line EF, FD repre- senting 50,000 lbs. per square inch and EA 10,000 lbs. per square inch. The resultant intensities at various points m the wall of the combined cylinder are found by taking the algebraic sum at each point of the three results shown. The result- ant hoop stress at D is found by laying off KF = DQ, the resultant intensity being 1)7^ = 50,000 — 29,250 = 20,750 lbs. per square inch. Similarly BH =MB —BP = 16,248 — 18,283 = —2035 lbs. per square inch, showing that the tensile stress developed by the high internal pressure was not quite enough to overcome the shrinkage compression. The intensities of hoop stress in the wall of the inner cylinder are therefore the intercepts of ordinates at right angles to BD between FM and KH. All stress in the outer cylinder is tension equal in intensity at any point to the sum of the ordinates between AB and ME added to those between AB and LS repre- sented by the ordinates drawn from AB to ON. Thus it 222 HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES. [Ch. IV. is seen that the shaded parts of the diagram represent at each poirt the intensity of stress existing at that point. The highest tension exists in the outer cyHnder at B and is equal to 28,054 + 16,248=44,302 lbs. per square inch. At Art. 41] CYLINDER UNDER HIGH INTERNAL PRESSURE. 223 the outer point A the tensile intensity of hoop stress is seen to be 27,552 lbs. The intensity of hoop stress at the interior surface of the cylinder has been found to be 20,750 lbs. per square inch, materially less than at the outer sur- face, which is desirable, as the radial normal pressure at the inner point is 40,000 lbs. per square inch. The high tensile intensity 44,302 lbs. per square inch, found at the inner surface of the outer cylinder and the compression of about 2000 lbs. per square inch at the adjacent point on the inner cylinder show the desirability of a redesign for the assumed internal pressure with adjust- ment of the amount of shrinkage and with the wall com- posed perhaps of three cylinders instead of two. In this manner the undesired extremes of stress in the vicinity of the middle of the wall can be avoided. The results, how- ever, exhibit completely the procedures to be followed where it is desired to make a combined cylinder with a number of concentric shells with vshrinkage so employed as to produce a more nearly uniform, though not continuous, stress condition than can be attained in a single wall with- out shrinkage. In a single wall of 12 -inch thickness in this case the hoop tension would have varied from 50,000 lbs. per square inch at the interior surface to only 10,000 lbs. per square inch at the exterior surface. The radial compressive intensities p have not been plotted in Fig. 2, as the resultant intensity in every case is found by adding the intensities due to each condition as given in the tabulations. At the interior surface the maxi- mum intensity of pressure is 40,000 lbs. per square inch. At 3 inches from the interior surface the maximum inten- sity will be about 20,000 lbs. per square inch and at the common surface of the two shells that intensity will be about 17,000 lbs. per square inch, thus decreasing outward until the value o is found at the outer surface. 224 HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES. [Ch. IV. Art. 42. — Thick Hollow Spheres. When the thickness of wall of a hollow sphere is so great that the stresses may not be considered uniformly distributed over a diametral section of the shell the approxi- mate formulae of Art. 39 cannot be used; it becomes neces- sary to make an investigation similar to that required for thick hollow cylinders. It will be supposed that the interior of the spherical shell is subjected to an intensity of pressure p' greater than the exterior normal pressure pi as shown in Fig. i. As the intensity of the interior pressure, produced possibly by a fluid, is greater than that of the exterior pressure the material of the shell will be subjected to an internal stress of tension as well as the radial compression, but the formulae as demonstrated will be equally applicable to the case of the exterior pressure being greater than the interior with- out any modification whatever. In the latter case, however, the internal stress acting around a great circle will be com- pression instead of tension. The formulas will be so written that a tensile stress is positive and a compressive stress negative. If a diametral section of the spherical shell be taken as in Fig. I, it is clear that for a given radius r there will be a uniform intensity of tension normal to that section and no other stress, i.e., this tension at every point will be in the direction of the circumference of a great circle. Fur- thermore, since that observation is true of all possible diametral sections of the shell it is equally obvious that at any point in the shell there will be two circumferential or hoop stresses at right angles to each other and a third radial stress of compression with no other stress on its surface of action, the three stresses being principal stresses at the assumed point. The three principal planes on which Art. 42. THICK HOLLOW SPHERES. 225 these principal stresses act are two of them diametral and at right angles to each other, while the third is tangent to the spherical surface with radius r, and it is at right angles to the other two planes. The state of stress in the interior of the shell is also obvious from the fact that the interior and exterior fluid or normal pressures are each the same^ in intensity at all points making the resulting con- FlG. I, dition of stress completely symmetrical. As every diam- etral plane section of the shell is a principal plane of stress there will be no shear on any such plane and for the same reason there will be no shear on any of the concentric spherical surfaces within the limits of the shell. Remembering that the interior radius of the shell is / and the exterior radius ri and that the tendency to tear the shell apart in any diametral annular section is due to the excess of the interior pressure over the exterior the follow- ing equation may be at once written, if h represents the 2 26 HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES. [Ch. IV. intensity of the internal tensile stress developed at any point in the annular section: Tr{p'r'^-pir.i^)= ] h.2Trr.dr. . . . (i) If in eq. (i), r' and ri be considered variable and of so nearly the same value that they differ from each other only by dr, the quantity p'r"^ —piVi^ becomes equal to d{pr'^). Hence, eq. (i) for that supposition may take the following form : d(pr^) =2hrdr = 2prdr-\-r^dp (2) This is a differential equation between h and p. Another equation of condition is required to determine those two variable quantities. Such an equation may be written by so expressing the relation between the internal distortions or strains accompanying the stresses h and p as to make the diametral sections of the shell plane what- ever may be the intensities of the internal stresses h and p. The consideration of such relations between the strains produced would be precisely the same as given in Art. 8 of Appendix I, and hence it is repeated here. If it be remembered that the intensities of the two circumferential stresses at any interior point of the shell are equal to each other and indicated by h, as in eqs. (i) and (2), while p represents the intensity of the internal radial stress at the same point, the relation between the internal strains or distortions necessary to make all diametral sections of the shell plane for all intensities of stress is equivalent to the condition that the sum of the three principal stresses must be constant at all points as expressed by eq. (3), a being constant : p + 2h=a (3) Art. 42.] THICK HOLLOW SPHERES. 227 From eq. (3) : p=a — 2h and dp = 2dh. .... (4) Substituting from eq. (4) in the second and third members of eq. (2) : 2 hrdr = 2 ardr — ^hrdr — 2 r^dh . By arranging terms the preceding equation takes in- tegrable form as given by eq. (5) : ^hrdr-\-r^dh=ardr (5) If 6 is a constant of integration, eq. (5) may be integrated so as to take the form of eq. (6) : r^h=^-ar^-\-b', h=--\ — - (6) 3 3 r^ By using the first of eqs. (4) and eq. (6), eq. (7) at once follows : ^ a 2h . s '-s-y^ ^'^ At the inner and outer surface of the spherical shell p=p' and p=pi, respectively. Eq. (7) will then give: p'= ^andi7i=--— . .... (8) 3 ^ 3 ^r Hence : I I \ ./^ — fi^ The preceding equation will at once give the following value of b, which in turn substituted in the second of eqs. 8 will give the value of -, following that of b: 3 bJl^jy^; and«=^:!:;i:i^. . ; (9) 228 HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES. [Ch. IV. a These values of b and - substituted in eqs. (6) and (7) will give the following values of radial intensity p and cir- cumferential intensity h at any point in the shell distant r from the centre. In writing these final expressions it is to be remembered that the constants a and b may be either positive or negative and their signs are changed so as to make all positive stress tension and all negative stress com- pression, as was done in the case of thick cylinders. piTi^ -p'r'^ {pi -p')r'^ri^ i (10) These equations can be put in more convenient shape for computation by dividing all terms in the second mem- bers by ri^, which will give eqs. (loa) and (iia) : (loa) y'6 {px-p'V^i P ,'3 r'3 ^ {pi-p')r'^i '^- /3 ' /3 .^' (iia) It is necessary to determine a thickness / of shell which will resist a given intensity of internal pressure. Eq. (11) shows that the circumferential tension h will be greatest when r=r' in eq. (11). Making this substitution 2h{/^-ri^)=Spiri^-p\2r'^+ri^). Art. 42.] THICK HOLLOW SPHERES. 229 Dividing by /^ and solving: fi^^ 2(h-\-p') r'^~ 2h-p'+sPi' Hence there may be at once written: , ^ ,3 2{k+p') , ( . ri-r =t=r \ , , , r. . . . (12) yl2h-p'+spi This value of t will give the thickness of material re- quired so . that the maximum intensity of circumferential tensile stress shall not exceed a prescribed value h at the interior surface of the sphere when the interior pressure is p' and the exterior pressure pi, the latter being smaller than the former. A similar treatment may be given to eq. (11) after making r=ri in order to determine a thickness t such that the circumferential compressive stress shall not exceed a given prescribed value when the exterior pressure pi exceeds the interior pressure p'. In eq. (12) if ^' = 2/^+3^1, the value of t becomes infinitely great, showing that if the interior pressure reaches or exceeds the value indicated no thickness of shell what- ever will prevent the circumferential or hoop tension ex- ceeding the prescribed limit h. If either internal or external pressure become zero, while the other has any assigned value, it is only necessary to make either p' or pi equal zero in all the preceding equations. Furthermore, it is a matter of indifference whether p' or pi is numerically greater in the application of any of the preceding equations except eq. (12). 230 HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES. [Ch. IV. Radial Displacement at any Point in the Spherical Shell The general analysis of Art. 8 of Appendix I, gives an expression for the radial strain or displacement of the material at any point within the spherical shell. It has already been seen that no other displacement occurs, as all diametral sections of the shell remain plane for , any degree of stress whatever. If this radial displacement or strain at any point be indicated by p, the analysis indi- cated show^s that the value of this displacement will be given by eq. (13): ^ 4<^l3(i+r) r;^_^ /^_ r^j' ' ^^^. t Knowing the internal and external pressures to which the shell is subjected eq. (13) will give the value of the radial displacement of any indefinitely small piece of material at the distance r from the center. If r = ri the corresponding value of p given by eq. (13) will indicate the increase or decrease, as the case may be, of the external radius ri; and if r=r' the increase or decrease in length of the interior radius r' will result. In eq. (13) G is ob- viously the modulus of elasticity of the material for shear, while r is the ratio of lateral over direct strains. CHAPTER V. RESILIENCE. Art. 43. — General Considerations. The term resilience is applied to the quantity of work required to be expended in order to produce a given state of strain in a body. If a piece of material is subjected to tension, that state of strain will be simply the stretching of the piece or the amount of compression, if the piece is subjected to compressive stress. In precisely the same manner the resilience of a bent beam is the amount of work performed upon it by its load in producing deflection. There may also be the resilience of shearing or of torsion. In the ordinary use of the expression, resilience refers to the amount of work expended within the elastic limit, whether of torsion, compression, or tension, but it m.ay properly be extended in its meaning to include the total amount of work required to rupture the material under any one of the preceding conditions of stress. Elastic resilience may easily be computed by means of exact formulas, but if the total work required to cause rupture in any case is desired, a graphical record of the total strains produced between the elastic limit and failure must be obtained by actual tests. In these articles the formulae for elastic resilience only will be given; in other subse- quent articles the method of computing the total resilience 231 232 RESILIENCE. [Ch. V. of failure will be illustrated by computations from actual strain records. Art. 44. — The Elastic Resilience of Tension and Compression and of Flexure. Let it be supposed that a piece of material whose length is L and the area of whose cross-section is A is either stretched or compressed by the weight or load W applied so as to increase gradually from zero to its full value. If E is the coefficient of elasticity, the elastic change of length will be -^-^. The average force acting will be Jl^, hence the work performed in producing the strain will be Resilience = — r^ (i) W If -J-, the intensity of stress in the metal, be represented by t, eq. (i) may be written Resilience =^Af^ (2) Again, eq. (2) may take the following form: Resilience = \AE^JL = ^AEPL. . . . (3) In eq. (3) the quantity /' = c^ is obviously the square of the strain (stretch or compression) per unit of length. If a bar of material i inch in length and i square inch Art. 44] RESILIENCE OF BENDING OR FLEXURE. 233 in cross-section be considered, .4 = i and L = i must be inserted in the preceding equations, and there will result Unit resilience = ^-p=iEP (4) t^ The quantity -^ =EP is called the "Modulus of Resil- ience." The expression is ordinarily employed when t is the greatest intensity of stress allowed in the bar. The preceding equations are applicable whether the bar or piece of material is in tension or compression, the coefficient of elasticity E being used for either stress, while t represents the intensity of either tension or compression, as the case may be. Inasmuch as the values of t and E are usually taken in reference to the square inch as the unit of area, it is generally convenient to take L in inches, although any other unit of length may be taken when multiplied by the proper numerical coefficient. I he Resilience of Bending or Flexure. It has already been shown, in considering the common theory of flexure, as applied to the flexure or bending of beams, that the intensities of the stresses of tension and compression vary from point to point throughout the entire beam. In determining the elastic resilience of flexure, therefore, it is necessary to flnd the work per- formed in producing the varying strains corresponding to the stresses in the interior of the beam. The resilience due to the direct stresses of tension and compression will first be considered and then that due to the shearing stresses. 234 RESILIENCE, [Ch. V. In order to obtain the expression for the work per- formed by the direct stresses of tension and compression in a beam bent by loads acting at right angles to its axis, a differential of the length, dL, is to be considered at any normal section in which the bending moment is AI, the total length of span or beam being L. Let / be the mom.ent of inertia of the normal section, ^4, about its neutral axis, and let k be the intensity of stress (usually the stress per square inch) at any point distant d from the axis about which I is taken. The elastic change produced in the indefinitely short length dL when the intensity k exists . k is pdL. If dA is an indefinitely small portion of the normal section, the average force or stress, either of tension or compression, acting through the small* elastic change of length just given, can be written by the aid of a familiar equation of flexure as 1 7 r. Md -k.dA=—f 2 21 k.dA=^f.dA . (5) Hence the work performed in any normal section of the member, for which M remains tmchanged, will be, since Jk.dA.d=M, I M M' ^^^kd.dA.dL=-^^dL (6) The work performed throughout the entire piece will then be wi"- I" / The integration indicated in eq. (7) is readily made in all ordinary cases by substituting the value of the bend- Art. 44.J RESILIENCE OF BENDING OR FLEXURE. 235 ing moment M in terms of the variable horizontal ordinate or abscissa x and the load, it being remembered that dL is precisely the same as dx. If, for example, the beam is non-continuous, simply supported at each end and carries uniformly distributed load p per unit of length P throughout the whole span, AI =-{Lx — x^). By the in- sertion of this value of M in eq. (7), there will result I r^ pV p^D W^L^ Resilience = —j=rf I ~ — (L — xydx= ^ -^-. = =— , (8) 2EIJ0 4 ^ ^ 240EI 24oEr ^ ^ W representing pL, the entire load on the beam. This equation gives the value of the total work per- formed by the direct stresses of tension and compression in the interior of a simple beam uniformly loaded and supported at each end, under the assumption that the moment of inertia / of the cross-section is constant through- out the entire span. If a single load W rests at the centre of the span, the W reaction at each end being — , the value of the bending W moment at any point will be — x. By inserting this value of ikf in eq. (7), there will result Kesihence=—j=^.2 / — x^ax=-—r=^. . . (9) 2EI Jo 4 g6EI Similarly equations of the elastic resilience of the direct stress of tension and compression in beams loaded in any manner whatever may easily be written. In some cases like the last the deflection at the point of application of a single load may easily be determined. Let that deflec- 236 RESILIENCE. [Ch. V. tion be represented by w\ when a single load W rests at the centre of the span the work performed by this load in producing the deflection is \Ww. Hence that amoiint of work must be equal to the resilience given by eq. (9), and WU w= j-,j (10) The Resilience Due to the Vertical or Transverse Shearing Stresses in a Bent Beam. The work performed by the vertical shearing stresses in a bent beam of any shape of cross-section may readily be found. Let 5 be the total transverse shear in a normal section, I being the moment of inertia of the latter about its neutral axis, h the width or breadth (constant or variable) of the section, ^ the unit shearing strain defined in Art. 2, d and d^ the distances of the extreme fibres from the neu- tral axis, and G the coefficient of elasticity for shearing. By eq. (6) of Art. 15 the intensity 5 of the shear at any point in the section at the distance z from the neutral axis will be S^j^{d^-Z^) (II) Again, by eq. (3) of Art. 2, *-i-4ri^^'-''^ • (-) The amount of shearing stress on the indefinitely small portion of the section h.dz will be sh.dz, and its path in performing the w^ork will be (t>dx, x being the horizontal ordinate of the section of the beam from any convenient origin, as the end of the centre of the span, i.e., in this case Art. 44-] RESILIENCE DUE TO SHEARING STRESSES. 237 the end of the span. The differential work performed in the section will be, by the aid of eqs. (11) and (12), iisbdz).{^dx)--^^j^^{d'-zydzdx. . . (13) In this eqtiation it is easy to express the breadth b of the section in terms of z, whatever may be its shape, by the aid of the equation of the perimeter of the section. In all the ordinary and important cases of engineering practice involving this resilience of shearing the shape of the section is rectangular for which b is constant, and it will be so regarded in the following equations. Remem- bering that X and z are independent variables, and that the first integration will be made in reference to z, that integration will give ^fsH.fy^^.Yd.^-^^^fsHx. (Z4) As the section is taken to be rectangular in outline, with h bh^ the breadth b and depth h, d=d^=~ and /=- — . Eq. (14) will then become Resilience =-j-r^ / S^dx (15) The total transverse shear 5 will have varying values depending upon the amount of loading on the beam and its distribution, i.e., in general it will vary with x, and when not constant it must be expressed in terms of that variable before the remaining integration can be made. If a single weight W rests on the beam at the distance of V from one end where the reaction is R', and at the 23^ RESILIENCE. [Ch. VI. distance /^ from the other end where the reaction is R^, the shear S will be constant for each of the segments into which the point of loading divides the span ; in one of those segments S = R\ and in the other S = R^. The com- plete integration of eq. (15) will be, therefore, Resilience = -^(R''r+R^\). If there be substituted in the parentheses of the second member of the preceding equation the values R' =W-r V and i?i = Wj, there will result 3 ir Resilience = 7 , ^ -V W^ (16) SbhG I ^ ' If the weight W rest at the centre of the span l^=r = - and Resilience =—~tWH (17) Eq. (17) affords a simple method of finding the deflec- tion w^ of the point of loading due to the transverse shear. As the weight W is supposed to be gradually applied the expended work JT/Fw^ must be equal to the shearing re- silience given in eq. (17). Hence ""'^i^il ^^8) When a non-continuous beam simply supported at each end carries a uniform load over the entire span, it has been shown in Art. 22, eq. (7), that the transverse shear at any Art. 44.]. DIRECT AND SHEARING STRESSES. 239 section is equal to the load between the centre of span and that section. If, therefore, the origin of x be taken at th-e centre of span and if p represents the load per unit of length of the beam, S=px. By substituting this value of 5 in eq. (15), and remembering that twice the integral must be taken for the whole beam, Resilience = —t^tt ■ 2 / p x^dx = ^ ^^ ^ = ^ — — — fi q ) SGhh Jo ^ 2oGhh 2oGhh' ^^^ The shearing resilience, therefore, in a non-continuous beam carrying a uniform load is only one third as much as that due to the same load concentrated at the centre of the span. If, as is usual, (7 is expressed in pounds per square inch the unit for /, 6, and h will be the linear inch. Other modes of loading than those takeji can be treated in precisely the same general manner. As the intensity of the longitudinal shear at any point of a beam is the same as that of the transverse shear, the total work of the longitudinal shear throughout the beam is the same as the work of the transverse shear. The total work of the shearing stresses in a bea.m is therefore composed of those two equal parts. The Total Resilience Due to Both Direct and Shearing Stresses. The general expression for the total resilience of a bent beam due to both shearing and direct stresses will be the sum of the second members of eqs. (7) and (13), expressed by the following equation:. Total resilience = I —FrjdLi- I I of27^(<^' z^) "^dzdx. 240 RESILIENCE. [Ch. V. Or, by eqs. (7) and (15), since dL=dx, Total resilience = / ~cjd^-^7n~Y- S^dx. . (20) By the aid of eqs. (8) and (19) the total resilience for a simple non -continuous beam may be as follows: If the imif orm load pl = W, Total resilience = W^{j^^ + ^^. . (21) For the same beam carrying a single load W at the centre, by eqs. (9) and (17) Total resilience = W^(^^^ + -^^. . . (22) As has been explained, the last two equations are appli- cable to beams with rectangular sections only. In a similar manner the total deflection of a beam supported at each end and loaded with a single weight W at the centre of the span, due to bending and flexure, will be found by the sum of the two expressions given in eqs. (10) and (18): Art. 45. — Resilience of Torsion. The w^ork expended in producing elastic strains of torsion constitutes the resilience of torsion and is a special case of shearing resilience. The twisting moment which produces the angle of torsion a is given by eq. (i6) of Art. 44-] RESILIENCE OF TORSION, 241 Art. 37 and is iTf=6'a/^. When the piece twisted has the length / the total angle of torsion is al and the differential amount of work performed by the moment M in producing the indefinitely small twist d{al) =l.da is Ml. da. Hence Resilience = I Mlda=GlIp / a . da = Gil p—^ . . (i) If P and e are the force and lever-arm of the twisting couple, eq. (18) of Art. 37 shows that ^^^SZ Pe^ p Substituting this value of a^ in eq. (i), P'^eH Resilience = ^r (2) 2Ul ^ ^ p 4 7ZT If the normal section of the piece is circular Ip = Hence, for a shaft with circular section, P^-eH Resilience = -7:^—^ (3) If the section of the shaft is a square, Ip = — , b being the side of the square. Hence, for a square section, Resilience = r-14 (4) In some cases shafts are subjected to combined torsion and bending. In such cases, if it is desired to compute the total elastic resilience it is only necessary to take the 242 RESILIENCE. [Ch. V. sum of the two resiliences, each foiind as if existing in> dependently of the other. The resiHence of torsion beyond the elastic limit or between the elastic limit and the ultimate resistance must be determined, as in all cases of distortion beyond the elastic Hmit, from an actual strain record, as given, by the testing machine when the piece is strained up to any given degree of permanent stretch or to rupture. Art. 46. — Suddenly Applied Loads. A load is considered suddenly applied when its full amount acts instantly upon any piece of material loaded by it. In the preceding articles relating to resiHence the loads are treated as being gradually increased from zero to their full values. In such cases the amount of external loading at any instant is supposed to be equal only to the internal stress or stresses opposing it, so that the w^ork performed is equivalent to one half the total load multi- plied by the total resulting strain. When the loads are suddenly applied, on the other hand, the internal stresses produced are exactly equal to the external forces only when the strains corresponding to the latter are reached, and the work performed up to that point is just double the work expended when the loads are gradually applied. It follows from this last . consideration that the strains produced by the suddenly applied loads will be double those found under gradual application. Inasmuch as the elastic strains are proportional to the corresponding stresses, it further follows that the stresses produced by suddenly applied loads will be double in intensity those which are produced by the same loads gradually applied. The work expended by a suddenly applied load up to the point of strain corresponding to its amount being Art. 46.] PROBLEMS FOR CHAPTER V. 243 double the work performed by the internal stresses, the total stress induced in the material at the limit of the final strain produced by such a load will be double the amount of the latter. The internal stresses in the piece will, there- fore, cause it to recover from its strained condition and vibrations will result, the treatment of which constitutes an important branch of the theory of elasticity in solid bodies. Some general features of that treatment will be given in Art. 12, App. I, but as they are seldom used in engineering practice they will not be considered here. It is only important at this point to note carefully the distinction between the effects of a given load grad- ually applied and suddenly applied, the strains and stresses in the latter condition being double those in the former. Again, it is also important to distinguish between loads suddenly applied, and shocks, as they are called in engineering practice. A shock is produced when the load falls freely before acting upon a piece of material sustaining it.- The cause of shock, therefore, is a suddenly applied load with the effect of a free fall of the latter super- imposed. These matters must be carefully taken into account and allowed for in such structures as bridges carrying rapidly moving trains, and those allowances are incorporated in the provisions of specifications covering bridge construction. Problems for Chapter V. Problem i. — A 6-inch by 1.7 5 -inch steel eye-bar 48 feet long is subjected to a stress of 117,500 pounds. If that load is gradually applied what is the work performed in the total length of the bar, if £ = 30,000,000 pounds? Also what is the unit resilience? 244 RESILIENCE, [Ch. V. t = — — — = 11,190. L = 48X12 =576 inches. Eq. (2) of Art. 44 then gives r> -r 1 ^ A' io.5X(ii,i9o)'X576 Resihence = work performed = ■ ^ 2X30,000,000 = 12,621 in. -lbs. Eq. (4) of Art. 44 gives Unit resihence = ' =2.00 in. -lbs. 2X30,000,000 Problem 2. — A cast-iron column 18 feet long having an area of cross-section of 40.8 sq. in. carries a load of 245,000 pounds. If the coefficient of elasticity E is 14,- 000,000 pounds, how much work is performed in com- pressing the column if the load is gradually applied. Problem 3. — A 30-pound lo-inch rolled steel I beam carries a uniform load of 1000 pounds per linear foot in addition to its own weight with a span of 16 feet. What will be the resilience or work performed in the material of the beam imder the gradual application of that total load of 1030 pounds per linear foot, the moment of inertia / of the beam being 134.2 and £ = 30,000,000 poimds? Eq. (8) of Art. 44 is to be used, in which L is 192 inches. Incidentally, what will be the greatest intensity of stress, k, in the extreme fibres?. Ans, Resilience = 1987 in. -lbs ; k = 15,000 lbs. per square inch. Problem 4. — In Problem 3 if the thickness of the web of the lo-inch rolled beam is .5 inch, find the resilience oif the vertical or transverse shearing stresses in the beam, the coefficient of shearing elasticity, G, being taken at 12,000,000 pounds. The remaining data are / = i92 inches; h = io inches; ^=0.5 inch, and 1/^ = 16,480 pounds, and they are to be used in eq. (19) of Art. 44, Art. 46.J PROBLEMS FOR CH/fPTER V, 245 Problem 5. — A round bar of steel 2I inches in diameter is twisted by a force of 2100 pounds acting with a lever- arm of 17 inches. Two sections 25 ft. apart are turned 0.185 inch in reference to each other, i.e., the total strain of torsion for a length of bar of 25 feet has that value. Find the total angle of torsion, the angle of torsion and the coefficient of elasticity, G, for shearing (i.e., for torsion). Ans. 01=0.00043; q:/ = 0.129; and 6' = 13,000,000 lbs. Problem 6. — The greatest permitted working intensity of torsive shearing is 8000 pounds per square inch. Design a steel shaft to carry a twisting moment produced by a force of 1900 pounds, acting with a lever-arm of 84 inches. If the coefficient of elasticity for shearing is 12,000,000 potmds, what will be the angle of torsion? Also what will be the total angle of torsion and total strain of torsion for a length of shaft of 13 feet? Problem 7. — In Problems 5 and 6 find the work per- formed in twisting the two steel shafts, i.e., the resilience for 25 feet length in the one case and 13 feet in the other. Use equations of Art. 45. Problem 8. — In Problem 5 suppose the load suddenly applied, what will be the resulting resilience and greatest intensity of extreme fibre stress? CHAPTER VI. COMBINED STRESS CONDITIONS. Art. 47.— Combined Bending and Torsion. Probably the most important case of combined bend- ing or flexure and torsion is that of the ordinary crank- shaft represented in Fig. i. The centre of the thrust of a connecting-rod is at A, on the crank-pin journal against which the connecting-rod bears. The centre of the shaft-bearing is at B. If the thrust at A is represented by P, then the actual resultant moment about the centre of the bearing B will be PxAB. The problem is to determine the maximum stresses de- veloped by this resultant moment in the section of the shaft at B. Two methods may be employed in both of which the resultant moment of P multiplied by the lever arm AB is resolved into its two components, one of which is the ordinary bending moment represented by M =Px CB, and the other is the twisting moment M' =PxAC. The latter produces torsion in the journal at B and the former produces pure flexure or bending at the same section. Let CB be represented by / while e represents AC. The moment of pure bending at B will be ■ . M=Pl. ....... (i) 246 Art. 47.] COMBINED BENDING AND TORSION. 247 The twisting moment producing pure torsion will be M'^Pe (2) If d represents the distance of the most remote fibre in the" section B from the neutral axis of the latter, and if / Fig. I k is the greatest intensity of bending stress at the dis- tance d from the neutral axis, while / is the moment of inertia of the normal section of the shaft at B about the same neutral axis, the following will be the value of k : Md_Pld I ~ I ' • • • • ° k = (3) Again, if T is the greatest intensity of torsional shear in the normal section of the shaft at B, at the greatest distance r, in the perimeter, from the centre of gravity or the centroid of the same section, the value of the maximum intensity T will be _ MV Per (4) In eq. (4) Ip is the polar moment of inertia of the nor- mal section at B. 248 COMBINED STRESS CONDITIONS. [Ch. VI. First Method. In this method it is only necessary to consider the intensities k given by eq. (3) and T given by eq. (4), the greatest allowed working stresses of direct tension and of shearing respectively, k would have the value of the greatest tensile working stress of the material of the shaft for the reason that if tested to failure the shaft would yield first on the tension side. It being understood, therefore, that ^ and T represent the greatest allowed working intensities of stress, usually expressed in pounds per square inch, eq. (3) will give (s) / M " k " PI d^ '' k ° • Under the same conditions < eq. (4) will give h_ M' Pe r " T^ ^ T . For the circular section 4 and > • For a square section 12 and i^-^, . . . , . (6) (7) (8) b being the side of the square. In eq. (5) for a circular section d^r and for a square section d = — ;=. In eq. (6), r = r for the circular section, but for the square section Art. 47.] COMBINED BENDING AND TORSION. 249 r = -—=i. Making those substitutions in eqs. (5) and (6) for V 2 the circular section, there will result, D being the diameter of the. shaft. For bending , . .r =— =^1 _^ = 1.08-^ D 2 PI k D shPe ^,sfPe For torsion . „ , . r =— ^\~^ =.86a(-y (9) In the practical use of eqs. (9) that one of the two values of r should be taken which is the greatest. This will insure that both the direct stress of tension and the shearing stress shall not exceed the prescribed values of k and r. The substitution of the values of / and Ip for the square section in eqs. (5) and (6) will give, remembering that d and r are each one half the diagonal of the square, 3 6\/2Pl For bending . . . 6 = \ For torsion . . . .b = i.62\(^ = 2 .04^1 PI k (10) In eq. (10), also, the greatest value of h given by the application of the two formulae is to be taken, so that, as in the case of the circular section, neither of the two in- tensities k and T shall exceed the values prescribed for them. This method involves only the consideration of the simple formulae of the common ^theories of flexure and torsion. 250 COMBINED STRESS CONDITIONS. [Ch. VI. Second Method. The second method of treatment of this case of the crank-shaft consists in determining the greatest intensity of the direct stress of tension in the section B of the shaft at the jom*nal-bearing. This resultant maximum intensity is produced by the combination of the same component moments, M =Pl and AF =Pe, as in the preceding method. With the sections of shafting ahvays employed the maxi- mum intensity of bending stress k and the maximum intensity of torsional shear T exist at the same point and on the same plane, i.e., the plane of normal section of the shaft. The existence of the shear T on the normal section at the distance r from its centre of gravity carries with it the same intensity of shear at the sam.e point on a longi- tudinal plane passing through the axis of the shafting. At the point considered, therefore, on two indefinitely small planes at right angles to each other, one normal to the axis of the shaft and the other parallel to it, there exist the direct intensity of tension k on the first, and the intensity of shear T on the second. The problem is to determine at the same point the greatest intensity of the direct stress of tension on any plane whatever, and the angle /? between the direction of that stress and the axis of the shaft. Reference may best be made to the general fonnulae of internal stresses in a solid body for its solution, and those are eqs. (8) and (9) of Art. 8. Those equations are adapted to this case by making px=k, pxu = T, tan a=tan /S, and p = t, the latter quantity being the greatest intensity of tension desired. These substi- tutions give the following two equations : /=J^ + 72 + ^ -(ii) \ A 2 Art. 47.] COMBINED BENDING AND TORSION. 251 27 k tan 2/3 ^-— (12) Eq. (11) gives the greatest intensity of direct tension ,in the shaft in terms of known stresses. By eq. (12) the position of the plane or section of the shaft on which the maximum intensity t exists may at once be found. Inasmuch as ^ is the angle between the direction of the stress t and the axis of the shaft, the angle between the plane on which t acts and the axis of the shaft will be 90°+^. Under this method of treatment it would be necessary to design the shaft so that t should not exceed the greatest prescribed tensile working stress for the material em- ployed. The greatest intensity of compressive stress in the shaft would be found by giving the negative sign to the radical in the second member of eq. (11). The preceding formulae have been established in a manner to make them applicable to any form of shaft section or any values of k and T. It is only necessary to insert in those formula any intensities of those stresses that may exist. If, for example, it were considered desir- P able to add the shear — -o due to the thrust P to the tor- Tzr P sional shear it would only be necessarv to take T -\- — -, for T wherever the latter quantity occurs. If a shaft is circular in section, as is almost universally the case, so that Ip ==2/, and if the shearing effect of P in the section at B, Fig. i, be omitted, useful and extremely simple relations may be deduced. In that case D = 2r, being the diameter of the shaft, and j the angle ABC 2S2 COMBINED STRESS CONDITIONS. [Ch. VI. cf Fig. 1, M as before being the resultant moment, or M=PXAB: , rM cos y ■ , ^ rM sin / , , k = J — ^ and T = -j-^. . . (13) By the substitution of these values in eq. (11), ^ = ^(i4-cos;)=--^(i+cos;). . . (14) Hence D = i.72^J-j{i+cosj) C15) Eq. (14) gives, by the aid of the first of eqs. (13) ^ ^ = -^(i+cos y) =-(sec y + i). . . . (16) 21 2 The second of eqs. (13) gives, after substituting the value of — ;: = 2/ irD^' ^ ^.iM sin / , V The substitution of the values of T and k from eqs. (13^ in eq. (12) gives Art. 47] COMBINED BENDING AND TORSION. tan 2i T = tan j ; i/. 253 . (18) This last set of results relating to circular shafts will, in all ordinary cases, supply everything required for the operations of design or of investigations regarding con- ditions of stress in existing shafts. Eqs. (13), first of (14), (16), and (18) apply as they stand to square shafts. The first method involves simpler considerations than the second, not only analytically, but also in respect to Fig. 2. empirical quantities required to be used. The test pieces from which the ultimate resistance of the material is de- termined are always taken parallel to the axis of the shaft, but the greatest intensity of stress t found in the second method has a direction inclined to that axis by the angle /?. In general, therefore, it will probably be found more practicable to use the first method rather than the second. In the case of the double crank-shaft shown in Fig. 2, it is only necessary to treat each half precisely as if it were the single crank-arm in Fig. i. 2 54 COMBINED STRESS CONDITIONS. [Ch. VI. Art. 48. — Combined Bending and Direct Stress. There are a considerable number of practical problems of combined flexure and direct stress of sufficient impor- tance to merit careful examination, and among them is the flexure of long columns treated in Art. 24. In this place the particular cases to be considered are those in which the bending is produced by a uniform load at right angles to the axis of the member, or by eccentricity of longitudinal loading, the direct stress (or external force) being applied in a direction parallel to the same axis. Lower chord eye-bars and. other horizontal or inclined chord members of 'pin bridges belong to this class. Let ilfj represent the bending moment in the m.ember at that section where the deflection is greatest, produced by loading at right angles to the m.ember's axis or by eccentricity in the application of the longitudinal loading; let w^ represent the greatest deflection resulting from the total bending moment and direct stress ; also, let P be the total direct stress acting upon the member whose length is /, while k represents the greatest intensity of stress due to bending alone and at the distance d of the most remote flbre from the neutral axis of the section at which the deflection w' is found. Finally, let A be the area of cross- section of the member which, together with the moment of inertia I, is supposed to be constant throughout the entire P length; and let 258 COMBINED STRESS CONDITIONS. [Ch. VI. If the bar carries any other uniform load than its own, it is only necessary to make W represent the total uniform load, including the weight of the bar itself. Finally the direct force P may act with the eccentricity e. In this case the moment Pe produces uniform bending throughout the length of the bar, and it is only needful to write (-^±Pej for -^ m the preceding formula, the double sign showing that Pe may act either with or against the moment of the uniform load. The formulas of this article are not sufficiently exact for the usual cases of engineering practice. Art. 50. — The Approximate Method Ordinarily Employed. The method commonly employed in practical work for the treatment of compound bending and direct stress is a much closer approximation than the preceding method, although not exact. Its chief f capture is the introduction of the bending moment produced by the direct or longi- tudinal force multiplied by the actual maximum deflection. In the same manner the moment due to the eccentricity of the line of action of that force is introduced wherever necessary. Eq. (6a) of Art. 27 gives the following expression for the deflection w' due to pure bending and in terms of the greatest intensity of bending stress k, a being a constant depending, among other things, upon the distribution of loading : ^=^E5 ^'^ If the deflection as given in eq. (i) be placed equal to each of the two parts of the deflection given in eq. (21) Art. 50.] APPROXIMATE METHOD ORDINARILY EMPLOYED. 259 of Art. 28, it will be found for a beam simply supported at each end and loaded uniformly, that a=i\, and for the same beam loaded by a single weight only at the centre of the span, a=^g. The cases which occur in practice conform nearly to that of a load uniformly distributed over the length /. Hence for such a beam there is ordi- narily takC> 000 "^ 0>iO Tj-iAiO^iNt-lt^ CO 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 w "^ TO C < Ph 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 c; •^tTj-^TJ-TfTtro.^Tj-Tt-iOiOTj-iOTtrtTtTtrOTj-'^rO tJ-vO lo t)- ro lO in fOO lo ■H « r-^TfroiorJ-o, c 11 00 00 vororOw iO';tior^voN lOOO t-'^iOt^J^-t^Ost^O^M rnO t-- fOOO 00 »D 0> N r~ E fe 00 low-, lo'^ioioioiniriinioinvoiouiioiOHioioiowoioio^ioioiriioioioin-^ioinioi/^ 0+^ longa- m, Per nt. in 8 nches. i/-;5C x> looo Ti-u-iNNu-> oO'tw^ 'to Cv H r-oC ■* ^00 COt^m ininiANOU-) O OOO O O w r-O O r- OOO oo O 0> a looo oo OvO O00t^Ou^ -^OO i^O J> J> J>00 O t- rOMM rooO O ■^OO OoOr-rO'tH HinO ^^ rONt«iinN»/>i-i li^t-T^Tl■0 OvfO^t^r-P) N ioir)N rJ-Q J? u OOvO^>Ou^'^OOOCMOOO« fOOO O 't f^oO 00 t}-0 NvO rorOmrOMOO N t}-hi>h\0 i/~. :iK r~oO MCsocOOOOOcOOOcCOoCOOOOr~HVO OX t^oC OOoO w i>OOnOO Sj ^O^O•*'t■<^^OTtrl■TJ•TJ■rO'tT)•^o^OrO■>tr^•r^Ti•cOTt-'t^^!cocOfOri•fO^O't^O^Of'0^O■>t>+ B 1 ^,^^H==c.»^c*o.»=^«H^.*».p£- --:-----: ^^ a i XXXXXXXXXXXXXcgoI^^^° ?)S>S o«^^^^''£'^«*»'»S>oS«i*-t-^.»^'^'=i» - ^ ^H« xxxxxxxxxxxxx O O too -O^-ti^u^'+Tj-rOWi 5^ 1 XAAA/N>'VAAA/N/^/^/^nnhhhhhm t>000000\0O0000r0Hr~ Ov O- l>0 tJ- CO —t c _ c 5"u s^ c. Mn. P. s. Si. 31.2 39.8 •23 .70 .0521.004 .27 30-4 29 .27 .65 .045-018 .26 34-3 46 5 .27 .60 .047 .007 .28 32.0 40 8 •30 .65 .040 .004 .28 31.2 39 8 ■23 .70 .052 .004 .27 32.6 44 5 •27 .60 . 047 ^ . 008 .28 29.6 38 5 •23 .60 .052,. 004 .27 30.4 42 5 •30 .65 .041 .009 .26 28.1 37 6 .29 .70 . 046 . 006 • 25 31-4 39 4 .29 .70 .046 .006 • 25 21.9 37 I .29 .70 . 046 . 006 • 25 31.6 31 7 ■30 .65 •0371.004 .27 29.6 37 7 ■25 •50 .043 .02 .20 31.2 40 .29 •65 .05 .024 .27 29.6 45 5 •31 .60 .036 .003 1 .26 Character of Fracttire. Turntable wheel. Track segments. . Rack segments . Track segments Turntable v/heel Rack segments. . Track segments. Shoes 47,510 49, 500 47,500 47,500 49,775 47,500 46,270 48,900 46,130 48,640 49,77 5 47,600 45,200 47,500 49,800 72,300 67,200 67,900 71,100 72,115 68,100 71,920 74,700 71,860 71,600 71,335 76,020 68,000 68,700 75,700 Silky cup. " ang. Irregular. Silky ang. " cup. Irregular. Silky cup. ang. Irregular. Art. 58.] STEEL. 323 Rail Steel. The grade of steel adapted to railroad rails is much higher in the hardeners carbon and manganese, and corre- spondingly higher in physical quantities than structural steel, at the same time it is a quite different metal from that adapted to the finer purpOvSes of tools ; it is manufac- tured by the Bessemer process. The great increase in the immediate past in the weight and speed of railroad locomotives and trains has subjected rails to intensely severe duties which can be performed without deteriora- tion of metal only by steel of the highest powers of en- durance, which means a steel of high ultimate resistance, elastic limit, and corresponding ductility. The grades of steel used for rail purposes at the present time are well illustrated by the following tabular statement, which shows the chemical composition of the rails of various weights and sizes used by theN. Y. C. & H. R. R. R. Co., the pounds at the head of the columns indicating the weight NEW YORK CENTRAL & HUDSON RIVER R. R. SPECIFICATIONS. 65-Lb. 70-Lb 7 5 -Lb. 5o-Lb. loo-Lb. Carbon. Silicon. Manganese. Sulphur not to exceed Phosphorus not to exceed Rails having carbon below will be rejected Rails having carbon above will be rejected 0.45 to 0.55 0.15 to 0.20 1.05 to 1-25 0.069 0.06 0.43 0.57 0.47 to 0.57 0.15 to 0.20 1.05 to 1.25 0.069 0.06 0.45 0.59 0.50 to 0.60 0-15 to 0.20 1 . 10 to 1.30 0.069 0.06 0.48 0.62 0.55 to 0.60 0.15 to 0.20 1 . 10 to 1.30 0.069 0.06 0.53 0.65 0.65 to 0.70 015 to 0.20 1 .20 to 1 .40 0.069 0.06 0.60 0.70 The numbers represent the per cents of the various elements. 324 TENSION. [Ch. VII. of rail per yard. The metal of the lightest or 6 5 -pound rail corresponds to an ultimate resistance of 85,000 to 90,000 pounds per square inch, with an elastic limit of .5 to .7 of that value. The highest or 100-pound rail corresponds to metal having an ultimate tensile resistance of probably 110,000 to 120,000 X->ounds per square inch, with an elas- tic limit of .6 to .7 of those amounts. In these chemical compositions it is pertinent to observe the high carbon and manganese, and the low phosphorus and sulphtir. After several years' experience in the effort to secure a most enduring steel for a railroad rail weighing 135 pounds per yard, Mr. James 0. Osgood, Chief Engineer of the Central Railroad of New Jersey, states in a paper published in the Official proceedings of the New York Rail- road Club for May 21, 191 5, that the following chemical composition has ^delded the most satisfactory results within the experience of that road, on which, where these heavy rails are laid, the traffic is of excessive intensity. Carbon .85 to i.oo per cent or carbon .8 to .95 per cent. The rails having the latter carbon content also contain chromium^ 0.2 to 0.4 per cent and nickel 0.2 to 0.4 per cent. It Vv'ill be observed that this rail section, i.e., 135 pounds f)er yard, is the heaviest yet rolled and used in the United States up to the date of Mr. Osgood's paper. Rivet Steel. The grade of steel ordinarily used for rivets is the softest, or lowest in hardeners, employed in engineering construction; it should thus be correspondingly low in phosphorus and carbon. In Table I of this article there Avill be found the measures of ductility and other physical properties of a number of specim.ens of rivet steel, which are fairly representative of that metal, except Art. 58.] STEEL. S^S tlmt the ultimate resistance is frequently much lower than is shown there. In much of the rivet metal used at the present time the ultimate tensile resistance may run from 52,000 to 60,000 pounds per square inch. In such steel the carhon may n,ui down to .06 or .08 per cent. with sulphur between .02 and .03 per cent., and phos- phorus even lower. The treatment to which rivet metal must be subjected in the heading of rivets makes it imperative that the metal possess qualities of ductility and toughness to an unusual degree and that the vari- ations of temperature in the rivet shall not reduce its resisting capacity. In other words, rivet steel must pos- sess physical properties enabling it to resist torturing treatment to the highest practicable degree. Nickel Steel, The alloy, nickel steel, to which the allusion has already been made in connection Vv'ith the subject of the modulus of elasticity of steel, possesses marked characteristics of high ultimiate resistance and elastic limit, the latter usually running from j% to f of the former. The amount of nickel in the alloy is usually about 3. 2 5 -per cent, while the carbon content may frequently be .25 to .30 per cent, although higher values of the nickel content will be found in the table following, which shows the results of tests of both full-size eye-bars and specimens cut from those bars. That table* shows the high ultimate resistance and elastic limit ^delded by this material, with but little if any decrease in ductility. The effects of annealing may be observed to be practically the same as for carbon steel. * The results in this table were courteously given to the author by Mr. HenryW. Hodge, C. E., of the firm of consulting engineers, who designed and built the St. Louis Municipal Bridge, at St. Louis, Mo. 326 TENSION. [Ch. VII. •J pq -i000000'+ "b ce 00 rOOO OONOOOOOOOOi-iNMrOOOcOON Required by Specification u o Q 5 C9 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx vO O O ■* ^ -^ TfvO '^^C sO o o O O P* ^O N o o o o ■* < >, c < 1 r0OiOPOOOO(NOr;)ONOOii->MOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO o o PM E OS m < 6 o d OOl^OMl/lOOt^t^lONOiNOOO TtO 0\ ■* OiO O t-- o 1 a •a 1 c < ^ o a; M r^O 1/5VO NiONawOt^O\'=tN^ l>0 l>00 fOO\OiOv*M OiW5fOO\r^O\Ci^lONI>t^iO O d i-irc«/5'-iTti-ii-i(si-»iHr'3NNrO>-irOOO' OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO lO O O 00 '^O 0000OO«SOr}-Ocs roO m O O^C^ OOO aO>0 O^O^OlO>OoO O^O^C^O^ s ^ Q O OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO O 00 '^O COOxOO-ioo''ro^i>w o'c'roroo'TfrfTtt-^Tf VO lAO lO lO lO lO lOO lO lO lO lOO O O lO lOO lO lO lO l/~/ lO 01 C c a c ;3 i-i|>{SOvOOOvO M ONOiOi/5t^CMOO Nt^lOC\ a-O "^ ^ o r^r~'^OfO>-iOc^>-ioooONOOC^r^oONNt>.OiO'-' roi^rorofO'^rOO) rots -^rororoc^ N rororOfOCS ror«5r^ 4^s ClOOOlOt-OlOO>OOOOlOt^ONI>iO(MOt^001 o o M 00 t- o >r) Ov O tooo O t^ ■* N o t^O OMHt^or-'-ioor- MI-HCS1-IMMMWHIHNNNWHMNNIHMIH(S1-(I-I Q < w OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OcsooOOOOiOMOOtsOOOior^OOoOOONO t-vcoo O^OOOi^oOOO (^Ow ^i-HvOvO O"0C r^- 0> o o o o"o vo'cc o" '^cc'oc'vC i-i ►- 00 oT CN ro o r4 o" t-^ •-/> M OO oo" 00\C\0OO0O0i00\C\0w00O00O0C^0i0\ VO-*-" O H 'sis' OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO •^ N <3 M 00 o M Tf o 00000000 oo TtOO "^OO o o o o "l " 9.°°. "^ "?°°. '-^ '^. "2 "^ 9. "-l ^. "^ '^ '^ "^ ^°° lO rf 01 (^ o" oi ►-<" fO o" r^ fO Oi w O fO m" o" w o" doo" m' pOoo" O ts' t~^ O NO »/:0 O vO lOO ^O lO 1/^vO O vO O >0 >/50 O lO >00 >0 lO o o q ;2 6 2; M N fO -"t \f.O t^OO Ov O H N fO ■* »oO 1^00 Oi O H (M ro ■* Art. 58.] STEEL. 327 > pq < c c c c Is e 6 a e g G 0. o-n 0. tt! M <« «5 <« 60 MOO bO rt ^ (U (U OJ (U Ji bo fe fe 0) « .S ^ cJ 6 Pi 1- c n! t^ rt rt . rt ^g ^ ^ ^ a j0.j3 o^^C CCC 3 1 3|S ^-fS^I ll^i DO:;::^ M^^d^^a+^r^ +^+^_C-^^-^^^-^;^^^ 2^ o'w J^'55"w'^'w'c« ^"rt Q .1313 j> ovj^oo ^ UT^UT^iO rOOO 10 M lO (N rf O\00 • i/) 00 t^ 00 O OMO C^ •^CS C?\0 t^ 0> O\00 O O 0\ ■^HOO Ov -vOi^r-OiOJOON fQ MNHMMM MCqcqwWMMM .MHMHWNWIH G ^ w-^rOOvOH -ON • l^O ^O rooo Ooo N t-t^io "^00 O-^MNIOM •O'^ • 00 O f^O 00 t^ •* t- t- ■* «/5 ro 0\ 0\ d ^" C^CSC^MWN .(Nr^-MMMMHMNMl-IHMMM Tl ^ Tl-00 M(»csrOHMrJ-Tl-ioiHf«5 io\0 OfOnNMOiOOOO o rt ? (N »o -to O O • -"too 00 l> fOO OrOMvOiOOorOt^t^w o C 3 «5 S 0) "S 0000000000000000 »/)00 oooooooooooooooooooooooooooo 00 a dj ^ H S3 C to OOOOOOt- • O M loooooo ^O rooOOMD O Ooooo MOM Ttoo 0\0 -lOO (Ni/^MirjtsuotS MOO roOiAiOC\ CO t-l N rO-f^NtNro .c^MfonrONiNMrorot^Nt- l^"* :^>M^^H^.^.Mt-toloc^^(r)0^ o c^OOfOt^O ;OfO ioOTfiOMCSN'^J-r^vOMro'^r^O \n l""^ ro '^ ^ cq r<5 -"t . fO rO . cs rf n ro M m -^ ^ n ro ^^ tJ- ^ n ro M C xn OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO O O O00O'*Mr-roOC> l>0 r-00 (n oO ^oo ro O m lo (n m m O O °° " °, 9, '^. 1 9. R! 1 "^ "^ "^.^. ov 't^. " °. "} '"r "^ '^ t '~: c6r^irit^\r,6o,6o^-^ c^oo" (N tC ^ aoo" ao o" ^ to r^ o" o o q m 6 ^■^ ^ O\O>00 C^000000 CiCNOiOOOO 0\o C?\O\0000 (?iOO C>O\00 0\ 00 o m OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO o '■^S.^ v^ G OO M ^ror^ (N loioioojo M '*OM^r-^t^ M-oo lo ro ui o M 6 ""-^ rt- q a 1/1 Ov Ov >* M_oO__ f^^oo^o^ '^ 1 ^ t°°.°°.^.^-''-l '^ ° 9. q m"o -^O rooo'vo' lA t^oo' rf tC t-I (v^ ri dvO rooo' d 6 6\ '^oo" UOIOIOIOIO'^IOU^VJIUIIOIO lOO vO lO IT) in lO "TfO lO l/^ lO ^ W W) OOOOt^OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO __ t^rOM fOOOO roO '*O\iO^CM>00 lOioOiO OM loO ui »o lO too M too lO i/l lo m ro •t^cC 1J rororOfOPOfOrOrorCfOfOrOrororONr^rONrororororo 5 . . u^POfOrOCS«SPOfOOfOi/5ro>OPOfOOiO M M fO ^lOO t^00OOMfS~5-^ WMMMMMMMMM(NCSMCSC< tN 3^8 TENSION. [Ch. VII. The following tabular statements give the physical qualities of nickel steel adapted to the various purposes indicated. They are taken from results published in the Railroad Gazette for August 8th, 1902. NICKEL-STEEL FORGINGS. Tensile Strength.Lbs, Elastic Limit, Lbs. Exten., Per Cent. Cont., Per Cent Driving-wheel axles Piston-rods Main crank-pins Front crank-pins Connecting-rods and guides 99,310 90,140 93,570 92,180 92,040 64,170 60,090 65,450 64,170 59,820 25.00 25.50 24.00 24-50 26.00 NICKEL-STEEL CASTINGS. Crosshead Furnace-bearer, bearer-guide Annealed : Carbon steel Nickel steel Oil-tempered : Carbon steel Nickel steel 84,540 85,050 109,500 100,330 129,360 103,890 53,980 54,490 51,440 66,720 67,230 76,390 18 1 50 18 00 19 50 25 00 17 50 25 00 31- 10 26.04 36.31 54.56 38.53 61.56 SMALL RIFLE BARRELS— NICKEL STEEL. Tensile Strength, Lbs. Elastic Limit, Lbs. Ext. in 2 Inches, Per Cent. Cont. or Area Percent. * 115,100 114,080 114,590 116,620 116,120 114,590 99,820 97,780 99,820 96,770 97,780 98,800 23 23 23 22.50 23 24 64.00 64.95 65.45 62.05 64.00 62.53 Vanadmm Steel. The alloy called vanadium steel contains when used for many purposes some chromium, which frequently gives it the name Chrome Vanadium Steel. This grade of steel contains carbon and manganese about in the proportion of ordinary structural steel. Indeed it may be considered Art. 58.] STEEL. 32( ordinary structural steel alloyed with chromium and vana- dium. The addition of these latter materials gives to the resulting product great toughness with high ultimate resist- ance and an elastic limit remarkably high in proportion to the ultimate resistance. It is used largely for such special purposes as locomotive parts, both as castings and in the forged condition. In either case, however, it requires heat treatment. It is largely used for locomotive frames, axles, piston rods, crank pins, tires, as well as for many parts of automobiles. Many physical tests of small specimens have been made giving elastic limits of about 40,000 pounds per square inch (for castings) up to about 100,000 pounds per square inch, the corresponding ultimate tensile resistance being about 70,000 pounds per square inch up to about 150,000 pounds per square inch. These variations in physical qualities depend upon chemical contents of the alloy and upon the condition of the material as cast or rolled, and finally upon the heat treatment of the material. In a paper on '' Vanadium Steel in Locomotive Con- struction " by George L. Norris, Engineer of Tests of the American Vanadium Co., published in the Official Proceed- ings of the New York Railroad Club, 191 5, he gives the following chemical contents as meeting the requirements for the locomotive parts indicated. Chemical Contents of Chrome Vanadmm Steel. Castings Axles, Piston Rods and Crank Pins Tires Carbon .20 to .30% .30 to .40%* .50 to .65% Manganese .50 to .70 .40 to .60 .60 to .80 Chromium •75 to 1.25 .80 to 1. 10 Silicon .20 to .30 Not over .20 .20 to .35 Vanadium Over .16 Over .16 Over .16 Phosphorus Not over .05 Not over .04 Not over .05 Sulphur Not over .05 Not over .04 Not over .05 * Preferred .35% 330 TENSION. [Ch. VII. The elastic limit, ultimate resistance, final stretch and final reduction of area corresponding to the grades of mate- rial indicated by the chemical contents are shown in the next table. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS (After Heat Treatment), Elastic Limit Ult. Resist. Stretch in Reduction Lbs. per sq. in. Lbs. per sq. in. 2 ins. of Area. Castings 40,000- 50,000 70,000- 85,000 25% 45% Axles, Piston Rods and Crank Pins. . . 80,000-100,000 95,000-125,000 25 55 Tires 56" diam. and under .... 110,000-125,000 140,000-160,000 Min. 12 Min. 30 Tires over 56'' diam 95,000-115,000 120,000-140,000 Min. 15 Min. 35 These physical requirements correspond closely to the usual results of tests. They show the high elastic limit of the material and its high degree of ductility. Castings must be carefully annealed by heating slowly to about 1550"^ F. and then slowly cooling. The heat treatment for chrome vanadium driving axles consists of: " (i) annealing the rough forging by heating carefully and cooling slowly, (2) reheating,"forging, and quenching in water or oil, preferably the latter, (3) then promptly re- heating slowly and uniformly to a temperature sufficiently high to give the desired properties. The forging must be held at this final or draw-back temperature for at least two, hours. The axle should then be allowed to cool slowly. " The recommended temperature for annealing is 1475- 1525° F., and for quenching from 1600° F. to 1650° F. The final heating for obtaining the physical properties should be approximately 1100° F. to 1200° F." The heat treatment to which vanadium side rods, piston Art. 58.] STEEL. 331 rods, and crank pins are submitted is the same as that given above for driving axles. In the manufacture of locomotive tires, the heat treat- ment is somewhat different from that set forth above, as it consists of : '' (i) In reheating the tires after rolling, and then quenching in oil, (2) then reheating slowly and uniformly to a temperature sufficient!}^ high to obtain the desired physical properties. The tire must be held at this final temperature at least two hours, which is considered the minimum time required for the changes to be effected throughout the tire section. The tire should then be with- drawn from the furnace and allowed to cool in still air. *' The recommended temperature for quenching is about 1600° F. The final heating for obtaining the physical properties specified should be approximately iioo to 1200 h. It is obvious that material with such physical properties possesses unusual toughness and resilience. For that reason it is specially adapted to locomotive springs and other similar uses. For such a purpose the carbon contained is relatively high. Mr. Norris in the paper already indi- cated gives the following as a suitable chemical composition : Chemical Composition. Per cent. Carbon 0.52 to 0.60 Manganese 0.70 to 0.90 Chromium 0.80 to ii.o Vanadium Over o. t6 Phosphorus . .' Not over 0.04 Sulphur Not over 0.04 This material requires heat treatment consisting of : " (i) Heating and quenching in oil, (2) then reheating 332 TENSION. [Ch. VII. or drawing back, preferably in a lead bath, and cooling slowly. The time in the lead bath should be lo to 15 minutes. "The recommended temperature for quenching is from 1575 to 1650° F. The drawback or annealing temperature should be approxim.ately from 900 to 1100° F." When such material is tempered for railway springs it has the following physical properties : " Elastic limit, lbs. per sq.in 160,000-180,000 Tensile ^strength, lbs. per sq.in. . . 190,000-230,000 Elongation in 2 inches 10-15% Reduction of area. 30-45% " This material possesses the highest physical properties of the steels yet used for commxCrcial purposes. Some recent tests, June, 191 5, reported by the American Vanadium Company, show excellent results for carbon- vanadium steel both in the natural condition of the vSpeci- mens and after simple annealing as well as after heat treat- ment, the latter yielding highest results generally, but not for ultimate resistance, the ductility, however, being dis- tinctly lower in the natural condition. The following table gives the results of the tests as well as the chemical analysis and treatment. The first six- sets of values belong to test specimens taken from 7 -inch and 11 -inch axles, w^hile the last three belong to specimens from connecting rods. TESTS OF CARBON-VANADIUM STEEL Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulphur Vanadium Chem. Analysis. . 0.47% • 0.90% 0.012% 0.020% 0.15% Art. 58.] EFFECT OF HIGH AND LOW TEMPERATURES. 333 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Treatment. Yield Elastic Ultimate Stretch Point Limit Resist. m 2 in. lbs. per lbs. per lbs. per Per- sq. m. sq. m. sq. m. cent. 71,200 68,000 123,000 16.0 56,000 52,000 90,000 24.0 85,000 82,000 112,500 22.0 75,000 70,000 117,000 16.0 58,000 54,000 94,000 22.0 87,000 80,000 115,000 20.5 92,000 85,000 131,000 17.0 71.500 67,000 105,000 235 92,500 86,000 123,000 20.5 Reduc- tion of Area Per- cent. Natural Annealed 1450° F O. Q. 1600; T. 1160° F Natural Annealed 1450° F O. Q. 1600; T. 1160° F Natural xA.nnealed 1450° F O. Q. 1600; T. 1160° F 30.0 50.0 550 28.5 47 52.0 44.0 52.0 50.0 Effect of Low and High Temperatures on Steel. There has been much difference of opinion expressed upon the effect of low temperature upon steel, especially upon steel rails. The high number of breakages in steel rails during the winter, particularly in the early days of the use of steel for such a purpose, has given the impression that low temperatures in the vicinity of zero degrees F., or lower, make steel brittle and hence subject to sudden fracture without warning in the cold weather of winter. This impression has been shown to be without material foundation in rails of the best quality, but phosphorus makes iron and steel " cold short." If, therefore, there should be a sufficient amount of phosphorus present steel or iron would undoubtedly become more liable to fracture at low tem.peratures. In the early days of rail making, when the constituent elements were not so carefully con- trolled as at present, it is highly probable if not practically certain that the presence of phosphorus accounted for many breakages at low temperatures. For many years, however, 334 TENSION. [Ch. VII. the effects of the prejudicial hardeners phosphorus and sulphur have been well recognized and they have been kept so low as to have no material effect upon the finished products. Again, frozen ground in the winter adds somewhat to the rigidity of a roadbed, enhancing to some extent the effects of shocks or blows to which rails are subjected under rapidly moving heavy train loads. Some of the increased breakages in the winter are probably due to this cause and it is possible that a great majority of them may be ac- counted for in this way. On the whole the latest experiences do not seem to indicate that with the excellent quality of steel now pro- duced for engineering purposes the effects of low tempera- tures are at all serious, but that they may be ignored when suitable precautions are taken in the processes of manu- facture. The effect of high temperature, on the other hand, is a matter of some concern in connection with building con- struction, since the ultimate carrying capacity of iron or steel may be seriously affected or even destroyed by the high temperatures of conflagrations unless the supporting members are protected against the effects of intense heat. Figs. 3 and 4 represent the results of investigations by Prof. R. C. Carpenter, formerly of Cornell University, who made tensile tests on wrought iron and steel circular speci- mens .5 inch in diameter. Fig. 3 is self-explanatory. It ' shows the graphical relation between the temperatures of the specimens and the ultimate tensile resistance per ^square inch. The ductility represented by the final elongations or stretches in 8 inches at the corresponding temperatures of rupture are exhibited in Fig. 4. Art. 58.] STEEL. 335 Prof. Carpenter observes " that all the curves have a point of contrafiexure at about 70° F., and another at a temperature not far from 500°. The maximum strength is found at temperatures c-f zi.oo° to 550°. At LBS. , ^<'^'^3 ^ 1 in nni\ XoO ^ " < c ^/ X TOC L SI ^EEL o".7o TOO L SI X EEL I / V . c > c Xn \ \ / X \ V A ) V "^ f^ II 0.25 ■ K'O 300^ 500° TEMPERATURE OF SPECIMEN, DEGREES F. 700° 900 Fig. 4 or wire. The hardening process consists in heating the steel to such temperature as may be desired to accomplish a given purpose and then quenching in water, brine, oil, molten lead, or other proper bath. The temperature from which the quenching is done m.ay be that indicated Art. 58.] STEEL. 337 by an orange color; it depends upon the size or character of grain of metal desired. In general terms, the higher the content of carbon, the more marked will be the re- sults of the hardening processes. Quenching has a com- paratively small effect upon low or medium structural feteel. Tlie process of tempering is, in reality, supplementary to the process of hardening in the manner just described. After a piece of steel has been hardened by quenching so that its temperature is that of the air, if it be again heated it will exhibit different colors as the temperature is increased. The first noticeable color will be a light delicate straw, then deep straw, light brown, dark brown, brownish blue, called "pigeon wing," light bluish, light brilliant blue, dark blue, and black, after which the temper is completely remioved. The preceding colors are due to thin films of oxide that form on the exterior surfaces of the pieces as the temperature increases. When this heating is stopped at any color and the steel allowed to cool, the metal is said to be drawn to the temper shown by the corresponding color. The tempers at different colors for different processes are sometimes stated as follows: Light straw For lathe-tools, files, etc. Straw " " " " " Light brown " taps, reamers, drills, etc. Darker brown " " " " " Pigeon wing " axes, hatchets, and some tools. Light blue " springs. Dark blue " some springs, occasionally. Tempering or hardening increases both the elastic limit and ultimate resistance, but decreases the ductility. 33^ TENSION. [Ch. VII. Annealing. The processes of annealing, like those of hardening and tempering, produce more marked results in the higher steels than in the lower. Steel has a sensibly varying density at different temperatures; in other words, a given weight of metal will occupy sensibly different volumes at different temperatures. Hence if a piece of steel be subjected to any operation, such as forging, which gives to different portions concurrently widely varying tem- peratures, those portions will necessarily be subjected to considerable intensities of internal stresses, and if those stresses are not rem^oved they may reduce greatly both the ultimate resistance and ductility. In the higher grades of steel and in special steels it is, therefore, impera- tive to anneal members which have been subjected to such operations. These observations are specially perti- nent to such high steels as those adapted to the manufacture of tools or other similar purposes. In general it is neces- sary in structural engineering practice to resort to anneal- ing only in the case of eye -bars, or other members which have been subjected to the operations of forging. The process consists simply in heating the member to be annealed to about a cherry-red temperature until the piece is heated through, and then allowing it to cool grad- ually to a normal temperature. At the cherry-red heat the metal is sufficiently softened to allow the molecules to readjust their relative positions so as to remove the internal stresses. After the operation of cooling is com- pleted the metal will be at least approximately, if not entirely, in a condition of no internal stresses, i.e., if the annealing has been properly done. The more gradually and uniformly the cooling is accomplished the more ex- cellent will be the results. Sometimes resort is made to Art. 58.] STEEL. 339 such specia.l means to accomplish these ends as covering the members, after bringing them to a proper temperature, with sand, ashes, or other similar material, to insure a slow and uniform cooling. The preceding tables show what is alwa^^s found in a comparison of results for the natural and the an- nealed metal. The process of annealing will diminish the ultimate resistance of structural steel in general from about 4,000 to 6,000 or 8,000 pounds per square inch, and the elastic limit will be reduced correspondingly. These effects will be found more marked as the metal is finished between the rolls at lower temperatures. In general, steel which is hardened by the conditions of manufacture, like that of comparatively low temperature in rolling, will exhibit greater decreases of ultimate resist- ance and elastic limit under annealing. The process of annealing increases the ductility of the steel, since it softens the metal. In spite of the re- duction in ultimate resistance and elastic limit, therefore, the operation gives a valuable quality to the steel. Effect of Manipulations Common to Constructive Processes; Also Punched, Drilled and Reamed Holes. The shop treatment of steel must in some respects be peculiar to that metal and different from that which characterizes the manufacture of wrought-iron bridge mem- bers. While the processes of punching and shearing may not be vSpecially injurious to comparatively thin plates and shapes of low steel and of the lower carbon grades of mild steel (perhaps up to a limit of 65,000 pounds per square inch) they are sufficiently injurious to heavier sections and to the higher grades of steel to necessitate the avoidance of their effects. If punches and dies are kept in good sharp condition, as they should be, the prejudicial effects are 340 TENSION. [Ch. VII. lessened. The effect of a punch, however, under the best conditions of operation is not to make a smooth-sheared surface, but one of somewhat ragged or serrated character in which incipient cracks are started and which may be continued indefinitely into the interior of the metal unless some curative procedure is employed. It has been found by actual test that the region affected by the punch or by the jaw of the shear extends but a short distance from, the cutting-edge of the tool. Within that region, however, the metal is much hardened and the loss of ductility and elevation of elastic limit is due to that hardening. The decreased ultimate resistance is probably due to the violent disturbance of the molecules and the resulting minute fissures in the metal within the same region. In riveted work, the prejudicial effect is therefore removed by reaming the punched hole to a diameter about I inch larger than made by the punch. This removes a thin ring of injured metal about -^ of an inch thick, and it is found sufficient for the purpose. In large and heavy work it has come to be the practice by the best shops to make drilled holes in. which cases no question of the injury of metal can arise. The use of the drill leaves a sharp edge at each surface of the plate which tends to produce a shearing effect upon the corresponding rivet sections. Some specifications require this to be over- come by a quick application of a proper tool to remove the sharp edge. The general effects of the cutting edge of the shear are precisely the same as those of the punch, as the opera- tion in each case is a shear. Hence, if sheared edges are planed off to a depth of one-sixteenth to one-eighth of an inch, the injured metal will be entirely removed. The hardening effects of both shearing and punching may also be removed by the process of annealing, although Art. 58.] STEEL. ■ 341 less effectually than by reaming and planing. As naturally would be inferred by experience in punching, higher steel and thicker plates are more injuriously affected by shear- ing than low steels and thinner plates. In consequence of the irregular edge of a large sheared plate, bridge specifications frequently require that at least one-quarter of an inch of metal shall be removed from the edge of such plates by planing. Steel seems to be very sensitive to the effects of hammer- ing or working at what is termed a " blue heat." Con- sequently it is necessary to heat the rivet to such a tem- perature as will enable the operation of heading to be completed before the rivet cools to the blue stage. A bright red or yellow heat is requisite for good work, and the rivet should be held under a pressure of fifty or sixty tons per square inch of the shaft section until the metal has timxC to flow throughout the rivet length and thus completely fill the hole, otherwise the upsetting will be complete at and in the vicinity of the rivet -heads only. An additional advantage in holding the rivet under the greatest pressure of the riveter for a short time is the fact that the rivet becomes cool enough to prevent the separation of the plates. The forging of steel requires unusual skill and ex- perience. When a piece has been heated to a proper temperature it should be kept under work tmtil it has fallen in temperature to a proper point to secure all the advantages of working, but of course not below red heat. The forging should be done with a hammer whose weight is suitably proportionate to the mass to be forged. If the hammer is too light, the result will be a surface effect only, with the interior but little changed. Pressure forging, with appropriate facihties for attaining great pressures, is probably capable of producing the best results. 342 TENSION. [Ch. VII. The operation of annealing, particularly as applied to full-size bars, is one of great importance in the manu- facture of structural steelwork. The metal is heated as tmiformly as possible, so that tmdue stresses will not be developed, to a bright cheny-red, corresponding probably to about iioo or 1200 degrees Fahr., and then allowed to cool gradually. By this means any internal stresses that may have been produced by the process of forging, or any other shop manipulation, are eliminated. The metal is sufficient^ softened at the highest temperature to allow the molecules to adjust themselves to a condition of essentially no stress, and if the cooling is gradual the internal stresses will not be re-developed . Change of Ultimate Resistance, Elastic Limit and Modulus of Elasticity by Rete sting. It has been observed from the earliest experiences in testing steel and wrought iron that if a piece of material be subjected to an intensity of tensile stress higher than the elastic limit, thus producing permanent stretch, the ultimate resistance will be materially increased, although the duc- tility is generally decreased. Sufficient investigation has not even yet been undertaken to gage the full significance of such phenomena, but enough has been done to show some important results. It is yet uncertain whether an indefinitely long rest may not diminish to some extent at least the enhanced ultimate resistance of a piece of metal stressed beyond the elastic limit. Professor Bauschinger made some investigations in this special field many years ago which indicate that the elastic limit is considerably decreased by immediate retest- ing, but that such a decrease does not take place if a period of at least twenty -four hours or possibly more elapses before retesting. Some tests indicate that the elastic limit ]Art. 58. STEEL. 343 may be much increased even by suitable periods of rest between applications of loading. The yield point appears to be raised materially by re- testing, and the same observation as already indicated is equally applicable to the ultimate resistance. Fracture of Steel. The character of steel fractures has been incidentally noticed, in some cases, in the different tables. If the steel is low, or if some of the higher grades are thoroughly annealed, the fracture is fine and silky, pro- vided the breakage is produced gradually. In other cases the fracture is partly granular and partly silky, or wholly granular. In any case a sudden breakage may produce a granular fracture. The Effects of Chemical Elements on the Physical Qualities of Steel. Anything more than a meagre statement of the influ- ence of the chemical composition of steel on its physical properties is obviously out of place here, but a knowledge, however slight it may be, of the influence of certain ele- ments on those properties is so essential to the engineer in his structural work that attention should at least be called to it. Although other elements exert highly important influ- ences upon the resisting qualities of steel, carbon is tin- doubtedly the most prominent hardener. The effect of a given percentage of carbon, at least within certain rather wide limits, is to give greater toughness and resist- ing qualities to steel with less concurrent brittleness than any other contained element. It is made, therefore, the basis of classification of structural steel, the low steels being low in carbon and the high steels high in carbon. 344 TENSION. [Ch. VII. The metal manganese also gives to steel some advan- tageous qualities. At the present time it seldom enters steel to an amount less than .5 per cent., nor more than about I per cent. Its presence seems to confer the capacity of resisting the effects of high temperatures in shop pro- cesses. Metal low in phosphorus and sulphur appears to require less manganese than that which is higher in. those impurities. It has been found that the influence of manganese upon steel depends in a rather extraordinary manner upon its amount. If the content reaches 1.5 or 2 per cent, steel becomes practically worthless on account of its brittleness, but when a content of 6 or 7 per cent, of manganese is reached, the metal becomies extremely hard and acquires to a high degree the property of toughness by quenching in water without becoming much harder. When steel is alloyed with more than about 7 per cent, of manganese, manganese -steel is the product, which, in its natural state, may have an ultimate tensile resist- ance running from 74,000 to OA^er 116,000 pounds per square inch. When quenched in water the ultimate tensile resistance of the same mictal mxay run from about 90,000 pounds per square inch up to nearly 137,000 pounds per square inch. Before quenching the final stretch ranged from i to 4 or 5 per cent., and after quenching from 4 to 44 per cent. The preceding figures belong to a range in manganese from about 7 per cent, to over 19 per cent, concurrently with carbon from about .61 per cent, up to 1.83 per cent. This metal is an interesting alloy, but is never used in structural engineering work. Opinions vary much as to the influence of silicon on steel, but it seems now to be well established that that influence within the limits ordinarily found is of minor consequence, or at least not prejudicial to either Art. 58.] STEEL. 345 resistance or ductility. In structural steel it usually ranges from less than .03 to .05 per cent., while in rail steel it may run as high as .3 per cent. In some excellent tool-steel it may run even from .2 to .75 per cent. Sulphur is an impurity carrying with it highly preju- dicial effects. It essentially injures metal for rolling, as it makes the steel liable to crack and tear at the usual temperatures found between the rolls. It also diminishes capacity to weld. Its effects may, to some extent, be overcome b}^ the presence of manganese and by proper care in heating. It is, however, highly prejudicial as an element and is usually kept below about .04 per cent. Of all the objectionable elements found in steel, phos- phorus has the position of prim.acy. Although it is a hardener which may increase the ultimate resistance to som.e extent, it produces brittleness and diminishes most materially the capacity to resist shock, and it is one of the chief purposes of the best methods of steel production to reduce phosphorus to the lowest practicable limit. Its effects are sometimes erratic, being occasionally found in excess in apparently good material. In structural steel it is seldom permitted to nm over .08 per cent., and in the basic processes of manufacture it frequently falls to .03 or .04 per cent. The presence of .1 to .25 per cent, copper appears to have no deleterious eft'ect upon steel and may even be beneficial. As high as i per cent, of copper has been foimd in steel without serious effects where sulphur was low. Aluminum steel is an alloy containing at times as high as 5 to 6 per cent, of aluminum. The effect of alumi- num on ultimate resistance does not seem to be prejudicial, nor, again, is it of any special advantage; nor does it act seriously upon the ductility until its amount approaches 346 TENSION. [Ch. VII. about 2 per cent, or more. On the whole it does not seem to be a valuable element for steel. There are other special alloys such as tungsten and chromium steel. They are used for the special pj'^rposes of tools on account of their hardness, which is so extreme that neither quenching nor tempering is required. They do not, however, enter into structural use. Art. 59. — Copper, Tin, Aluminum, and Zinc, and their Alloys — Alloys of Aluminum — Phosphor-bronze — Magnesium. Anything like a complete knowledge of the physical properties of the alloys of copper, tin, aluminum, zinc, etc., is still lacking, although many investigations have been made in the past by the late Prof. R. H. Thurston and others, while other investigations are still in progress. The character of many of these alloys changes so radically for different proportions of the constituent elements and under different conditions of heat and other treatment that the results of tests are as varied as the relative amounts of the constituents and the physical conditions which attend the tests. Some of the results which follow belong to the earlier work of Prof. Thurston, but as they exhibit the same physical qualities as the corresponding alloys now used and as the later investigations do not cover the same field, they possess real value and are retained. Table I gives the tensile coefficients of elasticity {E) of copper and the alloys indicated as determined by Prof. Thurston. Table I. Metal. Authority. Remarks. Gun-bronze. . Alloy Alloy Tobin's alloy. Copper Thurston i 11,468,000 Copper, 0.90; tin, o.io (nearly). " 13,514,000 Copper, 0.80; zinc, 0.20. " I 14,286,000 Copper, 0.625; zinc, 0.375. " I 4,545,000 Composition, below table. " ■ I 9,091,000 Cast metal Art. 59. COPPER, TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC. 347 Tobin's alloy is a composition of copper, tin, and zinc, in the proportions (very nearly) of 58.2, 2.3, and 39.5, respectively. The value of E for this metal, and those for the two preceding and one following it, are calculated for small stresses and strains given by Prof. Thurston in the " Trans. Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs.," for Sept., 1881. There will also be found in Tables VIII, IX, X and XI coefficients of elasticity for alumiinum-zinc, aluminum magnesium, and other alloys, and for magnesium, alumi- num, and zinc. Table II. CAST TIN. p- E. ; p- E. 1,950 2,360 2,580 3,147,000 472,000 172,000 3,200 4,000 Broke at 96,400 41,540 4,200 lbs. Table III. CAST COPPER. p- E. p. E. 800 2,000 4,000 8,000 10,000,000 9,091,000 9,091,000 14,815,000 12,000 13,600 16,000 22,000 18,750,000 8,193,000 2,235,000 137,000 Broke at 29,200 lbs. The values of E (stress over strain) for different inten- sities of stress (pounds per square inch) for cast tin, cast copper, and Tobin's alloy, are given in Tables II, III, and IV. 348 TENSION. [Ch. VIT. " /?'* is the intensity of stress in pounds per square inch, at which the ratio E exists. Each of these metals is seen to give a very irregular elastic behavior. Tables TI, III, and IV are computed from data given by Prof. Thurston in the United States Report (page 425) and " Trans. Am. Soc. Civ. Engrs.," already cited. Table IV. TOBIN'S ALLOY. p- E. P- E. 2,000 4,545,000 18,000 5,455,000 4,000 4,545,000 24,000 5,941,000 6,000 4,088,000 30,000 6,250,000 8,000 4,938,000 40,000 6,390,000 10,000 5,263,000 50,000 4,744,000 14,000 5,110,000 60,000 3,436,000 Broke at 67,600 lbs. Ultimate Resistance and Elastic Limit. Table V is abstracted from the results of the experi- ments of Prof. Thurston as given in the " Report of the U. S. Board Appointed to Test Iron, Steel, and other ^letals," and *' Trans. Am. Soc. of Civ. Engrs.," Sept., 1 88 1. The composition of the various alloys was as given in the table, which also contains results for pure copper, tin, and zinc. All the specimens were of cast metal. The mechanical properties of the copper-tin-zinc alloys have been very thoroughly investigated by Prof. Thurston ("Trans. Am. Soc. of Civ. Engrs.," Jan. and Sept., 1881). As results of his work he has found that the ultimate Art. 59. COPPER, TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC, Table V. 349 Percentage of Pounds Stress per Square Inch at Per Cent., Fina^ Cupper. Tin. Zinc. Elastic Limit. Ultimate Resistance. Stretch. Contrac- tion. 100 100 100 90 80 70 62 52 39 29 21 10 00 00 00 Gun 90 80 62.5 58.2 100 90.56 81.91 71 . 20 60.94 58.49 49.66 41-30 32.94 20.81 10.30 0.0 70.0 57-50 45-0 66 2=; 00 00 00 10 20 30 38 48 61 71 79 90 100 Queensl'd 100 Banca 100 Bronze 10 00 00 2-3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 8. 75 21.25 23-75 23-75 2.30 50.00 10.00 20.00 00 00 00 ' 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 37-5 39-5 0.0 9.42 17.99 28.54 38.65 41 . 10 50.14 58.12 66.23 77-63 88.88 100.00 20.25 21.25 31.25 10.00 39-48 40.00 30.00 15.00 11,620 11,000 14,400 15,740 19,872 12,760 . 27,800 26,860 32,980 5,585 688 2,555 2,820 1,648 4,337 6,450 3,500 2,760 3,500 31,000 33,140 48,760 67,600 29,200 0.05 0.005 0.065 0.037 0.004 10. 8.0 150 13-5 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 00.0 15-0 75-0 5,585 . 688 2,555 2,820 0.07 0.36 3,500 1,670 2,000 10,000 , 0.36 4-6 32.4 31.0 4-0 7-5 47 86.0 29 -5 8.0 16.0 10,000 9,000 16,470 27,240 16,890 3,727 1,774 9,000 14,450 4,050 18,000 (?) 1,300 2,196 3.294 30,000 (?) 5,000 (?) 21,780 (?) 32,670 30,510 41,065 50,450 30,990 3,727 1,774 9,000 14,450 5,400 31,600 1,300 2,196 3,294 66,500 9,300 21,780 3.765 31-4 29.2 20.7 10. 1 50 43 38.0 28.0 17.0 11-5 0. 16 039 0.69 0.36 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 58.22 10.00 60.00 65.00 3-13 0.7 0.15 7.0 0.0 0.0 3 so TENSION. Table V. — Continued. [Ch. VII. Percentage of Pounds Stress per Square Inch at Per Cent., Final Copper. Tin. Zinc. Elastic Limit. Ultimate Resistance. Stretch. Contrac- tion. 70.00 75.00 80.00 55 00 60.00 72.50 77-50 85.00 10.00 5-00 10.00 0.50 2.50 7.50 12.5 12.5 20.00 20.00 10.00 44 50 37-50 2.00 10.00 2.50 24,ooo(?) I2,000(?) I2,000(?) 22,000 22,000 1 1 ,000 20,000 I2,000(?) 33,140 34.960 32,830 68,900 57,400 32,700 36,000 34,500 0.31 3-2 1.6 9-4 4.9 3-7 0.7 1.3 5-4 4.0 25.0 6.6 II. 0.0 30 The. values of the elastic limit in the lower part of the table were not at all well defined. tensile resistance, in pounds per square inch, of " ordinary bronze, composed of copper and tin, as cast in the ordinary course of a brassfounder's business," may be well represented by T^ = 30,000 + I ,oooi( ; ** where t is the percentage of tin and not above 15 per cent." " For brass (copper and zinc) the tenacity may be taken as: 7^ = 30,000 + 500.^, where z is the percentage of zinc and not above 50 per cent." He found that a large portion of the copper-tin -zinc alloys is worthless to the engineer, while the other, or valuable portion, may be considered to possess a tenacity, in pounds per square inch, well represented by combining the above formulae as follows: Tzf = 30,000 + 1 ,000/ -f 5000. These formulae are not intended to be exact, but to Art. 59.] COPPER, TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC 351 give safe results for ordinary use within the limits of the circumstances on which they are based. Prof. Thurston found the " strongest of the bronzes" to be composed of: Copper o 55 .0 Tin 0.5 Zinc 44. 5 100.00 This alloy possessed an ultimate tensile resistance of 68,900 pounds per square inch of original section, an elongation of 47 to 51 per cent, and a final contraction of fractured section of 47 to 52 per cent. The first and sixth alloys of copper, tin, and zinc, in Table V, are called by Professor Thurston ''Tobin's alloy." " This alloy, like the maximum metal, was capable of being forged or rolled at a low red heat or worked cold. Rolled hot, its tenacity rose to 79,000 poimds, and when moderately and carefully rolled, to 104,000 potmds. It could be bent double either hot or cold, and was found to make excellent bolts and nuts." As just indicated for the particular case of the Tobin alloy, the mianner of treating and working these alloys exerts great influence on the tenacity and ductility. Professor Thurston states: "brass, containing copper 62 to 70, zinc 38 to 30, attains a strength in the wire mill of 90,000 pounds per square inch, and somj.etimes of 100,000 poimds." All of Professor Thurston's specimens were what may be called "long" ones, i.e., they were turned down to a diameter of 0.798 inch for a length of five inches, giving an area of cross-section of 0.5 square inch. 35^ TENSION. [Chrvil. Alloys of Aluminum. Prof. R. C. Carpenter, of Cornell University, in the transactions of the Am. Soc. Mech. Engrs., vol. xix, has reported a ntimber of interesting and valuable tests of alloys of aluminum, as well as tests of pure magnesium. Table VI . ALLOYS OF GREATEST RESISTANCE. Percentage of Ultimate Resistance, Lbs. per Square Inch. Specific Gravity. Per Cent, of Aluminum. Copper. Tin. Final Stretch. 85. 6.25 5. 7-5 87-5 5- 7-5 6.25 90. 30,000 63,000 11,000 3.02 7-35 6.82 4- 3.8 10. 1 The greater part of the results for t?ie aluminum-tin- copper alloys are given in Table VII, but the composition of those giving the greatest ultimate resistances are ex- hibited in Table VI. It will be observed that the highest ultimate resistance belongs to the alloy of greatest density but the alloy of least resistance has nearly as great density. The ductility of none of these alloys of greatest ultimate resistance is specially marked; indeed, the ductility is very low except in the case of the least ultimate resistance. The composition and corresponding elastic limits and ultimate resistances of aluminum-tin-copper alloys will be found in Table VII. Like all the aluminum alloys the specific gravity varies between wide limits, being low where there is much aluminum and high where there is little. The ductility is low in all cases except in that of pure tin or the alloy in which it appears to the extent of 90 per cent. There is in this table the usual wide range of physical qualities belonging to such a series of mixtures. Art. 59.] COPPER, TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC. 353 Table VII. ALUMINUM ALLOYS. Composition. Per Cent. Ultimate Resistance, by Weight. Lbs. per Square Inch. Elastic Limit, Lbs. per Square Inch. Specific Final Stretch Per Cen in 6 Gravity. Al. Tn. Cu. A, B. Inches. 100 90 27,000 40,815 28,330 42,038 12,000 13,832 6 s 6.5 4.0 5 5 7 6 10 10 80 32,209 34,200 24,829 6 5 0.8 20 20 60 1,966 2,225 * 5 7 30 30 40 849 1,077 * 5 05 40 40 20 4,800 5,672 * 4 91 100 15,000 14,316 6,432 2 67 82 5.6 3- 90 5 5 15,476 17,070 8,227 2 80 10 10 18,580 2 1 , 1 40 13.329 3 09 1.2 60 20 20 4,416 5,950 * 3 53 • 3 40 30 30 915 1,123 * 4 4 20 40 40 2,221 2,622 * 5 21 100 3,505 11,582 3,933 10,418 7 6 " 35.51 10. 15 5 90 5 4,823 77 10 80 10 5,999 5,922 2,988 6 24 I . I 20 60 20 1,198 1,200 * 5 55 30 40 30 993 , 961 * 4 96 40 20 40 3,798 3,997 * 4 48 A. Results of first melting, B. Results of second melting. Test pieces 6 in. between shoulders, diam. J inch. * Could not be turned in the lathe. The results in this table were obtained by Messrs. Geb- hardt and Ward, at the testing laboratory of Sibley Col- lege of Mechanical Engineering, Cornell University, in 1896. The physical properties of alurninnm-zinc alloys, in- cluding those metals unalloyed, are equally fully given in Table VIII, as well as the values of the coefficients of elasticity. There is not as wide variation of results in this table as in Table VII, although there is a considerable range of ultimate resistance, especially if the results for unalloyed zinc be included. It will be observed that this table also includes the intensity of stress found in 354 TENSION. [Ch. VII. Table VIII. ALUMINUM-ZINC ALLOYS. Percentage. Alumi- num. 90 90 85 85 80 80 75 75 70 65 60 60 50 50 25 25 Zinc. O o 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 30 30 33 35 40 40 50 50 75 75 Specific Gravity. 2 67 2 67 2 77 2 74 2 918 2 918 2 998 2 975 3 15 3 14 3 191 3 24 3 326 3 471 3 57 7.19 Ultimate Resist- ance, Lbs. per Sq. In. 14,460 16,750 17,940 18,100 21,850 22,940 24,400 23,950 19,770 19,300 19,060 13,175 14*150 2,522 Transverse Tests. Maximum Fibre Stress Lbs. per Sq. In. 14,500 14,150 18,950 28,091 34,600 45,080 43,200 41,200 40,350 38,100 39,850 25,500 7,556 Coeflficient of Elasticity. 6,535,000 7,710,000 9,260,000 9,110,000 8,210,000 8,178,000 8,540,000 8,500,000 8,670,000 6,680.000 Remarks. Shrinkage uneven. (I << Shrinkage uneven It (t Shrinkage even. Poor specimen. i Elongation of all the specimens less than I per cent. Note. — The experimental results given in Table IX are those of Messrs. Hunt and Andrews, obtained at Sibley College of Mechanical Engineering, Cornell University, in 1894. Table IX. TENSILE TESTS OF MAGNESIUM— CAST METAL. Number of Test Piece. Diameter. Ultimate Resistance, Lbs. per Square Inch. Elastic Limit, Lbs. per Square Inch. Final Extension, Per Cent. Coefficient of Elasticity. I •433 .433 .442 ■ 435 .424 •432 23,800 22,050 20,900 19,500 24,800 ■22,500 8,800 4-2 2,040,000 2 T, 860,000 3 4 5 6 10,780 8,400 7,090 1.8 2.5 31 2.3 2,060,000 1,830,000 1,930,000 Art. 59.1 COPPER, TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC. 355 Table X. ALLOYS OF ALUMINUM AND MAGNESIUM Number of Test Piece. Percentage of Magnesium. Specific Gravity. Ultimate Resistance, Lbs. per Square Inch. Elastic Limit, Lbs. per Square Inch. Coefficient of Elasticity. I 2 5 10 30 2.67 2.62 2.59 2.55 2. 29 13,685 15,440 17,850 19,680 5,000 4,900 8,700 13,090 14,600 1,690,000 2,650,000 2,917,000 2,650,000 2 '3. 4 c , . the extreme fibres of beams subjected to transverse load- ing. Although these values are not required at this point, it is more convenient to insert them here and refer to them in the article devoted to the flexure of such beams. The sizes of tlie specimens subjected to transverse load- ing are not given, but they Vv^ere small. Table XL Character of Alloys. Resistance, Pounds per Square Inch. 6 ComposiLlcn and Remarks. Tension. Transverse. Al. Cu. Tin. Elastic. Ulti- mate. Elastic. Ulti- mate. I 2 3 /o 100 93 75.7 07 /o % 4,000 6,250 12,055 18,555 35,075 2,.345 9,000 t^ 7 3 25,250 23,420 6 20% zinc, 1.3 man. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 100 100 98 98 96 96 96.5 I inch bars. ...... f " " 12,500 17,185 17,154 18,870 13,720 18,870 22,300 30,880 26,313 i 2 2 4 4 2 I " " f " " 9,000 18,647 S I " " 3 «< i< 16,000 23,045 i|% chromium. 19,000 26,310 II 12 13 14 15 98 96 94 92 90 2 4 6 8 10 2,150 2,400 2,250 2,000 1,750 8,622 9,565 9,315 7,270 7,352 . H >, S3 0^ 356 TENSION. [Ch. Vli. The experimental results given in Tables IX and X were also established at the testing laboratory of Sibley College of Mechanical Engineering of Cornell University. The tests were made by Messrs. Marks and Barraclough, graduate students in 1893. Table IX gives results for pure magnesium, including the coefficients of elasticity and the final stretch, while Table X exhibits the results for alloys of aluminum and magnesium, the per cent, of magnesium being shov/n in one of the columns, the remaining per cent, being aluminum. The ultimate resist- ances given in Table IX show that magnesium is a metal of considerable tensile resistance, especially in comparison with its density, its specific gravity being but 1.74, that of aluminum being 2.67. Table XI exhibits the elastic limits and ultimate Table XL — Continued. Final, stretch Per Cent. (Tension Pieces). Final Contraction, Per Cent. (Tension Pieces). Hardness (Relative). specific Gravity of specimen. Coefficient of Elasticity. Lbs. per Square Inch. Ten- sion. Trans- verse. Tension. Transverse. 5.62 I. GO .15 iO.93 3.08 1.77 3.61 12.87 35.56 2.670 2 . 830 3II7 2.654 2.810 3.055 8,385.000 11,115,000 9,685,000 8,440,000 8,065,000 8,060,000 8.49 38.30 7.12 6.94 6.79 12.30 12 .42 13.35 14.09 2.710 2.715 2.725 2 .756 2.774 2.773 2.759 9,780,000 10,110,000 10,000,000 10,330,000 Q 600 000 19.49 39.02 9,505,000 3.62 10.10 10,440,000 10,595,000 10,070,000 9,813,000 I-3I 9.78 9,850,000 4.00 5.38 5.19 3.06 3.87 8.64 6.86 7-97 5.41 8.89 3-71 3.74 3-49 3-33 3.09 2 . 689 2.739 2.771 2.804 2.856 5,435,000 6,210,000 5,035,000 5,175,000 6,675,000 Art. 59.] COPPER TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC. 357 resistances of all the different alloys shown in the table, and in the conditions also exhibited by the table, i.e., whether cast or rolled. There are also given coefficients of elasticity for both tension and transverse tests, as well as elastic limits' and ultimate stresses (intensities) in the extreme . fibres of small beams, to which reference will be made in the article devoted to transverse resistance. It will be observed that both the elastic hmits and the ultimate resistances of Table XI are found within the range exhibited by the results already shown in the preceding tables. If desired, diagrams can readily be constructed from the results of each table which will show the variations of physical quantities corresponding to the variations of composition of the alloys. In 1895 the Fairbanks Company tested at their New York office four specimens of Tobin bronze manufactured by the Ansonia Brass and Copper Co., with the following results. ROLLED TOBIN BRONZE PLATES— SPECIMENS 8 INCHES LONG. Specimen, Inches. Resistance in Pounds per Sq. Inch. Per Cent., Final Elastic. Ultimate. Stretch. Contraction. 1X.185 1X.185 1X.25 1X.25 51,350 51,350 56,000 56.450 78,920 78,810 79,200 79,640 20.5 17-5 17.5 16.25 45-4 44.33 43.2 40.72 Alloys of Aluminum and Copper. In 1907, Prof. H. C. H. Carpenter, M.A., Ph.D., and Mr. C. A. Edwards, made their Eighth Report on alloys of aluminum and copper to the Alloys Research Committee of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers of Great Britain. 358 TENSION. [Ch. VII. This alloy is known as ** aluminum bronze " or " gold." These investigators made over a thousand tests in tension and torsion and in other ways, including heat treatment for both cast and rolled material, The investigation is one of the most important ever made with this class of alloys. Out of the great number of tests contained in the report, Table XII has been selected as sufficiently typical for the purpose of conveying a correct impression of the character of the work done. Table XII. The percentage of aluminum only is given in the Table, as the alloy is of aluminum and copper, the remaining percentage being copper. Al. Yield Point Ult. Resist. -p Elongation No. per cent. lbs. per sq. in. lbs. per sq. ^^ in. atio. in 2 inches per cent. I O.I 8,512 25,760 33 46 2 I o6 6,720 30,020 22 52 3 2 I 7,616 30,240 25 53-5 4 2 99 8,512 32,480 26 60 5 4 05 7,840 37,410 21 83 6 5 07 9.632 40,540 24 75 7 5 76 10,752 39,870 27 67 8 6 73 10,752 41,780 26 9 7 35 14,784 47,710 31 71 10 8 12 17,248 55,800 31 58 II 8 67 21,952 62,944 35 48 12 9 38 21,728 68,050 32 36.2 13 9 9 25,312 71,010 36 21.7 14 10 78 31,584 59,750 48 9.0 15 II 73 31,360 56,960 55 5 i6 13 02 44,240 44,240 . . . I t^'t, t" It will be observed that the specimens were of cast, metal. While the rolled specimens give somewhat higher ductility, in the main there is much less difference than would probably have been anticipated. Although the elastic ratio, i.e., the ratio of the elastic limit over the ultimate, is somewhat higher for the rolled specimens, the difference on the whole is not great, except in a compara- Art. 59.1 COPPER, TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC. 359 tively few instances. In fact, the differences in results found by the investigators between the cast and rolled metal are much smaller than might have been expected. The authors of the report state, among other obser- vations : " (a) The limit of industrially serviceable alloys must be placed at 11 per cent, of aluminum. For most purposes the limit might be put at 10 per cent., beyond which there is a rapid fall of ductility with no rise of ultimate resist- ance. . . . " (b) Between these limits the alloys fall into two classes: i. those containing from o to 7.35 per cent, of aluminum: 2. Those containing from 8 to 11 per cent, of aluminum. Class i represents material of apparently low yield point and moderate ultimate stress, but of very good ductility. The introduction and further addition of alumi- num causes a gradual increase of strength but hardly affects the ductility. It is true that as regards the steadiness of the ductility this has only been establivshed for the rolled bars. But the sand and chill castings have shown the same kind of variations as the rolled bars in all the properties examined. . . . " Into Class 2 come alloys of relatively low yield point but good ultimate stress. From 8 to 10 per cent, of alumi- num the ductility is also good. ..." To gain an adequate idea of the physical properties of the various grades of this alloy of aluminum and copper requires a full scrutiny of the entire report. Bronzes and Brass Used by the Board of Water Supply of New York City. In the construction of the Additional Catskill Water Supply for the city of New York by the Board of Water Sup- ply a large amount of bronze castings and rolled bronze, as -,6o TENSION. [Ch. VII. well as brass, was used for a great variety of large and small articles varying from a number of tons in weight each to a few pounds, such as small bolts. The specifications prescribed that " Whenever the term. ' bronze ' is used in these Specifications in a general way or on the drawings, without qualification, it shall mean manganese or vanadium bronze or monel metal. . . . " The minimum physical properties of bronze shall, except as otherwise specified, be as follows: Castings: Ultimate tensile strength 65,000 lbs. per sq.in. Yield point 32,000 lbs. per sq.in. Elongation 25 per cent. Rolled Material: Ultimate strength 72,000 lbs. per sq.in. Yield point 36,000 lbs. per sq.in. Elongation 28 per cent. Rolled material, thickness above one inch: Ultimate strength 70,000 lbs. per sq.in. Yield point 35,000 lbs. per sq.in. Elongation 28 per cent." The modulus of elasticity E for tension and compression was about 14,000,000. The requirements of these specifications were even exceeded both in resistances and in ductility. Much trouble, how^ever, was experienced by the rolled metal exhibiting cracks and failures in articles large and small, in many cases even before put in place in the w^ork and subjected to duty. vSuch difficulties, however, were not experienced in castings. Investigations intended to discover the origin of these difficulties have not yet been completed, but they are prob- ably due to some feature of manipulation of material during Art. 59.1 COPPER, TIN, ALUMINUM, ZINC, ETC. 361 processes of manufacture, including the treatment of the molten metal. Phosphor-Bronze . Phosphor-bronze possesses merit not only as a structural material on account of its high elastic limit and ultimate resistance, but also because it is a good anti-friction metal. Its elastic limit may be taken from 45,000 to 55,000 pounds per square inch and its iiltimate resistance from 50,000 to 75,000 pounds per square inch, both values being given for' unannealed material. The same material as unc^nnealed wire with a diameter of one-tenth to one-sixteenth of an inch may give ultimate resistances var^dng from 100,000 to 150,000 pounds per square inch, or if annealed not more perhaps than 50,000 to 60,000 per square inch. In the latter case, however, the final stretch may run from 3 c to 40 per cent. Bauschinger s Tests of Copper and Brass as to Effects of Repeated Application of Stress. The late Professor Bauschinger made some investiga- tions regarding the effect on elastic limit and yield point of repeated application of loading similar to those made on steel and wrought iron. The grade of brass used in his tests was called " red brass." With the exception of one case of brass the elastic limit and the yield point were both materially elevated by repeated application of loading, whether the repetition was made without a period of rest between two consecutive applications or not. Some repetitions were made immedi- ately and some after periods of 17I to 53 hours of rest. The effect on the modulus of elasticity was small and irregular, i.e., in some cases there was a small increase and 362 TENSION. [Ch. VII. in others a small decrease and in some cases no material change. Art. 60. — Cement, Cement Mortars, etc. — Brick. The ultimate tensile resistance of cements and cement mortars depends upon many conditions. The two great divisions of cements, i.e., natural and Portland, possess very different ultimate resistances whether neat or mixed with sand, the latter being much the stronger. With given proportions of sand or neat, the ultimate resistances of cement mortar or cement will vary with the amount of water, used in tempering and with the pressure under which the moulds are filled. Again, the character of the sand used will obviously influence largely the tensile resistance of the mortar produced, and not only the degree of cleanliness, but the size of grain and the variety of sizes are elements which must be considered. It has also been maintained by some that silica-sand will give better results, other things being equal, than other sand. Finally, the shape of briquette used will affect the results to some extent. Fig. i, on page 370, shows the form of briquette recommended by the Committee of the American Society of Civil Engineers, and it is the form generally used in American practice. It is foreign to the purpose of this work to enter into the consider- ation of all these influences; they are ^ only mentioned to enable the few typical experimental results which follow to be interpreted properly. • As the fineness of grinding is an important quality of a cement, it is usually noted by stating the percentage of weight of tlie cement which either passes through or is retained ux.>on a sieve having a stated number of meshes per linear inch, which number squared gives the number of meslies per square inch. The sizes of the grains of sand Art. 60.] CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK. 363 used are graded in the same way. The " No." of a sieve to which reference may be made in what follows indicates, therefore, the number of meshes per linear inch. Modulus of Elasticity. In consequence of the fact that cement, mortars, and concrete begin to exhibit permanent stretch at compara- tively low tensile stresses there is a little uncertainty as to the value of the modulus of elasticity unless distinct state- ment is made of the intensities of stress at which those values are obtained, and whether the total stretch is used or that total less the permanent set. It is not possible to make such statement in connection with all the values which follow, except that thc}^ have been reached at low intensities of stress unless otherwise stated, and with elongations w^iich may be considered wholly elastic. Al- though cement mortars and concrete do not exhibit a per- fectly elastic behavior their stress-strain lines for intensities of stress even exceeding those used in practice are essentially straight and, on the whole, exhibit elastic properties at least equal to those of cast iron. Comparatively few tests have been made to determine either the tensile or compressive modulus of elasticity of cement, mortar and concrete, although that quantity is a most important element in the theory and design of much concrete work and reinforced concrete members. Mr. W. H. Henby of St. Louis, made a number of determinations of the tensile modulus of elasticity of Portland cement con- crete of 1-2-4, 1-2-5, 1-3-6, and 1-4-8 mixtures and gave the results in a paper read before the Engineers Club of St. Louis in 1900. He obtained values varying from less than 2,000,000 to 8,360,000. Other tests, however, indi- cate that values above perhaps 3,000,000 should not be 364 TENSION. [Ch. VII. used. While higher values of the modulus of elasticity for rich mixtures of concrete may exist, the more important considerations of design usually bear upon work in which concrete must take serious loading when less than thirty days of age. For all these reasons it will seldom be advisable to take the modulus of elasticity of even as rich a mixture as i cement, 2 sand, and 4 broken stone higher than about 2,500,000, and it will be seen later that in concrete steel w^ork w^here portions of a structure are liable to be loaded to a material extent within a comparatively short time after removal of the forms, it is the usual practice to consider the modulus as having a value of 2,000,000 only. These considerations are confirmed by the results of tests given below. Professor W. Kendrick Hatt, of Purdue University, in a paper read before the American Section of the Inter- national Association for Testing Materials, at its con- vention, 1902, gave the following values for the tensile coefficient of elasticity and ultimate tensile resistances of Portland cement concrete composed of i cement, 2 sand, and 4 broken stone at the ages of 25, 26, 28, and 33 days: Coefficient of Elasticity, Lbs. per Sq. in. Ultimate Tensile Resistance, Lbs. per Sq. In. jMaximuin 2,700,000 2,100,000 1,400,000 360 280 Average . ..... Minimum ... It will be found in discussing the compressive modulus of elasticity that both moduli probably acquire nearly their full value in about three months' time. It would appear that moduli do not increase in value with the lapse of time to the same extent as the ultimate resistance to Art. 60.] CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK. 365 compression, although conclusive data as to this point are not complete. Such tests as have been made show that the modulus of elasticity in tension or compression for cinder concrete should not be taken higher than about 1,250,000 for 1-2-5 mixtures. Some tests show somewhat lower values and others values running over 2,000,000, but the latter results are too high for cinder concrete as ordinarily made and put in place. Ultimate Resistance. The ultimate resistances of neat Portland cement and mortar made with the same cement have been somewhat increased within the past half dozen years; but, upon the whole, those resistances as exhibited in the following tables are fairly representative of the best grades of cement used at the present time (191 5). The conditions of manu- facture are now so well controlled that a high 7 -day or 28-day test cement may readily be produced; but that is not always desirable; the main purpose in masonry construction being rather the attainment of an ultimate resistance possibly less high under a short-time test but which continues to increase indefinitely. A cement show- ing a high ultim.ate resistance on a short-time test may not continue to increase its ultimate resistance satisfactorily, or that resistance may even recede for a time. The following tabular statement is of interest and value as indicating the character of the cement used in the con- struction of the first subway for the Rapid Transit Railroad in the City of New York. It will be observed that the ultimate resistances of both the neat cement and the mix- ture of I cement, 2 sand, are practically as found a dozen years later. The number of briquettes broken during the years igoo and 1901 was over 18,000. The average ulti- 366 TENSION. [Ch. VII. mate tensile resistances in pounds per square inch found by that series of tests of both Portland and natural cements, as given in the report of the Chief Engineer, are the following : Year. Neat Cement. Sand 2, Cement i* I Day. 7 Days. 28 Days. 7 Days. 28 Days. Portland: Average result Average result Spec requirements 1900 I901 229 300 645 400 172 215 125 714 763 500 249 322 200 276 380 200 118 218. 100 434 525 300 215 350 150 Natural: Average result Average result Spec reciuirements . 1900 190I * For natural cement a i cement i sand mortar was used. The results for the natural cement are of interest, as that material has at present (191 5) practically disappeared from use in consequence of the low prices for which Portland can be produced. Table I exhibits the results of tests of briquettes of different brands of domestic Portland cement as made in the testing laboratory of the Bureau of Surveys of the Department of Public Works of Philadelphia, Pa., for the year 191 2. This table gives the fineness of the cements in terms of the percentages by weight which were retained on sieves with 2500, 10,000 and 40,000 meshes per square inch; it also shows the amount of water used for the different mixtures, as well as the specific gravities of the, material. It will be observed that the briquettes were made of neat cement and of mortar with a mixture of i cement to 3 sand. The results, therefore, show the effect of the presence of sand on the ultimate tensile resistance of the matrix. The periods at which the briquettes were tested are the standard 24 hours, 7 days and 28 days. Art. 60.1 CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK. 367 Table I. Average Results of Tests of Portland Cement Made during 19 12 — Phila., Pa. '0 :;:^ Fineness in per cent. >> Tensile strength in pounds per square inch. Brand No. SO. No. 100. No-. 200. Neat 1:3 24 hrs. 7 dys. 28 dys. 7 dys. 28 dys. Allentown. . . Alpha.. ..'... Atlas Bath Dexter Dragon ...... Edison Giant Lehigh Nazareth. . . . Northampton Paragon Penn Allen.. . Phoenix Saylor's Vulcanite. . . . Whitehall . . . 816 500 168 388 582 532 630 28 2,026 1.956 28 42 514 572 1,984 150 1,162 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 O.I 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3 4 4 3 2 4 2 4 3 I 3 5 4 3 3 3 3 6 8 I 4 3 7 •3 I 9 4 3 8 I 5 5 19.7 23-5 23.2 20.5 17.8 20.9 18.9 22.8 19.4 16.8 22. 1 21.8 23.2 20.1 21. 1 21.7 21.2 3-174 3. 161 3-I5I 3-130 3.128 3.106 3-II4 3.202 3.172 3-151 3-138 3.082 3-156 3.146 3.127 3-165 3-155 20.0 19.9 19.8 20.3 20.6 21.6 23.1 20.0 20.0 20.6 20.0 23-3 20.0 20.7 19.9 20.0 20.0 377 399 480 434 434 398 261 563 363 453 497 355 446 372 277 267 429 721 701 656 710 767 704 598 672 752 776 727 644 686 670 706 717 713 797 770 741 741 820 718 670 751 812 830 812 674 735 723 801 746 759 379 367 348 384 376 370 334 366 410 403 393 328 373 364 327 376 389 499 450 430 468 450 436 412 398 498 467 445 429 475 456 436 467 477 Table II shows the maximum, mean and minimum results of the tests of briquettes of various brands used by the Board of Water Supply of the City of New York during 1 9 1 4 . During the past few years American Portland cement has been improved in uniformity of quality and fineness of grinding. These tests, therefore, show the latest results of the best practice in cement production and use. The tabulated values show the variations occurring in systematic testing of large quantities of cements at 7 -day and 28-day periods. The results are all in pounds per square inch and so arranged, as is evident, that in each vertical group of three in each column the highest value is the maximum and the lowest, the minimum, the mean occupying the middle position. 368 TENSION. Table II. [Ch. VII. Brand. Approx. Bbls. Alpha. . Alsen . . Atlas . . Saylor's 170,000 324,000 520,000 45,000 No. Briquettes. 852 1620 2790 243 Neat Lbs. per Sq. In. 7 Day. 28 Day. 866 700 572 744 615 453 755 643 549 815 714 669 857 716 601 864 747 650 785 662 575 883 773 694 I c. 3 Ottawa Sand Lbs. per Sq. In. 7 Day. 320 285 246 263 192 147 324' 279 221 265 247 208 Day. 458 380 336 360 300 219 414 356 279 392 354 322 The large quantities of cement used with the corre- sponding large number of briquettes tested give the Table special value and interest. The Ottawa sand is the standard silica sand of that name so extensively used in cement mortar testing. The preceding tabular results give ultimate tensile re- sistances for- periods no longer than 28 days, but both neat cement and cement mortars go on acquiring additional resistance for long periods, although at slow rates after a period of 28 days; indeed, it may be stated without ex- aggeration generally after a period of only 7 days. Table III therefore is used to show the increase of ultimate resist- ance up to a period of six months. The results of this table are taken from the Annual Report of the Bureau of Surveys of Philadelphia, Pa., for the year 1901. It will be observed that the values are not greatly different from those given in Table I at a date 10 years later. In fact, the earlier values are a little higher than the later, showing the ten- dency to secure a higher degree of permanency in the setting of the cement rather than higher ultimate tensile resistances. Art. 60.] CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK. 369 Table III. AVERAGE RESULTS OF PORTLAND CEMENT TESTS MADE DURING 190L Brand. No. of Tests. Broken. Ultimate Tensile Resistance in Pounds per Square Inch. Neat . 24 Hrs. 7 Days. 28 Dys. 2 Mos. 3 Mos. 4 Mos. 357 770 834 885 813 785 542 728 790 802 761 815 235 336 387 443 363 826 932 778 424 669 719 713 745 776 418 830 864 775 377 699 747 684 735 774 345 721 7-^3 460 800 955 775 295 697 766 756 766 733 437 721 746 731 715 727 290 748 767 707 807 710 524 713 765 788 796 775 6 Mos. Alpha. . . . Atlas. . . . * Castle. . Dexter. . . Giant. . . . Krause's. Lehigh. . . Phoenix. . Reading.. Saylor's. . Star. . . . . Vulcanite. Whitehall 827 825 786 760 745 740 Brand. No. of Tests. Broken. Ultimate Tensile Resistance in Pounds per Square Inch. to 3 Standard Quartz Sand. 24 Hrs. 7 Days. 28 Dys. 2 Mos. 3 Mos. 4 Mos. 81 252 314 344 312 302 104 204 289 324 321 337 65 121 176 215 68 298 336 312 87 227 309 328 317 328 74 229 285 270 76 233 329 296 310 303 94 264 343 150 263 301 338 64 217 296 319 301 311 77 219 298 321 301 2S6 45 226 287 269 298 280 87 232 313 295 295 343 6 Mos. Alpha. . .. Atlas. .. . * Castle. . Dexter. . . Giant. . . . Krause's. Lehigh. . . Phoenix. . Reading. . Saylor's. . Star Vulcanite. Whitehall 262 308 329 325 286 330 370 TENSION. [Ch. VII. During the construction of a number of dams in the Croton basin supplying the water works of the City of New York, briquettes of neat cement and of mortar i to 2 and I to 3 were tested after periods beginning with one week and extending up to five years. There was a continuous increase of ultimate resistance throughout the entire period, although at a very slow rate after about six months. At the end of five years the neat Portland cement attained an ultimate resistance of 840 pounds per square inch and the I to 2 mortar, 700 pounds per square inch, while the I to 3 mortar reached 590 pounds per square inch. Other tests of briquettes up to two years of age and more confirm the preceding results. The recent cement product, called silica-Portland cement, is manufactured by grinding together certain portions of clean silicious sand and Portland cement The results given below are taken from the tests of such silica-Pvortland cement, manufactured by the SiHca-Port- land Cement Co., of Long Island City, N. Y. One part, by weight, of Aalborg Portland cement was ground to- 'Table IV.. SILICA-PORTLAND CEMENT. Ultimate Tensile Resistance in Pounds per Square Inch. Per Cent, of Water. Age. Mixture. Seven Days. Fifteen Days. Twentv-one Days. Two Hundred and Nineteen Days. ■ Neat 18-21% 11% ( 148 8 130 ( 121 ( ^' 23 i 69 ( 58 (172 6-^ 165 ( 147 ( 166 S\ 149 ( 121 ( 114 8^ 98 ( 88 (1-6) s. C.-2 q. .. ( 220 5] 204 ( 194 All specimens one day in air and remainder in water. Art. 60.] CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK. 371 gether with six parts, by weight, of clean silicious sand to such a degree of fineness that essentially all of the product passed through a 32,000-mesh sieve. This finely ground mixture of i cement to 6 sand, by weight, is called "neat" in what follows, while " (1-6) s. c.-2 q." is i part, by weight, of the *'neat" silica-Portland cement to 2 parts, by weight, of crushed quartz, or ''standard" sand, all of whicli passes a No. 20 sieve and is retained on a No. 30 sieve. The results were obtained in the cement -testing laboratory of the department of civil engineering of Columbia Univei-sity. The figures on the left of the brackets show the number of tests of which the ultimate resistances are the greatest, mean, and least in each case. Five seven-day tests of the Aalborg Portland cement used in the manufacture of the silica-Portland cement gave the following greatest, mean, and least ultimate tensile resistances, the specimens having been one day in air and six days in water: Greatest. Mean. Least. 594 lbs. per sq. in. 536 lbs. per sq. in. 441 lbs. per sq. in. Four specimens of the neat silica-Portland cement (1-6), one day in air and the remainder of the time in water, gave the following results: Age. 308 lbs. per sq. in 199 days. ' 264 " " 190 " 294 " " 189 " L260 " " 185 " Neat (1-6). All the preceding tensile tests of cement and cement mortars, unless otherwise stated, were made with the shape of briquette shown in Fig. i, which was recommended for use in the report of the " Committee on a Uniform System for Tests of Cement " of the American Society of Civil Engineers. That report was made in 191 2, and the bri- 37' TENSION. [Ch. vn. quette recommended has become the standard in American practice for the testing of cements and mortars. Fig. I. Weight of Concrete. As concrete is frequently used in masses where weight is an important element, it is always desirable to use an aggregate of high specific gravity. Concrete w^hen made of cement, sand and silicious gravel or broken limestone, trap- rock or granitic rock in such mixtures as are commonly employed, will weigh from 140 to 155 pounds per cubic foot with the greater part running from 145 to 150 pounds per cubic foot. The weight of cinder concrete will necessarily vary much with the character of the cinders. It may usually be taken as weighing about two-thirds as much as ordinary concrete Art. 60. CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK. 373 made with gravel or broken stone, i.e., from 100 to no pounds per cubic foot. Adhesion between Bricks and Cement Mortar. General Q. A. Gillmore many years ago investigated the adhesion of bricks to the cement mortar joint between them and also the adhesion of fine-cut granite to a similar joint. As might be expected in connection with such tests his results varied greatly, the highest belonging to a rich cement mortar and the lowest to the lean mortar of i cement to 6 sand. He found the adhesion to vary from about 31 pounds per square inch for neat cement to brick to nearly 3.3 pounds per square inch for a lean mortar of I cement to 6 sand. With fine-cut granite the adhesion for neat cement was 27.5 pounds per square inch and for cement mortar of i cement to 4 sand about 8 pounds per square inch. It is highly probable that the actual adhesion of bricks and cut stone to the usual joints made of i cement to 2 sand or i cement to 3 sand would be materially less in a mass of masonry than as arranged for a laboratory test. Nevertheless these early investigations would indi- cate that such joints might be worth from 8 to 12 pounds per square inch for bricks and but little different for granite. Mr. Emil Kuichling prepared a paper in 1888 from all available sources for the purpose of disclosing what all experimental investigation had determined up to that time. These results indicated that neat cement might give ad- hesion to bricks or cut stone varying from about 20 pounds up to over 200 pounds per square inch, with values from 29. pounds up to 146 pounds per square inch for mortar of I cement to i sand; and 38 pounds to 73 pounds per square inch for a mortar of i cement to 2 sand. Further, accord- ing to his table a mortar of i cement ^to 3 sand would 374 TENSION. [Ch. VII. yield adhesion from 13 pounds up to 48 pounds per square inch and but httle less for a mortar of i cement to 4 sand. Nearly all these results, however, are undoubtedly too high for the usual masses of masonry in engineering construction. Other experimental determinations of the adhesive resistance of natural and Portland cement mortars to brick and stone may be found in the report of the Chief of Engineers, U. S. A., for 1895. At the age of 28 days the adhesive resistance of neat Portland cement to the surface of sawn limestone was about 270 poimds per square inch; about 240 pounds per square inch with a mortar of I cement to J sand; about 225 pounds per square inch with a mortar of i cement to i sand, and about 170 pounds per square inch with a mortar of i cement to 2 sand. Table V exhibits the average results of three and six months' tests of the adhesion of Portland and natural cement mortars to bricks w^hich were cemented to each other at right angles and then pulled apart normally at the ends of the periods named. These average results are taken from the same report of the Chief of Engineers, U. S. A., for 1895- Table V. AVERAGE ADHESIVE RESISTANCE OF BRICKS CEMENTED TOGETHER AT RIGHT ANGLES TO EACH OTHER. Cement. Mortar. Adhesion, Pounds per Square Inch. Portland Neat 60 * ' I c, i s. 60 < < I C, I s. 40 ( ( I c, 2 s. 20 (( I c, 3 s. 20 Natural Neat 55 ( ( I c, ^ s. 50 < ( I C., I s. 45- ( < I C., 2 S. 30 (< I c., 3 s. 15 Art. 60.] CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK. 375 There will also be found in that report average values of the shearing adhesion of plain i-inch round bolts to neat Portland cement and to Portland cement mortars of i month's age, the bolts having been embedded at various depths "from 2 to 10 inches in the mortars. The shearing adhesion for the neat cement varied from a maximum of 345 potmds per square inch for a depth of insertion of 4 inches down to 230 pounds per square inch for a depth of insertion of about 8J inches. In the case of the Portland cement mortar of i cement to 2 sand the shearing adhesion varied from a maximum of 280 pounds per square inch for a depth of insertion of the bolt of 2 J inches down to 250 pounds per square inch for a depth of insertion of about 7 1 inches. When the bolt was embedded in the Portland cement mortar of i cement to 4 sand the shearing adhesion ranged from a maximum of about 145 poimds per square inch for a depth of insertion of 10 inches to a minimum of about 70 pounds per square inch for a depth of insertion of 2 inches. These values of shearing adhesion are impor- tant results in the theory and design of concrete-steel members. The Effect of Freezing Cements and Cement Mortars. There have been many attempts made to determine the effect of freezing neat cements and cement mortars after having been mixed for use at various ages and under various conditions. vSome valuable data have been ac- cumulated, but the conditions attending such investiga- tions are so complicated and so difficult to be analyzed quantitatively that many most discordant conclusions have been reached. Different results will follow if the freezing- is done immediately after the mixing of the cement or mortar, or after the initial set has taken place, or after the considerable hardening which takes place at the age of 376 TENSION. [Ch. VII. 12 to 24 hours. Probably the best data in this connection arise from an engineer's practical experience in laying masonry when the temperature of the air is below the freezing-point. Under such circumstances it is rarely the case that anything more than surface freezing takes place before the hardening of Portland cement. With the slower action of the natural cements similar conditions do not exist. It is undoubtedly prejudicial even with Port- land cements to have alternate freezing and thawing take place at comparatively short intervals of time. On the other hand, the great majority of laboratory investigations indicate that Portland cement or cement mortars may be severely frozen and remain so for long periods of time without essential injury. It is probable that setting usually proceeds during a frozen condition, but at an exceedingly slow rate, and that the operation of setting is actively renewed after thawing. While it has been stated in some quarters that natural cements may be frozen similarly and thawed without essential injury, there is considerable laboratory evidence as well as that of practice which indicates that conclusion to be erroneous, especially if it be given any considerable application. There may be cases in which natural cements can be or have been frozen without essential injury, but the author's experience in extended practical operations in masonry construction induces him to believe that any natural cement severely frozen before being thoroughly hardened is so seriously injured as to be practically de- stroyed. On the other hand, his extended observations not only on his own work, but on those of others, lead him to beheve that, as a rule, Portland cement will not be sensibly injured under the conditions of actual masonry construction by being frozen. It is customary in most large works to permit no masonry to be laid at a tempera- Art. 60.] CEMENT, CEMENT MORTARS, ETC.— BRICK, 377 ture much below about 26° Fahr. above zero, but with precautions easily attained it is certain that concrete and other masonry laid in Portland cement mortar may prop- erly and safely be put in place several degrees below that temperature. It has also been stated in some quarters that natural cements and some Portlands have been actually improved by being frozen. Such conclusions should be received with exceeding caution. The author believes that there is no conclusive evidence that any cement or cement mortar can be improved by freezing. In cold weather it is customary on some works to use salt water for mixing mortars and concretes, and that practice when suitably conducted may be resorted to with safety and propriety. Such solutions generally rtm from 2 to 8 or 10 per cent, by weight of salt. Occasionally, also, soda is dissolved in water at tlie rate of 2 pounds per gal- lon. Before using this solution an equal volume of water is added so that the final solution contains about i pound of soda to a gallon of water. This solution expedites the setting of the cement with a view to accomplishing a safe degree of hardening before the mortar is frozen. It is doubtful whether this practice should be encouraged. The Linear Thermal Expansion and Contraction of Concrete and Stone. Satisfactory investigations regarding the expansion and contraction of concrete and stone are exceedingly few in number, and the data by which variations in the dimen- sions of large masses of masonry due to temperature changes can be computed are correspondingly meagre. Professor William D. Pence, of Purdue University, has made such investigations and presented the "results in a valuable paper read before the Western Society of Engineers, 37^ TENSION. tCh. VII. November 20, 1901. In his experimental work he com- pared the thermal linear changes of concrete bars and bars of steel and copper, basing the coefficients of expansion of the concrete and mortar on the relative changes of the two materials for the same range of temperature. These experiments w^ere conducted with great care, but the resulting values might perhaps have been at least better defined had two materials been employed with a greater difference in their rates of thermal expansion and contrac- tion. Professor Pence employed two kinds of concrete and one bar of Kankakee limestone, seven experiments having been performed on a concrete of i Portland cement, 2 sand, and 4 broken stone ; one on a concrete of i Portland cement, 2 sand, and 4 gravel ; and three on a concrete composed of i cement and 5 of sand and gravel, making the mixture essentially equivalent to the preceding concrete of i cement, 2 sand, and 4 gravel. The maximum, mean, and minimum coefficients of linear expansion per degree Fahr. found in these tests were as follows: Kind of Concrete. Maximum. Mean. Minimum. Broken stone, 1:2:4 Gravel, 1:2:4 Gravel 1*5 .0000057 .0000055 .0000055 .0000054 .0000053 .0000056 .0000052 .0000052 Kankakee limestone Betw^een January and June, 1902, Messrs. J. G. Rae and R. E. Dougherty, graduating students in Civil Engineer- ing at Columbia University, with the aid of Professor Hallock of the Department of Physics of the same university, determined with great care by the most accurate direct measurements the coefficients of linear thermal expansion of one bar of concrete of i Portland cement, 3 sand and 5 gravel, and one bar of mortar of i Portland cement and 2 sand, each bar being 4 inches by 4 inches in cross-section Art. 6 1.] TIMBER IN TENSION. 379 and about 3 feet long, both bars being tested at the age of about 5i years. The coefficients of linear thermal expansion for each degree Fahr. found in these investiga- tions were as follows: For 1:3:5 concrete 00000655 " 1:2 mortar 00000561 It is believed that these last two determinations were made with the utmost accuracy attainable at the present time in an unusually w^ell equipped physical laboratory and under most favorable conditions. When it is remembered that the coefficient of linear thermal expansion of such iron and steel as are used in engineering structures is about .0000066,* it is apparent that structures of combined concrete or other masonry and steel may be expected to act under thermal changes essen- tially as a unit, a conclusion which is justified at the present time by extended experience. Art. 61. — Timber in Tension. The ultimate resistance of timber in general is much affected by the moisture which it contains, except that the amoimt of moisture does not appear to affect sensibly the ultimate tensile resistance. At this point, therefore, no further attention will be given to the effect of moisture or sap on the tensile resistance, but the infliience of moisture on the * A large number of determinations of the thermal expansion of iron and steel per degree Fahr. may be found in the U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Materials for 1887, The maximum, mean, and minimum for steel bars are as follows: . 000006 756 . 000006 466 . 000006 1 7 Other coefficients of thermal expansion are also given as follows: Wrought iron 00000673 Cast iron 000005926 Copper 000009 1 29 38o TENSION. [Ch. VII. compressive and bending resistances will be fully set forth in the articles devoted to timber in compression and bending. There are few results of investigations which give satis- factory moduli of elasticity for timber in. tension. Values are given in the annual " U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Materials," but these results are generally for small selected sticks which are quite different from com- mercial sizes of lumber as generally used. Some of these moduli run up to nearly 3,000,000, which is much too high for any ordinary commercial timber as used in structural work. In " Tests of Structural Timbers," by McGarvey Cline, Director of Forest Products Laboratory, and A. L. Heim, Engineer of Forest Products, issued as Bulletin 108 of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, 191 2, a large number of determinations are made of ultimate resistance, elastic limit and modulus of elasticity for commercial sizes of lumber of nine different kinds of generally used timber. The moduli of elasticity, however, are determined from bending tests, which makes them a kind of composite of both tension and compression values. The results found, however, are among the best available. The following tabular statement gives the moduli for green and air-seasoned structural sizes: Table I. Green Air-seasoned Wt. per cu. ft. oven-dry Long-leaf Pine . . Douglas Fir Short-leaf Pine . . Western Larch . . . Loblolly Pine . . . . Tamarack Western Hemlock Red Wood Norway Pine . . . . 1,463,000 1,517,000 1,473,000 1,301,000 1,387,000 1,220,000 1,445,000 1,042,000 1,133,000 1,705,000 1,549,000 1,726,000 1,487,000 1,487,000 1,341,000 1,737,000 890,000 1,418,000 35 28 30 28 31 30 27 22 25 Art. 6i.] TIMBER IN TENSION. 381 It will be noticed that redwood gives the lowest modulus of elasticity and Norwa}^ pine next above it except the value for air-seasoned tamarack. Long-leaf pine, short-leaf pine, and Douglas fir give nearly the same results. In determinmg the tensile resistance, and, indeed, other resistances of timber, the size of the specimen plays a more important part, probably, than in any other class of materials used by the engineer. Small specimens, such as are usually employed in tensile tests, are inevitably so selected as to eliminate such defects as decay and decayed or other , knots, wind shakes, season cracks, and other deteriorating features, so that the results exhibit physical properties belonging to the best parts of full-size sticks. In engineering practice, on the other hand, large pieces of timber must be used as furnished in the timber market. However close the inspection, ma}^ be such pieces in- variably include within their volumes m^any spots of weak- ness due to those features which in the small specimen are carefully excluded. It is of the utmost consequence, therefore, in dealing with physical data belonging to timber to realize that results determined by the testing of small specimens are almost without exception materially mis- leading in consequence of reaching higher values than those which can possibly belong to the average stick used in structural work. These observations must be carefully remembered in considering the experimental data which follow. While there exists a large amount of data on the tensile tests of timber it relates largely to small selected sticks or is otherwise scarcely available for engineering construc- tion. The best recent data are given by Messrs. Cline and Heim from which Table I was taken. On page 57 of that Bulletin tabulated data of a large number of bending tests 382 TENSION. [Ch. VII. of green and dry structural timbers are found, the failures being by tension in the fibres subjected to that kind of stress. Those data are shown in Table II. The modulus of rupture is simply the intensity of stress in the most remote fibre of the timber. Table IL Species. Long-leaf pine: Green Dry Douglas fir: Green Dry Short-leaf pine: Green Dry Western larch: Green Dry . . Loblolly pine: Green Dry Tamarack : Green Dry Western hemlock Green Dry Redwood : Green Dry. . Norway pine: Green Dry Average modulus of rupture All lbs. per j tension failures. Modulus of rupture in per cent, of average green modulus of rupture. First failure by tension (per cent.) 6,140 5.749 5.983 6,372 5.548 6,573 4.948 5.856 5.084 6,118 4.556 5,498 5.296 6,420 4.472 3,891 3,864 6,054 112 121 83 82 94 117 73 no 86 120 90 106 74 108 81 80 94 134 Failure due to Large knots. 82 69 76 96 166 102 73 39 71 71 77 94 136 Small knots. 80 78 90 77 112 86 90 92 58' Irregu- lar grs. 77 82 100 115 71 103 90 114 96 112 106 55 48 73 Pitch pockets 90 Nothing apparent 112 121 104 136 109 132 100 124 98 138 98 100 81 119 90 87, 105 129 The moduH of rupture are the averages of all failures whether by tension, compression or shear, but the figures given in the table after the second column represent the Art. 6i.] TIMBER IN TENSION. 383 percentages of the average '* green " moduli of rupture at which the extreme fibres failed in tension under influence of " large knots," " small knots," *' irregular grain " or " nothing apparent " as indicated at the head of each column. Although these values are not found by direct tests of tension, they may be accepted as fair and suitable ultimate resistances of the different kinds of timber in tension. Table III. Kind of Timber. Ultimate Resistance, Pounds per Square Inch. With Grain. Across Grain. Working Stresses, Pounds per Square Inch, With Grain. Across Grain . White oak White pine . Southern long-leaf or Georgia yellow pine Douglas, Oregon, and yellow fir Washington fir or pine (red fir) Northern or short -leaf yellow pine. . . . Red pine Norway pine Canadian (Ottowa) white pine Canadian (Ontario) red pine Spruce and Eastern fir Hemlock Cypress Cedar Chestnut California redwood Cahfomia spruce 10,000 7,000 12,000 12,000 10,000 9,000 9,000 8,000 10,000 10,000 8,000 6,000 6,000 8,000 9,000 7,000 2,000 500 600 500 500 500 1,000 700 1,200 1,200 1,000 900 900 800 1,000 1,000 800 600 600 800 900 700 200 50 60 50 50 50 Reviewing all the experimental work which has been done up to the present time (1902) in determining the ultimate tensile resistance of timber, and keeping in view experience with the resistance of full-size timber sticks in completed structures, the best representative series of values of the ultimate and working tensile intensities of timbers is that recommended by the Committee on 384 TENSION. (Ch. VII. " Strength of Bridge and Trestle Timbers " of the Associa- tion of Railway Superintendents of Bridges and Buildings at the Fifth Annual Convention in New Orleans, 1895. That series is given in Table III. The ultimate resistances of the table are much too high for full size pieces, but the working stresses may be accepted as they stand. It will be noticed that the ultimate tensile resistance of the various timbers across the grain, so far as they are given, are but small fractions of the ultimate resistances along the grain. A corresponding large decrease in resist- ance across the grain will also be found in connection with the compressive resistance of the same timbers. The working resistances given in this table are those employed in the great bulk of engineering timber structures. CHAPTER VIII. COMPRESSION. Art. 62. — Preliminary. With the exception of material in the shape of long columns, but few experiments, comparatively speaking, have been made upon the compressive resistance of con- structive materials. Pieces of material subjected to compression are divided into two general classes — " short blocks " and ** long col- umns "; the first of these, only, afford phenomena of pure compression. A " short block " is such a piece of material that if it be subjected to compressive load it will fail by pure compres- sion. On the other hand, a long column (as has been indi- cated in Art. 35) fails by combined compression and bending. Short blocks only will be considered in the articles immediately succeeding, while long columns will be sepa- rately considered further on. The length of a short block is usually about three times its least lateral dimension or less. It has already been shown in Art. 5 that the greatest shear in a short block subjected to compression will be found in planes making an angle of 45° with the surfaces of the block on which the compressive force acts, i.e., with 385 386 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII its ends. If the material is not ductile this shear will frequently cause wedge-shaped portions to separate from the block. But the friction at these end surfaces, and in the surfaces of failure will 'prevent those wedge portions shearing off at^ that angle. In fact the friction will cause the angle of separation to be considerably larger than 45°; let it be called a. Then, in order that there maybe perfect freedom in failure, the length of the block must not be less than its least width or breadth multiplied by 2 tan a. In some cases, a has been found to be about 55°, for which value. 2 tan a = 2 X 1.43 = 2.86. If the bearing faces of the short block under compres- sion are of much area, for such a purpose, it will be difficult in many cases, especially with large loads, to secure a uniform apph cation of those loads. The resulting ultimate resistance for the entire block will give an average intensity of pressure which may be quite different from the greatest intensity. These simple considerations are particularly pertinent to such materials as blocks of concrete or of natural stone, which may be 12 inches square or more in section. Again, in such material as natural or artificial stone the friction between the head of the testing machine and the bearing surface of the specimen, or along the planes of greatest ultimate shear will tend to support laterally to some extent the material as it approaches failure, thus raising the apparent ultimate resistance of the material. The shorter the block the greater will be this frictional supporting tendency. This effect has been marked where the tests specimens have been cubes varying from 2 inches on their edges to 12 inches, the large cubes showing mate- rially greater resisting capacity. Failure of short cylinders of cast iron showing the shearing of the metal on the plane of maximum shear. View exhibiting the failure of short cylinders of Connecticut brown sandstone. {To face page 386.) Art. 63.] WROUGHT IRON. 3S7 Art. 63. — Wrought Iron. It is difficult to fix the point of failure of a short block of wrought iron or other ductile material. As the load increases above the elastic limit, the cross-sections of the test piece increase in lateral dimensions or *' bulge out," so that increase of compressive force simply produces an increased area of resistance, while the material never truly fails by crumbling or shearing off in wedges. It is comparatively easy to determine the elastic limit, but at what degree of loading the material may be said to fail after permanent distortion begins is not clear unless some arbitrary limit should be fixed by convention. In an actual structure obviously failure may be said to take place when the degree of distortion is such that the structure fails to discharge safely its function as a load carrier, but that degree of distortion would vary much in different structures or in different parts, possibly, of the same structure. For the present purpose it may perhaps be assumed tentatively that a ductile material fails when its distortion under compressive loading becomes apparent to the unaided eye. Modulus of Elasticity. As wrought iron is no longer a structural material, there are practically no recent tests to determine the compressive modulus of elasticity, but earlier investigators made suf- ficient tests when the material was in general use to establish the modulus with reasonable accuracy. Those investi- gations show that there is no essential difference between moduli for compression and tension. Hence the modulus of elasticity for wrought iron in compression may be taken at 26,000,000. Small specimens would in some cases yield 388 COMPRESSION. (Ch. VIII results perhaps as high as 28,000,000, but for general use the former or smaller value is preferable. Limit of Elasticity and Ultimate Resistance. Investigations for determining the elastic limit of wrought iron in compression are almost entirely lacking, but its value may safely be taken the same as for tension, i.e., depending upon the area of cross-section and the amount of work put upon the material in its manufacture, from 22,000 to perhaps 26,000 pounds per square inch, the former for large sections and the latter for small sections. The difficulties met in the effort to determine a well-defined ultimate compressive resistance for wrourht iron have already been noticed, but such compression tests as were made during the general use of wrought iron for structural purposes indicate that what may be termed the ultimate compressive resistance may reasonably be taken at about the ultimate tensile resistance. The amount of permanent distortion taking place at that degree of loading has not been satisfactorily determined, but it would certainly be apparent to the unaided eye and it might run from i per cent, to 5 per cent, or possibly more. It m,ay be assumed, therefore, thset the ultimate compressive resistance of wrought iron will range generally from 45,000 to 50,000 pounds per square inch. Art. 64. — Cast Iron. The behavior of cast iron under compression as found in ordinary casting is not less erratic than in tension. When this material was used for such purposes as heavy ordnance and car wheels it was so produced as to possess excellent physical qualities for a cast metal, especially after remiclting and being held in fusion. Even then, however, the modulus Art. 64.] CAST (RON. 389 of elasticity was not much higher than for the best quaUties of ordinary castings. It may be said generally that the modulus of elasticity for cast iron in either tension or com- pression may be taken from 12,000,000 to 14,000,000. These values are about half of the corresponding values for wrought iron and little less than half the corresponding values for structural steel. Inasmuch as cast iron is a brittle material failing suddenly at the limit of its resisting capacity, either in tension or compression, it can scarcely be said to have an elastic limit except for special grades of unusual excellence, and even with such material it is not well defined. The ultimate resistance of cast iron to compression is fairly well defined, but it varies greatly in value according to its quality. Special grades for ordnance and car wheels may have compressive resistances running from 100,000 per square inch up to 150,000 pounds per square inch. For many years when cast-iron columns were used in engi- neering practice it was customary to consider the ultimate compressive resistance for such members as 100,000 pounds per square inch, but that value is far too high. Although the quality of ordinary castings is variable, it is reasonable to take the ultimate compressive resistance at 80,000 pounds per square inch for such material as may be used under good and effective specifications for columns, machine frames and similar purposes, although there are modern cast-iron column tests which appear to indicate that even that value is too high. Art. 65.— Steel. Table I of Art. 58 contains the results found by Prof. Ricketts in testing cylindrical specimens of mild steel in compression. These specimens were six inches long be- tween carefully faced ends, and, as the table shows, their 39° COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. diameter was about 0.75 inch. The coefficients of elasticity for compression were found by measurements very carefully made with a micrometer on a length of four inches. The elastic limits, however, were determined by operating with a cylinder two inches long, and were taken at those points where the material of the specimens ceased to hold up the scale beam, and may have been somewhat above that point where the ratio between stress and strain ceases to be essentially constant. The coefficients of elasticity are found to be quite uniform, irrespective of the per cents of carbon, within the limits of the table, and they are seen to be a very little less than the coefficients for tension. The difference is so small that no essential error will arise if, for all en- gineering purposes, they are assumed the same. A comparison of the elastic limits for tension and compression presents some irregularities; yet with the exception of the high percentages of carbon in the last two grades of Bessemer metal, the two sets of elastic limits as wholes are not very different from each other. In the Bessemer steel with the two high per cents of carbon, the tensile elastic limits are materially higher than those for compression. The following very important conclusion results from this comparison of the elastic limits for the mild structural steels: since these elastic limits are es- sentially equal it is not only permissible but wholly rational to increase the working resistances of mild steel bridge columns over tjiose for iron in at least the same proportion, that the tensile working stress of the same steel is increased over that of iron in tension. Experiments on a sufficient number of full-size steel columns are yet lacking to verify this conclusion. It appears from such data on the compressive resistance of steel as exist that not only the coefficient of elasticity Art. 65.] STEEL, 391 but, also, the limit of elasticity in compression may be taken the same as that for tension for the same grade of steel. This was practically true in the older investiga- tions of Kirkaldy, and it is essentially confirmed in the few later investigations available. The ultimate compressive resistance of steel, like the ultimate tensile resistance, varies with the content of carbon, being comparatively low with a small percentage of carbon, and correspondingly large with a high percentage of that element. It is also much affected by the operations of tempering and annealing. Special grades of steel adapted to heat treatment have after such treatment given ultimate compressive resistances of various values up to nearly or quite 400,000 pounds per square inch and values ranging from 150,000 pounds up to 300,000 pounds per square inch are not uncommon in the records of the older testing. Such high results, however, are only obtained with hardened and tempered metal. There is the same uncertainty as to the point at which compressive failure takes place in steel which attaches to the ultimate compressive resistance of all ductile metals and which was commented upon in Art. 63. It is probably safe, however, if not entirely correct, to take the ultimate compressive resistances of different grades of steel equal to their ultimate tensile resistances in the absence . of explicit determinations; and a similar observation may be applied to the working resistances in pure compression of same grades of steel. Art. 66. — Copper, Tin, Zinc, Lead, and Alloys.* Table I shows some coefficients of elasticity (i.e., ratios between stress and strain), computed from data deter- * As this field of investigation has not been worked since Prof. Thurston left it his results are ^llowed to stand (19 15). 392 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. mined by Prof. Thurston, and given by him in the " Trans. Amer. Soc. of Civ. Engrs.," Sept., 1881. The gun bronze contained copper, 89.97; "tin, 10.00; flux, 0.03. The cast copper was cast very hot. Table I. Stress in Pounds per Square Inch. Coefficients of Elasticity in Pounds per Square Inch; Gun Bronze. Cast Copper. 1,620 3,260 6,520 9,780 . 13,040 16,300 19,560 22,820 26,080 29,340 32,600 48,900 3,622,000 4,075,000 6,113,000 6,520,000 5,433,000 5,148,000 3,935,000 2,308,000 1,073,000 463,600 1,254,000 1,415,000 1,651,000 1,795,000 1,824,000 1,842,000 1,845,000 1,735,000 1,503,000 1,144,000 815,000 332,500 The ratios of stress over strain are far from being con- stant. Strictly speaking, therefore, there is no elastic limit in either case. In that of the gim bronze, however, it may be approximately taken at 20,000 pounds per square inch (Prof. Thurston takes it 22,820), and in that of the copper at 25,000 pounds. The test specimens v/ere two inches long and turned to 0.625 inch in diameter. At 38,000 pounds per square inch the gim bronze speci- men was shortened about 41 per cent, of its original length, while its diameter had become 0.77 inch. The copper specimen failed at 71,700 pounds per square inch, having been shortened about one third of its length. The results of a series of tests by Prof. Thurston, in connection with the United States testing commission, are given in Table II; they were abstracted from " ]\Iechanical Art. 66.] COPPER, TIN, ZINC, LEAD AND ALLOYS. 393 Table II. Composition. Pounds per Square Inch Causing a Shortening of Greatest Load in Per Cent, of Short- Ultimate Crushing Pounds ening Resist- Manner of Caused ance in Failure. Copper. Tin. 5 Per Cent. 10 Per Cent. 20 Per Cent. per Square Inch. by Greatest Load. Lbs. per Sauare Inch. 07.83 1.92 29,340 34,000 46,000 46,260 0.37 34,000 Flattened 95-96 3-80 39,200 42,050 52,150 52,150 0.30 42,050 " 92.07 7-76 31,500 42;000 65,000 84,100 0.45 42,000 " 90.43 9-50 32,000 38,000 60,000 61,930 0.34 38,000 " 87.15 12.77 39,000 53,000 80,000 89,640 0.39 53,000 " 80.99 18.92 65,000 78,000 103,490 103,490 . 20 78,000 " 76.60 23.23 101,040 114,080 0.09 114,080 Crushed 69.90 29.85 146,680 0.04 146,680 " 65-31 34.47 84,750 . 03 84,750 " 61.83 37.74 39,110 0.02 39,110 " 47-72 51-09 84,750 0. 02 84,750 " 44.62 55-15 35,850 O.OI 35,850 " 38.83 60.79 39,110 0.02 39,110 " 38.37 61.32 29,340 O.OI 29,340 " 34-22 65.80 19,560 19,560 0.06 19,560 " 25.12 74-51 17,930 17,930 17,030 17,930 0.28 17,930 " 20.21 79-62 16,300 16,300 16,300 16,300 0. 29 16,300 " 15-12 li-^^ 6,520 6,520 6,520 9,450 0.51 6,520 Flattened 11.48 88.50 10,100 10,100 10,100 14,020 0. 50 10,100 " 8.57 91.39 6,500 9,780 0.06 9,780 " 3.72 96. 31 6.520 6,520 6,520 9,780 0.34 9,780 " 0.74 99-02 6,520 6,520 6,520 9,780 0.36 9,780 " °-32 99-46 6,520 6,520 6,520 9,780 0.38 9,780 « Cast c opper 26,000 39,000 51,000 74,970 0.45 39,000 "■' " . " 33,000 45,500 58,670 78,230 0.43 45,500 ** II 34,000 42,000 58,000 71,710 0.32 42,000 II " 30,000 36,000 50,000 104,300 0.52 36,000 " " " 30,000 37,000 50,000 91,270 0.48 37,000 iS *' " 35,000 48,000 65,000 97,790 0.41 48,000 " Cast tin 6,030 6,400 6,530 7,500 0.44 6,400 and Physical Properties of the Copper- tin Alloys," United States Report, edited by Prof. R. H. Thurston, 1879. All the specimens were 0.625 i^ch in diameter and 2 inches long. Scarcely one of them can be said to possess an elastic limit. The series of alloys presents some interesting results. About the middle third of the series are seen to be brittle compounds giving (as a rule) high ultimate compressive resistances, while the other two thirds are ductile, and give at the copper end high r-esults, and low ones at the tin end. It will be observed that Prof. Thurston took the load per square inch which gave a shortening of 10 per cent, of the original length as the. ultimate resistance to crushing of the 394 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. ductile alloys and metals, since such materials cannot be said to completely fail under any pressure, but spread laterally and offer increased resistance. Table III. Per Cent, of Pounds per Square Inch for Per Cent, of Manner of Copper. Zinc. El. Ultimate Resistance. Shortening. Failure, 96.07 3-79 305,500 29,000 :>.o Flattened 90.56 9.42 342,100 30,000 10. * * 89.80 10.06 29,500 10. It 76.65 23.08 656,500 42,000 10. tt 60.94 38-65 1,772,500 75,000 10. tt 55-15 44-44 78,000 10. it 49.66 50.14 1,345,500 117,400 10. <( 47-56 52.28 1,500,000 121,000 10. - 25.77 73-45 4,232,800 110,822 5-85 Crushed 20.81 77-63 2,485,000 52,152 2.75 " 14.19 85.10 897,000 48,892 10.8 i ( 10.30 88.88 49,000 10. Flattened 4-35 94.59 48,000 10. ** 0.00 100.00 318,500 22,000 10. Table III contains the results of Prof. Thurston's tests of the copper-zinc alloys made while he was a member of the United States Board. The data are taken from ''Ex. Doc. 23, House of Representatives, 46th Congress, 2d Session." The specimens were two inches long and 0.625 inch in diameter of circular cross-section. The values of E^ (ratios of stress over strain) are com- puted for about one quarter the ultimate resistance. This ratio is so very variable for different intensities of stress, that these alloys can scarcely be said to have a proper "elastic limit." Two specimens of tobin bronze, each .75 inch in diameter and I inch long, tested by the Fairbanks Company of New York City in 1891, were compressed about .8 per cent, at 45,000 pounds per square inch, and a little over 10 per cent. Art. 67.] CEMENT— CEMENT MORTAR— CONCRETE. 395 at 90,000 pounds per square inch. Tobin bronze contains 58.2 per cent, copper, 2.3 per cent, tin, and 39.5 per cent, zinc. Art. 67. — Cement — Cement Mortar — Concrete. The ultimate compressive resistances of mortars and concrete determine the carrying power of many engineering works, and it is of much importance to ascertain those resistances and the conditions under which they may be made the greatest possible. Obviously, the carrying power in compression of both mortars and concretes will depend upon a considerable number of elements such as the character of the cement, the proportions of mixture of the sand and cement for mortar or of the cement, sand, and gravel or broken stone for concrete, the thoroughness of the ad- mixture, the amount of water used, the conditions under v/hich the mortar and concrete are maintained while the operation of setting is taking place, the temperature, and other various influences. The modulus of elasticity of concrete must necessarily depend chiefly upon the proportions of the mixture and the age of the concrete when tested. It will also depend to a material extent upon the intensity of compressive stress at which the strain is observed. At this point a clear under- standing of the elastic behavior of the mortars and concrete is necessary to a correspondingly clear view of what takes place in a concrete-steel beam under loading. In many cases of concrete under compression of varying intensities a careful measurement of the resulting strains shows that a permanent deformation or compression remains at least for the time being after the removal of the load, even when the latter is sometimes not more than 100 or 200 pounds per square inch. This permanent set is dependent upon the age of the material and usually, perhaps always, 396 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. decreases as age increases. In many other cases a per- manent set is observable only under intensities of stress as high as looo or 1200 pounds per square inch, or even considerably more. When these sets occur they are fre- quently found far below what may probably be termed the elastic limit of the material, and in some quarters they have given the impression that mortar and concrete have little or no true elastic behavior. This, however, is an erroneous view, as in the testing of concrete and mortar cubes equal increments of stress intensities quite uniformly give equal increments of strain or deformation over a considerable range. Although the upper limit of this essentially constant ratio between stress and strain is usually not very clearly defined, it is so defined in a considerable percentage of cases and in almost all tests of well-made concrete and mortar that limit may readily be assigned near enough for all practical purposes. A large amount of data bearing upon these points will be found in the " Report of Tests of Metals and Other Mate- rials" at the Watertown Arsenal for 1899. Twelve-inch cubes with a great variety of proportions of constituent elements ranging from a few days up to six months in age were employed in those investigations. Figs, i and 2 ex- hibit graphically the results of twelve of those tests so taken as to be fairly representative of all. The vertical ordinates of the curves represent compressive stress intensities up to failure, while the horizontal ordinates represent the total compressive strains or deformation imder the corresponding stresses also up to the point of failure. These strains are shown in the figures one himdred times their actual amoimts. In Fig. I the concrete nine days old shows only little resist- ing power and a low coefficient of elasticity, as would be expected. In nearly all the other cases, on the other hand, the ratio between stress and strain is reasonably constant Art. 67.] CEMENT— CEMENT MORTAR— CONCRETE. 397 Up to nearly 1000 poiinds per square inch. The two excep- tions are found in Fig. 2, belonging to i to 3 Portland- cement mortar and to i, 2, and 4 steel-cement concrete, the former four months old and the latter three months old. / # 3000 PDSt 3000 PDSt fi .•>1 .*^ ■<:. ''t>' wos. iios.^ ¥ 2000 N / ^^ U^ 2000 ^ >« c // o^^^ . // ^ 1000 s^^^ 25^ 3>i 1000 ■•/ V ^ "/ / .0 }5 .0 1 .0 5 IN ..! 3. I .0 35 .C 1 .0 15 IN 5000 PDSt / 4000 / 0^ ejiS^ ^ 1 / 3000 P^- f ^ qnoo ^;> LX i 3000 I / ..// ,.^OS t/ 1000 I'j: .^ ::-^ ■7 / ^" ^ r 1 .003 .01 .015 IN. .005 .01 .015 in. Fig. 2 On the other hand, the 1,2, and 4 concrete six months old in the right-hand group of Fig. i discloses constant propor- tionality between stress and strain up to 2000 pounds per square inch, and the same observation may apply to a sim- 398 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. ilar concrete represented by one of the curves in the left- hand group of Fig. 2 . Again the i to i granite-dust mortar four months old represented by one of the curves in the right-hand group of Fig. 2 shows a constant ratio up to nearly 4000 pounds per square inch. Indeed, the whole group of curves probably show^s a more satisfactory approach to a constant ratio between stress and strain than do similar curves for cast iron. It should be stated, as will be observed by referring to the report cited, that some of the curves shown in Fig. i and Fig. 2 belong to groups for w^hich small permanent sets were observed below elastic limits, while others belong to those which show no such permanent set. This observation does not appear from the test records to be applicable to any particular character of curves, but .sometimes to those which are more nearly straight and some- times to those which are less so. The results deduced from the tests of cubes covered by the 1899 and other "Reports of Tests of Metals and Other Materials ' ' are confirmed by the investigations of such for- eign authorities as M. Considere, ]\Ielan, Brik, and others. They show conclusively that it is reasonable and safe to apply to concrete and concrete-steel beams the formulae established by the common theory of flexure after intro- ducing into_ them empirical quantities established by experi- ment precisely as is done with iron and steel beams. Table I is a condensed statement of average values of the modulus of elasticity for concrete of different propor- tions of mixture prepared by Mr. Edwin Thacher from original sources, including the annual Reports of Tests of Metals and Other Materials carried on by U. S. officers at the Watertown Arsenal for a lecture given by him at the College of Civil Engineering of Cornell University, 1902. This table exhibits as reasonable values for the coeffi- cient of elasticity in compression as can be determined at Art. 67. CEMENT— CEMENT MORTAR— CONCRETE. 399 f fe CO w. > < C5 . GO xn <^ c c . rt o 0000 0000 - O O O r^ r^ O O LO rC oi o 000 0000 o c o o o o c o r^ ro r-- O O 01 vc oc 088 _ q_ q_ c ro C" t~^ ^ r^ CO C O lOvO OC SC O 1- CO 000 88 ■ O C O G O O C O O O o c o o o 00 CO CN CN cox oc vC ^ 00000 89050 o, o. o, q^ o^ r^ r^ rf cT w" O vc vO i^ cs vO vo CO Tl- to 00000 r^ CO 10 10 10 '^ -:)- r- r- CO vO ►- 00 X 1-1 ►- O r^ r~^ 10 t^ O X ^ o '^ 0_^ "0 o__x^ hT oT cT >-<" i-T 88888 O o) o) O vC O HH HH O "^ mx X u^vo cT cn" oT cs" cn" 00000 10 t~0 CO cox OX r^ r^ CO H. O 04 CN -rh CO 04 oT oT oT O O O O O O 'd^o" o) c^ o o o o o o c c c c coco o^ o^ 0_ 0_ to CO CO CO r^ ^ '^ CO X 1-1 ►-' O Q ^ 8 O) 10 r^ X X 1 0) *~' o o 88 X O O cs r^ O O O r^ 10 LO 10 01 04 O) M O C 88 m CO O) X M o 00000 00000 X I- X X vO r- r^ r^ r^ r^ r^ 10 r^ r^ On oT CO 04" 04" 04' 88888 o_^ o^ o_^ o_ o^ CO x" •-'' C> t^ X r--x X 10 O r^ f^ fO t-i 04 04 Ol 11 04 00000 00000 00000 '^ o" -^ o" o" •1 vo w o r~- 04 r^ 04 10 w C-O CO CO 04" CO X 04 I r^ r- HH X O X 01 X X 04 r- o r^ t~-x 00000 00000 o_^ o^ o_^ o__ o__ ■=^ '^ 04" ^f x" r-- 04 10 04 o M^ r-.X_^ r--x 04" i-h" hT hT i-T 0000 8888 « H^ O H-. CO MD C^ O vO O '^ 0_^ O ^10 r^ '^ CO CO CO 88888 00000 M r^ lo H, X r--vo 04 r-^ o 10 M M too ro ^ CO CO CO CO w 04 w w r^ r^ to cox 04 lox vo to 00000 00000 o__ o o o o -^ -^ O" w rC M M to c^>o 04 04 t^ O to rO CO CO '^ CO to to r^ r^vo 04 0) VC vo T:f M M HH HH VO or rO ^ -^ CO d • CJ • : OS 1 : : : : C • C • • c • rH < II 5 1 ^ tr < Alpha. Germa Atlas. Alpha. Germa Albert Atlas. Alpha. Germa Alsen. Mean. 400 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. the present time. The value to be selected for any particu- lar case will depend upon the proportions of mixture and upon the degree of balancing of the sand and gravel or broken stone, although the influence of the latter cannot be definitely stated. It is not improbable that a -considera- ble portion at least of the variations in the results of the table are due to the varying degrees of natural balancing in the different test blocks. The value will also depend upon the age of the concrete. For all ordinary engineering constructions it is reasonable to take the coefficient of com- pressive elasticity at 2,500,000 to 3,000,000 pounds per square inch for a concrete mixture of i cement, 2 sand, and 4 gravel or broken stone. This table shows that practi- cally the same value may be taken for a concrete of i cement, 3 sand, and 6 gravel or broken stone, especially if the mate- rials are well selected and balanced. If the concrete is mixed in the proportions of i cement, 6 sand, and 1 2 gravel or broken stone, the coefficient of elasticity is seen to decrease materially and should not be taken higher than 1,500,000 pounds per square inch. Suitable quantities for mixtures other than those named in the table can be reasonably and safely selected from those afforded in it. These values show that the ratio of the coefficient of elasticity for steel over that for concrete may range from 10 to 20 for the varying conditions described. The more common practice is to make this ratio 15, i.e., on the basis of 30,000,000, for the modulus of elasticity for steel and 2,000,000 for concrete. The ratio of 12, however, is sometimes found by taking the same value as before for the modulus of steel, but 2,500,000 for the modulus of elasticity for concrete. The ratio of the two moduli is constantly used in the treatment of reinforced concrete work. A further consideration must be kept in view in con- Art. 67.] CEMENT— CEMENT MORTAR— CONCRETE. 401 nection with the vakie of the modulus of elasticity for con- crete, and that is the fact alluded to in previous pages that nearly all concrete and reinforced concrete work must usually, carry considerable loading, in the exigencies of con- struction, when it has attained no greater age than perhaps 10 to 30 days, i.e., before the m.odulus of elasticity (or ultimate resistance) has attained its full value. Again, a large mass of concrete, as actually built, cannot reasonably be expected to have as high a modulus as 12 -inch cubes or other com- paratively small pieces made and tested in a laboratory. For all these reasons it is prudent to take a rather low value of the modulus of elasticity for the analytic work of design. The following tabulated statement shows ultimate resist- ances per square inch of 12 -inch cubes of concrete obtained in the Testing Laboratory of the Department of Civil Engineering of Columbia University in 191 2 by Mr. James S. Macgregor, in charge of the laboratory. GRAVEL CONCRETE; i Cement, 2^ Sand, 5 Gravel. Ult; Resistance Pounds per Sq. In. Max. Mean. Min. Alsen . . . . Atlas. . . . Atlas . . . . Iron Clad Iron Clad Lehigh. . . Lehigh . . . Vulcanite Vulcanite Alsen . . . . Alsen*. . . 1,917 1,905 2,223 1,789^ 1,848 2,717 2,278 1,162^ 1,735 2,322 1,202 1 = 773 1,796 2,191 1,553* 1,778 2,584 2,139 1,097* 1,593 2,088 1,023 1,557 1,706 2,152 1,431* 1,657 2,431 2,007 1,047* 1,518 2,006 944 Age of all cubes 42 days * Gravel unwashed. The coarse aggregate for all cubes was river gravel with stones up to i-inch size. Some of the gravel contained an excessive amount of dirt or other fine material, which 402 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. Table II. MEAN ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE REvSISTANCES OF 12-INCH PORT- LAND-CEMENT CONCRETE CUBES. Mean Ultimate Resistance, Coefficient of Elasticity in Portland Cements. Pounds per Square Inch at Atre. Pounds per Square Inch at Age. Brand; C jmposition. 7 Days. 1,724 I Mo. 3 Mos. 6 Mos. I Mo. 3 Mos. 6 Mos. \ I c, 2 s., 4 b. St. 2,238 2,702 3,506 2,500,000 3,571,000 5,000,000 Say lots. . ■{ I c, 3 s., 6 b. St. 1,625 2,568 2,882 3,567 2,778,000 4,167,000 2,500,000 1 I c, 6 s.,i2 b.st. 67s 800 1,128 1,542 833.000 2,273,000 2,083,000 \ 1 c, 2 s., 4 b. St. 1,387 2,428 2,966 3,953 3,125,000 4,167,000 3,125,000 Atlas . . . ■< I c, 3 s., 6 b. St. 1,050 1,816 2,538 3,170 3,125,000 2,778,000 3,571,000 i 1 f I C, t) S.,I2b.St. c, O S., 2 b. St. .■594 1,090 1,201 1,583 1,316,000 1,136,000 1,786,000 3,294 Alpha. . . \ I c, 2 s., 4 b. St. 902 2,420 3,123 4,411 2,083,000 4,167,000 3,125,000 c, 3 s., 6 b. St. 892 5,150 2,355 2,750 2,083,000 3,571,000 4,167.000 c, 6 s.,i2 b.st. 564 1,218 1,257 1,532 1,667,000 1,786,000 1,923,000 f; c, O S., 2 b. St. c, 2 s., 4 b. St. 2,734 3,246 2,642 3.858 3,082 5,129 3,643 3,571,000 2,778,000 3,571,000 4,167,000 Germania -i c, 3 s., 6 b. St. 1,550 2,174 2,486 2,930 2,273,000 2,778,000 3,125,000 c, 6 s.,i2 b.st. 759 987 063 815 961,000 2,083,000 1,786,000 c, O S., 2 b. St. 3,118 3,240 3,710 5,332 2,273,000 2,273,000 3,571,000 Alsen ...-il c, 2 s., 4 b. St. 1,592 2,269 2,608 3,612 2,788,000 2,778,000 4,167,000 c, 3 s., 6 b. St. 1,438 2,114 2,349 3,026 2,273,000 2,778,000 3,571,000 c, 6s.,i2 b. St. 417 873 844 1,323 1,562,000 1,562,000 1,786,000 10-INCH CUBES. Alpha. . . I c, o s., 2 b. st 5,463 6,556 5,000,000 In this table each ultimate resistance is a mean of four to six tests. Table III. MEAN ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE RESISTANCES OF 12-INCH PORT- LAND-CEMENT CONCRETE CUBES WITH LOAD TAKEN ON 8'^ BY 8''.25 PLATE ON ONE FACE. Portland Cements. Brand; Composition. Mean Ultimate Resistance, Pounds per Square Inch at Age. I Month. 3 Months. 6 Months. • 11 ^ I c, S., 2 b. St... Alpha--- ]." 2" 4 " ... Germania -;;?,- °?,-; ^^- A.sen....|;f,-.°?;.4\^t;;; 5,089 3.287 4,327 3,587 4,087 3.233 4.531 3.522 3,426 5,669 6,671 4,582 6,382 4,983 Each ultimate resistance is a mean of three tests. A view exhibiting the failure under compression of a i2-in. concrete cube. The composition is I Portland cement, I sand, and 4.5 broken stone. The age of the concrete was I year, 8 months, 23 days, and the ultimate compressive resistance attained was 4481 lbs. per sq. in. {To face page 402.) Art. 67.] CEMENT— CEMENT MORTAR—CONCRETE. 403 accounts for the low values of the starred ultimate resist- ances per square inch, as indicated by the footnote. The age of all the cubes was 42 days, also as indicated in the table. These results are unusually valuable in one respect, in that the cubes were not mixed in the laboratory, but in the field, where actual work was being done, and hence received no special care in the operation. Tables II and III contain the results taken from the " U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Materials " for 1899. They exhibit the ultimate compressive resistances of cubes of Portland-cement concrete, the cements being among the well-known brands. The ages of these cubes vary from seven days to six months. The data show clearly the increase of ultimate resistance with the ages of the cubes, and the same observation applies to the three columns showing the coefficients of elasticity at one month, three months, and six months. The compositions of the different concretes of Table II are those quite generally employed in engineering practice. Table III exhibits the ultimate resistances of the same concretes, but with the pressure applied to the 12-inch cubes on areas 8 inches by 8^ inches, this end being at- tained by the use of steel plates. As would be expected, the ultimate resistances are seen to be considerably greater than are found with the total load distributed over the entire surface of a cube. The broken stone used in the cubes, the results of whose tests are given in Tables II and III, was a conglomerate from Roxbury, Mass., and the sand was coarse, clean, and sharp. The voids of the broken stone measured 49.5 per cent, of their total volume. Table IV, taken from the same volume of the '' U. S. Report of Tests of Metal and Other Materials'' as Tables II and III, exhibits the ultimate compressive resistances of 404 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. Table IV. MEAN ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE RESISTANCES OF MORTAR AND CONCRETE 12-INCH CUBES. Brand; Composition. Mean Ultimate Resistance, Pounds per Square Inch at Age of Four Months. Weight per Cubic Foot, Pounds. Coefficient of Elasticity, Pounds per Square Inch. Alpha Portland f I c, I s., o b " 2 " O ^I Li Atlas Portland Star Portland Saylors Portland Germania I Portland Alpha Portland Steel slag r I I Hoffman Rosendale Norton \ ^ Rosendale ) St. s., o " 4 o 2 " O 2 " 4 4,371 2,506 1,812 829 484 185 5,570 5,045 3,979 4,353 5,306 1,743 1,939 t 741 643 277 t 332 t 136.5 134-2 133-8 120.9 119-5 116. 9 III. 5 141.5 134-5 134-7 134-7 137-3 126.6 152. 1 t X27.7 125.2 120.7 146.2 t 3,571,000 3,125,000 1,786,000 6,250,000 4,167,000 3,125,000 2,500,000 3,571,000 1,190,000 2,500,000 * Granite dust. t Age, 3 months. X Trap rock, broken stone. Table V. CHEMICAL ANALYSES OF PORTLAND AND STEEL-SLAG CEMENTS. Cement. Silica. Oxide of Iron. Alumina. Lime. Magnesia. Sulphur Trioxide. Carbon Dioxide. Alpha. . . 20 2.8 10.87 58.66 3-35 1-34 2.56 Star. . . . 21.73 2-5 9-47 56.34 3-61 1. 91 3-94 Standard 22.5 2.6 1 1 . 98 51-44 3.61 1-57 5-96 Alsen. . . 20.67 2 . I 14.6 42. 16 2.32 2.32 4-45 Steel. . . . 31 .02 Trace 10.9 57-31 4-05 3.36 4.81 Art. 67. CEMENT— CEMENT MORTAR— CONCRETE. 405 the mortar and concrete 12-inch cubes described therein. These results need no explanation, as they are similar to those which have already been given, but it is well to note that the last four lines of the table give results belonging to two brands of natural cement. There are also shown one test of a steel-slag cement mortar cube and one of concrete. Table V exhibits the chemical analyses of the Portland and steel-slag cements named in Table IV. These analyses exhibit about the usual composition of the various grades of cement to which they belong. Table VI. COMPRESSION TESTS OF 12-INCH CUBES OF PORTLAND-CEMENT CINDER CONCRETE. Brand. Composition. Age when Tested, Days. Ultimate Resistance in Lbs. per Sq. In. Coefficient of Elasticity, Pounds. Max. Mean. Least. Germania . I c. I c. I c. I c. I c. I c. I c. I c. I c. , I s , 2 S , 2 S , 2 S , 3S , I S , 2 S . I s , 2 S , 3 cir , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 3 , 5 , 3 , 5 der 99 and 102 102 98 98 and loi 91 90 90 90 90 3 3 3 3 I 3 3 3 no. 4 112. 8 107.9 106.3 103.5 114. 1 no 116. 3 109.9 2,023 1,701 1.344 1,114 Hi 2,988 1,715 2,580 1,263 2,001 1,634 1.325 1,084 788 2,834 1,600 2,414 1,223 1,975 1,589 1.295 1,052 2,780 1,402 2,295 1,200 Alpha....*. Atlas.*.*.'.' : 2,500,000 1,279,000 3,125,000 857,000 The results exhibited in Table VI are interesting as belonging to Portland-cement cinder concrete and they are of- practical importance because such concrete is used in many buildings especially for floors, in consequence of its weighing much less than ordinary broken-stone concrete. The ages of these cinder concrete cubes is seen to run from 90 to 102 days, which is sufficient to give nearly the full ultimate resistance of such material. It is seen, however, that cinder concrete is materially less strong or capable of ultimate compressive resistance than either broken-stone or gravel concrete having the same proportions of mixture in its composition. The column giving the weight in 4o6 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. pounds per cubic foot shows that cinder concrete weighs but about three fourths as much as that made with gravel and broken stone. The data contained in this table were taken from the '' U. S. Report of Tests of Metal and Other Materials" for 1898. Messrs. Harold Perrine, C.E. and George E. Strv^nan, C.E. presented a paper to the Am. Soc. C. E. in 191 5 describing their extended investigation* in " Cinder Con- crete for Floor Construction between Steel Beams." The Table VII is taken from that paper and each value is a mean of ten results, except those in the second column Table VIL C. S. Cin. 1:2:5 Continuous rnixer. Coltrin. Alsen. C. S. Cin. 1:1:5 By hand turned twice. Dragon. C. S. Cin. 1:2:5 Batch mixer. Vulcanite. C. S. Cin. Method Cement . Ransome. Mixer, Atlas. Sand Long Island Bank Sand, North Shore. Anthracite. Cindeis. Ice plant. Local hotel steam plant. Local. Local office building steam plant. Weight, lbs. per cu. ft One month test: Ult. Resist., lbs. per sq. in. E, lbs. per sq. in Two months test: Ult. Resist., lbs. per sq. in. E, lbs. per sq. in Six months test: Ult. Resist., lbs. per sq. in. E, lbs. per sq. in 107 407 924,600 701 1,134,000 933 971,000 913 993,000 100 507 857,400 662 1,030,000 754 1,050,000 813 956,000 107 818 1,230,000 1,254 1,740,000 1,744 1,348,000 1.465 1,200,000 109 980 1,492,000 1,035 1,428,250 1,478' 1,276,000 1,475 1,320,000 One year test: Ult. Resist., lbs. per sq. in. E lbs per sq in . . * Made in the testing laboratory of the Dept. of Civil Engineering, Col- umbia University by the aid of the Wm. R. Peters, Jr. memorial research fund. Art. 67.] CEMENT— CEMENT MORTAR— CONCRETE. 407 from the right side of the Table, which are means of nearly that number. The compressive test specimens v/ere cinder- concrete cylinders 8 inches in diameter and 16 inches long. The values given in the Table are representative of good structural cinder concrete. A large number of tests, the results of which need not be given here, have shown that gravel may advantageously be used, in the interests of economy, in the place of broken stone for concrete. On the whole, the broken-stone concrete is probably stronger than that made with gravel, but the difference is not material for all ordinary cases. The gravel should not be water-worn, but have sharp, gritty surfaces to which the setting cement may strongly bond itself. All sizes from the largest permissible down to coarse sand should be taken, and when so balanced the voids may be reduced as low as 20 per cent, of the total volume of the gravel or even lower. This balancing of the broken stone or gravel enhances both economy and resisting qualities. A careful examination of all the Tables, I to V, shows that reasonably well-made broken-stone concrete may carry a load of 300 to 500 pounds per square inch without exceeding i to |, or possibly |, of its ultimate resistance, the composition of the mixture being i cement, 2 sand, and 4 broken stone, or perhaps i cement, 3 sand, and 5 broken stone. It is possible that this may be an under statement of the capacity of the concrete if the mixture is as well balanced as it should be. It is a mistake, as has been shown repeatedly by actual test, to screen out the finer portions of the broken stone or to attempt to secure an approximately even sand grain. It is conducive to an increased resistance as it is to increased economy to balance the sand, gravel, or broken stone by using all the varying sizes between the least and the greatest. Indeed, in many 4o8 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. Table VIII. COMPRESSIVE RESISTANCES OF 12"xl2' CONCRETE COLUMNS. .c*; Age. Days. W'ght Ult. Composition. in Lbs. per Resist, ir Lbs. per Cu.Ft. Sq. In. I cement, 3 sand, 4-1^" | . 2 47 ) broken stone, 2-Y' broken > 145 1,072 2 47 1 stone ) 145 917 4 47 do. 144 1,067 4 47 do. 144 1,132 6 46 do. 844 6 46 do. 143 1,048 8 42 do. 145 935 Hand mixed 8 42 do. 145 900 lO 40 do. 142 909 lO 41 do. 143 807 12 39 do. 144 947 12 39 do. 144 980 14 34 do. 145 936 14 35 do. 145 907 J A-( I cement, 3 gravel, 4-1 i'' i 1,185 2 VA broken stone, 2-|" broken ,'- 145 2 4/| stone ) 147 1,183 4 48 do. 143 980 4 48 do. 144 936 6 48 do. 146 1,131 6 48 do. 146 1,200 8 42 do. 146 1,108 8 42 do. 146 1,086 lO 41 do. 146 1,015 lO 42 do. 146 1,000 12 37 do. 149 1,400 12 39 do. 148 1.500 14 35 do. 148 858 14 6 6 35 42 ( 42 1 do. I cement, 6 gravel, 8-1^" broken stone, 4-I" broken ■ stone 148 143 144 807 500 467 Machine mixed 6 6 I cement, 7 gravel, 8f-ii" 42 42' br'k'n stone, 4^-f'' br'k'n - stone ) 141 142 427 436 6 6 I cement, 5 gravel, 6f-ii" 146 708 45 45" br'k'n stone, 3^-!" br'k'n Y stone 146 747 6 6 46 ' 46 I cement, 4 gravel, 5^-1^" ) 146 900 br'k'n stone, 2§-f" br'k'n V stone ) 145 797 12 36 ■ 39 I cement, 3 gravel, 6— |" [ 150 1,250 "] Reinforced with 12 broken stone ) 149 1,700 , (^ 4-f" cold-twisted j steel rods embed- J ded in the concrete ( I Silica Portland cement, 2 ) 9 580^ coarse clean sand, 3 quartz >• 148 2,548 ( gravel (^'-2") ) Art. 68.] BRICKS AND BRICK PIERS. 409 cases it may be advisable to use the entire product of the crusher. The relation between the ultimate compressive resist- ance of concrete made with balanced material and the lenofth of column is illustrated by the results given in Table VIII, which has been collated and arranged from the " U. vS. Report of Tests of Metal and Other Materials "for 1897. The heights of column range from 2 to 14 feet. While there are some exceptions, the rule is general that, other things being equal, the ultimate resistance decreases as the length or height of column increases. On the whole, the machine- mixed material appears to be a little stronger than the hand-mixed, but the difference is not substantial except for the 8, 10, and 12 feet lengths. Art. 68. — Bricks and Brick Piers. The ultimate compressive resistance of bricks depends largely upon the manner in which they are tested and the care with which the surfaces pressed are filled out with a proper cushion and made truly parallel to the bearing surfaces of the testing machine. The best of bricks as produced for the market do not have opposite faces truly parallel, and hence when they are placed in a testing machine for testing to failure the pressure will be con- centrated at different points and the bricks will be broken partly by bending before the full ultimate compressive resistance is developed unless the pressed surfaces are made true by some kind of a ciishion. This cushioning is frequently and perhaps usually done with plaster of pans, as in the case of the tests of bricks at the U. S. Arsenal, Watertown, IMass., the results of which are given in Table 11. Again, a brick tested on edge will give a less ultimate resistance per square inch than when tested fiat and the 4IO COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. resistance on end per square inch of section will be less than that on edge. When the brick is tested flatwise, even when truly surfaced with a cushion such as plaster of paris, it is a very short block and the friction of the pressed surfaces on the bearing faces of the testing machine is sufficient to give the compressed material substantial lat- eral support, not permitting it to separate and crush away readily. It will be found, therefore, that when blocks are tested flatwise the ultimate resistances per square inch, as a whole, will be much higher than when tested on edge. This condition of things holds to some extent when the bricks are tested on edge, so that an endwise test will give the ultimate compressive resistance per square inch some- what less than that found when the brick is tested on edge. An endwise test of the brick more truly represents the ultimate compressive resistance of the material than a test either flatwise or on edge. A series of tests of a variety of bricks and terra-cotta made in 1896 at the U. S. Arsenal at Watertown, Mass., gave moduli of elasticity about as follow^s: Pressed brick, 1,000,000 to 3,000,000 pounds per square inch, the hardest varieties giving the higher values and the softer material, the lower values; hard buff brick and terra-cotta, 4,000,000 to 4,800,000 pounds per square inch. Some soft-face brick gave moduli of elasticity varying from about 400,000 to 890,000 pounds per square inch. These determinations of the modulus were made with intensities of pressure from about 1000 to 4000 or 5000 pounds " per square inch. Such experimental results ordinarily show some erratic or abnormal features and these tests were no exception to that rule. The coefficients of thermal expansion and contraction per degree Fahr., were at the same time found to range from .00000205 to .00000754, the larger of these values A solid i6-incli square-face brick pier laid in lime mortar It was tested at the U. S. Arsenal, Water- town, Mass., and gave an ultimate compressive resistance of 1337 lbs. per sq. in. The pier is shown as it existed after failure. {To face page 410.) Art. 68.1 BRICKS AND BRICK PIERS. 411 being about 25 per cent, higher than the coefficient for concrete. In the Proceedings of the Am. Soc. C. E. for March, 1903, Mr. S. M. Turrill, Assoc. Am. Soc. C. E., gives the results of a large number of tests of common building brick, 2 in. by 4 in. by 8 in. in size, manufactured at Horse- heads, N. Y. The following table is fairly representative of the results of Mr. Turrill's tests, made with great care at the civil -engineering laboratories of Cornell University: TEST OF COMMON BUILDING BRICK. Brick Tested. No. of Tests. Ultimate Compressive Resistance, Pounds per Square Inch. Greatest. Mean. Least. On end 12 12 12 3.763 3,913 5,463 2,628 2,832 3,995 1,234 1,897 2,665 On edge Flat These bricks were tested in their natural condition as delivered from the kiln ready for use. Other tests were made of the same brick saturated with water and after being reheated in a suitable oven. This latter test was designed to disclose the quality of brick after having passed through a conflagration. The satu- rated bricks tested on end and on edge showed material loss of resistance below that of their natural condition, but those tested flat showed large gains. The reheated bricks exhibited large gains in all three modes of testing. These bricks were obviously not of hard-burned, high-resisting character. The coefficient of elasticity of twelve of these bricks ran from 540,000 to 1,815,000 pounds per square inch, with a mean value of 1,305,000 pounds. 412 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. A large number of determinations of the ultimate com- pressive resistances of bricks were made among the earlier experimental investigations at the U. S. Arsenal at Water- town, Mass. These results showed values for hard-burned bricks varying from about 8,000 to about 12,000 pounds per square inch with an average of about 9,000 pounds per square inch when tested on edge. What may be termed medium bricks, i.e., intermediate between hard-burned strongest bricks and common building bricks, gave results varying from about 4,000 to about 8,000 pounds per square inch, with an average value of about 5,500 pounds per square inch w^hen tested on edge. The following results of tests of three different kind of brick and hollow tile were obtained by Mr. J. S. Mac- gregor in the testing laboratory of the Department of Civil Engineering at Columbia University. The ultimate resis- tances given are the means of seven sets of tests, eight in each set. Half bricks were tested flatwise. This mode of testing obviously yields much higher values than if the bricks were tested on edge. Lbs. per sq. in. Max. Mean. Min. Common Hudson River, moulded Stiff Clay, side cut Harvard, over-bumed . 4.357 2,537 3,203 2,305 6,642 2,006 2,072 The hollow tiles were of two types, six-core and two-core. The cross-sections were 10 inches by 12 inches, 8 inches by 12 inches, 8 inches by 16 inches, and 12 inches by 12 inches. The length or height of each set of tiles was 12 inches with one exception of 8 inches. The tiles were all tested with the webs (or cores) vertical and the net sectional areas Art. 68. BRICKS AND BRICK PIERS. 413 varied from about 41 square inches to 60 square inches. The ultimate resistances per square inch on both the net sections and the gross sections are as given below. There were five sets of ten tests each and the results given are the greatest, mean and least results of the five sets. Lbs. per sq. in. Max. Mean. Min. \et section 5.718 2,680 4.598 2,090 3,826 1,710 Gross section Brick Piers. Inasmuch as tests of brick piers have shown that their ultimate compressive resistances run only from about 1000 to 4500 pounds per square inch, depending upon the character of the mortar, it is seen that in such masonry a small portion only of the compressive resistance of the bricks is developed in piers and other similar brick-masonry masses. These latter results doubtless depend largely upon the cementing material. There is no question that the ulti- mate resisting capacity of brick masonry is affected greatly by the resisting capacity of the mortar, and the same general observation can be applied to other classes of masonry. There is more than this, however, affecting the carrying capacity of brick and other grades of masonry as compared with the ultimate compressive resistance of the bricks used in the one case of masonry or of the individual stones employed in the other. The texture or character of the mass of burned clay com- posing the brick is exceedingly variable, both in conse- quence of the varying mixture of the material in the bricks 414 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. before being burned and in consequence of the varying degree of burning in each individual brick. Again, what- ever may be the care in placing the bricks in a testing- machine, including the cushioning of the ends, it is prac- ticably impossible to secure anything like a uniform bear- ing upon either the ends, sides, or beds. Their irregular dimensions and exterior surfaces and the varying quality of the materials, even in the best of brick, introduce into their resisting capacity elements of variation which are frequently so great as to lead to abnormal results. While the mortar used in forming a mass of brick masonry im- doubtedly fills up many irregularities of surface, voids of considerable magnitude frequently remain unfilled. The consequence of these uncontrollable elements in a mass of brick masonry is always a material reduction of ultimate carrying capacity and frequently a large reduc- tion. However excellent in quality, therefore, the mor- tar or binding materia' in a brick-masonry pier may be, it is inevitable that there will be not only a wide range in ultimate compressive resistance, but in all cases a material reduction below that exhibited by the individual bricks when tested by themselves. Profs. Arthur N. Talbot and Duff A. Abrams reported, in Bulletin Xo. 27 (1908) of the University of Illinois, the results of a series of sixteen tests of brick piers and the same number of hollow terra-cotta block piers. Two grades of brick were used, a hard-burned shale brick and a soft under-burned clay brick. Eighteen of the former tested on beds gave : Lbs. per sq. in. Max. . Mean. Min. Ult. Comp. Resist 14.150 10,690 7.030 Art. 68. J BRICKS AND BRICK PIERS. Sixteen of the soft bricks similariy tested gave: 415 Lbs. per sq. in. Max. Mean. Min. Ult. Comp. Resist 5.670 3.920 2,190 The hollow terra-cotta blocks were about 4 inches by 8 inches, 4 inches by Sj inches and 4 inches by 8j inches in cross-section, the height or length being generally 8 inches, but 4 inches in some cases. These blocks had three cores, two i| inches square each and one i^ inches by J inch. Table I AVERAGE VALUES FOR BRICK COLUMNS Columns. Ratio of Ratio of Average Ultimate Ultimate Ultimate. of Col- of Col- Load, lb. umn to umn to per sq. m. Ultimate Ultimate of Brick. of "A" E Initial Modulus of Elasticity. Num- ber of Tests. Shale Building Brick. A-Well laid, 1-3 portland cement mortar, 67 days Well laid, 1-3 portland ce- ment mortar, 6 months. Well laid, 1-3 portland ce- ment mortar, eccen- trically loaded, 68 days. Poorly laid, 1-3 portland cement mortar, 67 days Well laid, 1-5 portland ce- ment mortar, 65 days. . Well laid, 1-3 natural ce- ment mortar, 67 days. . Well laid, 1-2 lime mortar, 66 days 3365 •31 1. 00 3950 •37 1. 18 2800 .26 •83 2920 .27 .87 2225 .21 .66 1750 .16 •52 1450 •14 •43 4,780,000 5,025,000 4,400,000 3,525,000 3,250,000 800,000 104,000 Under-burned Clay Brick. Well laid, 1-3 portland ce- ment mortar, 63 days . . 1060 27 31 433.000 4i6 COMPRESSION. (Ch. VIII. The brick columns were about 12 J inches by 12^ inches in section and 10 feet long. The mortar joints were about f inches thick. Failure of these columns took place chiefly by vertical cracks through joints and bricks. Table I gives the mean results of these tests. The characteristics and dimensions of the terra-cotta columns or piers and the average results of tests per square inch of gross area are given in Table la. Table Ia. AVERAGE VALUES FOR TERRA COTTA COLUMNS Characteristics of columns. Number of Columns in Average Average Ultimate Unit Load lb. per sq. in. Ratio Ultimate of Column over Ultimate of Block (Gross area). Initial Modulus of Elasticity. 8^X8| in. 8|Xi3in. 13X13 in. 1-2 Portland cement mortar. All well laid and centrally loaded. 2 2885 ■83 2 3070 .89 2 2955 •85 2,194,000 2,194,000 2,194,000 12^ X 125 m. 1-3 Portland cement mortar, well laid unless noted. Central load Eccentric load Poorly laid, central load . . . Poorly laid, eccentric load . . Inferior blocks, central load. 1-5 mortar, central load . . . 2 3790 74 4300* 83* I 3470 (55 I 3305 64 I 3IIO 60 I 3050 59 2 3350 65 2,765,000 2,330,000 3,200,000 2,500,000 2,300,000 2,690,000 * Estimated. The average age of columns when tested was 67 days. The joints of the columns were about | inch thick and the blocks were laid on end. Failures were sudden and accompanied or caused, by longitudinal cracks. In fact, An 8 X i6-in.-face brick pier witli i6-iii. square base laid in lime mortar. It was tested at the U. S. Arsenal, Watertown, Mass., and gave an ultimate compressive resistance of 1233 ^^s. per sq. in. on tlie upper section and 601 lbs. per sq. in. on the lower section. The cracks due to failure are clearly- seen. i^To face pc.ge 417.) Art. 68.1 BRICKS AND BRICK PIERS. 417 the chief manner of fracture of both brick and terra-cotta cokimns or piers is by longitudinal cracking. Table II exhibits the results of testing piers of brick masonry in the Gov^^sting machine at Watertown, Mass. It is taken from '^ Ex. Doc. No. 35, 49th Congress, ist Session." The dimensions of piers are shown in the table; also the kinds of mortar used and the grades of brick. The " common " and ** face " brick, both hard burnt, were from North Cambridge, Mass. The other bricks Table IL CRUSHING STRENGTH OF BRICK PIERS. Height Section Weight Ultimate No. of P ier, of Pier, Composition of Mortar. per Resistance, Ft. Ins. Ins. Cu. Ft., Lbs. Lbs. per Sq. In. I I 4 8X8 I lime, 3 sand. 137-4 2,520^ 2 6 8 8X8 I " 3 " 133-5 1,877 , 3 I 4 8X8 I Portland cement, 3 sand. 136.3 3,776 S 4 6 8 8X8 I " "3 " 133-5 2,249 ^ 5 6 2 2 12X12 12X12 I hme, 3 sand. I " 3 " 1,940 1,900 ■| 7 10 12X12 I " 3 " 131-7 1,511 0) 8 10 12X12 I " 3 " 125.0 1,807 9 2 12X 12 I Portland cement, 2 sand. 3,670 10 10 12X 12 I " "2 " 132.2 2,253J II I 4 8X8 I lime, 3 sand. 135-6 2,440^ • 12 6 8 8X8 .1 ;| 3 " 133-6 1,540 -^ 13 2 12X12 T- 3 2,150 -^ 14 2 12X 12 I .. 3 " 2,050 X^ 15 9 9 12X 12 r 3 ' 131-5 I 118 !- 1^ 16 10 12X12 I '' 3 " 136.0 I ',587 § 17 10 12X 12 I Portland cernent, 2 sand. 131 . 2,003 5 2,720 18 2 8 16X 16 I ," " 2 " 19 10 16X 16 I' " " 2 " i;887jO 20 2 12X12 I Hme, 3 sand. 1,370 Bav 21 6 12X 12 I " 3 " 1,133 >■ State 22 6 12X12 I " 3 " iig.7 1,210 bi-icks. 23* 6 12X12 I lime, 3 sand. 118. 2 i,33i1 1,21 1 24t 6 12X 12 I " 3 " 118. 1 25 26 10 10 12X12 12X12 I 3 ' 120.3 118. 1,174 C/J 924 -^ 27 10 8X 12 I 3 " 107.0 940 1 -d 28 TO 12X16 ^ " 3 '' 118. 7 773 V-^ 29 6 12X 12 I 3 .1 Rosendale cement. I 20. 6 1,646 ( (U 30 6 12X12 I Rosendale cement, 2 sand. 123.0 1,972 ! 03 ' 31 6 12X12 I lime, 3 sand, 2 Portland cement. I 20 . 3 1,411 (^ 32 6 12X 12 I Portland cement, 2 sand. 119 . 7 1,792 1 2,375J 33 6 12X 12 Clear Portland cement. 126.6 * Joints broken every 6 courses. t Bricks laid on edge. 41 8 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. were from the Bay State Brick Co., of Boston and Ca.m- bridge, Mass., and were medium burnt. The brick piers were built of bricks ''laid on beds and joints broken every course,, with the exception of two 1 2 by 1 2 piers, one of which had joints broken every sixth course, and one had bricks laid on edge. ''They were built in the month of May, 1882," and "their ages when tested ranged from 14 to 24 months." They were all tested between cast-iron plates. "Loads were gradually applied in regular increments, . . . returning at regular intervals to the initial load. . . . Cracks made their appearance at the surfaces of the piers and were gradually enlarged before the maximum loads were reached. Final failure occurred by the partial crushing of some of the bricks, and by the enlargement of these cracks, which took a longitudinal direction and occurred in the bricks of one course opposite the end joints of the bricks in the adjacent courses. This manner oi failure was common to all piers. It is important to notice that the resistance of the piers varies with the strength of the mortar used in the joints. Brick piers, 8 inches by 8 inches in cross-section and 6 feet high, built of Hudson River common brick, and others of Sykesville face brick were tested to destruction in the testing laboratory of the Department of Civil Engineer- ing of Columbia University in 191 5 by Mr. J. S. Macgregor, in charge of the laboratory, with the following results, two of the piers being built of Hudson River common brick and three of the Sykesville face brick. Lbs. per sq. in. Max. Mean. Min. Hudson River Common 902 3,436 812 3.363 722 3.289 Sykesville Face ' Art. 68.] BRICKS AND BRICK PIERS. 419 These piers also gave the two following values for the modulus of elasticity in compression : Hudson River Common E= 748,000 lbs. per sq. in. Sykesville Face £^ = 2,860,000 lbs. per sq. in. The age of the columns was 60 days. The ends were finished with plaster of paris to secure square and uniform bearings. The two moduli were determined at intensities of stress less than 250 pounds per square inch. Mr. Macgregor also obtained the ultimate resistances of three piers, 74 inches high built up of single, approximately 8-inch by 12 -inch hollow tile giving a gross horizontal cross- section of, 94 square inches and a net section of actual tile material of 50 square inches. These tile piers had f-inch joints filled with Portland cement mortar, i cement, 3 sand, the age of the piers being 60 days. The ultimate compressive resistances per square inch for the three piers were as follows : Gross Section 1,236; 1,239; ^^^ i»ii7 lbs. per sq. in. Net Section 2,324; 2,329; and 2,100 lbs. per sq. in. These tile piers failed in the blocks in most cases, but in other cases in the joints. The failures of the blocks showed vertical cracks as well as horizontal and some spalling. The results of all the experimental investigations available in connection with brick masonry and experiences in the best class of engineering work indicate that masonry laid up of good hard-burnt common brick may safely carry a working load of 15 to 20 tons per square foot or 210 to 280 pounds per square inch. In the construction of this class of masonry where the duties are to be severe it is of the utmost importance that the best class of Portland cement mortar be employed, as the carrying capacity of brick masonry depends largely if not chiefly upon the character of the mortar. 420 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. Art. 69. — Natural Building Stones. The ultimate compressive resistance of natural building stones is affected greatly by the condition of the rock from which the cube or other test-piece is taken. That portion of a ledge exposed to the weather may be much weakened and, in fact, even disintegrated, but the material at a short distance from the exterior surface may have the greatest resistance of v/hich the particular kind of stone is capable of yielding. Again, the compressive resistance of stones on their natural beds is much greater than when tested on edge. In the tests which follow the test -pieces were fairly representative of such quality of stones as would pass insfjection in first-class engineering work, and it is to be assumed that they were compressed on their beds unless otherwise stated. Table I taken from the " U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Materials " for 1894, exhibits the coefficients of elasticity, ultimate compressive resistances, weights per cubic foot and coefficients of thermal expansion per degree Fahr., as well as the ratio, r, between lateral and direct strains for the granites, marbles, limestones, sandstones, and other stones shown in the left-hand column. The coefficients of elasticity and of thermal expansion were determined by employing blocks of stone about 24 ins. long and 6 ins. by 4 ins. in cross-section, the gauged length being 20 inches, but the ultimate compressive resistances were found by testing 4-inch, cubes. The number of tests for each coefficient of elasticit}^ and ultimate resistance varied from one to nine but were generally two or three. The general run of values of ultimate resistance will be found to conform as well as could be expected with results for the same kind of stones in the tables which follow. Art. 69.] NATURAL BUILDING STONES. 421 It will be observed that the marbles are the heaviest stones, although the granites are not much lighter. There is a large difference, however, between the sandstones and the marbles or granites. Table I. NATURAL STONES IN COMPRESSION ON BEDS. Stone. Coefficient of Elasticity, Lbs. per Sq. In. Ultimate Compressive Resistance, Lbs. per Sq. In. Weight per Cu. Ft., Lbs. Coefficient of Expan- sion per Degree Fahr. r. Max. Mean. Min. Branford granite, Conn .... 8,712,100 15,854 15,707 15,560 162 .00000398 I 4 Milford granite. Mass 7,676,750 25,738 23,773 19,258 162.5 .00000418 I 5.8 Troy granite, N. H 6,118,850 28,768 26,174 23,580 164.7 .00000337 r 5-1 Milford pink granite, Mass. . Pigeon Hill granite, Mass. . . Creole marble Ga. ... 6,200,350 8,095,250 7,993,-00 10 427,800 22,162 20,716 I5,5T2 13,4^5 18,988 19,670 13,466 12,619 15,756 17,772 1 1,420 11,822 161. 9 161. 5 170 167.8 I Cherokee marble, Ga . 00000441 2.9 r S.7 Etowah marble, Ga 8,792,600 14,217 14,053 13,888 169.8 I ^..6 Kennesaw marble, Ga 8,217,950 10,771 9,563 8,354 168. I I 3.9 T V,! AT 168.6 .00000454 . 00000202 Marble Hill marble, Ga. . . . 9,950,850 11,532 11,505 11,478 I S.4 Tuckhoe marble, N. Y IS 173,200 19,223 16,203 11,640 178 .00000441 4- 5 Mount Vernon limestone, Ky 3,278,400 11,566 7,647 5,247 I39-I .00000464 4 Oolitic limestone, Ind North River bluestone, N. Y. Manson slate, Maine Cooper sandstone, Oregon .. . 5,475,300 EE ~zz .00000437 .00000519 22,947 14,920 Cooper sandstone, Oregon . . 3,021,350 16,366 15,284 14,203 159-8 .00000177 II Maynard sandstone, Mass. . . 2,034,650 10,538 9,880 9,223 133-5 .00000567 - Kibbe sandstone, Mass 2,066,800 10,663 10,363 10,063 133-4 .00000577 S- ^ Worcester sandstone, Mass. . 2,668,750 9,869 9,763 9,656 136.6 .00000517 4.4 Potomac sandstone, Md. . . Olvmpia sandstone, Oregon. Chuckanut sandstone. Wash. DvckerhofF's cement * Yammerthal flint lime- 13,441 12,790 T 2,665 11,389 23,724 28,647 I 2,061 10,276 18,496 . 000005 . 0000032 .00000578 28,951 * From Report of 42 2 COMPRESSION. fCh. VIII. The coefficients of elasticity generally range considerably higher than those for concrete in Art. 67, but the sand- stones form an exception to this observation. The coeffi- cients of thermal expansion vary between rather wide limits but they are mostly a little lower only than those determined for concrete. The coefficient for the Dycker- hoff cement is very close to those exhibited for cement mortar and concrete in Art. 60. The column headed r, giving the ratios between lateral and direct strains, contains interesting data. From what has been shown in Art. 4 it is apparent that the total volume of the test-pieces was considerably reduced by the compression to which the cubes were subjected. The coefficients of elasticity were determined at in- tensities of pressure running from 1000 or 2000 pounds per square inch up to 8000 or 10,000 pounds per square inch. A coefficient would first be determined at comparatively low pressures, as from 1000 to 3000 pounds per square inch, and then at higher pressures, as from 7000 to 9000 or 10,000 pounds per square inch. As a rule, the co- efficients determined at the higher pressures were mate- rially higher in value than the others, the stiffness of the stone increasing with the loads within the limits of the test. The values in the table are the m.eans of those at the low and high pressures. With the ordinary working values of pressures in masonry, probably not more than two thirds of the values of the coefficients of elasticity given in the table should be employed. In the *' U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Mate- rials " for 1900 there may be found the results of compress- ing 4-inch cubes of Tennessee marble and of granite from the Mount Waldo Quarries at Frankfort, Llaine. The Art. 69.] NATURAL BUILDING STONES. 423 ultimate compressive resistances of the 4-inch Tennessee marble cubes expressed in pounds per square inch, were as follows : Maximum. Mean. Minimum. 25,478 20,329 16,309 The preceding three results cover twenty tests. The ultimate resistances in pounds per square inch of the "Black Granite" from the Waldo Quarries, as determined from four tests of 2 -inch cubes, were as follows: Maximum. Mean. Minimum. 32,635 30.949 29,183 Again, in the same report, the ultimate resistances in pounds per square inch of four 4-inch cubes of limestone from Carthage, Mo., are as follows* Maximum. Mean. Minimum. 17,130 14,947 13.660 The preceding tests and the results of others given in Table II have been determined by compressing cubes 4 inches and 5 inches on the edge and it has been generally customary to use a cube for a test piece for either natural or artificial stones. It has already been indicated, however, in Art. 62 that such a short test piece in compression must necessarily give higher results than should be credited to the material. The use of compressive test specimens with lengths two to two and one-half times the diameter is just begin- ning, but that use has not become sufficiently general, nor has it been long enough the practice, to make available results from such desirable tests. Furthermore, some tests have shown that ultimate com- pressive resistances may be materially higher for large cubes 424 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. than for small ones. This is probably due to the lateral supporting effect given to parts of the test piece by the friction between the bearing head of the riiachine and the face of the material under test with which it is in contact. Preferably no cube tested for engineering purposes should be less than 12 by 12 inches in section, nor should any test piece be shorter than twice its diameter. The results found in Table II are taken from the '' U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Materials," for 1894. They relate to the various kinds of rock indicated and were found by testing 4-inch to 5 -inch cubes on their beds. Table II. state. Stone. Ultimate Compressive Resistance, Pounds per Square Inch. Minnesota Ortonville granite. Kasota pink limestone 20,415 10,833 17,780 4,353 9,606 8,775 10,114 21,556 19,875 9,465 4,834 2,899 «. Faribault marble tc Duluth brownstone a Mankato sandstone << IMantorville sandstone (( Frontinac sandstone << Luverne ciuartzite << Iowa Rubble rock Firestone << Gypsum Fort Dodge The ultimate resistances of the sandstones are relatively low, while the higher values are found for granites, lime- stones, and quartzites, as is usual. In 1906 the Carnegie Institution of Washington pub- lished An Investigation into the Elastic Constants of Rocks, More Especially with Reference to Cubic Compressibility, by Mr. Frank D. Adams and Dr. Ernest G. Coker. The experimental part of this investigation was made atMcGill University under the auspices of the Carnegie Institution. Art. 69.] NATURAL BUILDING STONES. 425 Although this investigation was made as a contribution more to physics than to engineering, the results obtained are of both interest and value to engineers and it is well to make use even for engineering purpOvSes of results deter- mined with so much care and such extreme accuracy in vspite of the fact that the specimens used were only i inch square in section or i inch in diameter and 3 inches long. If E is the ordinary modulus of elasticity in compression G the modulus of elasticity for shearing, V the so-called bulk. modulus, i.e., the reciprocal of the rate of change of unit volume for unit intensity of stress, and r the ratio of the rate of lateral strain of the specimen divided by the rate of direct strain under compression, Table III gives the results of these experimental determinations for those materials which American engineers more commonly use. Table III. Specimen. E. r. G. V- ^• 3(1 -2r) Black Belgian marble . 11,070,000 0.2780 4,330,000 8,303,000 Carrara marble 8,04.6,000 0.2744 3,154,000 5,946,000 Vermont marble 7,592,000 0.2630 3,000,000 5,341,000 Tennessee marble 9,006,000 0.2513 3,607,000 5,967,000 Montreal limestone . . . 9,205,000 0.2522 3,636,000 6,167,500 Baveno granite 6,833,000 0.2528 2,724,800 4,604,000 Peterhead granite .... 8,295,000 0.2II2 3,399,000 4,792,000 Lily Lake granite 8,165,000 0. 1982 3,380,000 4.517,500 Westerly granite 7,394.500 0.2195 3.019.700 4,397.500 Quincy granite ( i ) . . . . 6,747,000 0.2152 2,781,600 3,984,000 Quincy granite (2). . . . 8.. 247, 500 0.1977 3,445 000 4.-555.000 Stanstead granite 5,685,000 0.2585 2,258,700 3,940,000 Ohio sandstone 2,290,000 0.2900 888,000 i.8i6,oo« Plate glass 10,500,000 0.2273 4,290,000 6,448,000 426 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. Art. 70. — Timber. The ultimate compressive resistance, coefficient of elas- ticity, and other physical properties of timber in com- pression are affected greatly by the amount of moisture in the timber and by the size of stick. The investigations of Professor J. B. Johnson, acting for the Forestry Division of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, have shown that when the amount of moisture exceeds about 30% by weight of the timber the physical properties are not m.uch affected by any increased saturation. The walls of the wood cells at that point seem to experience their maximum softening. Green timber may be considered as carrying about one third of its weight in moisture, and it seems to matter little whether that moisture is water or sap, timber once dried and resaturated appearing to suffer the same diminished resistance as in its original green condition. Professor Johnson's tests showed that the Southern pines increased their ultimate compressive resistance in some cases as much as 75% by the process of drying or seasoning from 33% of moisture down to 10%, the general rule being a greatly increased compressive resistance with a decrease of moisture. It follows from these results, therefore, that green timber will be much weaker in compression than seasoned timber. Ordinary air seasoning even under cover seldom reduces moisture below about 15% in w^eight of the timber itself, although under favorable circumstances of seasoning the moisture may sometimes drop to 12% of that w^eight. As a matter of precision, therefore, or accuracy, the ulti- mate compressive resistance of timber should always be stated in connection with the percentage of moisture carried by the timber. This will be found to be the case in all of Professor Johnson's experimental work, to which reference has already been made and the results of which Art. 70.1 TIMBER. 427 are chiefly found in bulletins Nos. 8 and 1 5 of the Division of Forestry of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, the former being dated 1893. The earlier tests of Professor Johnson were made on a basis of 15% moisture, but in his later work a basis of 12% moisture was adopted, and he states in Circular No. 15 that in reducing the moisture from 15% to 12% the corre- sponding increases in the ultimate compressive resistance in pounds per square inch of Southern pines are approxi- mately as follows: Endwise. Across Grain. Long-leaf pine . Cuban pine. . . . Loblolly pine. . Short-leaf pine , 1,100 800 900 600 180 220 150 60 While it is important as a matter of physics to recognize clearly the effect of moisture upon the compressive re- sistance of timber, it is of equal importance, and possibly of greater importance, to recognize the fact that in engineer- ing practice, except in specially protected cases, the timber used in structures is more or less exposed and can seldom or never be depended upon to contain even as little as 15% of moisture, and with some conditions of weather and at some seasons of the year it may contain considerably more. It follows, also, that the condition of timber as to moisture in most structures will change materially from time to time. It would be unwise, therefore, and perhaps dangerous to use working compressive resistances based upon the results of tests of small pieces with moisture reduced to 15% or 12%, i\gain, it has been frequently stated as a result of the timber investigations by the Forestry Division of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, that the ultimate com- 4-'8 COMPRESSION. [Chi VII I. pressive resistance of large sticks may be taken as practically identical with that belonging to small selected test pieces, the quality of the material being the same in both cases. It is possible, if the quality of material throughout all portions of every large stick were identical with the quality of small selected specimens, that the ultimate compressive resistance per square inch might be the same; but that is radically different from the facts as they are. There is probably no stick of timber whose condition is permanent at any given time. If it is seasoning, its qualit}^ is im- proving, but after reaching a maximum of excellence it begins to depreciate by decay or from other causes. Any large stick of timber as used by the engineer is seldom free from some point of incipient decay and it is never free from knots, large or small, wind shakes, cracks from one catise or another, or from some other defective con- dition, at some point. Small specimens for testing are invariably so selected as to eliminate such spots as militating against a comparatively high resistance. The inevitable result for full-size sticks is a decreased resistance materially below that of the small specimen. For all these reasons, therefore, in engineering practice it would be a radical error to accept the ultimate compressive resistance per square inch of small test specimens as practically identical with that of large sticks. Values for the latter class of timber should be determined upon pieces as large as those used in structures and under the same conditions in which they are used, which means an indefinite amount of moisture ordinarily sensibly larger than 12% or 15%. In the "U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Materials" for 1896 and 1897 there may be found results of compressive tests for coefficients of elasticity for sticks of timber as shown in Table I. Those sticks were many of them large enough to form full-size posts. They appear to The fracture of a piece of Douglass fir or Oregon pine loaded tangentially to the rings of growth. The ultimate compressive resistance was found to be 600 lbs. per sq. in. iTo face page 429.) Art. 70.] TIMBER. 429 Table I. TIMBER IN COMPRESSION. Kind of Wood. Coefficient of Elasticity, Pounds per Square Inch. 1 6 Remarks. Maximum. Mean. Minimum. Douglas fir : Endwise 3,461,000 112,000 207,000 1,789,000 1,890,000 2,252,000 1,655,000 1,623,000 2,300,000 2,358,000 74,600 158,000 1,554,000 1,657,000 2,175,000 1,469,500 1,531,000 2,251,000 1,915,000 40,000 134,300 1,338,000 1,488,000 2,049,000 1,202,000 1,437,000 2,207,000 4 9 6 6 4 -1 6 10 12 Not well seasoned. Tangentially Radially White oak : Endwise (( (( (( Long-leaf pine : Endwise . . . From tops of trees From butts of trees Not well seasoned Short-leaf pine:* Endwise . . , . . . . Spruce : * Endwise (( (t (I Old yellow-pine posts :* Endwise Very dry. * These results are means of determinations at intensities varying from 500 to 5,000 pounds per square inch. have been of merchantable timber of about such quahty as is used in first-class engineering works. They had the usual supply of knots and other features which, while not material defects, prevented the pieces from being of selected quality. As also shown in the table, there were a considerable number of tests in each case. • "Endwise" compres- sion means compression parallel to the fibres of the timber, while "Tangentially" means a direction tangent to the rings of growth. That compression indicated by "Radially" was in a radial direction, i.e., passing through the centre of the tree trunk. The determinations were made at intensities of pressure varying from one third to one half the ultimate resistance. It will be noticed that in the values for long-leaf pine the highest results belong to sticks from the butts of trees, while those from the tops 430 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIIL give materially less values. It will also be observed that the values for the very dry yellow-pine posts in the last line of the table are high, showing the increased stiffness due to the absence of moisture. The coefficients of elas- ticity in the last five lines of the table were computed from the resilience of the compressed columns by means of a formula similar to eq. (2) of Art. 44. The values of the elastic limit, ultimate resistance and modulus of elasticity in compression along the fibres as well as the elastic limit in compression across the fibres of nine of the prominent structural timbers of the United States, both for large or structural sizes and small speci- mens, as shown in Table II, are taken from Tests of Struc- tural Timbers, Forest Service-Bulletin 108, U. S. Depart- ment of Agriculture, by Messrs. McGarvey Cline and A. L. Heim, 191 2, and exhibit some of the latest experimental investigations in the elasticity and resistance of timber. The large or structural sizes had cross-sections up to 10 inches by 16 inches and the small sizes down to 2 inches by 2 inches. The resistances parallel to the fibres, i.e. on end, were determined for pieces whose lengths were three to four times the cross dimensions. The authors of the paper properly observe that the " Results of tests made only on small thoroughly seasoned specimens free from defects " — " may be from one and one- half to two times as high as stresses developed in large timbers and joists." This is an important conclusion and a number of results in Table II confirm the observations of the authors. It is essential to observe the small resisting capacity of the various timbers when compressed across the grain, the resistance in the latter condition being but a small fraction of that along the grain. Table III contains the results of tests by Colonel Laidley, Art. 70.] TIMBER. 431 tn.t; ft c 5 .^ CO ^ O 10 o CO t^ O VO M ON 10 vO o o On 01 o o CO ON 01 HH »0 01 10 ON CO CO 01 O 00 00 00 On O 00 '^ CO o o l-^ 10 10 vO t^ 01 MD O 1000 O CO On on ON ON 10 'd- 10 c 10 10 ft3j O c a; in (1) a N CTi < — 1 cu ox rT, Ml Gj P h4c/2 "^ W (-! ^J vj ^ , w>> lyi ^- ,N N qL,.^ N j^ '-■' -^ M=l 'w "w <^ "w "55 -—I c« r/5 O) W w w V2 C G m w tn r^ 5 fN> rn 0) (U (U 0) N tS) •• N N CU N N N w ■55 U-55 •55r^-w •oc-^ C/J w^ i'^ 'w a'w ■55 Q CO ^ h^ H ^ P< 43 2 COMPRESSION. Table III. [Ch. VI ri. No. Kind of Wood. Oregon pine , Oregon pine Oregon pine Oregon maple Oregon spruce California laurel Ava Mexicana Oregon ash Mexican white mahogany Mexican cedar Mexican mahogany White maple White maple Red birch Red birch Whitewood Whitewood White pine White pine White oak White oak Ash Ash Oregon pine Oregon maple Oregon spruce Oregon spruce California laurel Ava Mexicana Oregon ash Mexican white mahogany Mexican cedar Mexican mahogany White pine White pine Whitewood Whitewood Black walnut Black walnut Black walnut White oak Spruce Yellow pine Black walnut Black walnut Black walnut Black walnut Black walnut Black walnut White pine White pine White pine White pine White pine White pine Yellow birch Yellow birch White maple White maple White oak ' . . Length, Inches. 16. 5 [Q.Q 12. O 12. O 1-95 3.63 3-92 3.92 3.58 3-69 3-64 3-77 3-75 3-75 3 -06 2.90 3-15 3.15 0-875 0.875 0.875 2 . 40 3.70 3.90 0-75 1 . 00 1-25 1.50 1-75 2 .06 0.7S 1 . 00 1-25 1.50 1-75 2 .00 4-25 4-25 4. 00 4. 00 3-95 Compressed Section in Inches. 2. 46 X 2.0 1.21X 1.21 1 . 21 X 1 . 21 3-63X3.63 3-92X5.75 3.58X3-58 3.69X3.69 3.64X3.64 3.77X3.77 3-75X3.75 3.75X3.75 4.00X4.00 4.00X4.00 4.26X4.26 4.26X4.26 4.00X4.00 4.00X4.00 4.00X4.00 4- 00 X 4. 00 4.00X4. 00 4.00 X 4. 00 4- 00 X 4- 00 4.00X4.00 3.45X3.00 3.63X3.00 5.75X4.75 4.75X4.-00 3.58X3.00 3.69X3.00 3.64X3.00 3.77X3.00 3.75X3.00 3.75X3.00 20X4.75 4-75X4.00 4-75X6.20 4.75X4.00 4-75X4.00 4 . 00 X 3 • 94 4.00X 2.50 4.75X4.00 4.75X4.00 4.00X4.00 4.05X4.00 4.05X4.00 4.05X4.00 4.05X4.00 4.05X4.00 4.05 X4. 00 4.05X4.00 4.05X4.00 4.05 X4. 00 4.05X4.00 4.05X4.00 4.05X4.00 4. 25X3.00 5.98X3.00 3.95X3.00 5 . 98 X 3 . 00 3 .96X 3-00 Ultiinate Resist- ance, Pounds per Square Inch. 8,496 9,041 8253 6,661 5,772 6,734 6,382 5,121 6,155 4,814 [0,043 7,140 7,210 8,030 7,820 4,440 4,330 5,475 5,760 7,375 7.010 7,940 7,640 1,150 1,875 710 680 2,000 2,100 2,200 2,150 1,950 4,500 875 1,012 900 1,000 2,450 2,200 2,525 3,550 970 1,900 2,800 2,56c 2,400 2,500 2,400 2,360 1 ,1 20 1 ,100 1,160 1,070 1,060 1,000 2,000 1,650 1,700 1,900 2,sOO C r t (LI Cq With Remarks. Unseasoned Worm-eaten Unseasoned Unseasoned Mean of two Mean of two Mean of foiir Mean of two Mean of two Mean of two Mean of foiir Mean of two Art. 70.] TIMBER. 433 U.S.A., "Ex. Doc. No. 12, 47th Congress, 2d Session." A few other tests of short blocks from the same source will be found in the article on "Timber Columns." Unless otherwise stated, all the specimens were thoroughly sea- soned. ■ , In this table the "length" of all those pieces which were compressed in a direction perpendicular to the grain might, with greater propriety, be called the thickness, since it is measured across the grain. In the tests (24-60) the compressing force was dis- tributed over only a portion of the face of the block on which it was applied ; thus the compressed area was sup- ported, on the face of application, by material about it carrying no pressure. In some cases this rectangular com- pressed area extended across the block in one direction, but not in the other. In all such instances the ultimate resistance w^as a little less than in those in which the area of compression was supported on all its sides. The "ultimate resistance" was taken to be that pressure which caused an indentation of 0.05 inch. Nos. (44-5 5 ) show the effect of varying thickness of blocks. Within the limits of the experiments, the ultimate resistance is seen to decrease somewhat as the thickness increases. The best series of values of the ultimate compressive re- sistance of timbers as actually used in large pieces and for engineering structures that can be written at the present time is that given in Table IV. That table shows values for railway bridges and trestles adopted by the American Railway Engineering Associa- tion. As in the case of tension, the compressive resistances across the grain are but small fractions of those with the grain. Values are given for columns under 15 diameters in length for the reason that such columns fail essentially by com- 434 COMPRESSION. [Ch. VIII. pression and without the bending which characterizes long columns. The table is one of great practical value. Table IV. TIMBER IN COMPRESSION. Unit Stresses in Lbs. per Sq. In. Kind of Timber. Perpendicular to the Grain. Parallel to the Grain. Working Stresses for Columns. Elastic Limit. Working Stress. Mean Ult. Working Stress. Length Under 15 Xd. Length Over 15 Xd. Douglas fir ... . Longleaf pine . . Shortleaf pine. . White pine .... Spruce Norway pine. . . Tamarack Western Hem- lock Redwood Bald cypress. . . Red cedar White oak 630 520 340 290 370 440 400 340 470 920 310 260 170 150 180 150 220 220 150 170 230 450 3,600 3.800 3.400 3.000 3.200 2,600* 3.200* 3.500 3.300 3.900 2,800 3.500 1,200 1,300 1,100 I.OOO 1,100 800 1,000 1,200 900 1,100 900 1,300 900 975 825 750 825 600 750 900 675 825 675 975 1,200(1 -//6orf) 1,300(1 -//6orf) 1,100(1— //6o--^ 12 It will be shown in the chapter on bending that k may here be taken at -T. 2 Art. 72.] DISTRIBUTION OF STRESS IN RIVETED JOINTS. 443 In Art. 30 the moments at the centre and end of a span fixed at each end and uniformly loaded were shown to be yV of the load into the span for the end moments and -^V of the load into the span for the centre moment. Hence, by the usual formulae, <-f)' M=—{p-d)Tt = -^^^=^T (h-fj ' ■ /. h=-o.sSV(p-d)d+o,sd . ... (5) Shearing of Rivets. The shearing of the rivets in a riveted joint takes place in the plane of the surface of contact between any two plates tending to move in opposite directions. In Fig. 8 the plane of shear would be the surface of contact between the main plates A and B, and in Fig. 7 on both sides of the main plate, F, i.e., between the main plates E and F and at the surface of contact between the main plate F and the bent cover-plate D. It is assumed that the total shear is divided uniformly between all the shear sections of the rivets so that if n were the total number of rivets carrying the load P and if d be the diameter of the rivet while 5 is the intensity of shearing stress in the normal sections of the rivets, there would result for single shear the expression P =n.'jSs4d^S. The rivets shown in Fig. 8 and Figs, i, 2, and 3 of the preceding article are in single shear. If each rivet must be sheared at two normal sections in order that the joint may fail (by shear), as in Figs. 4, 5, and 6 of the preceding article, the rivets are said to be in double shear. In the latter case in the preceding expression 2n must be written for n for all rivets in double shear. In 444 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. Fig. 7 the two lower rows of rivets are in double shear and the upper row in single shear. In Fig. 8 and in Figs. 5 and 6 of the preceding article, each row of rivets is assumed to take half the total load carried by the joint. That condition, if the cover-plates of Figs. 5 and 6 are of half the thickness of the main plates, makes the intensity of stress the same in the main plate and in the two covers between the two rows of rivets on either side of the joint. If, however, the thickness of the cover-plate is greater than one-half the thickness of the main plate, as is always the case in such joints, then if each row of rivets carries half the load, the intensity of stress in the two covers between each two rows of rivets will be less than in the main plate causing the rate of stretch in the latter to be greater than in the former. This condition would throw more than half the load, as shear, on the outer row of rivets. In other words, the tendency will be to make the stretch of the plates within the joint added to the distortion due to bending and shearing of the rivets equal to each other between each pair of rows of rivets parallel to the joint line between the main plates. If again there are three or more rows of rivets on either side of an abutting joint, there will be a corresponding tendency to overload the outer rows of rivets and relieve those nearest the centre or abutting line of the joint. There are further conditions in addition to those already discussed, militating against perfect uniformity in the stress conditions of the complete joint. It is impossible, however, to make allowance for these complicated and more or less obscure stress con- ditions in the operations of design or development of formulae. Hence, as already indicated, the usual assump- tions of uniformity in the three principal methods of failure of riveted joints are made leaving the working stresses to be determined by- the results of tests of actual joints. Art. 73.] DIAMETER AND PITCH OF RIVETS. 445 Art. 73. — Diameter and Pitch of Rivets and Overlap of Plate. Distance between Rows of Riveting. Diameter of Rivets. The "diameter of rivet may at least approximately be expressed in terms of the thickness of the plate which it pierces. There are various arbitrary or conventional rules based upon this method of determining the rivet diameter. If the unit is the inch, the diameter d may be expressed as ranging between the two following values for ordinary thicknesses of plate : ^ = .75^ +.375.) .. in which / is the thickness of the plate. Unwin gives the following expression for the diameter of somewhat different form from that which precedes: d = i.2Vt. . . . . . . '(2) Neither of the preceding expressions can be applied for all thicknesses of plates. If the thickness is great, those expressions make the diameter of the rivet too large, the diameter rarely exceeding i inch even for the heaviest plates. The application of eq. (i) to different thicknesses of plates will give the following diameters of rivets ex- pressed by the nearest yV in.: t d iin. T'ein 1 i 4 i 1 « f nV i li I lA 446 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. In structural work for ordinary thicknesses of metal the prevailing diameters of rivets are f in. and | in. For light work, such as sidewalk railings or light highway construction, rivets as small as J in. or f in. in diameter are used. On the other hand, i to i|-inch rivets are employed for specially heavy sections. Pitch of Rivets. It is possible to determine the pitch of rivets approxi- mately by an equation expressing equality between the tensile resistance of the net section between two adjacent rivets and the shearing or bearing capacity of a single rivet, but it is scarcely practicable to proceed in that manner as a rule. Again, the pitch will vary to some extent with the number of lines of riA^eting on either side of the joint. In single-riveting the pitch must be less than. in double- or . other multiple-riveting. In boiler or other similar riveting, also, the pitch must be usually less than in struc- tural work, as questions of steam- and water-tightness or other similar considerations are involved in the former class of joints. Finally, the pitch will also obviously depend largely upon the thickness of plates. In single- riveting for comparatively thin plates the following rela- tion may be taken, p being the pitch in inches : ^ = 1,75 in. to 2.25 in. ..... (3) For comparatively thick plates in single -riveting the follow- ing relation may hol:I: ^ = 2.375 in. to 3 in (4) In double-riveting, p and t still being the pitch and thick- ness respectively, the following relation may be taken for comparatively thin plates. Art. 73.] DIAMETER AND PITCH OF RIVETS. 447 ^=2.6875 in. to 3.25 in (5) Again, for comparatively thick plates in double-riveting, P=3-37S in. to 3.75 in (6) The values given by eqs. (3) to (6) are for boiler or other similar work. In structural work the pitch of rivets is seldom less than about three times the diameter of the rivet, and it is fre- quently specified not to exceed sixteen times the thickness of the thinnest plate pierced by the rivet. Overlap of Plate. The overlap of a plate, h in Fig. 2, Art. 71, in a riveted ioint is the distance from the edge of the plate to the centre line of the nearest row of rivets. This distance, like other elements of riveted joints, will depend somewhat upon the thickness of the plate as well as the diameter of rivet and other similar considerations. It is a common practice to make the overlap not less than about 1.5^^, d being the diameter of the rivet. Occasionally in riveted joints it is made a little less, but 1.5 times the diameter of the rivet is about as small as the overlap should be made. Some- times J in. is added to the preceding value of the overlap. The width of overlap (h) may also be determined in terms of d by the aid ofeq. (11) of Art. 72. Since the load on the rivet is represented by (p—d)Tt, p must be taken in terms of d for a single-riveted joint, in which p = 2^d to 2|(i. As a margin of safety, and as it will at the same tim.e .c-'mplify the resulting expression, let p=sd. Eq. (5) of Art. 72 then gives, in confirmation of the preceding rule, h = i.sid^ (7) * In corsequence of the direct tension in the metal on either side of the rivet this value of h should be increased, i.e., to perhaps 1.51^. 448 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. Experience has shown that this rule gives ample strength, and is about right for calking in boiler joints. It is to be remembered that the preceding conventional rules for the diameter of rivet, pitch, and overlap of plate are necessarily to a large extent conventional or approxi- mate, and in special cases they cannot be applied with mathematical exactness. As practical rules, how^ever, they are sufficiently close to give good general ideas of those features of riveted joints. Distance between Rows of Riveting. The distance between the rows of riveting is not susceptible of accurate expression by formulae, although the considera- tions involved in the establishment of eq. (ii) of Art. 72 would lead to an approximate value. It is evident, how- ever, that this distance should never be as small as h. Apparently, in more than double-riveted joints, this dis- tance should increase as the centre line of the joint is receded from, in consequence of the bending action of the rivet. There are other reasons, ho^vever, besides that of inconvenience, why such a practice is not advisable. In chain riveting the distance between the centre lines of the rows of rivets may be taken equal to the pitch in a single- riveted joint, or, as a mean, a/ 2.5 the diameter of a rivet. In zigzag riveting (Fig. 5) this distance may be taken at three quarters its value for chain riveting. Art. 74. — Lap-joints, and Butt-joints with Single Butt-strap for Steel Plates. A butt-joint with single butt-strap, similar to that shown in Fig. 3, Art. 71, is really composed of two lap-joints in contact, since each half of the butt-strap or cover-plate Art. 74.] LAP-JOINTS AND BUTT-JOINTS. 449 with its underlying main, plate forms a lap-joint. It is unnecessary, therefore, to give it separate treatment. From these considerations it is clear that the thickness of the butt-strap or cover-plate should be at least equal to that of the main plate ; it is usually a little greater. ' Let t = thickness of plates ; d = diameter of rivets ; p= pitch of rivets (i.e., distance between centres in the same row) ; r=mean intensity of tension in net section of. plates between rivets; T' = mean intensity of tension in main plates ; /=mean intensity of pressure on diametral plane of rivet; 5= mean intensity of shear in rivets; n = number of rivets in one main plate ; q = number of rows in one main plate ; h =lap as shown in Fig. 2, Art. 71. If all the dimensions are in inches, then T, T' , /, and 5 are in pounds per square inch. The starting-point in the design of a joint is the thickness t of the plate. The rivet diameter may then be expressed in terms of t, and the pitch in terms of the diameter. Such rules, like those given in Art. 72, may be useful within a certain range of application, but they cannot be depended upon in all cases. The thickness t of boiler-plate depends upon the internal pressure, and is to be determined in accordance with the principles laid down in Art. 39, after having made allowance for the metal punched out at the holes to find the net section. In truss work the thickness depends upon the amount of stress to be carried, and the same allowance is to be made for rivet-holes in finding the net section. 450 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. The relation existing between T and 7' is shown by the following equations: tip-d)T^tpT'; ,. J,=^, or T p-d d T-^-'-p W In order that the joint may be equally strong in refer- ence to all methods of failure, the following series of equali- ties must hold: -tpT =-tip-d)T = nfdt = o.7Ss4nd'S. .'. tpr =t(p-d)T=^qfdt = o.'jSs4qd'S. . . (2) It is probably impossible to cause these equalities to exist in any actual joint, but none of the intensities T\ T, /, or 5 should exceed a safe working value. The method of failure by tearing through the gross section of the main plate is practically impossible under ordinary circumstances, and it is neglected in designing riveted joints. This neglect is expressed by dropping the first member of eq. (2) and thus reaching eq. (3) : t{p-d)T=qfdt^o.7Ss4qd'S (3) This equation shows that the usual design of a riveted joint must provide against failure in three principal ways: 1. Tearing through the net section of the plate. 2. Compression of the metal where the rivets hear against the plate. 3. Shearing of the rivets. Although these are the three principal methods of Art. 74.] LAP-JOINTS AND BUTT-JOINTS. 451 failure of riveted joints, whatever may be their type or form, the proper design of such joints should be so per- formed as to afford provision also against the secondary stresses caused by rivet bending, bending of the plates, and other indirect influences discusssd in preceding articles. This latter end is attained by determining the empirical intensities T, f, and 5 of eq. (3) by testing to failure actual riveted joints in which those secondary stresses exist. In that manner the design against the three principal methods of failure, described above, will also afford provision against the secondary or indirect stresses of rivet and plate bend- ing or other similar conditions. The determination of the intensities T, f, and 5 by tests of actual riveted joints will be fully shown in the following articles. It may be stated here, however, that an approximate relation between the ultimate intensities of resistance to shear and tension for steel has been used in engineering practice in accordance with which S = .75T (4) It will be found hereafter that / may be taken at least 1.25 T. If these values be substituted in the third and fourth members of eq. (3) in which q = 2, there will result (i = 2/(nearly) (5) This value of d is too large for thick plates. The rivet diameter, therefore, for steel plates may be sai d to vary from 2t for thin plates to 1.6^ for thick ones, with a maximum diameter of ij to i| inches. The distance between the centre lines of the rows of rivets may be taken at 2.<,d to T,d for chain riveting and three fourths of that distance for zigzag riveting. The best designed single -riveted lap-joints give from 55 to 64 per cent, the strength of the solid plates. 452 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. Well-designed double - riveted lap-joints should give Irom 65 to 75 per cent, the resistance of the solid plate. Equally well-constructed treble- and quadruple-riveted joints should have an efficiency of 70 to 80 per cent, of the solid plate. It is therefore seen that there is little economy in more than double-riveting ordinary joints. Art. 75. — Steel Butt-joints with Double Cover-plates. Butt-joints with double butt-straps or covers differ in two respects, and advantageously, from lap-joints and butt- joints with a single cover; i.e., in the former the rivets are in double shear and the main plates are subjected to no bending. The cover-plates, however, are subjected to greater flexure than the plates of a lap-joint, for there is no opportunity to decrease the leverage by stretching. As the covers form only a small portion of the total miaterial, these, with economy, may be made sufficiently thick to resist this tendency to failure. Let f = thickness of each cover-plate ; and let the re- maining notation be the same as in Art. 74. The intensity of compression between the walls of the holes in the cover- plates and the rivets, and the tension in the former, will be ignored on account of the excess in thickness of the two cover-plates combined over that of the main plate. This excess in thickness is required on account of the bending in the covers noticed above. The thickness of each cover should be from ^ to I the thick- ness of the main plates, or f = .625 to .875/. The combined thickness of the covers will thus be from 1.25 to 1.75 that of the main plates. Art. 75] BUTT-JOINTS WITH DOUBLE COVER-PLATES. 453 The four principal methods of rupture in the main plate will then lead to the following equations, corresponding to eq. (2), Art. 74: -tpT =-t(p-d)T ^nfdt = i.S7oSnd'S. .'. tpT =tip-d)T=qfdt = i.S7.oSqd'S. . . (i) As in Art. 74, and for the reasons there given, the first member of eq. (i) may be "omitted, thus giving t{p-d)T=qfdt^i.S7oSqd'S (2) Tests of steel butt-joints with double cover-plates as well as other tests in bearing and tension in net section of plates make it reasonable to take / = i . 2 5 7, with T having values from 55,000 to 60,000 pounds per square inch for thick plates to perhaps 65,000 to 70,000 pounds per square inch for thin plates. With this value of /, and g = 2 , the first and second members of eq. (2) give for double-riveted butt-joints with two covers; P=3'Sd ....... (3) If the same value of / be preserved, there will result for single-riveted butt-joints with two covers P = 2.sd (4) If, as in the preceding article, there be taken 5 = .757 and /== 1.257, the second and third members of eq. (2) give d = i.o6t (5) This value of the rivet diameter is too small for thin plates, but about right for thick plates. 454 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. Double-riveted butt-joints designed in accordance with the foregoing deductions should give a resistance ranging from 65 to 75 per cent, of that of the solid plate. Single-riveted joints will give an efficiency somewhat less; perhaps from 60 to 65 per cent. It is to be supposed, in applying the rules just established, that all steel plates are drilled or punched and reamed. As in the preceding cases, the distance between the centre lines of the rows of rivets may be taken at 2.5 to ^d for chain riveting, and three quarters that distance for zigzag. Art. 76. — Tests of Full-size Riveted Joints. There have not been many tests of full-size riveted joints of either iron or steel, and those which have been made seldom include such heavy steel plates as are now frequently employed both in boiler work and for structural purposes. The most valuable tests available and with the greatest range in size of r vet and thickness of plate are those which have been made at the U. S. Arsenal, Water- town, :\Iass. The results shown in Table I were taken from ''Senate Ex. Doc. No. 1,47th Congress, 2d Session," while those in Table II are taken from "Senate Ex. Doc. No. 5, 48th Congress, ist Session." The results shown in Table III are from the same source and are given in the ''U. S. Report of Tests of .Aletals and Other Materials" for 1896. The character of plates, rivets, and holes is shown in the tables, and the intensities of tension in the net sections of plates, compression or bearing on diametral surface, and shearing on riA^ets are those which existed at the instant of failure. The bold-face figures show the kind of failure, and when such figures are found, for the same test, in two or three columns, they show that the same two or three kinds of failure took place simultaneously. Art. 76.] TESTS OF FULL-SIZE RIVETED JOINTS. Table I. RIVETED JOINTS— IRON AND STEEL. 455 Nq, Size of Rivet and Kind. Pitch of Rivet. Maximum Stresses, ^j Pounds per Square Inch. G Com- is 2 «H Tension pression Shearing on Net on Dia- on Area of metral Rivets Plate (T) Sxirface (5). ^ if). W Remarks. Single-riveted lap-joints; J4-inch iron plates. 426 427 436 437 428 429 438 439 430 31 47 48 49 50 ^' ' iron ' " %' ' ' -/H ' ' " M^ / •• ^' ' steel %' ' " i^' / <« w ' " 'V'lfl " iron yifl 8s 7i«" iron 86 ^/i«" " 617 ^" " 618 w 432 %" iron 433 Vh" " 434 " 43 S %" " 87 7/Jq" steel 88 %6" " 1% " 1% " I%6 " 43,230 76,140 34,900 57.7 45,520 82,910 38,640 61.4 38,580 73,260 34,870 52.8 41,790 79,360 38,660 57. 1 52,160 65,420 33,420 60.6 54,930 68,890 35,200 64.0 49,420 87,670 39,640 65.9 47,260 83,940 40,610 63.1 45,890 78,220 45,300 60.3 49,720 84,660 48,420 65.5 41,09s 66,778 44,204 53.1 37,500 60,886 42,038 4».3 ^V\-q" punched holes. drilled %6" punched drilled Single-riveted lap-joints; J4-iiich steel plates. %" iron ^/k' " %' steel %' " ^A' iron •>^' " %' steel %' %' " O/f^' " ^H " •• ^(^ " " '• %' " I%6 " I%6 " 46,340 82,480 37,890 53.2 46,010 81,780 37,860 52.8 60,250 107,260 49,270 69.2 59,240 105,290 48,750 68.0 40,950 77,870 36,350 48.2 42,370 80.200 36,710 49-6 63,190 120,160 56,100 74-3 61,310 116,090 52,460 71.8 66,860 90,000 41,790 68.8 70,000 94,230 43,750 72. c 62,496 101,180 65,220 69.0 58,338 94,800 60,382 64.8 60,184 114,603 52,742 70.6 57,439 109,650 50,645 67.6 ^%6" punched holes. drilled Double-riveted lap-joints; J4-inch plates. }4" drilled 38,53s 64,120 43,110 60.3 41,750 69,710 41,750 65.3 50,592 42,118 28,691 65.8 49,950 41,660 28,660 65.3 holes. %6" punched Double-riveted lap-joints; 14-ii^ch steel plates. 61,510 54,640 25,400 70.4 60,300 53,715 25,530 69.4 65,400 64,600 30,430 74-9 64,600 63,430 30,430 74.3 56,944 94,910 57,910 76.3 59,130 98,360 61,130 79-5 i^e" punched holes. ^:: Double-welt butt-joints; l^-i^ich iron plates. 615!^" iron 6i6l^" " 53,475 50,959 67,321 64,138 16,944 16,719 62. 2 59-3 I^Vlq" punched holes. 456 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. Table I. — Continued. [Ch. IX. Maximum Stresses, _^- Pounds per Square Inch. c •5 Size of "^ c No. Rivet and Pitch of Rivet. Tension Com- pression Shearing Remarks. Kind. on Net Area of Plate ( T) on Dia- metral Surface (/")■ on Rivets (S). c t Single-riveted lap-joints; ^-inch iron plates. 62 iM6"iron 2 ins. 37,460 60,340 38,280 49 -o %■''■ punched holes. 63 2 36,130 58,150 35,520 47.2 " " " 64 2 " 38,190 60,730 37,530 49-7 " drilled " 65 2 " 36,210 57,530 36,050 47.1 " 66 1% " 41,750 54,130 34,230 50.0 punched holes. 67 iH 41,290 53,400 34,150 49-3 720 i" 2^16 " 61,700 52,970 26,180 60.4 ^^i«" ';. 721 i" 2V16 " 58,510 50,220 24,830 57-1 11 <( 3< Single-riveted lap-joints; %-incli steel plates. SI l%6"iron 2 ins. 39,220 63,210 39,740 45-4 %" punched holes. 52 " " 2 37,700 60,760 38,190 43.6 " " " 53 ['. ^^^®^ 2 " 55,215 89,580 56,430 64.1 " " " 54 2 54,740 88,660 55,460 63.5 " '■' '* 55 " " 1% " 63,650 80,930 50,650 66.7 drilled S6 " " i-M " 63,976 81,600 50,900 67.2 .1 238 H" " 2 " 65,460 89,490 53,560 70.9 me" punched " 239 I iron 2 " 65,210 88,990 53,600 70.6 " " " 718 2%6 " 73,894 79,510 36,614 71-4 i^ie" ;; ;; 719 i" " 25/16 " 73,970 80,200 36,590 72.0 Double-riveted lap-joints; %-inch iron plates. 68 mQ"iTon 2 ins. 48,450 39,160 24,760 63.^ %" punched holes. 69 2 50,730 41,070 26,150 66.4 " " " S8 2 " 50,220 40,640 25,330 65.7 " " " 70 2 " 46,255 41,480 27,550 60. 5 " " " 71 2 46,110 41,270 27,010 60.4 " " " 81 3M '; 30,920 58,700 39,130 50.4 !! drilled '' 82 3M " 30,130 57,340 38,410 49.1 Double-riveted lap-joints; %-inch steel plates. 57 iVi6"iron 2 ins. 62,800 ■ 50,760 32,3TO 73- 2 34" punched holes. 59 " 2 " 64,720 52,450 32.930 75.2 " 60 " " 2 " 63,210 56,860 34,710 73.2 " !! 61 " " 2 " 54,930 49,530 ^0,8 -,o 65. 8 " " ^J " steel 3^4 " 44,660 84,460 52,750 64.4 '.'. drilled 1; 84 3^ 43,650 83,000 51,845 63.0 Reinforced riveted lap-joints; %-inch iron plates. (See figure next page.) 244 %" iron j 2 ins. '' 4 " joint welt 38,870 59,080 40,360 67.6 iMe" drilled hole, %" welt. 245 V4" " ^;: :: 43,770 56,640 34,460 74.0 i%6" 296 H" " / " " 44.840 57,910 33,890 75.7 .. 1^,, .. 297>^" " ]:::: . 42.680 55,350 31,810 71.9 " " " Art. 76.] TESTS OF FULL-SIZE RIVETED JOINTS. Table I. — Continued. 457 No. Size of Rivet and ■ Kind. Pitch of Rivet. Maximum Stresses, Pounds per Square Inch. c ►— 1 J Tension Com- pression Shearing on Net on Dia- on Area of metral Rivets Plate ( D Surface (5). ^ (f). a Remarks. Reinforced riveted joints; %-inch steel plates. (See above figiire.) 1^6" drilled holes. 246 %" steel i 2 ins. joint | ) 4 " welt (■ 62,050 67,320 32,960 89.0 247 Vs," " {■:.: :: j 62,880 68,135 33,900 90. 1 298 %" iron i:;:: , :; \ 61,020 67,300 34,250 87.8 299 %" ■■ i:::; :: \ 61,710 68,040 34,750 88.9 240 H' ' iron 241 " 292 " " 29^ " " 327 steel 328 " " Single-riveted lap-joints; }4-inch iron plates. ^%6" punched holes, drilled " 31,100 41,500 34,280 39-8 31,395 41,955 34,960 39-7 32,376 47,850 38,020 42.9 • 33,180 48,890 39,220 44-3 39,900 58,880 47,020 52.2 40,500 59.S00 47,830 54-2 Single -riveted lap-joints; J^-inch steel plates. 242 ^" iron 243 H" " 204 j^ifi ' " 295 i-Ae ' " 38,204 50,940 41,100 38.2 35.915 47,890 38,636 35-9 60,210 56,980 36,770 51. 2 49,590 47,060 30,540 42.2 i%6" punched holes. Double-riveted lap-joints; J^-inch iron plates. 329 54" iron {2 ins. 635;%" " I2 " 6i9l"'-^/i6"iron|2 ins. 62o|l5/x6" " I2 " 44,320 42,920 59,640 57,950 25,280 (57.0 (i%6" punched holes 24,560 I 55.2 J " Double -riveted lap-joints; ^^-inch steel plates. 29,354 I 19,670 I 5 3 . 8 ( I " punched holes. 64,602 I 64,519 I 29,371 Single-riveted lap-joints; 730 I iron 731I1" " 732 733I ;2S^ins. 34.680 34,230 47.5 TO 46,790 19,670 53' 19,644 ] 53-8 J '* ^-inch iron plates. 35,460 I 44-9 hVifi" punched holes. 34,930 I 42.0 I " " " Double-riveted lap-joints; ^-inch iron plates. [2%ins. I 43.580 I 29,740 I 22,960 I 56. 3 I iMe" punched holes. \2% " I 45,850 I 31,310 I 23,670 I 59-3 I " Single-riveted lap-joints; 5^-inch steel plates, j^lt" steel (234 ins. I 49,6^0 | 56,760 I 43,490 I 5 o . 5 I -i ^ie" Piinched holes. 55I1" " \2% •* I 52,770 I 60,150 1 46,080 I 53.61 " Double -riveted lap-joints; %-inch steel plates. 36(1" steel \2^^ ms. ■37I1" " 1 2% " 69,680 67.100 i 38,300 I 29,340 I 68.3 30,780 I 30,470 j 70.9 I i^b" punched holes. I 29,340 I 458 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. Table II. RIVETED JOINTS— IRON AND STEEL. No Maximum Stresses, . Thick- ness of Plate and Kind. Pounds per Square Inch. ;3, Diameter and Pitch of Com- o § Kind of Rivet. Tension pression Shearing Rivet. on Net on Dia- on c S Area of metral Rivets .ilPL, Plate (D Surface (5). Remarks. Single -riveted iron lap-joints. %" iron iVie" iron i%ins. 39,300 50,850 33,710 47 -o " " " " " " 41,000 53,050 35,170 49 -o W " 54" 2 35,650 47.350 37,300 45.6 %" " 35,150 46,690 36,780 44.9 Single -riveted iron butt-joints. punched holes. %" iron Hio'' iron 2 ins. 46,360 72,390 25,380 59-9 %" punched ho " " 46,875 73,050 25,450 60.5 )4" " H" " " " 46,400 61,940 24,630 59-4 1%6" " " " 46,140 61,740 24,310 59-2 " " ' Vs" " i" " 2H " 44,260 60,330 23,010 57-2 iVie" " " " 42,350 58,080 22,310 54-9 V4" " i^" " 2.9 " 42,310 57,000 21,870 52.1 I%6" " " 41,920 56,540 22,140 51-7 Single-riveted steel lap-joints. %" steel %" iron 1% ins. 61,270 65,760 40,390 59-5 " " " " 60,830 65,320 39,900 59-1 y^" " me'' iron 2 47,530 44,590 29,390 40.2 %" " " " 49,840 46,960 31,070 42.3 m^" punched holes. Single-riveted steel butt-joints. %" steel ^Vie" iron 2 ins. 62,770 97,940 31,240 71.7 W punched ho " " 1%6" " " " 61,210 95,210 31,020 69.8 i" ^" " " steel 68,920 62,220 20,370 57-1 " " ' 2" " " " 66,710 59,580 19,890 55.0 " " ' %" " i" 23^ " 62,180 71,450 27,750 63.4 1^6" " " " 62,590 71,930 27,940 63-8 H" " i^" " 2V2 •; 54,650 55.610 23,190 54 -o I%6" " " " 54,200 55,840 22,810 53.4 It is important to notice that in general the highest uhi- mate resistances of tension and compression or bearing are found with the thin plates, and that those quantities diminish appreciably as the thickness of plate increases, both for iron and steel. This law is not so well defined in reference to the diameter of rivet, if indeed these tests show it at all, except for steel. Art. 76.] TESTS OF FULL-SIZE RIVETED JOINTS. 459 The length of these test joints varied from 9.75 to 13 inches for Tables I and II, and from 10 to 27 inches for Table III. Although the results of these tables are somewhat irregular, they confirm the general accuracy of the relations established between the values of T, f, and 5 in the pre- ceding articles, as well as other general rules and conclu- sions for boiler work. Some efficiencies are lower than those given for similar joints in Art. 94, but such instances can, by the aid of the tables, be traced either to indifferent design or a phenome- nally low value of some one of the three resistances. In general the results compare well with those given in that article. The pitches of rivets are seen to be adapted to boiler work, being much less than are ordinarily used in bridge work; yet the corresponding resistances show what may legitimately be done and expected when unusual condi- tions demand a departure from ordinary rules. Before deducing working intensities for bridge con- struction from the preceding results it is to be first ex- plained that those results are as given in the government reports, and that the net section used is the gross section of the plate, less the actual metal removed by the punch or drill, with no allowance for deterioration by the former in the immediate vicinity of the hole. Again, in Tables I and II the diametral bearing surface and the shearing area of the rivet are taken to be those of the drill, or a mean between the punch and die in case of punched holes. In bridge work, in determining the net section, metal is deducted for a diameter equal to that of the cold rivet before driving plus one eighth of an inch ; and the shearing and bearing are computed for the section and diameter of the cold rivet before driving. 46o RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. Table III. TESTS OF STEEL-RIVETED JOINTS; ^-INCH PLATES. Maximum Stresses: Pounds per Squa,re Inch. Efficiency Joint. Rivet. of Joint, Remarks. Tension on Compres- Shearing Per Cent. Net Area sion on on of Plate Diametral Rivets (T). Surface (t). (S). A i" steel 38,940 57,960 41,760 47 • I it" drilled holes. B 39,450 81,530 35,560 57 C 62,200 56,410 63,000 59,33.0 59.950 77,900 88,510 78,900 22,480 29,640 20,930 29,410 83.5 80.3 !5-5 :: : 85.3 55,050 71,890 29.850 79-4 H 51,340 52,150 62,390 58,550 76,550 50,170 54,660 51,350 36,030 20,790 21,530 20,620 78 78.6 i::] ."■ ■ 55,030 67,490 27,030 8s. s * Joint not fractured. A. Double-riveted lap-joint; -^-inch plate. B. Double-riveted butt-joint, two splice-plates; ^-in. plate. C. Treble-riveted H. Quadruple-riveted butt-joint, two splice-plates; g-in. plate. The pitch of the outside rows of rivets in joints B, C, and H was double that of the adjoining rows. In the same joints one splice-plate was narrower than the other, so that it took one less row of rivets on either side of the joint than the other. With these explanations in view, the preceding tests justify the following working stresses for the plate-girder floor-beams and stringers of railway bridges with machine- driven rivets. Rivet shearing. Rivet ( 10, hearing,. | ^g' 7,500 'bs. per sq. in. for iron. 000 14,000 lbs. per sq. in. for iron. 000 ( 8,000 lbs. per sq. in. for iron. Tension in net section of plate i^ ^^^ ,. u n a a ^^^^-^ The bearing resistances are taken rather low, especially for steel, for the reason that thick plates are frequently used in bridge construction, and the ultimate bearing Art. 76. TESTS OF FULL-SIZE RIVETED JOINTS. 461 resistance for them is appreciably less than for the thin plates used in most of the preceding tests. The preceding working stresses aie based on steel for rivets giving from 56,000 to 64,000 pounds per square inch tensile resistance, while the steel for plates, in test speci- mens, should offer from 58,000 to 66,000 pounds per square inch ultimate tensile resistance. In the government report from which Table I is ab- stracted, can be found a large number of tests made for the purpose of determining the proper minimum distance from the centres of rivet-holes to the edge of plates. As a result of those tests and other experience on the same subject, it may be stated that the least distance from the centre of a rivet-hole to the edge of a plate may be taken at one and one half the diameter of the hole for steel and one and five eighths the diameter of the hole for iron, in cases where it is important to secure the maximum resist- ance of the joint. Efficiencies. The values of the quantity which has been termed the ■'efficiency" of the joint, i.e., the ratio of the resistance of a given width of joint over that of an equal width of solid plate, in the preceding investigations, are those actually determined by experiments with the joints themselves. They may, therefore, be relied upon. Some values which have for many years been considered as standard, but which in reality are of a somewhat arbitrary nature, and at best belonging to a limited class of joints, have been disregarded. 462 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. The tests of full-size wrought-iron and steel-riveted joints exhibited in Art. 76 show, as a rule, that thin plates give materially higher efficiencies than thick plates. Al- though there are irregularities, single-riveted lap-joints may- yield efficiencies running from 50 to 74 per cent, for J-inch plates, but dropping to 50 to 54 per cent, for |-inch plates and materially lower for 4-inch plates. On the whole, the double-riveted lap-joints show somewhat higher effi- ciencies than the single-riveted, but not quite the same relative differences between J-inch and |-inch plates, the values being found more generally between about 60 and 80 per cent. The single-riveted butt-joints of Table II, Art. 76, give efficiencies ranging from about 52 to 72 per cent. Some unusually high efficiencies are found in Table III of the same article for butt-joints, i.e., about 78 to 90 per cent. Those high values are due to the special design of the joints, and they cannot ordinarily be attained in prac- tice, but they show that well-considered designs will yield greatly increased efficiencies. In general, efficiencies running from 65 to 70 per cent, may be considered excellent for the usual conditions of practice. Art. 77. — Tests of Joints for the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association and for the Board of Consulting Engineers of the Quebec Bridge. In ' ' Proceedings of the- American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association," Vol. 6, 1905, there are given the results of a series of tests of carbon-steel riveted joints and a duplication of that series of tests in both nickel and chrome-nickel steel made for the Board of Consulting Engineers of the Quebec Bridge by Profs. Arthur N. Talbot Art. 7T.] TESTS OF JOINTS. 463 and Herbert F. Moore of the University of Illinois, also fully described in Bulletin No. 49 (191 1) of that institution. There were 144 joints tested in the latter two series. Furthermore, there were tested in alternate tension and compression 16 other nickel-steel joints and the same number of chrome-nickel steel joints. All the main plates of these joints were 6.5 inches or 7.5 inches wide with thicknesses from f inch to f inch except the 32 joints subjected to compression, for which the plates were 2 inches thick. There were 24 lap joints, the same number of butt-joints with double covers or butt- straps and an equal number each of the same type of joint with one filler and two fillers on each side of both main plates. The remaining joints for tension loads only (7|X|-inch main plates), with the exception of two sets of eight each, were also made with one or two fillers, but the latter extended beyond the end of the cover far enough to take one rivet. All rivets were |-inch in diameter, and those driven by a hydro-pneumatic riveter were called " shop " rivets while those driven by a hand-pneumatic riveter were designated Table I. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF RIVET AND PLATE MATERIAL Nickel-steel Riveted Joints. Chrome-nickel-steel Riveted Joints. Element. Rivet Material Per Cent. Plate Material Per Cent. Rivet Material Per Cent. Plate Material Per Cent. Carbon 0. 141 0.0023 0.037 0.442 3-33 0.258 0.008 0.044 0.700 3 330 0.136 0.038 0.032 0.696 0.986 0.240 0. 191 0.035 0.042 0.485 0.733 0.170 Sulphur, Phosphorus Manganese Nickel Chromium . . 464 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. Table II. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF RIVET AND PLATE MATERIAL All stresses in pounds per square inch. Nickel-Steel. Chrome-Nickel-Steel. Item. Rivet Material. Plate Material. Rivet Material. Plate Material. Number of specimens tested 2 9 40,200 51,700 89,700 25.0 55-8 29,950,000 2 8 Elastic limit 27,200 36,300 63,900 31-7 59-9 30,750,000 Stress at yield point . . . Stress at ultimate .... Elongation in 2 inches, per cent Reduction of area, per cent .-.■••• Modulus of elasticity. 45.000 68,500 33-5 634 38,400 59,000 35-2 63.3 as "field " rivets. The difference in resistance of the shop and field rivets was not material. Tables I and II show the chemical composition and the physical properties of the nickel and chrome-nickel steels vised. The following statement shows in a condensed form the results of the tests. Table III. Nickel-Steel Joints Lbs. per Sq. In. Av. Ult. shear shop and field rivets. 52,440 to 60,140 Max. tension in plates 16,850 to 50,800 Chrome-Nickel-Steel Joints Lbs. per Sq. In. Av. Ult. shear in rivets 48,190 to 56,650 Max tension in plates 16,170 to 49,500 Carbon Steel (Main, of Way Assoc. Tests) Lbs. per Sq. In. Av. shear stress 44,940 to 52,060 Max. tension in plates 15,190 to 48,400 Art. 77.] TESTS OF JOINTS. 465 The shearing of the rivets caused the failures of all the nickel-steel and chrome-nickel steel joints. The "carbon steel " used in the American Railway Engi- neering and Maintenance of Way Association tests was low basic open hearth material conforming to the specifications of that Association. Some of these joints failed by the yielding of the plates but the greater part of them failed by the shearing of the rivets and the results are all given in terms of the maximum shearing stress in the rivets at the instant of failure. The lower values in the ultimate and final shear stresses in these series of tests belong to the longer rivets, i.e. to the joints in which fillers were used. This was to be expected in consequence of the increased bending in those rivets. Indeed, these tests indicate that with ordi- nary thicknesses of plates the carrying capacity of the rivets begins to be seriously affected when the " grip " of the rivets, i.e. the aggregate thickness of plates pierced by them, exceeds about four diameters. It should be stated, however, that this depends much upon the design of the joint. Friction of Riveted Joints. Careful observations were made by Profs. Talbot and Moore as well as in the tests of joints for the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association to determine the friction of riveted joints which experienced engineers have long known to exist. These observations indicate that a material slipping of the plates took place in some of these joints when the shearing stress in the rivets was not greater than about 6,000 pounds per square inch. In other cases this slipping took place when the rivet shear was as high as 15,000 pounds per square inch. It was observed, as might be anticipated, that the quality of the 466 RIVETED JOINTS AND PIN CONNECTION. [Ch. IX. material of the joints had little effect upon the degree of stress at which slipping began. The results were about the same for the low carbon steel joints as for the chrome- nickel steel joints. As might be expected in a well-pro- portioned joint, the friction between the plates depends upon the force with which they are held in contact by the rivets. The motion of the plates is obviously due to the fact that the shaft of the rivet in cooling contracts more than the comparatively cool plate around it leaving a small annular space between the rivet and the wall of the hole. As the load on the joint increases a degree of direct stress of teiision (or of compression in joints under compression) is reached at which the plates slip on each other bringing the rivet shafts successively, or more or less simultaneously, in contact with the bearing side of the hole. After the load increases still more, a higher stage of stress is reached at which the yield point of the joint is found when relatively rapid distortion takes place. As an average the yield point of the nickel steel joints was found at an intensity of shearing stress in the rivets of about 35,000 pounds per square inch and not much different from that for the chrome-nickel steel joints. Material bending of the rivets appears to be an influential element in the increased deformation at the yield point of a joint and it is reasonable to suppose that, other things being the same, the longer the rivets the lower will be the degree of stress at which the yield point is found, although it is doubtful whether the rivets are long enough in the well-designed riveted joints of good engineering practice to show much effect upon the yield point. Profs. Talbot and Moore state that " The ratio of the yield point of riveted joints to ultimate shearing strength in these tests was about the same as the ratio of the yield point of the plate material in tension to the ultimate tensile strength of the plate material." Art. 78.] RIVETED-TRUSS JOINTS. 467 The results obtained from the joints tested in alternate tension and compression were not markedly different from those obtained in tension. The yield point seems to be slightly lowered after a few alternations of tensile and com- pressive loads. If these alternations took place rapidly, doubtless the joints would show much diminution of re- sisting capacity but the actual alternations were few in number and not rapidly made. These tests show that the friction between plates of a riveted joint cannot properly be considered as enhancing the resisting capacity. Furthermore, this slipping has a direct bearing upon the computations of secondary stresses in trusses with riveted connections. The corresponding deformation may militate materially against the accuracy or reliability of such computations. Art. 78. — Riveted-truss Joints. The circumstances ki which riveted joints are used in truss work render permissible many special forms which ^, r\ n\ n) n\ r^ r^ r^ r-\ r\ ^ r-^ r^s , 1 . I i ' 1 '^// 1 1 n 1 J, /^~' 1 i 1 // 1 M 1 1 1 1 l^i 1 1 o / 1 1 1 J 1 1 1 ^'vr n M ^vi 1 1 <= 1 -^/^ \\ \\ r\ ' h" 7'f / ' ' ' 1 ' /I 1 ' ' 1 1 7 M 1 ^ 1 ' /l 1 1 M ! //"! ll 1 III // ' M '// 1 M 1 1 '1 // \ ' // '"ill/ 1 i / i 1 1 X 1 1/1 1 1 yif 1 i l>^ 1 1 C5 1 1/"^ x! 1 1 "^ 1 >'^ > J ^ ><^ 1 ■""''^ -^ 1 ^_ ■ — h^ 1 __ -^^^^"^ \ ill -^'^ ■ s 1 -'! i i 1 1 1 i i ^ )-> ! 1 L 1 1 1 i i-s |l c/i 2 o 1 S 1 ^J u 3 o -tj y 3 1 • 1 • S _2_ p 1 1 7^" 1 ?^- ! .r Art. 83.] TESTS OF VARIOUS STEEL COLUMNS. 499 when the column ratio - increases from 20 to 40, then up to a value of at least 140 the curves differ but little from straight lines. Above the latter, the curvature becomes ISi^ m ^ =? m I «.- 5 decided but not sharp and the two lines converge so that when- becomes equal to 300 the difference between the two r resistances is but little over 1000 pounds per square inch. 500 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. This convergence is one element of confirmation of Euler's Formula as the carrying capacity for such high values of - depends chiefly upon the modulus of elasticity. With still higher ratios the two curves would probably coincide as both grades of steel have the same modulus. The difference between the working parts of the two curves show^n in Fig. 2 is reproduced on a much larger scale for- in Fig. 3. Between -=30 and -=140, the two full r r r straight lines may be drawn as shown. As the points represent accurately the numerical values of Table II, it is seen that the straight lines represent the ultimate resist- ances of the angle struts with sufficient closeness for all practical purposes between - =35 and - = 140. The straight line for the mild-steel angles is represented by eq. (6) ; ^ = 53,000-186- (6) r Similarly the straight line for the high-steel angles is represented by eq. (7); ^ = 79,000-325- (7) The curved broken lines represent approximately the unit ultimate resistances for - less than about 40. If the r second members of eqs. (6) and (7) be divided by a so-called " safety factor " of about 3, eqs. (8) and (9) will represent working stresses; For high steel ^ = 25,000 — 100- (8) For mild steel ;/? = 17,000 — 53 - (9) Art. 83.] TESTS OF VARIOUS STEEL COLUMNS. 501 A number of " model " carbon steel columns of large dimensions have been tested within two or three years in the large testing machine of the Phoenix Bridge Company at Phoenixville, Pa., together with two such nickel steel columns, under the supervision of Mr. James E. Howard, all but three of those tests having been made for the pur- pose of affording data for the design of the new Quebec Bridge across the St. Lawrence River. The results of these tests, as given in the Transactions of the American Society of Civil Engineers for 191 1 and in the Engineering Record for 1 9 14 are shown on Fig. 3. The average of three tests of built up carbon steel columns, 30 inches by 20 inches Area, 90.5 Sq. Ins. d J Fig 4. 42.75 Sq. Ins. r r Fig. 5. 34.63 Sq. Ins. Fig. 6. in outline, as indicated by Fig. 4, are shown at d, the value of - being 47 and the average ultimate resistance of the r three tests (varying but little from each other) being 30,000 pounds per square inch. The results shown at ^, / and g are also for carbon steel columns with built-up sections shown in the diagram on page 488, the cross-sectional area being 70.65 square inches. The length of these columns was 18, feet 9 inches and the ratio - was 38. Again a and b represent results for carbon-steel columns having - equal to 78 and 58 and with cross-sectional areas 42.75 square inches distributed as shown in Fig. 5. 502 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. Finally, the point n represents the result for two nickel steel columns having an area of cross-section of 34.63 square inches and - = 52, the section being shown in Fig. 6. The number of tests of the carbon-steel columns is not sufficient to form a proper basis for a straight line long column formula, but the broken line drawn through a and c and below e may, as a tentative matter, be represented by eq. (10); ^=44,000 — 150- (10) All these built-up carbon-steel columns were of mild steel, but their ultimate resistances are distinctly lower than the results for Mr. Christie's mild-steel angles. Full-size tests, however, have shown that the built-up column, unless designed with great care so as to act solidly as a unit, will not offer ultimate resistances as high as might be expected from the quality of the steel of which they are composed. On the same basis used for eqs. (7) and (9), the tentative working stress for built-up mild carbon-steel columns would be ; ^ = 14,000-50-. (11) The average for the two nickel-steel columms, shown at n, Fig. 3 is about 50,000 pounds per square inch and more than one-third greater than the corresponding result shown for the mild carbon steel at c. In all these column tests the elastic limit or the yield point of the member as a whole appears to be the controlling feature, i.e., the ultimate resistance is not above the yield point of the column and if the ratio - is comparatively large it will not be above the limit of elasticity of the column as a whole. It must be remembered also that both the elastic Art. 83.] TESTS OF VARIOUS STEEL COLUMNS. 503 limit and the yield point of built-up columns will be materially lower than the corresponding points of a single piece of the same metal. These tests appear to indicate that the ultimateresistances of nickel-steel columns exceed those of mild carbon-steel columns in about the same proportion that the elastic limit of nickel steel exceeds the elastic limit of the carbon-steel. Observations in these tests of full-size columns made at Phoenixville by Mr. Howard indicate that steel columns may be considered to have a true modulus of elasticity of about 29,000,000 or perhaps 29,500,000 for intensities of loading not greater than ordinarily allowed working stresses, i.e., from 8,000 to 12,000 pounds per square inch. While there are not sufncient data to determine precisely such physical elements of steel column resistance, there seems to be a relative motion of the component parts of a built-up member under test, which does not permit the existence of a true modulus of elasticity when loadings exceed about 12,000 to 15,000 pounds per square inch. Obviously the more nearly a column acts as a perfect unit, the better defined will be its elastic properties. Much more data derived from experimental work with full-size steel columns are imperatively necessary in order to reach definite conclusions regarding actions of stresses in the various parts of such members as well as for the development of such important details as latticing, battens, and other riveted details. Typical FormulcB Now in Use. As a result of the present conditions of experimental knowledge of built columns, as well as of those that are not built up, there is a great variety of column formulae used by engineers, both of the Gordon and straight-line type. The straight-line formula, however, is largely dis- 504 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. placing the Gordon formula. The General Specifications for Steel Railway Bridges recomniended by the American Railway Engineering Association as applied to the design of cross-sections of steel columns is ; ^ = 16,000 — 70- (12) The New York Central Lines are using the same formula in the design of their bridge work, as are engineering or- ganizations of other railway companies. Under the use of this formula a greater compressive load than 14,000 pounds per square inch is not permitted. The American Bridge Company Specifications for Steel Structures 1 9 1 3 , uses the following formula in its design work ; ^ = 19,000 — 100- (13) A provision for impact is made and 13,000 pounds per sq. in. is the maximum allowed under the use of eq. (13). A form of Gordon's formula still appearing in engineer- ing practice is 12,500 36,000 T"^ This formula is really an old wrought-iron column formula and should not be used without reducing the 36,000 in the denominator to 30,000. The New York Building Law gives for a steel column; ^ = 15,200-58 - , (15) The formula used by the City of Philadelphia for its buildings is of the Gordon type as follows : ^= Y~-p (^^) iH o 1 1,000 r^ Art. 83.] TESTS OF VARIOUS STEEL COLUMNS. 505 Other formulas could be cited but enough is shown to indicate the pronounced lack of uniformity in this practice. None of the preceding formulae should be used for - less than 30 nor more than about 120. In every case where a column formula is used, it would be much more convenient to employ a diagram with the curves accurately drawn to represent the desired formulae. The actual results, without computations, could be read directly from such long column curves. Details of Columns. In addition to the data already given in another portion of this article, the tests cited in this chapter show that the unsupported width of no plate in a compression member should exceed 30 to 3 5 times its thickness. These tests have usually been made with plates or metal J to | inch in thick- ness, and it is altogether probable that the above ratio of width over thickness would be increased with greater thicknesses. In built columns, however, the transverse distance between centre lines of rivets sectiring plates to angles or channels, etc., should not exceed 35 times the plate thickness. If this width is exceeded, longitudinal buckling of the plate takes place, and the column ceases to fail as a whole, but yields in detail. The same tests show that the thickness of the leg of an angle to which latticing is riveted should, not he less than \ of the length of that leg or side, if the column is purely and wholly a compression member. The above limit may be passed somewhat in stiff ties and compression members designed to carry transverse loads. The panel points of latticing should not he separated by a greater distance than 60 times the thickness of the angle leg to which the latticing is riveted, if the column is wholly a com- pression member. 5o6 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. The rivet pitch should never exceed i6 times the thickness of the outside thinnest metal pierced by the rivet, and if the plates are very thick it should never nearly equal that value. Art. 84. — Complete Design of Pin-end Steel Columns. In actual design it is necessary not only to make appli- cation of the preceding formulce for ultimate resistance of columns, but also to proportion a considerable number of details as matters largely of judgment and experience. If the column, like the section shown as the latticed channel or latticed upper chord in the preceding article, has two open sides as in the former or one open side as in the latter latticed, i.e., has small bars of iron running diagonally across those open sides in order to hold the parts of the column in their proper relative positions, those lattice bars vary in size with the size of column. While the dimen- sions vary somewhat among engineers, the following table, which has been largely used, illustrates effectively sizes that may properly be employed. For 6 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 inch rolled or built channels if Xye- " " " " " If Xfe " " " '' " ..= If Xf, " " " " ..\..ifand-2 XI " " " • " if " 2 xt 19-23 24-29 30 ^8 XI XI XI XI XI XI Xt^, x^ = ^r h a -^r ir- .1" " If . •li (( 2 •li (( 2h ■ •i^ Art. 84.] COMPLETE DESIGN OF PIN-END STEEL COLUMNS. 507 These bars or lattices may be used in single system, in which case each one should make an angle of about 60° with the centre line of the side of the column on which they are placed. If they are used in double system each pair of bars will intersect at their mid-points, and in this case the bars may make angles of 45° with the centre line of the side of the column on which they are emplo3^ed. In the case of double latticing the intersecting pairs of bars are riveted at their intersections. Lattice bars are held at their ends by one rivet or by two rivets according to the size of the column, as shown in the next table. Figs. I,. 2, and 3 illustrate different modes of riveting the ends of lattice bars. The size and number of rivets 00000000 00000000 -ca 3 \y UJ Fig. I. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. will obviously depend upon the size of the lattice bars employed and to some extent upon the manner in which their ends are held. The following table has been used in actual structural practice and exhibits good practice in the design of single latticing. It is based on the supposition that the lattice bars are fiats. In very large columns or in some exposed 5o8 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X situations it is necessary to use steel angles for latticing, the ends of which must be secured by rivets proportionate in number and diameter to the size of angle. Size of Lattice. Rivets: Number and Size. Number of Rivets at Lattice Point. Limiting Length of Lattice Centre to Centre of Inner Rivets. ilXx'^andf ....f" I 13 inches 2Xt7 f I 16 ' 2Xt\ 1 I 10 ' 2X1 f I 23 ' 2X1 f I 16 ' 2jXf 1 I or 2 20 ' 2^X1 1 I " 2 15 ' 2^Xt\ .| I " 2 20 ' 2hXT\ 15 I " 2 17 ' 2iXi ■|- I " 2 26 ' 2iXi tI I " 2 24 ' 2iX^ 4 15 ' 3X1 I or 2 18 ' 3X1 •1 I " 2 16 ' 3X1 ^■ 4 9 ; sXi^ |- I or 2 25 ' 3XtV It I " 2 22 ' 3X1^ f 4 15 ' 3Xi " I or 2 32 ' 3Xi jf I " 2 29 ' sxi . 2. . 4 21 ' sxh 2. . ■• 4 II ' *• 4XtV I . . f I or 2 28 ' * 4XtV 2. . 4 22 ' 1 4XtV 2.. i 4 15 " At each end of the open or latticed sides of the column are placed batten plates which limit the latticing. The width of these batten plates is determined evidently by the width of the column, but the lengths vary somewhat under different specifications. A good and convenient rule is to make the length of a batten plate at least equal to its width. The thickness of a batten plate will depend upon the size of column; it is seldom made less than | in. and usually not more than f in. for large columns. The size of rivet will also depend upon the size of columns. Rivets less than fin. in diameter are seldom used in railroad Art. 84.] COMPLETE DESIGN OF PIN-END STEEL COLUMNS. 509 work and rarely more than i in., the prevailing diameter being f in. One of the most important details of a column is the jaw or extension of one side at the end. The two jaws contain the pin holes through which are transferred to the pin the total load carried by the column. These jaws or extensions are formed so as to fit in between the parts of intersecting members, usually the upper or lower chords and eye-bars. It is, therefore, imperative to make them as thin as the bearing upon the pins and the carrying capacity of the jaws themselves acting as short columns will permit. Figs. 4, 5, 6, and 7 exhibit some types of Fig. 4. these post jaws as they commonly occur. As the figures show, they are formed by cutting away the flanges of the angles or channels forming parts of the posts and riveting on the pin or thickening plates required to strengthen the detail. The jaws form short columns whose lengths should be taken from the centre of the pin hole to the last centre line of rivets in the body of the column back of the 5 TO LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. cut in the angle or in the flange of the channel. This length indicated by / is shown in each of the figures. There have been but few tests made to determine the -e — e — e— a — e — — ©-^e — q — e- -X7 KJ C^ ^— o e — G — e^^-i-^-o o o -e — 9 ' o (5 — e U ^ Fig. 5. o o o a I .%P^.J$_-Jl_-_S--. -x- -G-^>- H Fig. 6. Fig. 7. resisting capacities of this particular detail, but those which have been made form the basis of the following formula for medium steel columns. Obviously there will usually Art. 84.] COMPLETE DESIGN OF PIN-END STEEL COLUMNS. 511 be at least two jaws at the end of each column. The width of the side of the column will be represented by 6, as shown in Figs. 4 and 6, and t will represent the total thickness of metal whose width is b, also as indicated in the same figures. If P represents the total load on one jaw of the post, usually one half the total load carried by the post or column, the average working intensity of pressure on the section of metal bt may be written P I , . - = 9000-340- (i) The thickness t of metal is usually the quantity desired, and eq. (i) gives i=-^+\ w 90000 26 In these equations P should be taken in pounds, with b, ty and / in inches. Eq. (2) has been used to a considerable extent in the design of steel railroad bridges, and it is probably as reason- able and safe a value of the thickness t as can be written with the experimental data and experience now available. It is applicable to steel with ultimate tensile resistance running from 60,000 to 68,000 pounds per square inch. For higher steel or for highway bridges, or for other struc- tures where less margin of safety may be justifiable, the value of t may be made correspondingly less than that given in eq. (2). Prob. I. It is required to design a mild-steel pin-end column 45 feet long between centres of pins to carry a load of 353,000 pounds. The column formula to be used is essentially that given as eq. (11) of Art. 83 : ^ = 16,000 — 70— (3). 512 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. This equation gives the greatest mean intensity allowed <«n the column, so that p multiplied by the area of cross- section to be determined must be ^ equal or nearly equal to 232,000. ' if-^ The least diameter or width of a built column should not exceed about D one thirty-fifth of its length, except Pi w^here posts or columns are used as ■-^ lateral members, when the length may ,. -t. ■'I r» Pj^ g reach as much as 40 times the least diameter or width of cross-section. In this case the column is to be built of two plates and four angles, as shown in Fig. 8, and the width of plate FG must, therefore, not be less than about 16 inches. A width of 18 inches will make a w^ell-proportioned column and that dimension will be assumed. The separation of the plates is preferably made such that the moment of inertia of the section about the axis AB will be a little larger than the moment about the axis CD. The pin will pierce the two plates so that its axis will be parallel to CD. Under these conditions, if the column is designed so as to be strong enough with the moment of inertia of section taken about CD, it will be still stronger in reference to the axis AB, and no further attention need be given to possible failure about the latter axis. If columns of this type are proportioned in the general manner indicated, the radius of gyration of the section about the axis CD will be approximately .35 of the width. In this case that trial radius will, therefore, equal 6.3 inches. Hence, inserting the values of ^ = 540 inches and r = 6.3 inches in eq. (3), there will result ;/? = 10,000 pounds per square inch. The total area of section required, there- fore, will be closely 353,000 -mo, 000 =35.3 sq. ins. The distribution of this metal between the plates and angles is Art. 84.] COMPLETE DESIGN OF PIN-END STEEL COLUMNS. 513 largely a matter of judgment. Let there be assumed Two 1 8" X \" plates = 22 . 5 sq. ins. Four 2>^"X 3F'X 1 1 -pound angles =13 " " Total =35 • 5 sq. ins. This is a tentative composition of section which must be tested by eq. (3) to determine whether it is as nearly accurate as it should be. In order to do this, the moments of inertia of the section, as indicated, must be taken about the two axes AB and CD. Moment of Inertia about CD: Two iS'^Xf" plates =2X|xS'= 607.50 Four 3i"X 3F'X i i-lb angles about own axis = 14 . 20 Four 3i'''x 3J"X I i-lb.angles about CL>=4X3.25X (7-99)^= 829.92 Moment of inertia = 1451 , 62 Moment of Inertia about AB: i8C4)* Two i8"X|" plates about own axis 2X — ^^^ = . 74 Two i8"X|" plates about A5 2X ii.25X(6.o6)2= 758.70 Four 3j''X3i"X I i-lb. angles about own axis = 14.20 Four 3y'X3rXii-lb.anglesabout^i5=4X3.25X(7.38)'= 708.38 Moment of inertia = 1482 .02 These computations show, first, that the moment of inertia about A 5 is a little larger than that about CD, which is as it should be. They also show that the radius of gyration r is 6.39 inches. The approximate rule gives r = 6.3 inches. These two values are sufficiently near to accept the former. The trial composition of section may, there- fore, be considered satisfactory and final. The thickness of the side plates, .625 inch, is sufficient to insure no buckling in the unsupported width between rivets. Similarly the length of leg of the 3i-inch angles is also far within safe or proper limits. All features of the cross-section are, there- fore, so arranged as to meet all the requirements of suitable resistance in detail. 514 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. The details of the ends of the columns where they are formed into jaws, as shown by Figs. 9 and 10, still remain \ )4 inch batten plate 20- -i— Fig. 9. Fig. 10. to be designed. The diameter of pin will be taken at 7 inches, as shown in Fig. 9. The permissible intensities of shearing and of the bearing on the walls of rivet and pin holes will be taken as follows: Shearing on rivets = 9000 pounds per sq. in. Bearing on rivets and pins = 16,000 pounds per sq. in. The total thickness of metal in the two post jaws will, therefore, be _ . . , - . 232000 . , Thickness 01 metal = — -— ^ = 2.1 inches. 7 X 16000 The thickness of metal in each jaw must therefore be at least ly^ inches. Inasmuch as the thickness of side plates of the column is f inch, the pin plates to be riveted to the side plates must be at least iV ^i^ch thick to supply the Art. 84.] COMPLETE DESIGN OF PiN-END STEEL COLUMNS. 515 proper bearing surface for the pin ; but that thickness must be decided by the formula for the jaws, eq. (2). In that equation, P = 116,000 pounds, while ^ = 18 inches and /, from Fig. 9, is 9 inches. Making these substitutions in eq. (2). / = i.i3 inches. In order to meet the requirements of the post -jaw for- mula, therefore, the pin plate must be at least J inch thick. It is essential however to make these details specially stiff and strong and the thickness will, therefore, be taken at t% inch, as shown in Fig. 9. The number of rivets required above the pin hole w^ould ordinarily be computed for the thickness of plate required for bearing on the pin, i.e., with the thickness of pin plate of re inch. Assuming that thickness for this purpose, the rivets being taken | inch in diameter, the bearing value of a single 'rivet will be IXtVX 16,000 = 6125 lbs. The single shear of one J-inch rivet at 9000 pounds per square inch has a value of 5412 pounds which is less than the bearing value; the shear will, therefore, decide the number of rivets required. The bearing value of the |-inch side plate on the pin is 7X1X16,000 = 70,000 pounds. Hence the number of rivets required in the pin plate on each side of the column will be 1 16000 — 70000 . . ^ ^ ^ = nme rivets (nearly). 5412 ^^ These nine rivets must be found above the pin. That number, however, is far too small for the pin plate acting as a part of the jaw, and it will be judicious to make the total number of rivets above the pin 12, as shown in Fig, 9. 5i6 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. The jaw plates will extend 5 inches beyond the pin, as shown. The two batten plates above which the latticing begins will each be taken \ inch thick, and they will be placed as shown in both Figs. 9 and 10. It is assumed that the ends of the column are to fit into or between other members of the truss, so as to require cutting away the legs of the steel angles, as shown, as this is a common requirement. The length of a batten plate should not be less than its width. In the present instance the width of batten will be 19.75 inches; the length will, therefore, be taken as 20 inches. As indicated in the tabular statement at the beginning of this article, the lattice bars, fully shown in Fig. 10, will be 2^X1 inches, and the latticing will be taken as double, although this is not always done for the size of column in this particular instance. The lattice bars will be riveted at their intersections also as shown in Fig. 10. The length of lattice bar between rivets will be about 11 inches, as the angle made by each lattice bar with the side of the column will be about 45 degrees. A single |-inch rivet, therefore, at the end of each bar will be sufficient, as shown by the second table of this article. At each panel point of latticing a single |-inch rivet will hold the ends of both lattice bars. The complete bill of material for the entire column will be as follows: Four 3i"X 3F'X i i-lb. angles, 46.42 ft. long. . 185 . 7 X 1 1 = 2,043 lbs. Two i8''XF plates, 46.42 ft. long 93X38.25 = 3,557 " Four 27"Xii"XA"plates 9X21= 189 " Four 2o''X 20" xy' battens 6|X34= 227 " 240 lin. ft. of 2^'' Xf" latticing 240X3.19= 766 " 1060 I" rivets 10 . 6X 54 = 572 " Total weight of one column = 7,354 lbs. Art. 84.] COMPLETE DESIGN OF PIN-END STEEL COLUMNS. 517 Prob. 2. Let it be required to design a mild-steel column with pin ends, 36 feet long between centres of pins, to carry a load of 225,500 pounds. It is supposed that the column is a member of a railroad bridge, so that the load given includes a full allowance for impact. Gordon's formula as formerly employed in the American Bridge Com- pany's specification will be used : 17000 1 + In this formula p is the greatest mean intensity of working pressure allowed on the section of the column, / the length between centres of pins in inches, and r the radius of gyration of the 1 I --J10-* column section in inches. As the length f ""^ of the column is but 36 ft. =432 inches J two rolled 15 -inch channels latticed 7 ^' may be taken as the principal parts, as l shown in Fig. 11. By turning to the -^—^ tables in any steel handbook, it will be found that the radius of gyration of a 1 5 -inch channel about the axis AB varies from about 5.6 inches to nearly 5.2 inches. The larger of the two values will be tentatively employed. Substituting ^ = 432 and r = 5.6 in the above formula for p, ^ = 11,000 pounds per sq. in. Hence the total area required is 225500 1 1 000 20.5 sq. ms. The table of steel channels in any handbook shows that the combined area of two 15 -inch 3 5 -pound channels is 20.58 sq. in., and they will be accepted as correct. The 5i8 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. same table gives the radius of gyration r about the axis AB, Fig. II, as 5.57 inches, which is essentially equal to the trial value 5.6 inches. As shown in Prob. i, it is desirable to have the moment of inertia of the section about AB,-Fig. 11, a little less than that about CD, the former (AB) being parallel to the axis of the pin. Let the separation of the channels be made 10 inches in the clear. By using the values of the table, the moments of inertia about the two axes may be written : About Axis AB: Moment of inertia = 3 20X 2 =640. Hence r^ = -=31.02; .*. r = 5.57 ins. 20.58 About Axis CD: Moment of two channel sections each about axis parallel to CD and through centre of gravity 2X 8 . 48 = 16 . 96 2 X 10, 29X 5^' =689 . 84 Moment of inertia = 706 . 80 Fig. 12. Fig. 13. These results are all satisfactory and show that no revision of the section as given in Fig. 11 is needed. The end details and latticing shown in Figs. 12 and 13 Art. 84.] COMPLETE DESIGN OF PIN-END STEEL COLUMNS. 519 remain to be considered. The following data will be required : Thickness of channel web =-43 inch. Allowed shearing on rivets and pins = io,cco lbs. per sq. in. Allowed bearing on rivets and pins. . = 20, coo lbs. per sq. in. Diameter of rivets =| inch. Diameter of pin =6 inches. Value of one |-inch rivet in single shear =6,013 lbs. Bearing of pin on channel web =6X .43 X 20,000 — 51,600 lbs. Bearing to be carried by pin plate = — ~ — • —51,600 = 61,150 lbs. Thickness of pin plate = — = si inch 6X20000 ^ Bearing value of one |-inch rivet on ^-inch plate = IXiX 20,000= 8,750 lbs. Hence one pin plate needs -- — ^ = ten |-inch rivets. 6013 " It is assumed that the ends of the column must be formed into the jaws show^n in Figs. 12 and 13. As indi- cated in Fig. 12 the mean or effective length of the jaw is 12 inches. The load carried by one jaw is 112,750 pounds; hence the thickness of that jaw is by eq. (2) 112750 12 t = s ::; — + — = itV inch (nearly). 8000X15 27 ^^ ^ ^' The thickness of the jaw or pin plate to be riveted to the jaw must therefore be itV— •43=Tf inch. In order that these plates may be firmly made a solid extension of the post or column they should be riveted to the w^ebs of the channels with the rivets shown in Fig. 1 2 . The proper design of the jaw, therefore, requires a much longer and thicker plate and more rivets than the simple consideration of the pin and rivet bearing and shearing. The width of channel flange is 3.43 inches, hence the total width of column over these flanges, as shown in Fig. 520 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. 13, is 16 J inches. Each batten plate is therefore taken as 17 inches by 18 inches. The length of each lattice bar of the single, 30-degree latticing will be about 16 inches between centres of rivets at their ends. Lattice bars 2 J inches by f inch in section will, therefore, be used. The complete bill of material for one column will then be Two 15'' 35-lb. channels 37i ft. long 2X35X37^ = 2,602 lbs. Four 1 3" X 30" X if" plates 10X41 -44 = 415 " Four i7''Xi8''Xi"plates 6X28.9 = 173 " Forty-six 2^'' Xf'X 19" bars 72X 3- 19 = 230 " Two hundred and twenty-five l'^ rivets 2^X 54 = 122 '* Total weight of one column . = 3,542 lbs. Art. 85.— Cast-iron Columns. Cast iron was the earliest form in which the metal iron was used for columns, and it is natural, therefore, that the first long-column formulae for cast iron should have been among the earliest for that class of members. The first experimenter was Eton Hodgkinson, who published the results of his tests on small cast-iron columns, the greatest length of which was but 60.5 inches, in the " Philo- sophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London for 1840." He not only recognized the round- and fixed-end conditions, but he also made the distinction between long columns and short blocks, the length of the latter being from 4 to 5 times the diameter or least cross-section dimen- sion. If d be the diameter of the colum.n in inches and / the length in feet, and in the case of hollow round columns if D be the exterior diameter in inches and d the interior diameter in the same unit, while P is the total or ultimate load in pounds on the column, Hodgkinson established the following formulae for long cast-iron columns: J3.76 -^ = 33> 37977:7 5 (^or rounded ends). . . . (i) Art. 85-] CAST-IRON COLUMNS. 521 (i3 55 P = 98,9 2 2-77^ ; (for fixed ends) (2) For hollow cylindrical columns of cast iron P = 29,i2o 77^^ ; (for rounded ends) . . (3) /^3-55_^3-55 P = 99,32o 777^ — —; (for fixed ends) . . . (4) The working or maximum load allowed in any design of cast-iron columns would be found by taking one fifth to one eighth of the values given in eqs. (i) to (4) inclusive. It will be observed that Hodgkinson's formulae expressed in the preceding equations are simply Euler's formulae as given in eqs. (6) and (9) of Art. 35. with the introduction of an empirical coefficient and with the indices of d and / changed to harmonize with the experimental results. As Hodgkinson's experiments were made on very small columns of different metal from that used in cast- iron columns of the present day, his formulae cannot safely be used for practical purposes at the present time. A correct formula for cast-iron columns must be based upon tests of full-size columns cast with the metal ordi- narily employed in structural practice. Such tests have been made at the U. S. Arsenal at Watertown, Mass., and will be found reported in H. R. Ex. Doc. No. 45, 50th Con- gress, 2d Session, and in H. R. Ex. Doc. No. 16, 50th Congress, ist Session. A valuable series of tests was also made at Phoenixville, Pa., at the works of the Phoenix Bridge Co., under the auspices of the Department of Buildings of New York City in 1896-97. Although the entire series, including both the tests at Watertown and Phoenixville, do not cover the variety of sectional forms and range of ratio of length to diameter that could be 522 LONG COLUMNS. JCh. X. ' Mil] 1 ill 'i -•- ------- - +. i-....| _j_----_ -.- _ __-_ — . 1 j 1 j ! ■ : ■ ■ ' 1 - - - M -h 1 ! ' / ■ " i 1 1 ■ 1 1 1 i ■■♦ 4+ '; ■ ^ .... , . , _ ^ , ^ , ,|| . ^ i '.•'•! / i ■ ■ ' . i 7 • • ' 11 tn I 1 ■ ' 1 H , / I OT = / 1 . / i i,\ ' i 1 , 1 : . 1 • / 1 • -^ 1 : 1 / , i : , .... . ,, uj 1 • ' 1 ' ■■ ' 1 1 '^ , ' / w ' / ' O ' / . . ^ ; :<-r, ! S -1 ' . ' ■ ■ ' , ' CO -:'-<•. ./•■■, '1 ' z z ■ /■ ■ ^ / ■ ' ■ ■ ' ■ ' ' 1 i 7 uj •■ : : ' 1 . . 1 J ^ 'IIxQ: I . •■ / • 1 ^ < , / : z w I J. / m\ ! ' 1 i < -)• /'•'/• : ^ 1 / o ■ /'■/■■'■'' ^1 ^ r^ / / i ^Q / /, i i i : . , : 1 ; . . . ' ^ Z . , / , ■ 1 ; 1 ' : ■ , • , UJ < / / + ' ! li.iiMji.'^^, ■/, / '■; '■'''' o+ , / 1 ! i 1 i 1 1 ' . , / ^ : 1 / / ' / ■ ' ' < ^ ' • 1 / t ■ / / I / ■*■ ' 1 : ' ' / • ■ 1 ' / / ' ' / / „^ ^ , (- . U'.-, .3 : o5 \ J /I ■ 1 / ■ ' // () + / / ' / ' / -N , ' / r/ , ,i'/ ' --it^ / , x' -. ■^4'. / / ^ ' 1 ,-^^/ \A / ^ - ^^-/ '\/ •^'' ( ^ ■ * ; ^V^A 7 *-/ i ' / .<§y '/=:;/:. = i XV ^ ^l // < / N.,. / ■ : ' •-'5 i , ■ > : .^-:^ / ''b/ , c:oi ' ' ->? ' ^/ ,■-:!.. 1 "> / dn \ ,, ' / ■ ^/ ' . ■ ^' . ^, . : ^J ^ ,,-^ , ■ ■ 1 . . ■/ ■ 1 1 - '-^ ^^ -' ^^ .'•.■■/' II' ' '■^ 1 ■ / C-, ( 1 ' ( ' i ■•/■'' i/ . ! i / ■ ' ^, ■ , i -'■'■■■/ ^i . , 1 •/;■■■■ o / ■ -. I M 1 : 1 '/ // / ^ ,■'■-:, , i . h i ■ . II j . '■ ' ' ' li 1 M i i 1 ' ' . ■ i ■ ^/ r ■ ■ ' 1 M ■ 1 ! i 1 ■ . 1 1 1 i / . ; ' . • ■ . i , , . 1 ••!■ , , : 1 1 1 h M 1 1 ;'<'','!, ■ ' '', .::,■,'-.,! i , . 1 ( __ . ^ — _ j , : . ^__ ^ -J L;;._^ ^ r ■ -- ■ - .-,. ^-. ^.-^ , ^.^-^ : i^ r !'."■ . .1 ^ -J 1 ' ' i ■ ~i , ' , -.-... \ , _ _ 1 ._. _. _(■■•_ -^ 1 ■■ ■ - " i .-. C-. ' .- . ■■■ , , " : ] - -1 ' ■ ! _' ' :. i- 1-^- ■- ^ ■ ^ . ■ \ ] '?, ■ - - ._: i_L — ■ ' "■ ' , . : . ! I 1 1 1 M > i 1 1 1 ' < J-M-H- _._ _ -1 1 1 i 1 ! 1 i h , :_ , 1 , , , , .,:,,.■■! i 1 l.y Art. 85. CAST-IRON COLUMNS. 523 desired, the results are sufficiently extended to show closely what may be considered the proper ultimate values for hollow round cast-iron columns of full size. Table I. Diameter in Inches. Length in Area of Section Length over Ultimate No. 1 Resistance Inches. Large End. Small End. in Exterior in Pounds Square Inches. Diameter per Square Inch. Ext. Int. Ext. Int. I 190.25 15 13 43.98 12.7 30,830 2 15 12.75 49 03 12.7 27,126 3 15 12.75 49 03 12.7 24,434 4 i5i 12.75 49 48 12.7 25,182 5 15 12.66 50 91 12.7 35,435 6 " 15 12.63 51 52 12.7 40,411* 7 160 8 6 21 99 20 29,604 8 160 8 5.91 22 87 ■ 20 28,229 9 120 6.06 3.78 17 64 20 • 25,805 10 120 6.09 3.96 17 37 20 26,205 II 147-75 8 6.5 17 08 18.5 25,973 12 150 9 7 25 14 16.7 21,183 ' 13 162 12 10 34 55 13.5 30,813 14 159 -75 14 12 40 84 II. 4 25,400 15 169 5 4-54 3 5 34 29,854 16 157 7.17 4 83 21 8 22 25,470 17 157 6.35 3 9 17 28 25 27,210 18 156 5.8 4 03 13 22 27 25,100 19 142.6 7.68 5 52 5-94 4 3 17 49 26.7 29,310 20 146.8 8.01 5 58 5 9 4 35 18 65 21.3 28,520 21 150 6.17 4 85 5 09 3 48 12 08 27 33,500 22 145.5 6 4 35 4 74 2 73 12 81 37-1 24,620 23 133.6 6.02 4 36 4 84 2 88 12 87. 24.6 28,060 24 129.3 6.03 4 35 4 87 2 95 12 87 23.7 27,350 25 127.6 7.47 5 97 5 72 4 62 12 13 19.3 46,660 26 118. 5 3.98 I 96 2 97 49 7 16 34-1 23,090 27 28 119 118 3.98 I 96 2 98 I 47 7 17 34.3 22,040 3-97 I 95 2 99 I 39 7 7^ 34-2 25,060 29 84.6 4.88 3.03 4 27 2 08 II -5 18.5 31,190 * Not broken. Table I shows the results of all these tests, while the Plate exhibits the same results graphically. The tests Nos. I to 10 inclusive were made at Phoenixville in De- cember, 1897, and Nos. 11 to 14 inclusive in 1896; the 524 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. former group under the immediate direction of Mr. W. W. Ewing, and the latter under the immediate direction of Mr. Gus C. Henning. The results shown for tests 15 to 18 inclusive were taken from H. R. Ex. Doc. No. 45, 50th Congress, 2d Session, but those for Nos. 19 to 29 inclusive are either taken or digested from H. R. Ex. Doc. No. 16, 50th Congress, ist Session, being portions of reports of tests of metals and other materials at the United States Arsenal, Watertown, Mass. As Table I shows, the columns Nos. 19 to 29 inclusive were slightly conical, although probably not enough so to affect appreciably their resistances. The areas of section in square inches for these columns were taken at mid- distance between their ends. As the area of section varied considerably in some columns that operation may be a source of a little error in determining the ultimate resist- ance per square inch from the result of the tests, but if the error exists at all it must be very small. The mid-external diameter was also taken for these columns in determining the ratio of the length over the diameter shown in the Table and in the Plate. As will be observed both in the Table and in the Plate, the ultimate resistances per square inch determined by the tests are quite variable, even for the same ratio of length over diameter. Indeed, in a number of cases they are quite erratic. In Nos. i to 6, for which the ratio of length over diameter was 12.7, the ultimate resistances vary from a little over 24,000 lbs. per square inch to over 40,000 lbs. per square inch with no failure at the latter value. Again, the ultimate resistance per square inch for No. 25, which shows a ratio of length over diameter of less than 20, is nearly 47,000 lbs. per square inch, which is excessively high as compared with other ultimate resist- ances with the same or less ratio of length over diameter. Art. 85.1 CAST-IRON COLUMNS. 525 These erratic results are not surprising in view of the ordinary character of the metal. It should be remembered that the failures of these columns are frequently recorded with such "remarks" as the following: "Foundry dirt or honey-comb between inner and outer surfaces," "bad spots," "cinder pockets and blow holes near middle of column," "flaws and foundry dirt at point of break." In other words, it was no uncommon feature to observe that defects, flaws, or blow holes or thin metal had determined the place of failure. There is considerable uncertainty in platting the results of tests affected by these abnormal con- ditions, but a more or less satisfactory law for the generality of cases may be determined from a graphical representation of the results, as shown on Plate I. On that Plate the ultimate resistances in pounds per square inch, as shown in Table I, have been platted as vertical ordinates, while the ratios of length over diameter given in the same Table are represented by the horizontal abscissas, all as clearly shown. The full straight line drawn in about a mean position among the results of the tests probably represents as near as any that can be found a reasonable law of variation of ultimate resistance with the ratio of length over diameter. It is evident that within the range of these experiments a straight line will represent the ultimate resistances fully as well as any curve, if not better, although the results for the lengths of thirty-four times the diameter begin to indicate a little curvature. The formula which represents this straight line, i.e., which gives the ultimate resistance per square inch, is as follows: / ^ = 30,500- 160J. ..... (5) It is to be borne in mind that these columns were round and hollow, and that thev were tested with flat ends in all 526 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. cases. The ordinary formula, based upon Hodgkinson's tests, and frequently used in cast-iron column construction, is as follows: 80000 1 + P = TP ^^) 400 d The curve corresponding to this particular form of Tredgold's formula is also shown on the Plate. It will be seen that at the ratio of length over diameter of 10 to 12 (not an uncommon ratio) the ultimate, as given by this formula, is just about double that shown by actual test. In other words, if a safet}^ factor of 5 were required, as is the case in some building laws, the actual safety factor would be but 2 J. The curve represented by eq. (6) is seen to cross the true curve at a ratio of length over diameter of about 29. A glance at the Plate will show how erroneous and dangerous is the use of the usual formula for hollow round cast-iron columns; indeed, that formula is grossly wrong, both as to the law of variation and the values of ultimate resistance. In view of the working resistances, which have been used in the design of cast-iron columns, it is no less interest- ing than important to compare the ultimate resistances per square inch of mild-steel columns, as determined by actual tests, with the ultimate resistances of cast-iron columns, as shown by the tests under consideration. The broken line of short dashes represents the formula I ^ = 52,000-180- • . (7) determined by actual tests of mild-steel angles made by Mr. James Christie at the Pencoyd Bridge Works, and given in Art. 60. This line or formula shows that the ultimate resistances per square inch of mild-steel columns Art. 85.] CAST-IRON COLUMNS. 527 are from 40 to 50% greater than the corresponding quanti- ties for cast-iron, the same ratio of length over diameter being taken in each comparison. When the erratic and unreliable character of cast-iron columns is considered, it is no material exaggeration to state that these tests show that the working resistance per square inch may be taken twice as great for mild-steel columns as for cast-iron ; indeed, this may be put as a reasonably accurate statement. The series of tests of cast-iron columns represented in the Plate constitute a revelation of a not very assuring character in reference to cast-iron columns now standing, and which may be loaded approximately up to specification amounts. They further show that if cast-iron columns ■ are designed with anything like a reasonable and real margin of safety the amount of metal required dissipates any supposed economy over columns of mild steel. If the average working stress per square inch is one fourth of the ultimate resistance, eq. (5) gives I ^ = 7600 — 40-7 (8) If the working stress is to be taken at one fifth the ultimate, eq. (5) gives / p = 6ioo-s22 (9) In these equations p is the average working intensity of pressure in pounds per square inch. The length / and the exterior diameter d must be taken both in the same unit, ordinarily the inch. These formulae may be used between the limits of - = 10 d and -7 = 35 or even 40. They may also be applied to hollow 528 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. rectangular columns with reasonably close approximation, d being taken as the smaller exterior side of the rectangular cross-section. Art. 86. — Timber Columns. The greater part of available tests of full-size timber columns have been made prior to 1900, and their results have not been obtained either by the aid of improved appli- ances in testing now employed, or in all respects under the care given in later testing work to secure accuracy or to avoid misinterpretation of the more or less obscure condi- tions which attend the testing of full-size timber members. The ratio of the length divided by the radius of gyration is much less in timber columns than those of iron or steel. Furthermore, as sections taken at right angles to the axes of timber columns are almost always rectangular, it is per- missible to use the ratio of the length over the least side rather than the length over the least radius of gyration, gaining thereby a little simplicity in the use of column formulae. Timber columns are subject to the same vicissitudes of knots, wind-shakes, season cracks and decay as other timber members. Indeed most failures of full-size timber mem- bers are induced by some local defect such as a knot, either decayed or sound. Unless in a thoroughly protected place, timber columns are in a condition of almost constant change and in the long run for the worse. The degree of seasoning is an element of material effect in the resistance of timber columns. The greater the amount of moisture in timber, the less will be its capacity for compressive resistance, other conditions remaining un- changed. As in all other full-size timber tests, the con- dition of moisture should be known and stated in connection with the results, of timber column tests. It makes little Art. 86.1 TIMBER COLUMNS. 529 or no difference whether the moisture is the original sap or the result of a damp atmosphere or immersion in water. Among the earliest tests were those of Professor Lanza, who investigated timber mill columns, mostly of circular section and some of them after standing in use in com- pleted buildings for various periods from one year to twenty- five years. These columns varied in length from about 2 to 14 feet, the great majority of them being from 11 to 14 feet. The diameters varied generally from about 5 inches to about II inches. A few were square. Neither the shape nor the dimensions of cross-sections appeared to affect materially the results of tests. The principal results of these tests are given in the tabulated statement below : Max. Mean. Min. Lbs. per Sq. In. Lbs. per Sq. In. Lbs. per Sq. In. Yellow pine, partially seasoned 5,450 4.370 3,510 Yellow pine, air seasoned 4,892 4,690 4,488 Yellow pine, dock seasoned . . . 5.950 4,563 3,477 White wood, partially seasoned 3,333 3,010 2,687 White oak, partialh^ seasoned. 3.786 3.070 1,964 White oak, in mill 6| years . . . 6,029 4,170 2,945 White oak, in mill 25 years . . . 6,147 4,420 3,266 White oak, thoroughly seasoned 4,450 3.175 1,865 The ends of these columns were usually flat, sometimes with a so-called " pintle " or, in a few cases, one end round. These results show the usual erratic features of full-size timber tests, some of which doubtless are due to undiscovered weaknesses at some point. Prof. Lanza stated that " The immediate location of the fracture was generally determined by knots." Some of the columns were tapered and the reduction of the section at the ends of such columns usually located the failure at those reduced ends. The greatest ratio of length to radius of gyration in these columns was about 86, but the actual results did not show that there was any discoverable relation between the 53° LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. ratio of the length over the radius of gyration and the ultimate column resistance. The latter was influenced little or none by the length of the columns. Tables I and II show the results of the early tests of Col. Laidley, Engineer Corps, U. S. A., made many years ago and reported in " Ex. Doc. 12, 47th Congress, ist Session." They show the large increase in ultimate resist- ance per square inch with short lengths. Indeed some of the pieces were short blocks. These results indicate the care that should be taken in discriminating between the ultimate compressive resistances of short timber blocks and long columns. The results in Table I for those pieces seasoned twenty years are too high, while those for pieces Nos. 16, 17, and 18 are low, in consequence of the material Table I. YEI.LOW PINE. No. Length, Inches. Form of Section. Section Dimensions, Inches. Ultimate Resistance per Sq. In. Lbs. I 20.4 Circular. 10. 2 diam. 6,676^ 2 119-95 Square. II Xii 6,230 (U 3 119.90 " II Xii 6,552 4 20.0 " 10. 4X 10.4 7,936 rt 5 16.0 " 8X8 8,165 ^ 6 8.0 " 4X4 7,394 73 7 3.0 " 1.5X 1.5 5,533 ^1 8 6.0 it 3 X 3 8,644 ■"S^ 9 6.0 " 3 X 3 8,133 •§0 10 3.0 " 1.5X 1.5 8.389 II 3-0 " 1.5X 1.5 8,302 be 12 3-0 " 1.5X 1.5 6,355 bJO 13 14.0 " 4-6X 4.6 9,947 '3 14 17.2 " 4-6X 4-6 10,250 s 15 19. 1 " 5-3X 5-3 7,820 _ CO 16 180.0 Rectangular. 16 XI3-65 3,070 17 180.0 ' ' 16. 2X 7.0 2,795 18 180.0 17 X 8.75 3,180 Nos. 13, 14, and 15 were pine of very slow growth. Nos. 16, 17, and 18 were very green and w^et. Art. 86.] TIMBER COLUMNS. 531 Table II. SPRUCE THOROUGHLY SEASONED. No. Length, Inches. Form of Section. Section Dimensions, Inches. Ultimate Resistance per Sq. In. , Lbs. I 24 Rectangular. 5-4X5-4 4,946 2 24 5 4X5 4 4,811 3 36 5 4X5 4 4,874 4 36 5 4X5 4 4,500 5 60 5 4X6 4 4,451 6 60 5 4X6 4 4,943 7 120 5 4X5 4 3,967 8 120 5 4X5 4 4,908 9 60 5 4X5 4 5,275 lO 30 5 4X5 4 5,372 II 15 5 4X5 4 5,754 12 121 .2 Circ ular. 12 4 dia m. 4,681 being green and wet. The tests pieces in Tables I and II were generally fine straight -grained timber of better quality than ordinarily used in engineering practice. This condition accounts largely for Col. Laidley's results, being materially higher than Prof. Lanza's for the same kind of timber. Formula of C. Shaler Smith. Although these formulae were deduced from tests made many years ago, they have been so extensively used over such a long period that they may properly be considered among the classics of engineering literature of this kind. Hence they are given here, although not now used so widely as formerly. The tests of full-size sticks on which the formulae are based were grouped by Mr. Smith as indicated and the corresponding formulae are as given below. 532 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. *' I St. Green, half -seasoned sticks answering to the specification 'good, merchantable lumber.' *'2d. Selected sticks reasonably straight and air-sea- soned under cover for two years and over. "3d. Average sticks cut from lumber which had been in open-air service for four years and over." If /= length of column in inches, d = least side of column section in inches, and p = Ult. Comp. resistance in lbs. per sq. in. ; then the formulae found for these three groups were : ForNo.i: /.^-^^^^ I P' 2Sod' Ty AT S2OO For No. 2 : p = ^ 300 a' For No. 3 : ^ = ^ I P' 2Sod^ ■ But in order to provide against ordinary deterioration while in use, as well as the devices of unscrupulous builders, Mr. Smith recommends the formula for group No. 3 as the proper one for general application. He also recommended J that the factor of safety be ^/- until 25 diameters are reached, and five thenceforward up to 60 diameters. This last limit he regards as the extreme for good practice. Art. 86.] TIMBER COLUMNS, 533 Tests of White Pine and Yellow Pine Full-size Sticks with Flat Ends. In consequence of the usual manner of simply abutting the end of timber columns against their supports, all such members are practically always assumed to have flat ends, but this expression does not mean accurately squared '' flat ends." Tables III and IV have been formed by digesting the results of tests of nearly or quite full-size white and yellow pine timber columns made at the U. S. Arsenal at Watertown, Mass., and reported in " Ex. Doc. No. i, 47th Congress, 2d Session," constituting one of the best series of timber column tests yet made in this country. Each result in both Tables is usually a mean of from two to four tests, although a few belong to one test only. All timber, both of yellow and white pine, was ordinary merchantable material, with about the usual defects, knots, etc., and failure frequently took place at the latter ; it was all well seasoned, and all columns were tested with flat ends. Table III. YKLLOW-PINE COLUMNS WITH FLAT ENDS. Length. Size of Stick Inches. 1' Ultimate Compres- sive Re- sistance, Lbs. per Sq. In. Length. Size of Stick, Inches. / d' Ultimate Compres- sive Re- sistance, Lbs. per Sq. In. Ft. Ins. Ft. Ins. 15 8.25X16.25 21.7 3,445 15 5-oXi2 35.6 3,764 3,304 10 16 8 5-5 X 5.5 22 4,738 23 4 7.7X 9-7 36.4 7.7 X 9-7 6.6 XI5.6 26.7 4,384 17 6 5.5X 5-5 38.2 3,242 15 27.0 3,593 15 4.5X11.6 41 2,462 12 6 5-5 X 5-5 27.3 5,077 26 8 7-4X 9-4 43 2,893 15 5-9 X12.0 30.8 3,546 15 4.0X1 1.4 44 3,065 20 7.6 X 9-6 31-2 3,496 20 5.4X 5.4 44-3 2,867 15 5.7 X11.7 31.9 3,106 22 6 5.5X 5-5 50 2,065 15 5.6 XI5-6 32.1 3.656 25 5.5X 5.5 55 1,856 15 5.5 X 5.5 32.8 3,962 27 6 5.3X 5-3 62.3 1,709 534 LONG COLUMNS [Ch. X. Flat-end yellow-pine columns were observed to begin to fail with deflection at a length of about 2 2d, d being the width or least dimension of the normal cross-section. All columns were of rectangular section, and / in the following table is the length. Table III, therefore, includes no short column, i.e., one which failed by compression alone with no deflection. About sixteen of the latter were tested with the follow- ing results: CM, ^ 11 • 1 ( maximum = 5,677 lbs, per sq. in. Snort yellow-pme columns ; J _, ' << << ^« 7 ju 1 M rnean =4,442 L-^d below 22 ) ■ ■ ^'^^ ,, <( ,( ( mimmum =3,430 " Each of the preceding tests was made on a single rectan- gular stick. A number of tests, however, were made on compound columns formed by bolting together from two to three rectangular sticks, with bolts and packing or separating blocks at the two ends and at the centre. The bolts were parallel to the smaller sectional dimensions of the component sticks. As was to be expected, those compound columns possessed essentially the same ultimate resistance per square inch as each component stick con- sidered as a column by itself, as the following results show. / is the length of the column and d the smallest dimension or width of one member of the composite column. All had fiat ends. l-^d. Number of Tests. C maximum = 4,559 lbs. per sq. in. 32.1 18 ^ mean =3,841 (minimum =2,756 (maximum = 3,*357 36 18.. i mean =3,122 (minimum =2,942 Table IV gives the results for white-pine columns, and corresponds with Table III, in that it shows only the failures with deflection, which was observed to begin with those columns at a length of 32^/. / and d possess the same Art. 86.] TIMBER COLUMNS. 535 Table IV. WHITE-PINE COLUMNS WITH FLAT ENDS. Ultimate 1 Ultimate Compres- 1 ■ Compres- Size of Stick, I sive Re- Size of Stick, / sive Re- Length. Inches. d ' sistance, Inches. d ' sistance, Lbs. per i Lbs. per Sq. In. 1 1 Sq. In. Ft. Ins. 1 Ft. Ins. 15 5-6XI5-6 32 1,874 17 6 5-4X5.4 40 1. 841 20 3 7-4X 9-3 32.4 2,448 26 8 7.5X9-3 42.7 2,113 15 5-6XII.5 32.7 2,432 20 5.3X5.3 45 1,455 15 3 5-4X 5.4 33 2,744 22 6 5-2X5-2 52 1,501 23 4 7-7X 9-6 36.4 2,072 25 5-3X5.3 57 . 952 15 4-5X11.6 40 1,672 27 6 5.4X5.4 62 1,081 signification as in Table III, the column l^d showing the ratios between the lengths and least widths. Thirty columns with lengths less than 32(i were tested to destruction. These sticks failed generally at knots by direct compression and without deflection. The results of these thirty tests were as follows: Short white-pine columns ; /-r-c^ below 32 All the preceding white-pine columns were single sticks, but a large number of built posts composed of two to four white-pine sticks bolted together, with spacing blocks at the two ends and at the centre, were also tested with the results shown below, l^d is the ratio of length over least width of a single stick of the set forming the composite column. l^d. Number of Tests. maximum = 3 700 lbs. per sq. in. mean = 2 414 " " ' minimum = 1 687 " " * maximum 32.1 15. C maxii < mean ( minin 2,273 lbs. per sq. in. i,q8o minimum =t,66i ) maximum = 2,255 mean =1,099 minimum =1,804 AO. maximum = 2 ,021 mean = 1 ,830 minimum = I ,419 536 LONG COLUMNS. [Ch. X. A comparison of these results with those given in Table IV shows that these composite or built columns were the same in strength per square inch with the single sticks of which they were composed, the latter being considered single columns. All the white-pine composite columns were tested witl: Plate F. 1 1 1 1 M 1 111; ! 1 1 ! r ! 11 ' MM M 1 ' M i 1 M M ' M 1 MM 1 M . 1 ' " III! II 1 MM MM 1 1 11 • 1 1 1 1 MM \ \ \ 1 1 M 11 1 II 11 1 1 III 1 L-j 1 1 Tf " "TtrT^'^^ji: — H IIWU ' |Wni e. r^ii-iit| o,i,iwr\o, | || {|| ||| M i T ■■'*-.^ ^ -"■- i M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ml 1 1 M ■ II ■ 1 1 M M M 1 1 M III 1 1 1 M M M 1 1 1 1 M 1 M 1 1 1 M M 1 1 1 III 1 M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 1 1 M 1 Mill MM' ' M Mill 1 M M ' i 1 I ! M Ml 1 1 ! M 1 III j 1 1 M 1 1 1 M 1 1 11 M 1 1 VUY\ V a 1 1 jl 11 M 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 1 1 M 1 1 ; 1 1 5000 Ids- 1 i m 1 m i ' " M 1 M 1 1 1 1 II 1 1 M M 1 1 1 M 1 1 M M WW H rf^ ""-..^ 1 1 3000 ------- - 1 ^^, '1 ■ i^iJ glmn • ""V1l-iJO' W-Pl N-E SI"" -lirxS " -**«*. '' -~- ^:: :::::: ::::-Wl:jm^%L---------------- ------------ --»^-^-^J^-^-;j lUUO--' --^ -..._._.... I ; h -- -- ^ - - 1 ' ' i ■ - - - - j J llm.!' ^P 20 1 1 ^M 401 1 f- 1 SO |^_ ^ I _£ flat ends and were built up with the greatest widths of individual sticks adjacent to each other. The results in Tables III and IV are shown graphically in Plate F. One ordinate gives the values of l-^d, and the other the ultimate resistance in pounds per sq. in. The full curved lines running into horizontal tangents at the left represent about mean lines through the points indicating the actual column tests. The broken lines represent the following empirical for- mulae ; in which p is either the ultimate resistance or work mg stress in pounds per sq. in. Art. 86.] TIMBER COLUMNS. 537 For yellow pine . . . _/? = 5800— 7o(/-f-(i) " white " ... p = ^Soo - 4j (l -^ d) For wooden railway structures there may be used: For yellow pine . . . ^ = 750 — 9(/-i- J) '' white "... p = soo-6{l^d) For temporary structures, such as bridge false works carrying no traffic: For yellow pine . . . p = i$oo—i%{l^d) '' white *' . . . p = iooQ-i2{l-rd) The preceding formulce are to be used only between the limits oj - = 20 and -=60 for yellow pine and ■-}=3o and da a - = 60 for white pine, d For short columns below - = 20 and -=30 there are to d d be used for yellow and white pine respectively : Ultimate. Railway Bridges. Stm?tu?e7 Yellow pine. . . .^ = 4400 550 iioo lbs. per sq. in. White " . . . .p = 2400 300 600 " " " All the preceding values are applicable to good average lumber for the engineering purposes indicated. Table V exhibits a number of results of the tests of short timber columns taken from the '* U. S. Reports of Tests of Metals and Other Materials" for 1894, 1896, 1897, and 1900. It will be observed that the ratios of length over thickness, i.e., minimum dimension of cross-section, are less than 22, and with two exceptions much less. These columns do not, therefore, come within the range of appli- cation of such formulae as those given on the preceding page for yellow pine and white pine. 538 LONG COLUMNS. ich. X. Table V. SHORT TIMBER COLUMNS. Timber. Long-leaf pine.. Short-leaf pine. Spruce. ....... Long-leaf pine * Cypress White pine. . . . Red oak. . . Douglas fir. White oak . Dimensions, I iches. /. Thick- d Leng'h Bre'dth ness. 1 20 9.8 9.8 I 2 120 9.8 9.8 12 120 9.8 9.8 12 120 9.8 9.8 12 120 9.8 9.8 12 120 9.8 9.8 12 120 9.6 9.6 12 131 9-S 9-5 14 120 8 8 58 9-5 7-9 8 71 9-5 7-9 9 48 4 to 6 3-5 14 60 14 2.8 22 60 8& 14 3 20 60 12 4.1 15 121 10 8 IS 106 10&12 10 1 1 74 7-5 7-9 lo 6q 10 8 9 Ultimate Compressive Resistance, Lbs. per Sq. In. Max. Mean. Min. 4,976 3,800 4,200 3,925 3,400 4,000 3,174 7,354 3,457 6,247 4,574 3,558 3,957 3,481 ^,000 3,568 2,589 6,093 3,308 3,652 2,917 5,160 6,211 6,725 6,220 3,697 4,214 4,372 4,042 4,200 3,369 3,714 3,037 2,600 3,135 1,900 4,960 3,113 2,917 S>568 Butt sticks. Top Middle " Butt Top " iViiddle Old posts. Probably 170 years old. * Well seasoned and dry; 12 years old. Had been in a fire and corners were partially charred. All posts represented in this table contained probably 1 5 to 18 per cent, of moisture, or perhaps more. The long-leaf and short-leaf pine tests show that columns taken from the butts of trees are stronger than those taken either from the middle or the tops, the top sticks, as a rule, having the least ultimate resistance per square inch of all. The white -pine and red-oak sticks yield interest- ing results on account of their age, as they were taken from some wooden trusses of the Old South Church, Boston, Mass., a building constructed in 1729. The timber was so housed as to be completely protected and kept very. dry. The results show no loss of resistance as compared with tests of the same kind of timber at the present time. The effect of immersion in water on the resistance of timber is illustrated by tests made at the Watertown Arsenal. A post similar to one of the old long-leaf pine columns, 12 of which were tested in a seasoned condition Art. 86.] TIMBER COLUMNS. . 539 giving the average shown in the Table of 6093 pounds per square inch, was submerged in water for a period of 130 days and then tested with the result of failing at 3800 pounds per square inch. The values given in Table V correspond closely to the results shown for yellow pine and white pine on pages 534 and 535, so far as they may properly be compared. CHAPTER XL SHEARING AND TORSION. Art. 87. — Modulus of Elasticity. It has already been shown in some of the Articles of the first part of this book that the stresses of shearing and torsion are identical, both being shears; hence the modulus of elasticity is the same for both. As it is much more convenient to make accurate deter- minations of the modulus of elasticity in torsion than in direct shearing, the former method has been employed in practically all cases. A number of such moduli for four varieties of steel are given in Art. ^S. Those values show that the modulus changes but little for the different varieties of steel indicated. The aggregate of torsion tests so far as they have been made indicate that the two moduli of elasticity, G for shear and E for direct stresses of tension and compression, have the approximate relation : G = {.4 to .45)^- Prof. Bauschinger published in *' Der Civilingenieur, " Heft 2, 1 88 1, the results of some of his tests of cast-iron cylinders or prisms which are still valuable on account of the accuracy with which he made his determinations. The prisms were about 40 inches long, and were subjected to torsion, while the twisting of two sections about 20 inches 540 Art. 87.] MODULUS OF ELASTICITY, 541 apart, in reference to each other, was carefully observed. The results for four different cross-sections will be given — i.e., circular, square, elliptical (the greater axis was twice the less), and rectangular (the greater side was twice the less). In each case the area of cross-section was about 7.75 square inches. The angle a. is the angle of torsion — i.e., the angle twisted or turned through by a longitudinal fibre whose length is unity and which is at unit's distance from the axis of the bar. Section. Hrrnlar j 0.007 degree 7,466,000 lbs. per sq ^^^^^^^^ 1^^-^ - 6,157,000" " 7,437,000 " 6,228,000 " 7,039,000 " 5,987,000 " Elliptical...... ..]°;°°9 Square Rectangular IC 076 0.008 073 o.oi 0.08 6,996,000 5,716,000 The formula by which G is computed, when the torsional moment and angle a are given, is the following: G = M I^ 'A a (i) in which M is the twisting moment, A the area of the cross- section, Ip the polar moment of inertia of that cross-section, and c a coefficient which has the following valuep 47:^ = 39.48 for circle and ellipse, 42.70 *' square, 42.00 " rectangle, as shown in Appendix I. Bauschinger's experiments show that the coefficient of shearing elasticity for cast iron may be taken from 6,000,000 to 7,000,000 pounds per square inch; also that it varies for different ratios between stress and strain. It has been shown in Art. 6, that if E is the coefficient of elasticity for direct stress, and r the ratio between direct m 542 SHEARING AND TORSION. [Ch. XI. and lateral strains, for tension and compression, that G may have the following value: E Prof. Bauschinger, in the experiments just mentioned, measured the direct strain for a length of about 4 inches, and the accompanying lateral strain along the greater axis of the elHptical and rectangular cross-sections, and thus determined the ratio r between the direct and lateral strains per imit in each direction. The following were the results: Compression. Section. r. G. Circular 0.22 6,541,000 lbs. per sq. in Elliptical 0.23 6,541,000 " " " Square ..0.24 6,442,000 " " " Rectangular 0.24 6,499,000 " " " TENSION. Circular o. 23 6,570,000 lbs. per sq. in. Elliptical 0.21 6,811,000 " " " Square 0.26 6,399,000 " " " Rectangular 0.22 6,527,000 " " " The values of E are not reproduced, but they can be calculated indirectly from eq. (2) if desired. It is seen that the values of G, as determined by the different methods, agree in a very satisfactory manner, and thus furnish experimental confirmation of the funda- mental equations of the mathematical theory of elasticity in solid bodies. The fact that G is essentially the same for all sections is also strongly confirmatory of the theory of torsion in particular. These experiments show^ that, for cast iron, the lateral strains are a little less than one quarter of the direct strains. If r were one quarter, then G =|-E, or E =|G^. Art. 88.1 ULTIMATE RESISTANCE. 543 Art. 88. — Ultimate Resistance. It has seemed more convenient to give some values of ultimate and working resistances for the materials iron and steel which are much more commonly used than any others to resist torsion in Arts. 37 and 38, where the complete analyses of the formulae for the common theory of torsion are given. Those articles should, therefore, be consulted for such formulae and analytic operations as are involved in the design of shafting to resist torsion. The experimental values set forth in the following articles may be employed in the formulae of the common theory of torsion for any de- sired practical operation in the design of torsion members. Before considering the ultimate shearing resistance of special materials it will be well to notice the two different methods in which a piece may be ruptured by shearing. If the dimensions of the piece in which the shearing force or stress acts are very small, i.e., if the piece is very thin, •the case is said to be that of "simultaneous" shearing. If the piece is thick, so that those portions near the jaws of the shear begin to be separated before those at some dis- tance from it, the case is said to be that of "shearing in detail." In the latter case failure extends gradually, and in the former takes place simultaneously over the surface of separation. Other things being the same, the latter case (shearing in detail) , will give the least ultimate shearing resistance per unit of the whole surface. In reality no plate used by the engineer is so thin that the shearing is absolutely simultaneous, though in many cases it may be essentially so. Wrought Iron. There may be found in the Articles on Riveted Joints some experimental determinations of the ultimate shearing 544 SHEARING AND TORSION. [Ch. XI. resistance of wrought iron which, under the conditions of such joints, may range from about 34,000 to about 43,000 pounds per square inch. It has been observed in the consideration of riveted joints that the ultimate resistance to shear of rivets will generally be less with thick plates than with thin, because the bending stresses of tension and compression will generally be greater for thick plates than for those that are thinner. If the riveted joint is so designed that the bending stresses are not greater for thick plates than for thin ones, the effects of bending will neces- sarily disappear. Such tests as have been made on direct shearing resist- ance show that generally it may safely be taken at 35,000 to 40,000 pounds per square inch, or if S is the ultimate shear per square inch and T the ultimate tensile resistance of wrought iron per square inch, there may be taken ap- proximately Cast Iron. There are few tests available for the determination of the ultimate shearing resistance of cast iron. For the ordi- nary grades, such as cast-iron water pipes and similar soft gray -iron castings, the ultimate shearing resistance • has sometimes been taken equal to the ultimate tensile resist- ance, i.e., 15,000 to 18,000 pounds per square inch, but this is probably too high except for the special stronger grades of material. For general purposes it is probably safe to take the ulti- mate shearing resistance of cast iron about three-quarters of its ultimate tensile re^stance. It should only be used for shearing, however, at a low working stress, depending obviously on the. purpose for which its use is contemplated. Art. 88.] ULTIMATE RESISTANCE. 545 Steel. The results of Prof. Ricketts' shearing tests on both open- hearth and Bessemer steel rounds with different grades of carbon are given in Table I of Art. 43. The elastic limit is the point at which the metal first fails to sustain the scale beam. The double-shear resistance in one case exceeds the single by over six per cent. According to these tests, the ultimate shearing resistance of mild steel may be taken at three quarters of its ultimate tensile resistance. Each shear result is a mean of three tests. The rivet steel was low, containing but .09 per cent, of car- bon. While the specimens of Bessemer steel were a little higher in carbon, ranging from . 1 1 to . 1 7 per cent., except the last six, they were also of low or medium steel. It should be carefully noted that the results in that table show that the ultimate' shearing resistances for the low or medium steels running from 44,600 pounds per square inch up to 53,260 pounds per square inch are closely three fourths the corresj^onding ultimate tensile resistances. On the other hand, the six specimens of high steel give ultimate shearing resistances but little over two thirds of the corre- sponding ultimate tensile resistances. This is a feature of the relation between the ultimate shearing and ultimate tensile resistances of different grades of steel which is commonly exhibited in tests. The high steel appears to yield an ultimate shearing resistance of sensibly less per- centage of the tensile ultimate than low steel. In the Arts. 74 and 76 on riveted joints there will be found a number of values of ultimate resistance for steel rivets in shear. They constitute important determinations of the ultimate shearing resistance of steel rivets under con- ditions in which they are frequently used. 546 SHEARING AND TORSION. [Ch. XI. Copper, Tin, Zinc, and Their Alloys. The following values of the ultimate resistance to torsive shear Tm, were determined by Prof. R. H. Thurston in his early experimental work on the bronzes. Although these determinations were made on test specimens only .625 inch in diameter and with a torsion length of i inch, they con- stitute practically the only fairly complete shear and torsion data on the copper-tin and copper-zinc alloys. Table I. Composition. Ultimate Torsive Shear, T,n- Elastic Limit, PerCentof r,„. Ultimate Torsion Angle. Cu. Sn. Pounds. Degrees. 100 00 35,910 35 1530 100 rtha1 1imf>«;tnTlP T^llTTalo . . . 1,735 55° SHEARING AND TORSION. [Ch. XL All the results except the last are taken from the Report for i8q4. Where but one value appears in the table one test only was made. In the other cases two tests were made and the mean values are means of the two shown in the columns containing the greatest and least. It will be observed that the ultimate shearing resistance is scarcely more than ten per cent, of the ultimate compressive re- sistance of the various stones tested. The greatest permissible working stresses for natural stones in shear, in design work, will necessarily depend on the duty to be performed. In view of the variable char- acter of even the best of natural stones as delivered ready for use, one eighth to one tenth of the ultimate is as much as should be taken in ordinary cases, and materially less than that under some conditions. Bricks. The shearing resistance of bricks, like that of natural stones, is seldom employed, but it is sometimes needed. The ultimate resistances of bricks in shearing shown in Table V are taken from the " U. S. Report of Tests of Metals and Other Materials " for 1894. Table V. BRICKS IN SHEARING. Kind of Brick. R--'- 'sheared Sur- ance. Lbs. per Square Inch. faces. Hydraulic Press Brick Co., St. Louis, No. 6 " 511 " " " " " brown " " " " Chicago, red Northern Hydraulic Press Brick Co., Minneapolis, dark red. Eastern " " " " Philadelphia, 210. . . . " " " " " " 220 " ." " 390 Philadelphia and Boston Face Brick Co., Boston, gray 1,011 642 1,047 784 714 1,167 1,097 988 433 639 1 Art. 88.J ULTIMATE RESISTANCE. 551 In these shearing tests the sheared surfaces were each about 2.25 by 4 inches in dimensions. The ultimate shearing resistances in Table V range scarcely 10 to 20 per cent, of the ultimate compressive resist- ances of the same materials shown in Art. 68. Working shearing stresses for design operations should not be taken more than one eighth to one tenth of the ultimate values found in Table V, CHAPTER XII. BENDING OR FLEXURE. Art. 89. — Modulus of Elasticity. The modulus of elasticity as determined by experiments in flexure can scarcely be considered other than a con- ventional quantity. If the span of a beam were very long compared with the depth of the beam and if the moduli of elasticity for tension and compression were equal to each other, and if all the hypotheses involved in the common theory of flexure were true, then the modulus of elasticity for flexure would be a real quantity and essentially the same, at least, as that for either tension or compression. These conditions, however, do not exist in bent beams and the quantity ordinarily called the modulus of elas- ticity in flexure possesses value chiefly as an empirical factor which enables deflection, independently of shear, to be estimated with sufficient accuracy for all usual purposes. The formulas to be employed in the determination of the modulus of elasticity for flexure have already been established in connection with the common theory of flexure and their use will be shown in succeeding articles. Art. 90. — FormulaB for Rupture. The formula of the common theory of flexure, available for practical use, are true only within the limits of elas- ticity. In the testing of beams to failure they are employed precisely as if the elastic properties of the material were maintained up to the degree of loading which causes failure. 552 Art. 90.] FORMULA FOR RUPTURE. 553 While this, strictly speaking, is irrational, it is the only satisfactory procedure available. By placing the analytic expression for the moment of the internal stresses in the normal section of a bent beam equal to the moment of the external loading causing failure, the resulting equation may be solved so as to give the apparent ultimate intensity of stress k in the extreme fibres of the beam. The so- called intensity of fibre stress found in this manner is an empirical quantity which may be introduced into the for- mulae of the common theory of flexure and so make them applicable to the operations of engineering practice in con- nection with loaded beams of any shape of cross-section. If k and k'^ are the greatest intensities of stress in the section of rupture and at the instant of rupture; y the variable normal distance of any fibre from the neutral sur- face; yi and y^ the greatest values of y; b the variable width of the section (normal to y) ; and M the resisting moment at the instant of rupture ; then the general for- mula for rupture by bending, as given by eq. (i) of Art. 26, is - I y'^hdy-^ — -, \ y^bdy. . . . (i) '1> y J-y' This equation is in reality based on the supposition that the moduli of elasticity for tension and compression are not equal. It is rare, however, that such a supposition is made. It is practically the invariable rule to assume the moduli of elasticity for tension and compression to have equal values and such an assumption is fortunately sufficiently accurate for all ordinary purposes. If the tensile and compressive moduli of elasticity are k k' the same — =—. and eq. (i) becomes yi y ^=57 ,• • (^) M = y^ 554 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. This is the usual equation of flexure employed so fre- quently in connection with the design of bent beams or the investigation of their carrying capacity, I being the moment of inertia of the normal section of the beam di the distance of the most remote fibre from the neutral axis of the section and M the moment of the external forces or loading about the neutral axis of the section in question. In the prac- tical use of this formula it is only necessary to introduce the proper values of I and di for the shape of a section involved. Art. 91. — Beams with Rectangular and Circular Sections. These are the simplest forms of sections for bent beams employed in engineering work. Timber beams are with few exceptions of rectangular section and so are many rein- forced concrete beams, although in such a case the section is composite, i.e., composed of two materials, and it will receive separate treatment in a later article. The solid circular section belongs to pins in pin-connected truss bridges whose design always involves their consideration as a loaded beam of very short span. The following are the values of / and d^ for rectangular and circular sections, h being the side of the rectangle normal and h that parallel to the neutral axis, while r is the radius of the circular section and A the area in each case : ... (i) bh' Ah' 12 12 Rectangular: - 2 r , Tzr' Ar'' / = — =— -, Circular: < 4 4 ^d,=r. (la) Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 555 If the beams are supported at each end and loaded by a weight W at the centre of the span (or distance between supports) , which may be represented by /, then the moment at the centre of the beam becomes JP:r=M=— (2) 4 There will then result from eq. (2), Art. 89: For rectangular sections: ,. Wl khh? kAh , , M=— -=-—=-— . ..... (3) 400 For circular sections : .. Wl irkr^ kAr , , M= — = = (4) 4 4 4 The quantity k is called the modulus of rupture for bending, and if experiments have been made, so that W is known, eq. (3) gives 3M^3]^ 2 Ak 2 bh^' ^^^ and eq. (4) r^ Wl Wl ,^, ^=^-=— ^. ....... (6) Ar xr ■ If the rectangular section is square, bk^ =b^ =h^. Steel. If the beam is simply supported at each end and carries a load W at the centre, while E is the coefficient of elasticity and w the deflection at the centre, eq. (28) of Art. 28 gives Wl' / ^ " = 4^- .^'^ 556 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. If, in any given experiment, w is measured, E may then be found by the following form of eq. (7) : -(8) 4SWI If the section is rectangular ^ WP 4wbh' (9) These equations enable the coefficient of elasticity E to be computed readily from experimental observations. It IS only necessary to measure accurately the deflection w produced by the load or weight IF and then introduce all the known quantities in eq. (8) or eq. (9). A bar of wTought iron 3 inches deep and i inch wide was placed on supports 48 inches apart and loaded with a weight of 400 pounds at mid-span. The measured de- flection was .0138 inch. Hence J-, 400X48X48X48 E = — - = 29,730,000. 4X1 X3X3X3X. 0138 Other applications may be made in precisely the same way. High Extreme Fibre Stress in Short Solid Beams. During the period when wrought iron was used for structural purposes, especially for wrought-iron pins with diameters up to 9 or 10 inches, it was observed that if the ultimate extreme fibre intensity k was computed by eq. (5) or (6) with data obtained by actual test, the result would be excessively high, i.e., far beyond the ultimate resistance to tension. These pins, however, on which are packed the Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 557 lower chord eye-bars of an ordinary truss bridge, have very short spans, indeed the span is usually much less than the diameter of the pin and sometimes less than one quarter of the diameter of the pin. It should be remembered in this connection that the common theory of flexure is im- plicitly if not explicitly based upon the condition that the length of span of the bent beam must be long compared with the depth of the beam. In fact the span should be many times that depth, and the longer it is the more nearly correct becomes the common theory of flexure. These ob- servations are equally true whether the cross-section of the beam_ is circular or rectangular or has any other shape. The following Table shows the results of tests of a series of short wrought -iron beams of circular section made by the author when wrought -iron pins were used in bridge con- struction, but which illustrate markedly the intensities of extreme fibre stress found with short spans. It will be observed that the spans were 8 inches and 12 inches only CIRCULAR BEAMS OF "BURDEN'S BEST" WROUGHT IRON. Kind. Diameter. Span. W. Elastic. Ultimate. K. Elastic. Ultimate. Turned. Turned. Turned. Turned. Rough. Rough. Turned, Turned, Rough. Rough. Turned Turned Turned Turned Ins. 25 25 ■25 .25 .00 .00 I .00 I .00 I .00 1 .00 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 Ins. 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 Lbs. 3,000 4,400 1,700 2,800 700 1,200 700 1,300 Lbs. 6,000 10,500 3,000 4,800 1,100 1,900 1,100 1,900 Lbs. 46,950 45,900 54,760 52,150 55,000 57,000 55,000 51,950 57,000 47,100 53,880 47,100 58,370 Lbs. 93,900 109,500 93,870 114,700 91,700 101,900 91,600 107,000 91,680 97,800 74,050 85,310 74,050 85,310 558 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. while the diameters of the circular beam sections varied from 1.25 inches down to .75 inch. W is the centre load and the extreme fibre intensity k is computed by eq. (6). The ultimate intensity k was assumed to be reached when the deflection at the centre of span amounted to about the diameter of the circular, section of the beam. This. particular feature of the tests is a matter of judgment, but k would differ little whether it be taken at a centre deflection equal to the diameter of the circular section or one half that diameter or even less. It will be noticed that the ultimate values of k are all much larger for the 8-inch span than for the 12-inch, and that all the ultimate values increase materially with the depth of the beam, rising to 107,000 to 114,700 pounds per square inch for diameters (i.e., depths of beams) of i inch and i{ inch. It will also be observed that the elastic limits are greatly increased. The ultimate tensile resist- ance of the iron used in these tests was about 55,000 pounds per square inch and the elastic limit a little more than half that value. Steel. Investigation by actual test has shown that short steel beams with circular or rectangular section will exhibit the same elevation of ultimate intensity of flbre stress k as found for wrought iron in the preceding section. This is well illustrated by the following tabular statement of results of tests of Bessemer steel beams with circular cross-section, also made by the author in the early days of the use of steel for bridge building. The Table is self-explanatory in view of the explanations made for short wrought-iron beams of circular section. The ultimate tensile resistance of the mild Bessemer steel used in these tests was about 65,000 to 70,000 pounds per square Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 559 CIRCULAR BESSEMER STEEL BEAMS, EQ. (6). Kind. Diameter. Span W k. Elastic. Ultimate. Elastic. Ultimate. Turned In. 1. 00 1. 00 1. 00 I .00 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 Ins. 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 Lbs. 2,500 3,750 1,150 1,800 1,150 1,800 Lbs. 4,500 7,500 1,800 3,300 1,700 3,300 Lbs. 86,000 85,300 76,400 76,400 77,400 80,800 77,400 80,800 Lbs. 146,750 152,800 137,520 152,800 122 200 " SI t( 148,200 114,400 148,200 (( « inch and the elastic limit about 35,000 to 38,000 pounds per square inch. The ultimate intensity of stress in the extreme fibres of these beams ranged, however, from 114,400 up to 152,800 pounds per square inch, the larger values belonging to the greater depth of beam and the smaller values to the smaller depth. The elastic limit is seen to be correspondingly high. These and the preceding tests show that the apparent ultimate resistance of wrought iron and structural steel in the extreme fibres of very short beams with circular or rectangular cross-section may be even more than twice the ultimate tensile resistance as derived from the testing of ordinary tensile specimens. This feature becomes even more marked when the spans of the cylindrical beams are still shorter, perhaps as short as the diameter of the circular section. In the design of pins in pin-connected bridges, this high- resisting capacity of wrought iron or steel in pins is recog- nized by making the working resistance in the extreme fibres of pins considered as beams as much as 50 per cent, higher than in members subjected to simple or direct tension. 56o BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. The explanation of this phenomenally high resistance to the tension of flexure (and also the compression) is found, as already indicated, in the fact that the common theory of flexure is not correctly applicable to such excessively short beams. No such high intensity of tensile (or com- pressive) stress actually exists in the metal as computed by eqs. (5) and (6). When the span becomes very short, not more than perhaps three or four times the depth of the beam, lines of stress run from the point of application of the load at the centre of the span direct to both supports, transverse shear being the vertical components of the stresses acting along these lines. All such or similar stress action reduces the actual flexure and makes the bending stresses of tension and compression correspondingly less; but as the flexure formulae, eqs. (5) or (6), contain no recognition of this condition, the apparent fibre stresses computed by their use are far above the actual. Numerous other similar short solid beam tests have confirmed the results given in the preceding two Tables. Cast Iron. Although cast iron is rarely ever used to resist flexure except in window and door lintels or other similar members whose duties are light, tests of short cast-iron beams have shown the same phenomena of greatly elevated ultimate resistance as found for the more ductile metals. The apparent ultimate intensity k in the extreme fibres of short cast-iron beams of circular or square section may be taken 50 per cent, above the ultimate tensile resistance of the same metal under ordinary tensile tests. Alloys of Aluminum. Table VIII of Art. 59, in the fifth column from the left side, exhibits values of the ultimate stress in the extreme Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 561 fibres of small beams of varying proportions of aluminum- zinc alloys. As might be anticipated, beams of either of those metals showed comparatively low resistance, but with aluminum varying from 80 down to 50 per cent, and zinc from 20 up to 50 per cent, the resistance was excel- lent, the maximum being found with Al js and zinc 25. Table XI of Art. 59 exhibits the ultimate fibre stresses in small beams of the alloys of aluminum with copper, zinc, manganese and chromium. The rolled bars of Al 96 and Cu 4 give excellent results; as does the cast bar of ^/ 75.7, Cu 3, zinc 20 and Man 1.3. The remaining values of the transverse resistances in the table are self-explanatory. Copper, Tin, Zinc, and their Alloys. In the following table are given the data and the results of the experiments of Prof. R. H. Thurston, as contained in his various papers, to which reference has already been made. The distance between the points of support was twenty -two inches, while the bars were about one inch square in section, and of cast metal. The modulus of rupture, k, is found by eq. (5), in which, however, in many of these cases, W is the weight applied at the centre, added to half the weight of the bar. When k is large and the specimens small, this correction for the weight of the bar is unnecessary ; otherwise it is ad- visable to introduce it. The coefficient of elasticity, E, is found by eq. (9), in which W is the centre load added to five eighths of the weight of the bar. The manner in which both these corrections arise is com- pletely shown in Case 2 of Art. 28. E, for any particular bar, has a varying value for dif- ferent degrees of stress and strain. Those given in the table 562 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. SQUARE BARS. Percentage of *. Elastic over Final E, Lbs. per Ultimate. Deflection. Lbs. per Cu. Sn. Zn. Sq. In. Sq. In. Ins. lOO 0.00 0.00 29,850 8.00 9,000,000 lOO 0.00 0.00 25,920 i 0. 14 ] to 0.41 1.38 to 8 . 00 |- 10,830,600 lOO 0.00 0.00 21,251 0.346 2.31 13,986,600 lOO 0.00 0.00 29,848 0. 140 Bent. 10,203,200 90 10.00 0.00 49,400 0.400 Bent. 14,012,135 90 10.00 0.00 56,375 0.41 3.36 80 20.00 0.00 56,715 0.657 0.492 13,304,200 70 30.00 0.00 12,076 I. 00 0.062 15,321,740 61.7 38.3 0.00 2,761 I .00 0.032 9,663,990 48.0 52.0 0.00 3,600 I .00 0.019 17,039,130 39-2 60.8 0.00 8,400 I .00 0.060 12,302,350 28.7 71.3 0.00 8,067 0.583 0. 121 9,982,832 9-7 90.3 0.00 5,305 0.25 Bent. 7,665,988 0.00 100 0.00 3,740 0.273 Bent. 6,734,840 0.00 100 0.00 4,559 0. 267 Bent. 5,635,590 80.00 0.00 20.00 21,193 3.27 11,000,000 62.50 0.00 37.50 43,216 3.13 14,000,000 58.22 2.30 39.48 95,620 1.99 1 1 ,000,000 55- 00 0.50 44.50 72,308 92.32 0.00 7.68 21,784 0.30 Bent. 13,842,720 82.93 0.00 16.98 23,197 0.41 Bent. 14,425,150 71 .20 0.00 28.54 24,468 0.51 Bent. 14,035,330 63-44 0.00 36.36 43,216 0.53 Bent. 14,101,300 58.49 0.00 41.10 63,304 0.48 Bent. 11,850,000 54.86 0.00 44.78 47,955 0.39 Bent. 10,816,050 43.36 0.00 56.22 17,691 I .00 0.0982 12,918,210 36.62 0.00 62.78 4,893 I .00 0.0245 14,121,780 29. 20 0.00 70.17 16,579 I. 00 0.0449 14,748,170 20.81 0.00 77.63 22,972 I .00 0.1254 14,469,650 10.30 0.00 88.88 41,347 0.73 0.5456 12,809,470 0.00 0.00 100.00 7,539 0.57 0.1244 6,984,644 70.22 8.90 20.68 50,541 0.4019 14,400,000 56.88 21.35 21.39 2,752 0.0146 14,800,000 45.00 23.75 31-25 6,512 0.0150 7,000,000* 66.25 23.75 10.00 8,344 0.0162 12,000,000* 10.00 50.00 40.00 21,525 Bent. 9,000,000 58.22 2.30 39.48 95,623 2.000 10,600,000 60.00 10.00 30.00 24,700 0. 1267 14,506,000 65.00 20.00 15.00 11,932 0.0514 17,000,000 70.00 10.00 20.00 36,520 0.1837 15,000,000 75.00 5.00 20.00 55,35S Bent. 13,000,000 80.00 10.00 10.00 67,117 Bent. 13,500,000 55- 00 5.00 44 • 50 72,308 Bent. 11,000,000 60.00 2.50 37 • 50 69,508 1.500 13,000,000 72.52 7.50 20.00 51,839 Bent. 12,000,000 77.50 I 2 . 50 10.00 61,705 0.705 13,500,000 85.00 12.50 2.5 62,405 B?nt. 12,500,000 These bars were about half the length of the others. Art. 91.J BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 563 may be considered average values within the elastic limit. As usual, "elastic over ultimate^' is the ratio of k at the elastic limit over its ultimate value. An examination of the ultimate tensile and compressive resistances of these same alloys, as given in preceding pages, shows that the. ratio of k over either of those resistances is very variable. It is usually found between them, but occa- sionally it exceeds both. Timber Beams. As timber beams are always rectangular in section, eq, (3) only will be needed. Retaining the notation of that equation, if the beam carries a single weight W at the centre of the span /, ^.. 2 kAh , ^ ^ = 3— ^'^) If the total load W^ is uniformly distributed over the span, 1^'=^^ (II) As k is supposed to be expressed in pounds per square inch, all dimensions in eqs. (10) and (11) must be expressed in' inches. In the use of timber beams it is usually convenient to take the span / in feet, and the breadth (b) and depth (h) in inches. Placing 12/ for /, therefore, in eqs. (10) and (11), ^^, kAh J ,_, kAh . . W=^; and W =2^ (i.) 564 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. in which formulae / must be taken in feet and A and h in inches. k If B be put for — eq. 12 becomes -^ 18' W = B^; and W = 2B^. . . . (13) Hence when W and W have been determined by ex- periment, For single load W at centre ^ Wl , Wl 18I/F/ \Wl \Wl ^ = Ah •'• ^=AB=-Ak~=ym=^-'^^^' (^4) For total load W uniformly distributed Wl Wl gW'l \Wl \ Wl ^~2Ah ''' '^~2AB~ Ak '~\2Bh~^S kh' ^'5) If the beam has a section one inch square and is one foot W long, B = W = — . B, therefore, may be considered the unit of transverse rupture ; it is sometimes called the coefficient for centre-breaking loads. If the depth h of the beam is given and the breadth is desired, eq. (14) gives Wl 18M b = Eq. 15 also gives ^ = gF=^^- • • • • • (16) , Wl gW'l , , ^=^5F=-W • • • • • (^7) In general, whatever m.ay be the distribution of the load- ing, if the bending movement is M (in inch-poimds), eq, (3) gives Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 565 ^--iBh or M 6M , . ^=^5P^W ^^9) The general observations which have already been made in connection with the ultimate resistances of timber in tension and compression are equally applicable to the flex- ure or bending of timber beams. The ultimate resistance of the timber as exhibited by the intensity of stress in the extreme fibre can safely be taken only when determined from tests of full-size beams as actually used in engineering structures. Such resistances or moduli when determined from small pieces selected for the purpose of test are liable to be largely in error for the reasons given in detail in Art. 6i. In fact Messrs. Cline and Heim state in Bulletin io8, " Tests of Structural Timbers," U. S. Department of Agri- culture, that values obtained from testing small thoroughly seasoned selected specimens " may be from one and one half to two times as high as stresses developed in large timbers and joists," and that statement is rather under than over, as many tests have shown. Furthermore, it is essen- tial to know at least approximately the degree of seasoning to which the timber has been subjected. Ordinary air seasoning will seldom reduce the moisture in full-size timber beams to less than 15 per cent, to 20 per cent. Inasmuch as timber in open engineering structures, like bridges, will at all times be exposed to rainfalls often heavy, working stresses used in the design of such structures should be prescribed for wet or green condition. If the structure is to be protected from atmospheric moisture, values belong- ing to seasoned timber may properly be employed. Table II of Art. 61 gives the modulus of rupture for S66 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. full-size beams tested to failure on a span of 1 5 feet by con- centrated loading at two points one third of the span from each end (Messrs. Cline and Heim, U. S. Dept. Agri- culture). These results include failures by tension and compression of fibres as well as failures due to shear along the neutral surface of the beams. Both green and air- seasoned timbers were tested with the sections given in the Article cited. Table I gives the results of the same series of tests under a proposed grading by which all beams tested were divided into Grade I and Grade II, the higher resistances being found in the former. Table I. AVERAGE RESISTANCE VALUES OF DIFFERENT SPECIES BY PROPOSED GRADES Average Modulus of Average Fibre Stress Average Modulus Nam ber of Tests. Rupture per Square Inch. at Elastic of Elasticity per Species. Limit per Square Inch. Square Inch. Total. Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade L n. L n. I. II. I. II. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Lbs. Longleaf pine . . 17 17 6,140 3.734 1,463.000 Douglas fir. . . . 161 81 80 6,919 5,564 4.402 3,831 1,643,000 1,468,000 Shortleaf pine. . 48 35 13 5.849 4.739 3.318 3.005 1,525.000 1,324,000 Western larch. . 62 45 17 5,479 3,543 3.662- 2.432 1,365,000 1,130,000 Loblolly pine . . 94 45 49 5,898 4.702 3.513 2,793 1,535.000 1,309,000 Tamarack 25 9 16 5,469 4.52s 3. 151 2,847 1,276,000 1,261,000 West, hemlock. 39 26 13 5,615 4.658 3.689 3.172 1,481,000 1,360,000 Redwood 28 21 7 4,932 3.091 4,031 2,947 1,097.000 877,000 Norway pine. . . 34 17 17 4,821 3.764 3.082 2,364 1.373.000 1,204,000 The intensities of stresses in extreme fibres are averages for each kind of timber at rupture and at elastic limit. It is to be understood, however, that the elastic limit is approxi- mate only as it is not a well-defined point in timber. The moduli of elasticity are fully as high as should be taken, if, indeed, they are not a little too high for ordinary pur- poses. Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 567 The table does not include results for white pine and spruce, but the resisting and elastic qualities of those two timbers are so near to the corresponding qualities of Norway pine that, they may be assumed to be the same under ordi- nary conditions. Table II gives a summary of the results of tests of full- size beams made by Prof. Arthur N. Talbot and described by him in Bulletin No. 41 (1909) of the University of Illinois. The cross-sections of these beams varied from 7 inches by 12 inches to 8 inches by 16 inches and the spans were 13.5 feet and 14.5 feet. The loads were applied equally at two points, each one third of the span from each end. The series into which the program of results is divided were used as a matter of convenience only and have no sig- nificance as to quality of material or as to physical features of the results. It will be observed that small beams and shear blocks were also tested and that the results for these smaller pieces are on the whole materially larger than for the full-size beams and nearly or quite twice as large in some cases. The extreme fibre stress was computed by means of eq. (5), in which VV is the total load at the two points of application at failure and / is two-thirds of the actual length of span in the tests, which makes the bending moment M =^WL If this external bending moment is placed equal 2kl to the — — , the intensity of stress k will take the value, as h indicated by eq. (5) : In this equation h is the depth of the beam and b its breadth, as already explained in connection with eqs. (i) and (la). W is obviously the load given by the reading S68 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. c/3 . O ^ O Ov M ir> 1/0 Tt rO C^ lO fO M lO O w O (^ O t^ -^ lO Ov ro ^ M 0_ t-- O r0U000OOOO>J1>O 0,1000 lOOOO r-'^i-i tNroOMi-i^O\'t o g£ Q QO^ 'u O oV. t-~ ro w O O ro O n ro (~0 O M Tf O^OOOOr0>OO^-| MNOvOOOOO-^W'* ro Tt o <3 q fo q> o)_ ■* ■* O O Ov o o M lAJ lA) 00 \0 O M On O 1^ CO l> lO rf fO rOvO ^ O O »Oir>>on 00 r^ O vO ro lO "^ 't (^ 00 "* vo r- O r^ \0 ts " 00 M M n ro ^ 00 O) ro -rl- 01 in '^ O Tf ^ O O O 00 O ^ 't O O O w w 00 oo 00 ro ro m M 000-^000 Ol^oOOt^O oivO-^^OO t^OoOOM-* oooooo ro^MdinvO rf in t^ in oj sOwoOOOOinOO o t^t^o *-" inooMvo oO'^Ooo •^inoooo •* ^ ei^ ^^ 5 03 e (U ':2 C rrt oj •« i2 g.2 130 fc C 'to O O ceo CO to -r-; tw (1) (u O ^ XI U o « l-i i-< J (U 0) u, ,^ u, -^ tiO be M M oj n! nS c fu m aj rS > > > CTl g§1 > •" O ^ >iS "rt -M to a! CO CO I- 'C JH *=3 "5 > > > S « & bo<; hJ be bo ^ ^ M^ ^ :=: I- ffi^^ffi g g g « C/2 W W W Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 569 of the scale beam of the testing machine. If Wi is one of the two equal loads applied to the beam at each one third point of the span, 2W1 must be written for W. The ultimate intensity of shear shown in Table II, which is both the intensity of shear in the neutral surface and on a normal section of the beam at the same point, is found by simply taking one and one half the end reaction divided by the cross-section bh of the beam. As the total transverse shear is greatest at the end of the span, the greatest inten- sity of shear on the neutral surface will be found at that point at or near which failure by shear will begin unless induced elsewhere by a season crack, wind-shake, decay or some other weakness of the material. Obviously there is neither transverse nor longitudinal shear between the two points, equally loaded, as they are symmetrically located with reference to the centre of the span. Table III shows the moduli of elasticity computed by Professor Talbot from the data secured by his beam tests. The modulus is found by observing the centre deflection of the beam when loaded within its elastic limit and then inserting the observed value of the deflection and the cor- responding observed load in a formula similar to eq. (7). Eq. (7) itself is not applicable for the reason that these Table III. Timber. Modulus of Elasticity (£), Max. Mean. Min. Longleaf pine. 2,105,000 1,595,000 1,478,000 1,915,000 1,857,000 2,087,000 1,900,000 1,620,000 1,591,000 1,229,000 1,386,000 1,251,000 1,780,000 1,499,000 1,025,000 1,585,000 887,000 944,000 611,000 Shortleaf pine, untreated Shortleaf pine, creosoted Loblolly pine, untreated Loblolly pine, creosoted OIH Dourias fir 1,310,000 1,138,000 New Douglas fir S76 BENDING OR FLEXURE. tCh. XII. beams were not loaded at the centre of span. The formula for the centre deflection, however, is readily derived by an analysis similar to that used in Art. 28. That operation will give 23WP . ^ 23M3 w = i2g6EI or I2g6lw' The preceding experimental values for timber are among the latest determinations and are representative of the best engineering practice, especially as they are based on tests of full-size timbers of as good quality as can probably be secured in the open market. The American Railway Engineering Association, after careful scrutiny of all tests of timber made up to 191 1, recommended the values given in Table IV for use in the Table IV. UNIT STRESSES IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH Bending. Shearing. Timber. Extreme Fiber Stress. Modulus of Elasticity. Mean. Parallel to the Grain. Longitudinal Shear in Beams. Mean Ult. Working Stress. Mean Ult. Working Stress. Mean Ult. Working Stress. Douglas fir Longleaf pine .... Shortleaf pine. . . . White pine Spruce Norway pine Tamarack Western hemlock . Redwood Bald cypress .... Red cedar White oak 6,100 6,500 5.600 4.400 4,800 4,200 4,600 5,800 5,000 4,800 4,200 5.700 1,200 1,300 1,100 900 1,000 800 900 1,100 900 900 800 1,100 1,510,000 1,610,000 1,480,000 1,130,000 1,310,000 1,190,000^ 1,220,000 1,480,000 800,000 1,150,000 800,000 1,150,000 690 720 710 400 600 590* 670 630 300 500 840 170 180 170 100 150 130 170 160 80 120 210 270 300 330 180 170 250 260 270* 270 IIO 120 130 70 70 100 100 100 IIO Unit stresses are for green timber and are to be used without increasing the live load stresses for impact. Values noted * are for partially air-dry timbers. Art. 91.] BEAMS WITH RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR SECTIONS. 571 design and construction of timber railway structures for the modulus of elasticity in flexure, the ultimate resistance and working stress in extreme fibres of bent beams, and similar quantities for ordinary shearing parallel to the grain and for longitudinal shearing along the fibres in the neutral surface of beams. The intensities of working stresses given in this Table are for railway structures. It may be justifiable to use somewhat higher values in other structures where the mov- ing loads are more steady or where perhaps it may be proper to consider all loading as practically quiescent or dead load. It is always to be remembered, however, that timber struc- tures are usually highly combustible and hence that it will frequently be advisable to provide some surplus of sectional area to prolong the carrying capacity of timber members after the beginning of a fire. Failure of Timber Beams by Shearing Along the Neutral Surface. In the preceding treatment of timber beams, it has been assumed that when broken under test the extreme fibres will fail, either in tension or compression. As a matter of fact, failure of such beams usually takes place at some weak spot, as a knot, point of incipient or active decay, or at some other point where abnormal weakness is developed. This latter observation holds true whether the. failure of the beam takes place by tension or compression in the extreme fibres or by shearing in the neutral surface. In Art. 15 it was shown that the greatest intensity of either transverse or longitudinal shear in any normal sec- tion of a beam takes place at the neutral surface, and hence that the tendency of the fibres there is to separate by longi- 572 BENDING OR FLEXURE, [Ch. XII. tudinal movement over each other. This is precisely the kind of failure which actually takes place in some short tim- ber beams. If the total transverse shear at any normal sec- tion of the beam is 5, eq. (8) of Art. 15 shows that the maximum intensity, s, of shear in the neutral surface is ' = ijr^- • (20) bd In this equation, b is the breadth or width of the beam and d the depth, usually taken in inches. If W is a single weight or load at the centre of span of a beam simply supported at each end, the shear s, as far as that single load is concerned, is constant throughout the entire length of the beam with the value 3W If, again, the beam is uniformly loaded with the total load W\ the intensity of shear 5 in the neutral surface has a value which varies from zero at the centre of span to the value given by eq. (21) after making W = VV\ Whenever the value of the intensity s exceeds the ultimate intensity of shear along the fibres lying in the neutral surface, the beam will fail by the separation of its two halves or parts at the neutral surface. The mean values for the ultimate resistance to shear along the fibres in the neutral surface of his loaded beams were found by Prof. Talbot and are given in Table II for the best varieties of pine timber and for Douglas fir, in- cluding results for creosoted beams of shortleaf pine and loblolly pine. The values for shear and other quantities recommended by the American Railway Engineering Associ- ation are found in Table IV. Art. 91. SHEARING ALONG NEUTRAL SURFACE. 573 The average values of the ultimate shear in the neutral surface determined by Messrs. Cline and Heim in their " Tests of Structural Timbers," already cited, are given in Table V for nine varieties of structural timbers, both green and air-seasoned. These results belong to the same full- size beams as the values given in Table I of this Article. Table V. COMPUTED SHEARING STRESSES DEVELOPED IN STRUCTURAL BEAMS Total Number of Tests. First Failure by Shear. Per cent, of Total and Average per Sq. In. Shear Following Other Failure. Per cent, of Total and Average per Sq. In. Species. Green. Dry. Green. Dry. Green. Dry. % Lbs. % Lbs. % Lbs. % Lbs. Longleaf pine Douglas fir Shortleaf pine V/estern larch Loblolly pine Tamarack . . . 17 191 48 62 III 30 39 28 49 9 91 13 52 25 9 44 12 10 54 2 17 8 7 10 5 7 6 353 166 332 288 335 261 288 302 232 56 6 46 27 28 33 23 10 272 221 364 340 434 299 307 278 23 22 6 16 2 28 II 6 374 295 327 314 356 263 281 218 266 49 8 21 16 68 17 294 418 370 546 Western hemlock . . . Redwood 438 250 Norway pine It will be observed in all of these tests that there is much variation in the intensities of the different stresses found and especially in these ultimate intensities of shear in the neutral surfaces of full-size beams. As has already been indicated this is due to the presence of a variety of weakening defects to which timber is subject. This sig- nifies that low working stresses should be used. It has been found in many cases, and possibly in nearly all, that wind-shakes, season cracks, and other influences 574 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. which induce at least partial separation of the fibres at the neutral surface, are the sources of incipient failure by shear- ing in the neutral surface. In designing timber beams this liability to shear along the neutral surface should always be carefully tested by computations. Relatively short beams are particularly liable to fail in this manner, and the greater part of the timber beams used in engineering work are of this class. It is a very simple analytical matter to establish such a relation between the methods of failure by longitudinal shearing and rupture of the fibres as to indicate more or less approximately the limit beyond which one mode of failure is more liable to occur than the other, but empirical values for both these ultimate resistances have been seen to be so variable as to make it more advisable to compute the carrying capacity of the beam by both methods, especi- ally as each is a simple procedure. Influence of Time on the Strains of Timber Beams. It has been found by actual observation that if a timber beam is loaded to no greater extent than one fourth of its ultimate load, the resulting deflection will continue to in- crease under continued loading for a long period of time. Sufficient investigations have not yet been made to express these results quantitatively Avith much accuracy. Enough has been ascertained, however, to show that the influence of time is most important in determining the deflection of timber beams under loads applied for a considerable period of time, and that when the loading becomes a large portion of the ultimate, i.e., perhaps 75 per cent., the beam may fail if the application be sufficiently continued. Indeed, Art. 91.] CONCRETE BEAMS. 575 some experiments indicate that failure may possibly take place at .6 or .7 of the ultimate of a single application, if that amount be imposed a sufficient length of time. It should be understood, therefore, that in using the co- efficients of elasticity given in this article for the purpose of computing deflections, such computations may be applic- able only when the loads are applied for short periods of time. Concrete Beams. When a concrete or a natural stone beam is subjected to transverse loading it fails by tearing apart on the tension side. The failure of the beams, therefore, indicates to some extent the ultimate tensile resistance of the material. Ob- viously, in the case of concrete beams the ultimate carrying capacity will depend upon a number of elements, such as the kind and quality of cement, sand and broken stone used, and the proportions of the mixture. Table VI contains results of tests of a considerable number of concrete beams 6 ins. by 6 ins. in cross-section and six months of age. For three months these beams were frequently wetted though kept in air. During the remaining three months they were kept in air without wetting. The length of span for some of these beams was 42 ins. and 18 ins. for the remainder. Within the limits of the tests this difference in span appeared to make no essential difference in the ultimate intensities of stress in the extreme fibres. With the cross-sections of the beams, i.e., 6 ins. wide and 6 ins. deep, the ratio of span length divided by the depth was either 7 or 3, making the beams very short. The different columns of the table show the character of the ingredients of the concrete as well as the greatest, mean, and least values of the intensities of ex- treme fibre stress K. As would be anticipated, the values 576 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. Table VI. CONCRETE BEAMS vSIX MONTHS OLD. Concrete. Size of Stone in Inches. No. of Tests. Ultimate Stress in Extreme Fibres. Lts. per Sq. In. Max. Mean. Mm. B'klyn Bridge Rosendale (1 ( ( < ( Atlas Portland c. s. br. .1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 1-3-5 1-2-4 T-,^-5 0-2^ 1-2^ O-I i < 0-2j 1-2* O-I 0-2^ 172^ O-I 0-2^ 1-2^ O-I Gravel. 6 5 4 3 6 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 6 6 6 6 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 I 6 6 6 6 5 6 140 128 153 140 134 ].« 647 516 510 458 560 516 385 329 554 297 423 329 560 491 574 460 654 541 192 554 417 379 279 460 ^73 103 80 128 136 125 126 526 449 452 402 503 420 349 283 424 268 377 272 472 404 493 419 566 484 171 157 481 352 344 245 382 '^14 76 33 109 134 120 122 460 360 335 360 458 355 282 1 ( 1 ( < ( < 1 ( ( < ( < ( < ( .. Silica Portland 238 326 224 297 238 404 341 453 391 466 414 147 414 285 312 195 326 266 t < i< ( ( < ( <( (( .< Alsen Portland . ( ( ( ( (< << (1 // '/ t' n^ Y 50( i / X ] A 1 f / A 1 40C iJ \ ^ ] / 1 1 ■A r^ I 300 ll / ^ r n ' X,„ <^\ y ALL BARS-1-3 ATLAS 4''! 2 HlGH-4'00 WIDE SPAN FOR B 36" " B^ 16'' " B2 16'' 20( (/ J k^ P ^- / / ^ C m ,( A V' --0- p^ /\A V _^^ H 'deflections of each bar left shows sets whe ARE REPRESENTED BY 2 CUR N LOAD AT GIVEN POINT IS Er VES; THE ONE TO THE JTIRELY REMOVED. <0 03 .0 ce .008 1 .010 1 .012 1 .014 1 .016 .ols .020 .001 .002 .004 DEFLECTION AT CENTERJN INCHES 584 BENDING OR FLEXURE. ICh. XII. natural cement should be used at all where concrete or mortar may be subjected to flexure. Table XII. BRICK-MASONRY BEAMS. (Age of beams about equally 5 months, 8 days, and 6 months.) ROSENDALE-CEMENT MORTAR: I C. 2 S. Span, Inches. / d' Stress in Extreme Fibre, Pounds per Square Inch. No. of Tests. Max. Mean. Mm. 96 78 66 42 7-4 6 5-1 3-2 67 81 91 54 18 56 73 38 23 54 5 4 8 PORTlvAND-CEMENT MoRTAR: I C, 3 S. 96 66 42 7.4 5-1 3-2 173 145 229 144 120 166 124 96 94 4 4 10 Table XII exhibits some interesting results of the tests of brick-masonry beams. These investigations were made by Messrs. A. W. Gill and Frederick Coykendall, gradua- ting students in Civil Engineering in Columbia University in 1897. Fig. I shows the manner of laying up the brick to form the beams which were tested. The breadth of each beam was about 12 ins. and the depth 13 ins. The spans varied from 8 ft. down to 3 ft. 6 ins., with the ratios of length over depth of beam given in the column headed -j. This column of ratios shows that the beams a should be considered short. The Rosendale-cement mortar was mixed with one vol- Art. oi.] BRICK-MASONRY BEAMS. 585 ume of cement to two volumes of sand, while the Portland- cement mortar was mixed with one volume of cement to three volumes of sand. During the first three months the beams were kept well wetted, but less so during the last three months. At no time were they dry. The Table gives Fig. I. all the results of tests and shows that the beams had very little resisting capacity, although possibly 15 to 20 pounds per square inch might be justified as working values in the extreme fibres of the beams built with Portland-cement mortar. The bricks were laid by ordinary masons with such care as could be impressed upon them, although the experimenters stated that the brickwork was of very in- different quality and hence that the results are lower than they should be. 586 BENDING OR FLEXURE. [Ch. XII. Natural-stone Beams. Table XIII exhibits results found by the same experi- menters as in the case of Table XII with a number of natural-stone beams, the spans for which varied from 36 ins. down to 12 ins. The first figure in the second column' 'of the table headed " Section " gives the depth of each beam, [ Table XIII. NATURAL-STONE BEAMS. BLUESTONE. Stress in Extreme Fibre, Span, Section, / Pounds per Square Inch. No. of ' Inches. Inches. Tests. d Max. Mean. Min. 24 4X6 6.15 3,958 3,512 3,054 5 36 6X8 6.2 3,288 2,797 2,906 3 12 4X6 3 4,112 3,237 2,282 II 24 8X6 3 3,929 3,547 2,715 6 GRANITE. 24 4X6 6 2,321 2,250 2,178 3 36 6X8 6 1,861 1,798 1,766 3 12 4X6 3 2,714 2,487 2,086 9 SANDSTONE. 24 4X6 6 1,575 1,354 1,237 3 36 6X4 6 1,204 945 637 3 12 4X6 3 1,907 1,539 1,267 9 MARBLE. 24 4X6 6 2,036 1,880 1,617 3 36 6X8 6 1,683 1,548 1,354 3 12 4X6 3 2,455 2,026 1,696 9 Art. 91.] NATURAL-STONE BEAMS. 587 while the second figure gives the width. It will be observed from the ratios of -1 given in the third column that the beams were very short. The extreme fibre stresses are seen to run comparatively high for the bluestone, granite, and marble. Indeed, working values of intensities may reasonably be taken as follows: For blue tone 250 to 400 pounds per square inch. ' * granite 200 to 300 " " * * " marbl 17 to 225 " " " * " sandstone , 100 to 150 " " " ** In the use of sandstone it should be understood that the preceding \alues apply only to the best quaHties of that particular stone. CHAPTER Xril. CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. Art. 92. — Composite Beams or Other Members of Concrete and Steel. Concrete, like other masonry, is admirably adapted to resist compression. Its capacity of resistance to tension is much less than its ultimate compressive resistance, although if the concrete is well made the tensile resistance may have considerable value. The purpose of the con- crete-steel combination is the production of a beam or other member almost entirely of concrete, but which shall have a high capacity to resist tension in those portions which may be subjected to tensile stresses. This result is accomplished by embedding steel bars of desired shape and of suitable cross -sectional area in the proper parts of the concrete. While no general rule can be given for the area of the steel section in comparison with the concrete, it may be stated approximately that the steel section is usually between f and r^ per cent, of the area of a normal section of the concrete. Inasmuch as the presence of the steel is for the purpose of giving tensile resistance to the member it is evident that the re-enforcing steel bars wih always be found in those portions of the concrete mass which may be subjected to tension. In such concrete- steel construction as arches the steel re-enforcement is frequently used both on the tension and compression sides of the concrete. 588 Art. 93-] CONCRETE-STEEL BEAMS. 589 In the case of concrete-steel beams or other similar members, as the steel is entirely embedded in the concrete, the loads and reactions must obviously be applied directly to the latter. When the concrete takes its stress, there- fore, at "least a portion of that stress must be conveyed to the steel, and that requires that the adhesive joint or bond between the steel and concrete shall be as strong as possible. Hence in laying the steel bars in the concrete it is necessary that the contact between the two materials shall be inti- mate and essentially continuous. Various means are em- ployed to accomplish these ends. Square bars are fre- quently twisted, while round bars may be nicked and fiat ones either twisted continuously in one direction or have alternate portions twisted in opposite directions, or, finally, rolled with alternately enlarged and contracted sections. Again, where built-up members are embedded in concrete, rivet-heads and other details of construction serve the same general purposes. The efficiency of the concrete- steel construction depends wholly upon the resistance of this bond, and the design must always be such that the adhesive shear, so to speak, or the stress of sliding along the steel surface, shall never exceed per square unit the ultimate resistance of the bond. In the analysis and computations which follow it is assumed, as it must be, that the bond between the steel and concrete is such as to make the entire mass act as a unit, so that the combination of the two heterogeneous elements shall act as a single whole. Art. 93.— Physical Features of the Concrete-steel Combination in Beams. It will be shown later on that so far as can be deter- mined from physical data now available the coefficient of elasticity for concrete in compression for the operations ^^o CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. ordinarily employed in designing engineering structures and for mixtures not less rich in cement than i cement, 3 sand, and 6 gravel or broken stone, at ages of one to six months, may range from about 2,000,000 pounds per square inch to more than 4,000,000 pounds per square inch, while for concrete beams the coefficient or modulus may range from about 1,500,000 pounds per square inch for compara- tively shallow beams to more than 3,000,000 pounds per square inch for beams of comparatively great depths. Values for the coefficient of elasticity for concrete in tension can be found in Art. 60. Further tests for the determination of this quantity are much to be desired, but enough has been done to estabHsh at least closely approxi- mate values. Some authorities assume the tensile coeffi- cient to be much less than the coefficient of elasticity for concrete or mortar in compression. As a matter of fact, the tests of a Monier arch of 75 feet span by a committee of the Austrian Society of Engineers and Architects, which made its report in 1895, showed in that particular case the coefficient of elasticity of concrete in tension to be nearly one fifth greater than the coefficient for compression, although it should be stated that the age of the tensile specimens was materially greater than that of the com- pression material. The values in Art. 60 indicate that the tensile coefficient is at least equal to the compressive. It is possible that subsequent investigations may show that the tensile coefficient of elasticity is less than that for compression, but at the present time there appears to be practically no basis for that assumption. It seems to be reasonable and safe, as it is more simple to take the two coefficients equal to each other until further investigations have conclusively established a different ratio. It is important to state in this connection that the re- Art. 93-] CONCRETE-STEEL COMBINATION IN BEAMS. 591 suits of tests with concrete-steel beams, so far as they have been made, indicate that the elastic or semi-elastic behavior of concrete under stress will in the main characterize the behavior of the same material when under loading in the composite beam of concrete and steel, so that the coefficients of elasticity determined for concrete alone may be used in the composite member. There is one important respect in which the action of concrete alone is quite different from that which takes place when it is combined with steel. In the latter case the con- crete will stretch under a stress nearly or quite equal to its ultimate resistance a comparatively large amount. It is sometimes stated that under such conditions the coeffi- cient of tensile elasticity of the concrete is practically zero, but there is just as much ground, or more, for making the same observation in connection with such ductile materials as structural steel. What is actually meant is simply that the concrete will stretch before parting much more when its deformation is controlled by the corresponding deformation of the steel reinforcement than when it acts by itself or without such reinforcement. This feature of the action under stress of concrete in the composite beam has a most important bearing upon som.e rather peculiar phenomena connected with the testing of such beams to failure. M. Considere has stated (' ' Comptes Rendus Academic des Sci- ences, ' ' Paris, Dec. 12, 1898) that mortar will stretch twenty times as much when combined with steel as when tmaided by that combination. He further states that the concrete stretches uniformly with uniform increments of bending moment up to about four tenths of the ultimate moment. As the coefficient of elasticity for concrete is a small fraction only of that of steel the tendency of the concrete in composite beams is to stretch or compress more than the steel embedded in it. Hence the concrete immediately 592 CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. adjacent to the steel tends to slide along the latter, but that tendency is resisted by the adhesive shear at the joint, in consequence of which the steel acquires its stress whether of tension or compression. The normal section of the unloaded beam, therefore, will not remain normal after flexure, but there will be either a cup-shaped depression around the steel or a similar shaped elevation. This is illustrated in Fig. i. i^^ ^S Fig. I. In that figure the intensity of stress on either side of the neutral axis is assumed to var}^ directly as the distance from the axis, but in a subsequent analysis a different law of variation will be assumed in order that the treatment may be complete, although the author is not of opinion that the assumption of any law of variation different from that of the common theory of flexure is at the present time justified. It will further be assumed in the analysis which follows that normal sections of the unloaded beam will remain normal under loading. This is a common procedure, and it is not believed that the amount of variation from a plane section under stress, described above, is sufficient to make the assumption sensibly in error. Art. 94 —Rate at Which Steel Reinforcement Acquires Stress. The determination of the rate at which the concrete gives stress to the steel is not of great importance in ordi- nary design work or in most other practical relations; yet Art. 94-] R^TE OF ACQUIRING STRESS. 593 it is desirable in some cases, and it is an element of the action of internal stresses in a composite beam which should be understood as clearly as practicable. The fol- lowing analysis offers a means of determining that rate as nearly as it can be done at the present time. The notation used is shown also in Fig. 3 on the opposite page. The intensity of stress in the concrete at the distance d^, the distance of the steel reinforcement, from the neutral axis is k. Then if / represent the moment of inertia of the entire composite section about its neutral axis (located by c/j, determined hereafter), there may be written ^^ kl ,^ ^ dk .1 ^-T^' ■■■'^-^- ■ • • ■ W If 5 is the total transverse shear in the normal section in question at the distance x from one end of the beam, dM=Sdx = ^^ (2) d Let p be the total perimeter of section of the steel re- inforcement at the section located by x. Let A^ be the area of steel section with perimeter p. Let 5^ be the intensity of adhesive shear at the surface or . joint between the steel and concrete. Let k^ be the intensity of stress in the steel. The variation of k^ for the indefinitely small distance dx is dk^. From what has preceded there may be written i>.dx.s'=A,dk,; ,.dx^^. .. . . (3) Inserting the value of dx from eq. (3) in eq. (2), ps' d. 594 CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. By solving this equation for s' and remembering that dk2 _E2 dk El , c^ A do dko c-^2G?2v42 / X Ip dk El I p This value of s' must never exceed the ultimate adhe- sive resistance between the steel and concrete. Tests for the determination of the adhesive shear between concrete and imbedded round rods have been made by Pro- fessors Talbot, Withey, Hatt, Duff A. Abrams and others. In view of the inevitable uncertainties of condition of such rods in respect to the bond between them and the concrete, greatly varying values must be anticipated, as they will depend upon the age proportions of the concrete, the smooth- ness (or roughness) of the surface of the rods, the amount of water used in mixing the concrete and the continuity of contact between the concrete and the rods. The value of adhesive shear has sometimes been taken as i6 to 20 per cent, of the ultimate compressive resistance of the concrete, but this is probably too high, even for the best qualities of concrete. Again, the ultimate value of adhesive shear as deter- mined by the pulling of rods directly from a block of con- crete may be materially different from that developed in a bent beam and, hence, the latter procedure should be the basis of determinations for reinforcing rods for beams. A clear distinction should be drawn between the adhesive shear existing prior to movement of the rod in its mastic and the resistance to that motion after it once begins. Professor M. O. Withey published in a Bulletin of the University of Wisconsin, No. 321, 1909, the data of a large number of tests in which the results were obtained from Art. 94.] ADHESIVE SHEAR OR BOND. 595 loaded beams, the stretch of the rods being accurately measured by an extensometer for a given length of imbedded rod. The diameter of rod was f inch and the age of the concrete varied from seven days up to six months. A large number of tests gave the adhesive shear as varying from a minimum of 129 pounds per square inch to a maximum of 362 pounds, a few only of the results falling below 200 pounds per square inch. It would probably be fair to take 250 pounds per square inch as a representative average of these results. In a series of tests with diameters of bars running from f inch to I inch, the average results were 278 and 286 pounds per square inch for the two smaller sizes of bars and 163 pounds and 195 pounds per square inch for the I -inch bars. The age of the 1-2-4 concrete in this case was two months. There may be found in Bulletin No. 71, University of Illinois, a full account of a large number of " Tests of Bond between Concrete and Steel," by Duff A. Abrams. These tests were made under a great variety of conditions as to age, sizes of rods, surface of rods, i.e., whether plain or deformed, shapes of cross-sections, rods pulled out of blocks and rods stressed in reinforced concrete beams, accompanied by extended observations as to effects of loading including careful measurements of the stretch of steel both in pulling rods from blocks and as they were stressed in beams. In these tests a clear distinction was recognized between the adhesion to the surface of the rods and the resistance of movement after initial slip, the greatest intensity of bond resistance visually being developed after the beginning of slip. A roughened surface of rod will obviously yield a greater bond resistance than a perfectly smooth surface, the resist- ance of the latter being almost wholly adhesion. 50 CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. The following are a few of Mr. Abrams' conclusions : " (41) The mean computed values for bond stresses in the 6 -foot beams in the series of 191 1 and 191 2 were as given below. All beams were of 1-2-4 concrete, tested at 2 to 8 months by loads applied at the one third points of the span. Stresses are given in pounds per square inch. I and I j-in. plain round. |-in. plain round |-in. plain round I -in. plain square I -in. twisted square. . . . i^-in. corrugated round . Number First End End Slip of o.ooi In. of Tests. Slip of Bar. 28 245 340 3 186 242 3 172 235 6 190 248 3 222 289 9 251 360 Maximum Bond Stress 375 274 255 278 337 488 " (42) In the beams reinforced with plain bars end slip begins at 67 per cent, of the maximum bond resistance; for the corrugated rounds this ratio is 51 per cent., and for the twisted squares, 66 per cent. " (43) The bond unit resistance in beams reinforced with plain square bars, computed on the superficial area of the bar, was about 75 per cent, of that for similar beams reinforced with plain round bars of similar size. " (44) Beams reinforced with twisted square bars gave values at small slips about 85 per cent, of those found for plain rounds. At the maximum load, the bond-unit stress with the twisted bars was 90 per cent, of that with plain round bars of similar size. " (45) In the beams reinforced with i|^-inch corrugated rounds, slip of the end of the bar was observed at about the same bond stress as in the plain bars of comparable size. At an end slip of 0.00 1 inch, the corrugated bars gave a bond resistance about 6 per cent, higher and at the maxi- mum load, about 30 per cent, higher than the plain rounds. Art. 94.] ADHESIVE SHEAR OR BOND. 597 " (46) The beams in which the longitudinal reinforce- ment consisted of three or four bars smaller than those used in most of the tests gave bond stresses which, according to the usual method of computation, were about 70 per cent, of the stresses obtained in the beams reinforced with a sin- gle bar of large size." As the greatest bond stress was developed after the beginning of slip, the preceding results show that such a maximum value exists beyond a net slip of 0.00 1 inch. Again referring to the resistance of deformed bars, he states, " The mean bond resistance for the deformed bars, tested was not materially different from that for plain bars until a slip of about .01 inch was developed; with a continuation of slip, the projections came into action and with much larger slip high bond stresses were developed." Again referring to a working bond stress, he states : " (59) A working bond stress equal to 4 per cent, of ths compressive strength of the concrete tested in the form of 8- by 16-inch cylinders at the age of 28 days (equivalent to 80 pounds per square inch in concrete having a compressive strength of 2000 pounds per square inch) is as high a stress as should be used. This stress is equivalent to about one third that causing first slip of bar and one fifth of the maxi- mum bond resistance of plain round bars as determined from pull-out tests. The use of deformed bars of proper design may be expected to guard against local deficiencies in bond resistance due to poor workmanship and their presence may properly be considered as an additional safe- guard against ultimate failure by bond. However, it does not seem wise to place the working bond stress for deformed bars higher than that used for plain bars." The preceding results were obtained from statically loaded beams. Professor Withey found no injurious effects on the resistance of adhesive shear under repeated loads until 598 CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. the latter became 50 to 60 per cent, of the ultimate static loads. This last percentage may be raised to 60 to 70 per cent, with corrugated bars. Investigations made by the same authority indicate that the results of static tests on smooth round rods imbedded in beams will give values for the bond or adhesive shear between the concrete and the rods from one half to two thirds only of corresponding results obtained by pulling imbedded steel rods from the con- crete cylinders, but Mr. Abrams appears to believe that the results of properly made ' ' pull-out ' ' tests will be about the same as found for beams. While materially larger values for ultimate resistance of adhesive shear have been reported by some experimenters with small rods, it appears prudent not to take the ultimate resistance greater than perhaps 200 to 350 pounds per square inch for round or square rods from ij inch to f inch in diameter. The working value for this bond for adhesive shear should not be taken more than one fourth to one fifth of its ultimate value. Art. 95. — Ultimate and Working Values of Empirical Quan- tities for Concrete-steel Beams. It is necessary for the practical use of the preceding and following analyses that a number of empirical quanti- ties be determined, chiefly for the concrete. The coeffi- cient of elasticity for wrought iron for this purpose may be taken at 28,000,000 pounds per square inch, and 30,000,000 pounds per square inch for structural steel, which is now generally used in the reinforcement of con- crete-steel beams. The modulus of elasticity for concrete at different ages and for different proportions of matrix and aggregate has Art. 95-] ULTIMATE AND WORKING VALUES. 599 been fully considered in Art. 67, and Table I of that Article exhibits a full set of values. A mixture of i cement, 2 sand and 4 broken stone or gravel is generally used in rein- forced concrete work ; and for such concrete the Table cited above shows that the modulus of elasticity at the age of one month may be taken from about 1,500,000 to nearly 3,000,000. In view, however, of the uncertain conditions attending the making of concrete on actual work a higher value than 2,000,000 is seldom used. The ratio of the modulus for steel divided by that for concrete is generally taken at 15, although 12 is sometimes employed, the latter value implying a modulus for concrete of 2,500,000. The ultimate resistances of mortar and concrete in tension and compression will be found in Arts. 60 and 67.- These values will also depend upon the proportions and character of mixture or upon the age. The records of tests and experience which have thus far accumulated in connection with concrete-steel construction show that the compressive working stress of concrete in beams, where the mixture is in the proportions of i cement, 2 sand, and 4 gravel or broken stone, may probably be taken as high as 500 pounds per square inch. It should be remembered that this intensity will exist in the extreme fibres of the beam only. Mixtures of less strength would require a corresponding reduction in the maximum working in- tensity of compression. A mixture, for example, of i cement, 2 J sand, and 5 broken stone, unless the materials were well balanced, might justify a reduction of the" greatest working stress to 400 pounds per square inch. Some foreign authorities have prescribed two degrees of safety, in the first of which the maximum working stress of compression of 427 pounds per square inch is allowed, and 711 pounds per square inch for safety of the second degree. Structures in which the duty of the concrete is 6oo CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. severe might be designed with the smallest of those values, but where the duty is materially less severe, with the larger. It is not unusual at the present time in the design of concrete-steel arches to allow a maximum mtensity of compression of 500 pounds per square inch and 50 to 75 poimds per square inch for the maximum intensity of tension, if tension is allowed. Tensile tests of concrete show that where proportions of I cement, 2 sand, and 4 gravel or broken stone are used a maximum intensity of tension of 50 to 70 pounds per square inch is about J to ^ the ultimate tensile resistance at the age of three to six months. These values are reason- able and may be employed in concrete work where it is permitted to avail of the tensile resistance of concrete. In much of the best engineering practice at the present time, however, the tensile resistance of the concrete is neglected in the interests of additional safety in concrete-steel beam construction. Inasmuch as fine cracks may appear in concrete from other agencies than tensile stress, it is un- doubtedly advisable in most cases certainly to omit the bending resistance of the concrete in tension, especially as that omission does not sensibly increase the weight or cost of the beam when properly designed. Art. 96. — General Formulae and Notation for the Theory of Concrete-steel Beams According to the Common Theory of Flexure. The application of the common theory of flexure to the bending of concrete-steel beams is in reality the de- velopment of the theor}^ of flexure for composite beams of any two materials. The notation to be used and the general formula will first be written, therefore, and then the special formulae for concrete-steel beams will be estab- I Art. 96.] GENERAL FORMVLJE AND NOTATION. 6oi lished in the succeeding articles. These general formulae, it should be observed, apply to beams of any shapes of cross-section of either material or for any relative areas of cross-section of those materials, although in concrete- steel beams the area of cross-section of the steel is frequently or perhaps usually but one to one and a half per cent, of the area of the concrete. Again, the formulae will be so written as to make practicable the use of different coefficients of elasticity for concrete in tension and compression if that should be desired. The notation to be used in the succeeding articles is chiefly the following: E^ = coefficient of elasticity of the steel. E^= " " " '' '' concrete in compression. nE^= ** " " '' '' concrete in tension. A^ and A^ are the areas of normal section of the concrete and steel respectively. 7j and I^ are the moments of inertia of A^ and A^ respec- tively about the neutral axis of the normal section. k^ = greatest intensity of bending compression in the con- crete. ^' = greatest intensity of bending tension in the concrete. c = greatest intensity of bending compression in the steel. / = greatest intensity of bending tension in the steel. 6= breadth of the concrete. h and /i/ are total depths of the concrete and steel re- spectively. 7^2= vertical distance between the centres of the steel reinforcing members. Jj= distance of extreme compression "fibre" of the con- crete from the neutral axis. (^2 = distance of the centre of the compression steel rein- forcing member from the neutral axis. 6o2 CONCRETE-STEEL BEAMS. [Ch. Xlll. ds = distance from the neutral axis to the centre of the tension steel reinforcement. d^ = distance from extreme compression fibre of the steel to the neutral axis, a = distance of the centre of the compression steel reinforcing member from exterior compression surface of concrete. ai = distance of the centre of the tension steel rein- forcing member from exterior tension sur- face of concrete. rA2=area of normal section of reinforcing steel in tension. (1—^)^2= area of normal section of reinforcing steel in compression. Jb= intensity of compressive stress in the concrete at distance z from the neutral axis. ^''= intensity of tensile stress in the concrete at dis- tance ^ from the neutral axis. ^2 = intensity of stress in the steel at distance z from the neutral axis. w= tensile or compressive strain in unit length of ' ' fibre ' ' at unit distance from the neutral axis. In all the theory* of bending of concrete-steel beams it is assumed, as in the common theory of flexure, that any plane, normal section of the beam, before bending takes place, will remain plane (and normal) while the beam is subjected to bending. Hence k=Eiuz, k" =nEitiz, and k2=E2UZ. . (i) Inasmuch as all the loading carried by concrete-steel beams is supposed to act in a direction normal to the axes * Given in Art. 32. Eqs. (i) to (4) are simple adaptations of the equa- tions of that Art. to this case. Art. 96.] GENERAL FORMULA AND NOTATION. 603 of the beams, as is usual in the common theory of flexure, the total stresses of tension and compression in any normal section of a beam induced by the bending must be equal to zero. The expression of this sum, written by the aid of eqs. (i) and by which the neutral axis of the composite section is determined, is the following: E.n[£^zdA,^nfl^zdA,] ,-E,u£_^jdA,=o. (2) Or / zdA^^n zdA.+j^ ,,^dA,= o. . (3) Eq. (3) is perfectly general, and the position of the neutral axis can always be located by it whatever may be the shape of cross-section of either the concrete or steel. Fig. I may be taken as an arbitrary typical com- posite section showing the preceding system of notation applied to it. The outline Fig. I. of the concrete is rectangular, as in the ordinary concrete-steel beam. The steel in com- pression is represented as tAvo steel angles, while three round rods constitute the steel in tension. In the next article the application of the general eq. (3) to the special case of the ordinary concrete-steel beam will be made. The general value of the bending moment of the stresses induced in any normal section of a composite beam can be at once written by the aid of eqs. (i). The typical ex- pression of the differential moment is kdAiZ=E^uzHA^, 6o4 CONCRETE-STEEL BEAMS. Hence the value of the moment is [Ch. XIII. M = E,uf\^dA, + nE,nfl^z^dA, + E,u£_^^z^dA,. (4) This equation is also completely general whatever may be the shape of section of eitner material. It will be de- veloped for the ordinary form of concrete-steel beams in Art. 97. Eqs. (3) and (4) cover completely the theory of bending or flexure of composite beams of two materials, one of them having different values for the coefficients of elasticity in tension and compression. It will be observed that the position of the neutral axis of any section of the beam, as located by eq. (3), is affected by the values of E^, E^, and n^ and that it does not in general pass through the centre of gravity of the section. Art. 97, — T-Beams of Reinforced Concrete. The general formulae of Art. 96 belong to beams of any shape of cross-section whatever; it is only necessary, there- '( -^-O-G-O- FlG. I. fore, in this case, to apply them to the T-shaped section. Two conditions, may arise, in one of which the neutral Art. 97.] T-BEAMS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE. 605 axis lies in the flange of the beam whose cross-section is shown in Fig. i, or, as shown in that figure, it may He below the flange. As is usually the case in actual work, the tensile resistance of the concrete will finally be neglected. This latter condition makes it necessary to consider only the case shown by Fig. i. Position of Neutral Axis. Using the notation of Art. 96 under the conditions out- lined above, but first recognizing the tensile resistance of the concrete, rdi rdi rdi-f I zdAi= I Z'b^dz-i- j Z'bdz Jo Jdi-f Jo =w(«.-f)+i^^' w Again, ^ X^ r^ nb zdAi=ni zbdz = (hi^ — 2hidi+di^). (la) - di Jhi- di 2 As the steel section is small it will be essentially correct to consider each part of it concentrated at its centre of gravity. Hence there may be written, rd,' 1 zdA2 = (i -r)A2d2-rA2{n2 -d2) =^2(6^2 -r/zs). {ib) JW-d^ Introducing the values given by eqs. (i), (la) and (2) in eq. (3) of Art 96, 6o6 CONCRETE-STEEL BEAMS. [Ch. XIII. bHd. -b^'- + — ^ bdA + --- -— ' h nbh.d, - n — ^ 2 2 2 2 2 + 1^.4, (d, -f/;,)=o. I — n 1 — n + ,E,A, (a+rh,) E^ b 1 — n The solution of this quadratic equation will give 1—71 3 If the two coefficients of elasticity for concrete in tension and compression are the same, as is always assumed in actual work, n = i. This value gives indetermination in Eq. 3, but it is only necessary to multiply both members of Eq. 2 by (i — n) and then make n = i. These opera- tions give d, = 'if -h '••*¥. E,A If the entire steel reinforcement is on the tension side of the beam, r = i, and in Eqs. 3 and 4, a + rh^ =a-\-h2=hi The tensile capacity of the concrete is practically always Art. 97.] T-BEAMS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE. 607 neglected; hence n = o in Eq. 3, and .,=-/!-.) E, b ,*v/(r--)'--l;t(°-'-^('C---)-ftt)' s These formulce locate the neutral axis by giving the dis- tance d^ for all cases. An important special case arises where the neutral axis NS, Fig. I, lies in the lower side of the flange, i.e., when di =/. Making that substitution in the equation preceding eq. (2), j,2^_JI^+^^(,5/.,+f ^,) =^l^+^A,(a + rh,). (6) 2 \ iLi / 2 rLi Solving this quadratic equation, nbhi+-=^A2 ^1 = 5'-n6 . Inbhi+^A2\ nbhi^ + 2^A2{a+rh2) ^V\-T^3S-/+ fe^ • • (7) If concrete in tension be neglected, n =0 and, , E2A2^ (E2A2Y, E2A2{a+rh2) .^. Eq. (8) shows that the case of a T-beam with neutral axis at the lower surface of the flange and with tensile resistance of concrete neglected is equivalent to a solid rectangular beam of the same width as the flange under 6o8 CONCRETE-STEEL BEAMS. [Ch. XIII. the same assumption of the neglect of the concrete in ten- sion. No material error will be committed in assuming any T-beam similarly equivalent to a solid rectangular beam if the neutral axis is near the under side of the flange. If the neutral axis NS lies in the flange the area (b' — b) (f—di) of concrete flange section will be in tension. In that case the term —n{b'—b)— must be added to the 2 third member of eq. (la), and hence to the first member of the equation preceding eq. (2). This will add obvious cor- responding terms to eqs. (3), (4) and (5), but the special case is so rare that it needs no further attention. Unless {f—di) has material value eqs. (7) and (8) may be used. Balanced or Economic Steel Reinforcement. In order that there may be economy of material it is necessary that the relation between the cross-sectional areas of the steel and concrete may be such as to make the greatest intensities of stress in each equal to the prescribed working stresses. This condition is said to make a " bal- anced " section or a balanced percentage of steel reinforce- ment. ' In the general case of tensile and compressive steel reinforcement with the tensile resistance of concrete recog- nized, the equality of the total tensile and compressive stresses in a normal section of a T-beam gives eq. (9), if the neutral axis lies in the under surface of the flange, as is assumed in establishing eqs. (6), (7) and (8); ^kidib'^c{i-r)A2^l^d^bdz+rA2t. . . (9) Adding \k\b'dz to each side of eq. (9) and then dividing the resulting equation by b'{d\-\-dz) =b'hi, eq. (10) will result: Art. 97.] T-BEAMS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE, 609 or 2 ^ c(i —r) —rt J (loa) It will now be convenient to simplify the forms of the preceding equations by using the following notation : e=-:-^, the ratio of the modulus of elasticity for steel over that for concrete. Usually e = i^, but occa- sionally ^ = 12. p =Yjr-, the steel ratio, usually expressed as per cent, of hi total rectangular section, i.e., in case of the T-beam per cent, of total rectangular outline h'hi. ^1 n The steel ratio or per cent, p, is written in terms of the circumscribing rectangle b^hi in the interests of simplicity and as being at least as rational as any other method. The effective depth of the beam is taken as hi because the exterior thickness of concrete (h—hi) is usually a pro- tecting shell against fire, possibly to be partially or wholly destroyed in a conflagration, and, hence, not to be counted as effective beam material. The formulae may easily be changed so as to be expressed in terms of the full depth h by simply writing h—o for hi, o being the difference (h—hi), i.e., the thickness of the concrete from the centre of the tension steel reinforcement to the lower surface of the web or stem of the beam, usually 2 to 3 inches, or 6io CONCRETE-STEEL BEAMS. [Ch. XIII. more for very large beams. The preceding notation will enable the following formulas for practical use to be written. FormulcB to Locate Neutral Axis in T-Beams. Dividing eq. (3) hy hi and writing -=;^ — -r^ for 7:^ ^ ; lLi £Li = q = f(b' hi\b \ -I +n / I —n +-ep 1 ^ 7777777m- =^ m^^H. ttriril:--: L-Tta xirrL- ii.- IM Fig. I. axis. The eight i|-inch round rods in two courses with their central line 4 inches from the bottom surface are shown both in section and in longitudinal broken lines. This latter dimension allows a fire-protecting shell of concrete 2 inches thick and i inch clear vertical distance between the two layers of four rods each. The combined dead and moving load on the beam has already been shown to be 3725 pounds per linear foot, making the end shear 3725X15=55,875 pounds. If bent rods inclined at an angle of 45° be supposed to take this whole shear, the total stress in those rods will be 55,875 Xsec. 45 degrees = 79,007 pounds. If the steel be stressed at 16,000 pounds per square inch, a little less than Art. loi.] DESIGN OF T-BEAM. 637 5 square inches of section will be required. Three i^-inch rounds, or their equivalent sectional area, will supply the desired section. It will be convenient to bend the upper set of four rods as shown in Fig. i , thus reducing tho actual stress in the inclined parts to about 12,000 pounds per square inch, the reduced unit stress not being objectionable. A greater vertical depth of concrete would have been avail- able for shear if the lower set had been bent upward, but with the use of stirrups this is not important arrd the arrangement shown is a little more convenient in actual con- struction. If desired the lower set could be bent, but it would be necessary to slightly rearrange the position of all the rods so that the bent parts of the lower set may pass the upper set, all of which is quite feasible. The hori- zontal ends of the bent rods should also be bent at right angles so as to secure the firmest possible hold on the con- crete at the end of the beam. The horizontal ends of the bent bars are about 12 inches long, making the lower bend of the same rods about 3.25 feet from the end of the beam. Vertical stirrups, 24 inches apart, will be placed through- out the central part of the beam and they will be carried down so as to pass under the lower reinforcing rods. There will be four prongs to each stirrup, looped at top and bottom. By this arrangement of the stirrups the bond shear on their surfaces is greatly reinforced by the vertical bearing on the concrete and reinforcing rods at the bottom. The first stirrup, as shown, will be placed at the lower bend in the upper set of reinforcing rods, although the stress in it is indeterminate, as the inclined rod is supposed to take the total shear. The total transverse shear in the second stirrup, 5.25 feet from the end of the beam, will be computed as carrying in tension 9.75X3725=26,320 pounds, requiring at 16,000 pounds per square inch, 2.25 square inches. Four i|-inch X 638 CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. |-inch flat bars will give the required area, each such flat bar constituting one member or prong of the stirrup. The shear at the next stirrup point, 2 feet farther from the end of the span, will be 28,870 pounds, and four i^-inchX^- inch stirrup sections will give a little more than needed, and that jection of bar will be adopted. Although smaller bars would be sufficient for the remaining sections, the i|-inch X A-ii^ch bars will be retained for the remaining stirrups. The total available concrete section for resisting shear is 29 inches X 15 inches =435 square inches which, under the specifications of the preceding article, may be taken at 44 pounds per square inch, making a total shear of 19,140 pounds to be provided for in this way if it should be con- sidered permissible. If the latter procedure were followed it would leave but two-thirds of the total transverse shear at each stirrup section to be resisted by the steel stirrups. In the case of such a heavy beam, however, it is believed to be the better practice to take care of all the shear by steel reinforcement. If 4 5 -degree steel reinforcements attached to the main reinforcing rods were used, the length of such inclined bars would be about 27 Xsec. 45 degrees =38 inches. Inasmuch as half the transverse shear at any section may be assumed to produce 4 5 -degree compression at right angles to such inclined tension bars, the latter may be computed as being stressed by half the transverse shear multiplied by sec. 45 degrees. The 4 5 -degree tension bars near the end of the span under such an assumption would take about 28,000 pounds only and if there were four of them, each i^ inchX i^ inch, they would be sufficient. At intermediate posi- tions further removed from the ends, a correspondingly smaller section might be used. The bond shear at the sur- face of such inclined bars could be taken at a working stress of 88 pounds per square inch of surface. Such in- Art. loi.] DESIGN OF T-BEAM. 639 clined tension bars should be placed not more than about 21 inches apart horizontally in order to secure effective action. Their upper ends should be bent at right angles or looped to secure a firmer hold on the concrete. These computations illustrate clearly the simple pro- cedures required in the design of a reinforced concrete T-beam. If the beam is of rectangular section, the pro- cedures are precisely the same, as the actual rectangular section in that case would correspond precisely to the effect- ive shear section taken for the T-beam. Design of Continuous Floor Slab for 6 Feet Span between Steel Beams. The slab is assumed to carry a warehouse load of 175 pounds per square foot in addition to own weight. It will also be assumed to be continuous over the steel beams 6 feet apart centres, the degree of continuity being that prescribed in Art. 100, making the centre and end bending wl^ moments each — , w being the load per Hneal foot of span. 12 A trial depth of slab of 4 inches will be assumed and the design will be made for a 12 -inch width of slab. A depth of I inch of concrete will be taken outside of the steel reinforcement, which will be wholly on the tension side of the slab, and the tensile resistance of the concrete will be neglected. The data to be used will then be: Span =6 feet. Moving load = 175 pounds per square foot. Dead l^ad = 50 pounds per square foot. Tension in steel, t = 16,000 pounds per square inch. Compression in concrete, ki =500 pounds per square inch. -=r = e=is; /i =4 inches; /^i =2.75 inches; 6 = 12 inches. 640 CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. 22 c X 6 X 6 The external bending moment, M = — ^ X 12 =8100 12 inch-pounds. The section to be designed must give a resisting moment at least equal to 8100 inch-pounds. Eq. (8), Art. 98, gives the steel ratio: ;p = .005 = . 5 per cent. Hence, ^2 = .005 X4 X 12 =.24 square inch. Eq. (4), Art. 98, then gives the position of the neutral axis: di T-= -.o75±.394=+.3i9; hi and di =0.88 inch; ds =hi —d\ = 1.87 inches. The internal resisting moment will now be given eq. (12), Art. 98: 500/12 X.^^ . M=^N^^-^^^ -f3.6X1.87' =8700 inch-pounds. .88 \ 3 / By revising the design the excess above 8100 inch-pounds may be reduced if desired, but the difference is too small to be material. Two f-inch square bars, placed 6 inches apart, having a combined area of .28 square inch, will afford satisfactory reinforcement, remembering that they must be carried from I J inches above the lower surface of the slab at the centre of span to that distance below the upper surface at the ends of the span. The end shear of 3X225=675 pounds is provided for Art. I02.] REINFORCED CONCRETE COLUMNS. 641 by the bending up of the reinforcing rods, especially as the concrete section is 4X12 =48 square inches. Art. 102. — Reinforced Concrete Columns. Reinforced concrete columns may be divided into two classes. The reinforcing steel in one of these classes is a wrapping or banding, usually as a spiral, of the concrete by coarse wire or thin fiat bars, so that the lateral strains or enlargement due to axial compression will be prevented as much as possible with the intent to increase correspond- ingly the carrying capacity of the col- umn. It is customary to use longi- 1^ ^ ^ tudinal steel rods spaced equidistantly ! ^^ -^ ] around the column adjacent to and //^^ ^M inside of the spiral banding, as shown i/px p\V^ in Fig. 2, the former being strongly 11 jj fastened to the latter by clamps or \\ // wires. When the cylindrical cage ^^^TZT^^^^ thus formed is filled with concrete, ^ig i usually a rich mixture such as i : 2 14, and encased with concrete about 2 inches thick, the com- plete column is formed. The steel reinforcement in the other class of columns is a load-carrying member, in fact a steel column in itself, filled with concrete and encased with the same exterior shell of concrete as in the banded column, as shown in Fig. 3. In the latter case the parts of the steel column reinforcement form the banding or wrapping around the concrete. The shape of cross-section of column for either class may be any desired, although the circular section is more convenient for the first class. 642 CONCRETE-STEEL MEMBERS. [Ch. XIII. Lateral Reinforcement and Shrinkage The analytic expression for the gain in carrying capacity arising from banding is easily written. Let Fig. I represent a band one unit (inch) in length, i.e., along the axis of the column, its interior diameter being d. When the column receives load its diameter d tends to increase in consequence of the lateral strains, thus pressing against the interior of the band and causing the latter to stretch accordingly. Let £^2 =30,000,000 = modulus of elasticity of the steel; El = 2,000,000 = modulus of elasticity of the concrete; px = uniform intensity of pressure between the ring or band and concrete ; pi = intensity of column loading on a normal section; a = area of section of band ; A = stretch of steel ring due to internal pressure px- Hence A =~-Trd. .*. New circumference =7r(i( i +^) . (i) ii2 \ A2/ The new diameter will be 5' Art. 105. — Flanged Beams with Unequal Flanges. By the common theory of flexure, if the two coefficients of elasticity are equal, it has been shown that if C, Fig. i, is the centre of gravity of the j^~~^ " cross-section, the neutral axis [^ of . the section will pass through that point. Let it now be sup- posed that the lower flange is in a__ tension, while the upper is in com- pression. Also let T represent the ultimate resistance to tension in bending, and let C represent the same quantity for compression in ' Fig. i. bending. Then s'nce intensities vary directly as distances from the neutral axis, .f3 A, I' F r h T T ^1 =^7^=^'^- (l) 662 ROLLED AND CAST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. The ratio between ultimate -ntensities is represented by n'. U d=h-{-h^ is the total depth of the beam, and hence ^d If, as an example, for cast iron there be taken r T J I ' n =— = 0.2, hi =-d. C 6 The relation between h and h^ shown in eq. (2) is en- tirely independent of the form of cross-section. But according to the principles just given, in order that economy of material shall obtain, the cross-section should be so de- signed that h and h^ shall represent the distances of the centre of gravity from the exterior fibres. The analytical expression for the distance of the centre of gravity from DF is ib'a' + (b-b^)f(d-if) + i{b,-b%' ' ^1 bd-\-{b-b')f-\-{b^-b')t^ ' ' ' ^^^ The meaning of the letters used is fully shown in the figure. In order that the beam shall be equally strong in the two flanges, the various dimensions of the beam must be so designed that x^=\. ....... (4) It would probably be found far more convenient to cut sections out of stiff manila paper and balance them upon a knife-edge. Art. 105.] FLANGED BEAMS IVITH UNEQUAL FLANGES. 663 The moment of inertia about the axis AB, thus deter- mined, is I =\W +hih,^ -{h-h'){h-ty -{hi-h'){hi-hY] . (4a) This value is now changed^ to kl This value is to be substituted in the formula M=^-, di For various beams whose lengths are / and total load W the greatest value of AI becomes : Cantileve uniformly loaded, M= — . 2 Cantilever loaded at end, M = Wl. ' Beam supported a' each end and uniformly loaded, '"^ 8 8 ■ Beam supported a each end and loaded at centre, M= — . 4 The last two cases combined, ?)■ Sometimes the resistance of the web 's omitted from consideration. In such a case the intensity of stress in 664 ROLLED AND CAST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. each flange is assumed to be uniform and equal to either T or C. At the same time the lever-arms of the different fibres are taken to be uniform, and equal to h for one flange and h^ for the other, h and h^ now representing the vertical distances from the neutral axis to the centres of gravity of the flanges, while d--^h-\-h^. On these assumptions, if / is the area of the upper flange and f that of the lower, there will result M=fC.h+rT.h, (5) But since the case is one of pure flexure, fC=f'T (6) .: M=fC(h + h;)=fCd^f'Td. ... (7) Also, from eq. (6), f'-C (8) Or, tne areas of the flanges are inversely as the ultimate resistances. Frequently there is no compression flange, the section being like that shown in Fig. 2. In such case h is equal to h' , or t' is equal to zero; hence h =h' in eq. (4a) , but no other change 1 is to be made in the second member of that Fig. 2. equation. Eq. (46) may then be used pre- cisely as it stands for the internal resisting moment of a beam with the section shown in Fig. 2. Prob. I. It is required to design a cast-iron flanged beam of 5 feet effective span to carry a load of 1800 pounds applied at the centre of span, the section of the beam to be like that shown in Fig. 2, i.e., without upper flange. The greatest permitted working stress in compression will Art. io6.] FLANGED BEAMS IVITH EQUAL FLANGES. 66$ be 8000 pounds per square inch, and the total depth of the beam is to be taken at 9 inches. Referring to eqs. (4a), (46), and Fig. i for the notation, the given data and the dimensions to be assumed for trial will, be as follows: d = g inches; b=b'=l inch; bi=S inches; ^1 = 1 inch; / = 5 feet; and C = 8ooo. The intro- duction of these values into eq. (3) will give for the distance of the centre of gravity above the bottom surface of the beam /ji =2.6 inches and h=d— hi =6.4 inches. The preceding trial dimensions will make the beam weigh about 50 pounds per lineal foot. If all the preced- ing values are substituted in eqs. (4a) and (46), remembering that M = — , there will be found 4 W = i994 — 125 =1869 pounds. The trial dimensions, therefore, give the centre-load capacity of the beam 69 pounds greater than required, which may be considered sufficiently near to show that the assumed dimensions are satisfactory. Art. 106. — Flanged Beams with Equal Flanges. Nearly all the flanged beams used in engineering prac- tice are composed of a web and two equal flanges. It has already been seen that the ultimate resistances, T and C, ^ of structural steel and wrought iron to tension and com- pression are essentially equal to each other ; the same may be said a''so of their coefficients of elasticity for tension and compression. These conditions require equal flanges for both steel and wrought-iron rolled beams. 666 ROLLED AND CAST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. I I I H— + . I I I I — B- In Fig. I is represented the normal cross-section of an equal -flanged beam. It also approximately represents what may be taken as the section of c any wrought-iron or steel I beam, the ^ — exact forms with the corresponding moments of inertia being given in hand- Y books. Although the thickness f of the ^ flanges of such beams is not uniform, such a mean value may be taken as will cause the transformed section of Fig. I to be of the same area as the original section. Unless in exceptional cases where local circumstances compel otherwise, the beam is always placed with the web vertical, since the resistance to bending is much greater in that position. The neutral axis HB will then be at half the depth of the beam. Taking the dimensions as shown in Fig. i, the mo- ment of inertia of the cross-section about the axis HB is D Fig. I. 7 = (b-t)h- 12 (i) while the moment of inertia about CD has the value 2fb' + ht' L = 12 (2) With these values of the moment of inertia, the general formula, M =-r, becomes (remembering that di=- or - bd^-(b-t)h^ or M=k M'=k 6d 2fb^-\-ht^ 6b ' (3) (4) I Art. 106.] FLANGED BEAMS IVITH EQUAL FLANGES, 667 k is written for all extreme fibre stress. Eq. (3) is the only formula of much real value. It will be found useful in making comparisons with the results of a simpler formula to be immediately developed. Let di=^{d+h). Since t' is small compared with -, the intensity of stress may be considered constant in 2 each flange without much error. In such a case the total stress in each flange will be kht' = Tbf, and each of those forces will act with the lever-arm ^di. Hence the moment of resistance of both flanges will be kht'-di. The moment of inertia of the web will be — . Conse- 12 quently its moment of resistance will have very nearly the value 6 ■ The resisting moment of the whole beam will then be M=k(bt'dy^^^ (5) A further approximation is frequently made by writing d^h for h^\ then if each flange area ht' =/, eq. (5) takes the form M -kd^(f + f) (6) Eq. (6) shows that the resistance of the web is equivalent to that of one sixth the same amount concentrated in each flange. 668 ROLLED ^ND CAST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV If the web is very thin, so that its resistance may be neglected, M^kfdi^kbfdi, (7) or /=s <« Cases in which these formulas are admissible will be given hereafter. It virtually involves the assumption that the web is used wholly in resisting the shear, while the flanges resist the whole bending and nothing else. In other words, the web is assumed to take the place of the neutral surface in the solid beam, while the direct resistance to tension and compression of the longitudinal fibres of the latter is entirely supplied by the flanges. Again recapitulating the greatest moments in the more commonly occurring cases: Cantilever uniformly loaded, M = —=^ . (9) 2 2 ^ Cantilever loaded at the end, M = Wl (10) Beam supported at each end and uniformly loaded, .M = -3-=^g-. ...... (II) Beam supported at each end and loaded at centre, Wl M = — (12) 4 Beam supported at each end and loaded both uniformly and at centre. Art. 107.] ROLLED 3TEHL FL.4NGED BEAMS. 669 ^=1(^ + 7) (^3) In all cases W is the total load or single load, while p, as usual, is the intensity of uniform load, and / the length of the beam. Art. 107. — Rolled Steel Flanged Beams. The resisting moments of all rolled steel beams sub- jected to bending are computed by the exact formula k being the greatest intensity of stress (i.e., in the extreme fibres) at the distance d^ from the neutral axis about which the moment of inertia / is taken. In all ordinary cases the webs of beams are vertical so that the axis for / is horizontal; but it sometimes is necessary to use the mo- ment of inertia / computed about the axis passing through the centre of gravity of section and parallel to the web. The latter is frequently employed in considering the lateral bending effect of the compression in the upper flange. The upper or compression flange of a rolled beam under transverse load, unless it is laterally supported, is somewhat in the condition of a long column and, hence, tends to bend or deflect in a lateral direction. This ten- dency depends to some extent on the ratio of the length of flange (/) to the radius of gyration (r) of the section about the axis parallel to the web, as will be shown in detail in a later article. It will be found there that the ultimate compression flange stress decreases as the ratio l^r in- creases. Hence in Table I there will be found values of l-^r for the different beams tested. 670 ROLLED /iND C/fST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. The results of tests given in Table I were found by Mr. James Christie, Supt. of the Pencoyd Iron Co., and they are taken from a paper by him in the " Trans. Am. Soc. C. E." for 1884. All beams, both I and bulb, were loaded at the centre of span. Hence the moment of the centre load, W, and the uniform weight of the beam itself, pi, will be, as shown in eq. (13) of Art. 106, MJ-iw+i^)J4 (2) a\ 2/ di Hence 4 k =T/(^+?) ••••••• (3) The known data of each test will give all the quanti- ties in the second member of eq. (3). The two columns of elastic and ultimate values of k in the table were com- puted by eq. (3). The positions of the bulb beams (i.e., the bulb either up or down) in the tests are shown by the skeleton sections in the second column. The coefficients of elasticity E were computed from the data of the tests taken below the elastic limit by the aid of eq. (21), Art. 28: w+m, (4) 4SE1 W being the centre load and pi the weight of the beam, the length of span / being given in inches. All beams were rolled at the Pencoyd Iron Works. The ''mild steel" contained from o.ii to 0.15 per cent, of carbon, and the "high steel" about 0.36 per cent, of carbon. These steels are the same as those referred to in Art. 60. No. 14 is the only test of a "high" steel beam; all the Art. 107.] ROLLED STEEL FLANGED BEAMS. 671 remaining tests being with mild-steel shapes. Tests 3 to 9 inclusive were of deck or bulb beams, as the skeleton sections show. Beams 3 and 4 were rolled from the same ingot, as were also 6 arid 7, as were also 10, 12, and 13, and as were also 16, 17, 18, and 19. All beams were unsupported laterally in either flange. The moments of inertia were computed from the actual beam sections. The length of span is represented by /, while r is the radius of gyration of each beam section about an axis through its centre of gravity and parallel to its web. The values of r were as follows: 5 inch I . . . .r=o.54inch. 3 inch I, 6 " "....r = o.63 " 8 " " 7 " "....r=o.7i " 10 " "....r = o.95 9 " " r = o.83 " 12 " •• r = i.oi Table I. TRANSVERSE TESTS OF STEEL BEAMS. . .r=o.59 inch. . .r=o.88 " Final k in Pounds per Coefficient of Kind of Span / Moment Centre Square inch at Elasticity E, No. Beam. in Ins. of Load in Pounds. in Pounds per Square Inch. r Inertia. Elastic. Ultimate I M ild 3" I 59 100 2.76 5,500 41,100 45,200 30,890,000 2 3" '' 39 66 2.76 8,300 40,800 45,100 25,011,000 3 ' s"? 108 200 12 8,800 50,000 55,000 27,7 18,000 4 ' 5"i 108 200 12 8,400 46,900 52,500 25,489,000 5 ' 6"2 96 152 22 14,860 51,200 54,300 23,692,000 6 ^"" 69 97 37.6 34,000 47,100 59,300 18,765,000 7 ' 7':? 69 97 37.6 34,000 47,100 59,300 23,040,000 8 ' 9"? 240 290 84.8 14,500 46,000 51,300 29,923,000 9 ' 9" I 240 290 82.9 13,500 39,800 48,800 30,209,000 10 ' 8" I 240 273 70.2 13,000 37,600 44,400 28,889,000 II 8"" 240 273 70.3 12,930 37,500 44,100 29,055,000 12 8" " 144 164 70.2 19,480 32,800 39,900 31,313,000 13 ' 8" " 96 109 70.2 31,300 40,300 42,800 23,689,000 14 H igh 3"" 39 2.74 1 1,500 54,300 ■ 27,515,000 IS M ild 10" " IS6 164 150.5 22,500 35,000 • ■ 28,414,000 16 10" " 168 177 150.5 21,000 35,200 27,182,000 17 ! 10" II 180 189 150.5 19,500 35,000 29,160,000 18 10" " 192 202 150.5 18,000 34,400 29,727,000 19 ' 12" II 240 238 264.7 24,500 33,400 30,749,000 20 1 2" " 240 238 267.6 24,200 32,500 ■ 29,568,000 21 ' 12"" 228 226 273-8 22,000 27-500 29,164,000 22 ' 12"" 216 214 263.7 29,000 35,600 • • 30,219,000 23 ' 12"" 204 202 256.7 27,000 32,100 . • 30,030,000 24 ' I2"|' 192 190 257.8 34,000 38,000 • 29,709,000 25 ' 12' " 192 190 262.6 34,000 37,300 28,234,000 26 ' 12"" 180 178 262 . 4 36,700 37,700 • 27,717,000 27 ' I 2" " 168 166 264.0 38,000 36,300 28,784,000 28 ' 12"" 156 154 261.7 43,000 38,400 27,818,000 672 ROLLED AND Cy^ST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. The values of k both for the elastic limit and the ulti- mate are erratic, and the range of results in the table is not sufficient to establish any law, but on the whole the small ratios l^r accompany the larger values of k. The bulb or deck beams also appear to give larger values of k than the I beams. The results of these tests indicate that the greatest working intensities of stress in the flanges of rolled steel beams may be taken from 12,000 to 16,000 pounds per square inch if the length of unsupported compression flange does not exceed 15 or to 2 0or. In the work of design, the quantity 1 -^a'^ used in eq. (2), called the ''section modulus," is much employed, and it can be taken directly from the Cambria Steel Company's tables at the end of the book, as can the moment of inertia /. Eq. (2) shows that / M . . j;--F- (5) Hence the moment of the loading in inch-pounds di- vided by the allowed greatest flange stress in pounds per square inch must be equal or approximately equal to the section modulus of the required beam. There may be found in the Proceedings of the Ameri(^an Society for Testing Materials, 1909, the results of tests of rolled I beams and girders produced by the Bethlehem Steel Company and of standard rolled I beams by Profes- sor Edgar Marburg. Also Professor H. F. Moore gives results of his testing of steel I beams of the regular or standard pattern in Bulletin No. 68 of the University of Illinois. Professor Marburg's main purpose appears to have been to make comparative tests of the ordinary I beam and of the wide-flange Bethlehem shapes, while the principal object of Professor Moore was to investigate Art. 107.] ROLLED STEEL ELAN GEO BEAMS. 673 the influence of lateral deflection on the capacity of the compressive flange without lateral support. Table II gives the results of these tests, each of professor Marburg's results except one being an average of three. Table II. TESTS OF ROLLED STEEL BEAMS. Span, I Ft. I r' Extreme Fibre Stress k, 'Lbs. per Sq.in. Modulus of Elasticity. Size. Type. Bias. Limit. Ultimate. Beth. I Std. I Girder Beth. I Std. I Girder Beth. I Std. I Girder Beth. I*. . .. Girder ...... 15 15 15 15 15 11 20 ' 20 20 20 125 167 75 125 167 75 129 176 90 III 84 31,700 ' 20,400 26,700 21,800 20,600 22,500 20,900 19,500 15,400 13,000 11,800 46,100 42,200 53,900 37,900 34,700 41,100 34,600 33,000 34,300 32,300 31,000 26,900,000 26,200,000 26,900,000 26,406,000 26,900,000 27,200,000 26,400,000 25,800,000 25,600,000 29,400,000 24,800,000 15" 38 1b. 15" 42 " 15" 73" 15" 38" 15" 42 " 15" 73 " 24" 72 " 24" 80 " 24" 120 " 30" 120 " 30" 175 " * One beam only. Prof. Moore's fifteen tests were with 8-inch, 18-pound and one 25-pound I beams, the spans being 5. 7-5. 7-92, 10, 15. i5 7 and 20 feet. The ratio l-^r' varied from 71 to 286. The ultimate fibre stress k was Max. 36,600; Mean 32,300; Min. 28,100. The Modulus E was. Max. 32,300,000; Mean 28,400,000; Min. 25,100,000. The Max. E is to be regarded with doubt. As is the case with all tests of full-size rolled beams, the results are seen to vary quite widely. This is largely due to the fact that such full -size members are seldom true in all their parts, i.e., the web may be a little twisted on the cooling bed and the flange will perhaps n3ver be perfectly plane, consequently the applied load in the testing machine will not be received with presupposed exactness. Again, the work of the rolls and the effects of cooling will not be uniform. At any rate the most scrupulous care in testing will not prevent many erratic results, apparently unac- countable. In order to show these results graphically they have 674 ROLLED AND CAST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. been .plotted on Plate I and the explanatory matter on the Plate will make clear the results belonging to each investigator. The horizontal ordinate is the ratio — , r' being the radius of gyration of the normal section of the column about a vertical axis parallel to the web and passing through its centre. The vertical ordinate is the intensity k of the extreme fibre stress produced by the ultimate load on the beam as shown in Table I. The equation ^=39,000-44-, represents the broken line drawn on Plate I. It is a tenta- -50-000 - ' ^ - PI atel H • • 40-000 •1 • X : __ T TtT T 30-000 •1 •1 .X -- .. x -5- T^ 20-000 10-000 Bethlehem I ? „ .. V Girder \ ^^^^"^^ X Standard I — Moore • Chri stie 000 - "i /-VJ-'=40 120 200 220 tive expression, as there are not sufficient tests with the requisite variation of — to justify more than a trial value of k. Art. 107.] ROLLED STEEL FLANGED BE/IMS. 675 Professor Marburg made no effort to give lateral sup- port to his beams under test, nor did he endeavor to give the compressive flange lateral freedom, as did Professor Moore for a part of his tests. As, however, the results appear to be about the same, whether the compressive flange has complete lateral freedom or not, under ordinary cir- cumstances of testing, no distinction is made on this account between the various plottings on Plate I. The extremely high values on that Plate belong to the first nine tests by Mr. Christie, as given in Table I. They are abnormally high and whether such results are characteristic of bulb sections or due to some other reason is not clear. Prob. I. It is required to design a rolled steel beam for an eftective span of 20 ft. to carry a uniform load of 725 lbs. per linear foot in addition to the weight of the beam itself, the circumstances being such that it is not advis- able to use a greater total depth of beam than 12 ins. The greatest permitted extreme fibre stress k will be taken at 12,000 lbs. per sq. in. It will be assumed for trial purposes that the beam itself will weigh 35 lbs. per linear foot, so that the total uniform load will be 760 lbs. per linear foot. The centre moment in inch-pounds will, therefore, be ^^ 760X20X20X12 ^ . „ J\I =■ ^ =456,000 m. -lbs. By eq. (5) the section modulus will be 456,000^-12,000 = 38. By referring to the tables in almost any steel com- pany's handbook it will be found that this section modulus belongs to a 12-inch, 35-pound steel rolled beam, and that beam fulfills the requirements of the problem. Prob. 2. It is required to design a rolled-steel beam for a 3 2 -ft. effective span to carry a load of 1280 pounds per linear foot in addition to the weight of the beam, and a 676 ROLLED /IND CAST FLANGF.D BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. concentrated load of 1 1 ,000 pounds at a point 1 1 feet distant from one end of the span. The greatest permitted work- ing stress in the extreme fibres of the beam is 16,000 lbs. per sq. in. It will be assumed for trial purposes that a 24-in. beam weighing 95 lbs. per linear foot will be required so that the total uniform load per linear foot will be 1375 pounds. It will then be necessary to ascertain at what point in the span the maximum bending moment occurs, i.e., at what point the transverse shear is equal to zero. Let a be the distance of the concentrated weight from the nearest end of the span, i.e., a = 11 ft. Then 'et P be the single weight, p the total uniform load per linear foot, and / the length of span. The following equation representing the condi- tion that the transverse shear must be equal to zero may- be written pi Pa Hence x = - +—7 . 2 pi In the above equation x is obviously the distance from that end of the span farthest from P to the section of greatest bending moment. Substituting the above numeri- cal values in the equation for x, there will result :r = i6 + 2.75-i8.75 ft. Since 32 — 18.75=13.25 the following will be the value of the greatest bending moment in inch-pounds: .^ y 1375X18.75 11,000X11 „ , M^y-^^ ^X 13.25 + X 18.75 j 12 = 2,900,363 inch-pounds. Art. io8.] DEFLECTION OF ROLLED STEEL[ BEAMS, 677 The section modulus of the beam required is by eq. (5) 2,900,363^16,000 = 181. The section modulus of a 24. -in. steel beam weighing 85 lbs. per linear foot is 180.7, a-s will be found by referring to the tables at the end of the book. Hence that beam will be assumed for the correct solution of the problem. The fact that the beam w^eighs 10 lbs. per linear foot less than the assumed weight has too small an effect upon the greatest bending moment to call for any revision. Prob. 3. A steel tee beam of 8 ft. span is to be used as a purlin to carry a uniform load of 125 lbs. per linear foot with the web of the tee in a vertical position. The greatest permitted intensity of stress in the extreme fibre of the tee is 14,000 lbs. per sq. in. It is required to find the dimensions of the tee. By referring to eq. (5) the section modulus will be written 1000X96 Q.. S = ^- = . 86 m. 0X14,000 By referring again to the steel handbook tables it will be found that a 3 X3 XA in. steel tee weighing 6.6 lbs. per lin. ft. has just the section modulus required. That tee therefore fulfils the requirements of the problem. Prob. 4. It is required to support a single weight of 12,000 lbs. at the centre of a span of 13 ft. 6 ins. on two rolled steel channels with their webs in a vertical position and separated back to back by a distance of 3 ins., the greatest permitted intensity of stress in the extreme fibre of the flanges being 15,000 lbs. Find the size of channels required. Art. 108.— The Deflection of Rolled Steel Beams. The deflections of rolled steel beams may readily be computed by the formula of Art. 28. The general pro- 678 ROLLED AND CAST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. cedure will be illustrated by using the equations for a non- continuous beam simply supported at each end and loaded by a weight at the centre of span, or uniformly, or in both ways concurrently. Eq. (20) will give the deflection at any point located by the coordinate x, while eq. (21) will give the centre deflection only. The tangent of the in- clination of the neutral surface at any point located by x dzv will be given by the value of -t~ found in eq. (19). Prob. I. Let the centre deflection of the rolled-steel beam of Prob. i of Art. 107 be required. Referring to eq. (21) of Art. 22, W = o; /== 20 feet = 240 inches; /? = 760 pounds; 7 = 228.3; and E may be taken at 29,000,000. Hence the centre deflection is 240X240X240X5X760X20 . . ^^ = 48X8X29,00-0,000X228.3 = • 4'4 mch. If half the external uniform load of 725 pounds per linear foot had been concentrated at the centre of span, ^^_ 725X20 , W =-^—^ ■ =7250 pounds; p = 35 2 and I = 20 ft. =240 ins. Also pi = 700 pounds. Hence the centre deflection would be 240 X 240 X 240 X (72 50 + 437 • 5) ..,• ^-u w, = :^ 7; = . ^ ^ ^ men. 1 48X29,000,000X228.3 ^^^ Prob. 2. In Prob. 2 of Art. 107 place the 11,000-pound weight at the centre of span, then find the inclination of the neutral surface and the deflection of the 24-inch 85- Art. 109.] IVROUGHT-IRON ROLLED BEAMS. 679 pound steel beam at the centre and quarter points of the 32-foot span, taking £^ = 29,000,000 pounds. Art. 109. — Wrought-iron Rolled Beams. Although wrought-iron rolled beams are not now manu- factured, being cofnpletely displaced by steel beams, yet many are still in use. Hence it is advisable to exhibit the empirical quantities required to design them and to determine their safe carrying capacities as well as their deflections under loading. It has been observed in Art. 107 that the upper or com- pression flange of a loaded flanged beam will deflect or tend to deflect laterally at a lower intensity of compressive stress as the unsupported length of such a flange is in- creased. The experimental results given in Table I ex- hibit the values of the intensity of stress K in the extreme fibres of the beam both at the elastic and ultimate limits, the usual formula for bending resistance being used, «=f <-) In the autumn of 1883 an extensive series of tests of wrought-iron rolled beams, subjected to bending by centre loads, was made by the author, assisted by G. H. Elmore, C.E., at the mechanical laboratory of the Rensselaer Poly- technic Institute. The object of these tests was to dis- cover, if possible, the law connecting the value of K for this class of beams with the length of span when the beam is entirely without lateral support. The means by which the latter end was accomplished, and a full detailed account of the tests will be found in Vol. I, No. i, " Selected Papers of the Rensselaer Society of Engineers." The main results of the tests are given in Table I. All the tests were made on 6 -inch I beams with the same area of normal cross- 68o ROLLED AND CAST FL/INGFD BEAMS. Table I. [Ch. XIV. K Final Perm'nent Perm'nent E No Span, Centre /. Vertieal Lateral Pounds per Square Inch. Feet. Weight, Pounds. r Elastic Limit, Ultimate, Pounds. Deflection, Inches. Deflection, Inches. Pounds. I - 20 4,060 400 27,726 31,094 0.14 24,170,000 2 4, 200 400 29,623 32,885 0.30 26,374,000 3 I ^^ 4.390 360 28,264 30,791 0.2 0.5 24,520,000 4 4,570 360 28.264 32,020 0.18 0.4 24,313,000 5 [i6 4,770 320 26,564 29,579 0.28 1. 00 25,771,000 6 5,270 320 29,596 32,632 0.48 1.25 25,003,000 7 [14 6,130 280 31,191 33,049 0.30 I .20 26,082,000 8 6,125 280 31,164 33,023 0.30 I .10 23,373,000 9 /■ 1 2 7,161 240 30,221 32,907 0.35 1.08 25,287,000 lO 7,350 240 31,314 33,817 0.33 I .09 24,022,000 II i ^° 9,255 200 33,082 35,358 0.39 1.08 25,115,000 12 9,655 200 33,082 37,064 0.50 1.50 24,218,000 13 [« 11,485 160 29,736 35,010 0.30 0.90 21,61 1,000 14 11,980 160 31,936 36,527 0.29 I .05 21,987,000 15 [ ^ 18,300 120 35,497 41,737 0.605 1-53 23,040,000 i6 18,145 120 36,617 41,396 0.67 1.88 20,935,000 17 • 5 22,870 100 34,136 43,434 0.67 1-75 22,023,000 i8 23,065 100 34,136 43,813 0.67 1-75 25,272,000 19 !- 29,985 80 32,619 45,532 0.96 1.70 24,315,000 20 28,585 80 32,619 44,744 0.60 1.86 21,275,000 section of 4.35 square inches. Actual measurement showed the depth d of the beams to be 6.16 inches. The moment of inertia of the beam section about a line through its centre and normal to the web was 7 = 24.336. The radius of gyration of the same section in reference to a line through its centre and parallel to the web was r = o.6 inch. / was the length of span in inches. If M is the bending moment in inch-pounds, W the total centre load (including weight of beam), and K the stress per square inch in extreme fibre, the following formulas result: k^ Md 2I and M = Wl k = Wld 8/ • (2) (3) Art. 109.] IVROUGHT-IRON ROLLED REAMS. 681 The experimental values of II \ /, d, and / inserted in the above formula give the values of k shown in the table. The coefficient of elasticity, E, was found by the usual formula, in which w is the deflection caused by W. The full line is the graphical representation of the values of k given in Table I. Since k must clearly decrease with PidLe I. 1 1 1^ 'i ' . 1 1 ■" ' ! — ■■ ~ ~1 ' ■; rn 1 'T- ■■ ■ III 1 M i M 1 1 1 1 i ' ' i : 1 i t - 1 11 r- -r ]-■■■■ 1 t 1 snnt a 1 V- 1 M ' ! ■ ' ' ! ; 1 !>^>^^^' ' ■ ' , , , Ml, I ■ i M i 1 1 M M M ■ I M I 1 11 1 i -y- --1 ,,,nfin ■ ' Ml' ' 1 M ' fSt'-i.' ' i ' i 1 II ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 1 1 M ' ! 1 ' M ' ' ' Mi' ' ^OOi 1 Mil i , M 1 1 r'^-i>^. Mm ' ' M 1 i M i M 1 1 1 MM ■ M M 1 i 1 M M ' ' ' 1 ' '^~^riS-.' 11 M M 1 1 M ' M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ \ \\ Ml' ' ' M M M^-^-'t. M 'Ti M ' ' M M 1 i MM Ml. . , 1 1 i ! >>T>>J V 1 1 1 M 1 ■ 1 ■ ■ --'■ 1 i 1 , : \U\ i^i'SjS-. 1 Mil'' 1 1 1 . 1 • ' M •■ ' 1 i ' ' ' ' ■ ' rKjJs^i 1 M 1 1 ' : : M 1 1 1 M -r^^ nVH --^^^U^ ' -M4+ + ^^ H-- \ 'rn h i 1 1 1 III' (flT^ r^-M-^ ' Wl^jAl ' M ■ ' 1 'ii cUUUU- ■ III 1 LllJl._--_-_--------l-±-^4---.-^.^^4± im^ irl -:^#F^ - M M M M 1 M 1 LI M 1 " ■'■ ' 1 1 M i ' 1 i M 1 M 1 1 ■ + t 1 1-L M \\\ M iff> a^n M'tiO 1 \ '"■n "on i M ' ^^p M \m the length of span, and increase with the radius of gyration of the section about an axis through its centre and parallel to the web (the latter, of course, being vertical), k has been plotted in reference to l^r as shown. No simple formula \yill closely represent this curve, but the bioken line covers all lengths of span used in ordinary engineering practice, and is represented by the formula ^=51,000-75- (5) For raiVay structures the greatest allowable stress per square inch in the extreme fibres of rolled beams may be taken at ^ = 10,000-15--. (6) 682 ROLLHD AND CAST FLANGED BEAMS. [Ch. XIV. Values of k taken from a large scale plate, like Plate I, are, however, far preferable to those given by any formula. The ultimate values of k given in Table I are fairly representative of the best wrought-iron I beams. The coefficients of elasticity E range from about 22,000,000 to about 25,000,000 pounds; the average may be taken about 24,000,000 pounds. The deflection of wrought-iron beams may be computed by the formula WP . . ^ = ^8E7' ^^) when the load W is at the centre of the beam. In the general case of a beam carrying the centre load W and the uniform oad pi, the quantity {W -^Ipl) must displace W in eq. (7). If the beam carry only the tiniform load pi, W in eq. (7) must be displaced by \pl. If it is desired to apply the law expressed in eqs. (5) and (6) to mild-steel beams, the second members of those equations may be multipHed by | to f for close approxi- mations. CHAPTER XV. PLATE GIRDERS. Art. no. — The Design of a Plate Girder. A PLATE girder is a flanged girder or beam built usually of plates and angles, the flanges being secured to the web by the proper number of rivets suitably distributed. The flanges, unlike those of rolled beams, are usually of vary- ing sectional area, although occasionally either flange may be of uniform section throughout when formed of two angles, or two angles and a cover-plate. Fig. i is a general view of a plate girder, while Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5 show some of the general features of design. The total length of a plate girder is materially more than the length of clear span over which the girder is de- signed to carry load. Blocks or pedestals of masonry or metal, as the case may be, support the ends of the girders and rest on the masonry or other supporting masses or members carrying the girder and its load. The distance between the centres of these blocks or pedestals is called the effective span of the girder, as it is the span length which must be used in computing bending moments, shears, or reactions. Plate girders must evidently be somewhat longer than the effective span. >In the Figs, the relations of the various parts at the end of the plate girder are shown in detail. The girder illustrated in Fig. i has 683 684 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. an effective span of 68 ft. with the centre of the pedestal block 15 inches from the face of the masonry abutment and 12 inches from the extreme end of the girder. The effective depth of the girder is the vertical distance or depth between the centres of gravity of the two flanges. When the girder has cover-plates this effective depth may be greater than the depth of web plate at the centre of span and less than that at the ends, even when the web plate is of uniform depth. It is always customary, how- ever, to take the effective depth of a plate girder with uniform depth of w^eb as constant. Frequently that depth is taken equal to the depth of the web plate; or, again, it may be taken equal to the depth between the centres of gravity of the flanges at mid-span without sensible error. In case the web plate is not of uniform depth the effective depth might still be taken as the depth of web plate at the various sections of the girder, or it may be taken as the depth between centres of gravity of the flanges at the same sections. The plate girder shown in Fig. i and to be assumed for the purposes of design is of the deck type and has a clear span of 65 ft. 6 ins., an effective span of 68 ft., and a length over all of 70 ft. The differences between the effective span and the clear span and total length are obviously dependent upon the length of span. For short spans those differences are relatively small, and relatively large for long spans. The depth of w^eb plate will be taken as 6 ft. 8 ins., and it will be found later that at and in the vicin- ity of the centre of span three cover-plates will be needed. The girder will be assumed to be of mild structural steel and will be supposed to carry a single-track railroad mov- ing load with the concentrations and spacings shown in Table I, Art. 21. The dead load or own weight of the girder and track will depend somewhat upon whether the girder is of the ^1-7J<^-* i-li--ipr-i:i)- , Sole PI. ll"x ^ X 1 6 PC •Remainder of Bott. li as Top Flange excexi ' holes to be shop rivi ,3* . 5K »l«l*C*|<-*k -IVA 4% 4_|_l_c4£!f.^, pQ-ffl-l '6-4-1 i -(p-OffiO oo- 3' „5>, O— 0

- 3-llJ^- \-T-T-t-T-9' H-|-oo-i"o-o6-H-l- l-f-|-6i-;i-f-f<&-H-H -3-11}^ >UrO^-»|« ZV/^* 0-666 o o-fio-ooooo-o o • " |:^:t-i {To face page 6'oS-^ Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 685 through or deck type. The only difference in computa- tion arising in those two types is due to the fact that if the girders are of the deck class (i.e., carrying the moving load directly on their upper flanges) the rivets connecting the upper flanges with the webs must be assumed to carry the wheel concentrations in addition to their other duties, as will be shown in the following computations. The total dead load or own weight will be taken as 1400 lbs. per linear foot. Inasmuch as there are two girders, each will carry one half of the moving load and one half of the dead load or own w^eight. It should be observed that the effective length of span being 68 ft., the two locomotives at the head of the train load will more than cover the span, so that the uniform train load will not appear in the computations. The design of this plate girder will be made in accord- ance with the provisions of the American Railway Engi- neering and Maintenance of Way Association and refer- ences will be made to those provisions. Bending Moments. The first computations necessary are those required to determine the bending moments, and from them the flange stresses at different points of the span. Those points may be taken at 5, 8, or 10 ft. apart as may be desired for the purpose of design; the closer together the sections are taken the greater will be the degree of accuracy attained. In the present instance those sections will be taken 5 feet apart up to 25 ft. from the end of the span, but the next or final section will be at the centre of span. After the bending moments are obtained, the flange stresses at once result by dividing the former by the efl^ec- tive depth. Figs. I and 2 show the complete single-track railway 686 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. deck-plate girder span consisting of two girders with the requisite bracing connections between them. The total dead load or own weight is a uniform load and consists of: Lbs. per L-n. Ft. Track (ties, rails, etc.) 450 Two girders and bracing 1050 Total 1500 Or for one girder -^ — = 750 2 As each girder will carry 750 lbs. of dead load per linear foot, and as the effective span is 68 ft., the expression for the dead-load bending moment in foot-pounds at any point will be as follows : M=^^(68x-x2) (i) 2 The application of eq. (i) to the sections of the girder 5, ic, 15, 20, 25, and 34 ft. from the ends will give the following expressions for the bending moments in foot- pounds : D. L. Moment. X Ft. Lbs. 5 . . . . .' 118,120 10 • . 217,500 15 298,100 20 360,000 25 403,100 34 433,500 The moving-load bending moments are next to be found by using the concentrations shown in Table i, Art. 21. For this purpose the criterion for the maximum bending Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 687 moment, cq. (5), Art. 21, must be applied at the assumed sections in which V (equal to x in the above dead-load computations) has the values 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 34 ft. The application of that criterion to the section BO, Fig. i, 5 ft. from the end of the span shows that W2, or the first driving wheel, must rest at the section in question for the maximum bending moment, the loads W2 to 1^12 inclusive resting on the span. Wi will be off the span. By the aid of Table i, Art. 21, the greatest bending moment desired is: Ms =^^(9,030,000 + 2 X 273,000) =704,000 ft. -lbs. 68 Similarly for the section CN, 10 ft. from the end of the span, the criterion eq. (5) of Art. 21 shows that 1/^3 must be placed at C with W12 2 ft. from the end of the span and Wi off the span. By the aid of Table i the desired moment takes the value: Mio= — (9,030,000-^-2 X273,ooo) — 150,000= 1,260,000 ft. -lbs. 60 Concisely stating the conditions and results for the remaining sections shown on Fig. i: For DL, 15 feet from end of span, two positions of moving load, I/F3 at D and W12 at D satisfy the criterion, but the latter with 13 feet of uniform train load on the span gives the greatest moment. Total load on the span is (1^10+ . . . +VF18+3000X13) and the moment is: ^15=— (6, 3 10, 000 +2 13, 000X13 +3000 X — j -345,000 = 1,715,000 ft. -lbs. 088 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. For EM, 20 feet from end of span, place 1^12 at E\ M20 ==^(6, 310, 000+8(213, 000 H 3£oo\\ _^^^ QQQ^ 2,040,000 ft. -lbs. For GH, 25 feet from end of span, place W12 at G and the moment is : M 25 25/ 000+232,500X3+3000—) -755.000 = 2,265,000 ft. -lbs. The moment at the centre of the span can be computed in the same manner, but by referring to Table II of Art. 2 1 , it will be seen to be : M34 = 2,435,400 ft. -lbs. A reference to the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association specifications, Art. 9, will show that the required allowance for impact is represented by the factor 7, in which V is the length of load on the span: 1=^ 300 L'+30o* The positions of loading already found for the greatest moving load moments give the lengths V in feet in the following table: Pt. Loaded Length, L '. Impact Moving Load Impact Moment Ft. Factor I. Moment, Ft. -lbs. Ft.-lbs. ■ 5 63 .827 704,000 582,000 10 63 .827 1,260,000 1,040,000 15 66 .820 1,715,000 1,405,000 20 61 .897 2,040,000 1,830,000 25 64 .825 2,265,000 1,866,000 34 68 .815 • 2,435,000 1,985,000 Art. no.] THE DESIGN OE A PLATE GIRDER. 689 By adding the dead load or own weight moments, already computed, to the moving load and impact moments in the preceding table, the total or resultant moments will be: Table I. T34- Total Moment ^^- Ft.-lbs. 5 1,404,000 10 2,518,000 15 3,418,000 20 4,230,000 25 4,534,000 34 4,855,000 Shears. Both dead and moving load shears must be computed. As the dead load or own weight is a uniform load on the girder, the shear at any point is simply the load between that point and the centre of span. Hence indicating the transverse shear at any section by the figure showing its distance from the end of the span, there will result the following values, 5o being the end shear or reaction: 5o =34 X750 =25,000 lbs. S5 = 29 X750 = 21,750 5io = 24 X750 = 18,000 5"i5 = i9X75o = i4,25o 520 = 14X750 = 10.500 525= 9X750= 6,750 534= 0X750= o The moving load shears will also be needed. Although there is no systematic criterion for such shears at different 690 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. points in a span traversed by a train of concentrations, it is a simple matter to find the greatest moving load shears at the sections contemplated by inspection and trial. The greatest end shear, i.e., the greatest reaction, has been found in Art. 21 and is given in Table II of that Article: End shear for 68-ft. span = 161,700 lbs. End impact shear =131,800 '' The impact factors for the shears are computed by the same formula already used for impact moments. For a shear 5 feet from end of span: place W2 at the 5 -foot section, then the greatest shear is c, 9,030,000 + 2X273,000 ., 55 = ^ ^ 7^ -^ = 141,000 lbs. Do By trying other positions it will be found that this gives the greatest shear. Wi is not on the girder and W12 is 2 feet from the end of the span. For section 10 feet from end: place Wn at the section. Hence 6,310,000 + 213,000X13 -1 3000X-— 5 0=- ^^ ^ -150.000 = 122,000 lbs. For section 15 feet from end: place Wn at the section r.nd there will result g2 6,310,000 + 213,000X8 +3000 X — S , = = 1 so, 000 = 104,300 lbs. Art. no. THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 691 For 20-ft. section: place W2 at the section and there will result c^ 6,QS0,000 ,, 020 = ^^-^ 150,000 =87,200 lbs. 68 For a 2 5 -ft. section: place W2 at the section and the greatest shear will be ^ S. 240, 000 + 213, 000 X3 11 525=^^-^*^^ T^ ^-150,000 = 71,500 lbs. Oo For the centre of span : place 1^2 at that point and the greatest shear will be : ^ ^,230,000 + 174,000X5 1, 534=^^^-^^^ t:^ ^-150,000=45,300 lbs. Oo The loaded lengths in each of these cases to be used in computing the impact factors are in the order of the sections beginning with that at 5 feet from the end, 63, 66,. 61, 56, 51, and 42 feet, the latter belonging to the centre of span. The following tabular statement repre- sents the elements of these moving load shears and the impact allowances: SHEARS AND IMPACT ALLOWANCES Section. Loaded Impact Moving Load Impact Shear. Length. Ft. Factor. Shear. Lbs. Lbs. 5 63 .8.7 141,000 116,500 10 66 .820 122,000 100,000 15 61 ■831 104,300 86,600 20 56 .824 87,200 71,800 25 51 •855 71,500 61,100 34 42 •877 45,300 39,700 692 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. Adding together the dead load, moving load and impact shears as now determined, the following will be the resultant or total shears at sections under consideration: Table II. RESULTANT OR TOTAL SHEARS. Section. lotal^hears. End . 319,000 5 279,300 10 240,500 15 205,100 20 169,500 25 139,400 34 85.000 The preceding results or computations due to the dead and moving loads are the principal data required in the design of the girder. Weh Plate. The effective depth of the girder will tentatively be taken as 6 feet 8 inches and the depth from the back of flange angles in the upper flange to the back of the lower flange angles will be taken as 6 feet 8| inches. As the depth of the web plate must be taken a little less ihan the depth from back to back of angles, in order that the flange plates may not touch the edges of the web plates when the different parts of the girder are assembled, that depth should be taken as 6 feet 8 inches. In fact the effective depth of a plate girder is sometimes prescribed as the depth of the wxb plate. This depth of web plate will leave \ inch clear at the top and bottom flanges, which is sufficient to insure the flange plates freedom from hitting the edges of the web. Art. 18 of the Specifications allows a working stress in shear of 10,000 pounds per square inch of gross cross- Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 693 section of the web. As the total end shear has been found to be 319,000 pounds, the gross web plate section at the end of span should be 31.9 square inches. The minimum thickness must then be '-^^7^ = .399 inch. 80 A web plate 80 X-^ inch will be used, giving a gross 16 sectional area of 80 X. 43 75 =35 square inches. The sur- plus area is small and it is judicious design to have it. This web plate thickness also satisfies Art. 29 of the Speci- fications which prescribes that ' ' The thickness of web plates shall not be less than of the unsupported dis- 160 tance between fiange angles," as 6X6 inch flange angles will be used, Flanges. Art. 29 of the Specifications provides that the design of the flanges may be based either on the moment of inertia of the net section of the girder or on the assumption that the flange stress is of constant intensity with its centre at the centre of gravity of the flange area, the latter including one-eighth of the gross section of the web, the difference between one-sixth and one-eighth of the w^eb section being supposed to cover the material punched out in the tension side of the web plate. The latter method will be employed. Art. 30 of the Speciflcations provides that '' The gross section of the compression flanges of plate girders shall not be less than the gross section of the tension flanges." It will be best, therefore, to design the tension flange first. Using the total or resultant bending moment at the 694 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. centre of the span, the trial effective depth of 6 feet 8 inches will give the centre flange stress as follows: 4,855,000 „ ,. - ^^' = 728,000 lbs. 6.07 The specifications permit a working tensile stress in the net section of the tension flange of 16,000 pounds per square inch. Hence the required net tension flange area is 728,000 16,000 = 45.5 sq.ms. The available flange section due to one-eighth the gross •7 r sectional area of the web is ^ =4.375 square inches. The 8 amount of flange area to be supplied by the flange plates and angles is, therefore, 45-5 -4-4 =41-1 sq.ins. . In providing 41. i square inches it is necessary to know what rivet holes are to be deducted from each cover-plate and each flange angle. It is clear that two rivet holes only need be deducted from each cover-plate, and it is plain that at least two rivet holes must be deducted from each flange angle section. In designing cover-plates for flanges it must be remembered that no such plate must be thicker than the one under it, i.e., if these plates are not of the same thickness, the thickest one must lie on the angles, the remaining thicknesses -to decrease or be the same in passing outward from the angles. As a trial section let the follow- ing be assumed: I Art. no. THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER 695 Angles or Cover-plates. Gross Area. Sq.Ins. Less Rivet Holes. Sq.Ins. Net Section. Sq.Ins. 2 6"X6"xr' 3 covers 14" Xl". .. 16.88 315 4XiX!=30 6XiXf=4-5 13-88 27.00 48.38 • 40.88 As 40.88 square inches is but ij per cent, less than the desired area, 41.4 square inches, the former may be accepted subject to further confirmation. If the centre of gravity of the gross section of the tenta- tive flange area consisting of the three plates and two angles indicated above be determined, it will be found .11 inch above the back of the angles. This will make the effective depth 6 ft. 8.5 ins. +.22 in. = 6 ft. 8.72 ins. This increase in effective depth will correspondingly decrease the centre flange stress so as to make the total actual net area of 45.3 square inches a little larger than required. Hence the trial centre tension flange area as determined above will be accepted as the actual flange area to be used, i.e., three i4Xi-inch cover-plates and two angles 6 X 6 X | inch. Length of Cover-plates. In the next Article there will be shown two methods of determining the lengths of cover-plates after the sections of those plates have been found for the greatest bending moment, usually taken as at the centre of span. These two methods are simply different forms of expres- sion of the same thing. The following notation will be •used : 696 PLATE GIRDERS [Ch. XV. Z= length of span in feet; L\ = length of outside cover-plate in feet; L2 = length of second cover-plate in feet; A = total net flange area, square inches ; a\ =net area of outside cover-plate, square inches; a2 =net area of second cover-plate, square inches; as =net area of third cover-plate, square inches. It has already been seen that if a beam simply supported at each end be loaded uniformly throughout the span, the bending moment at any point will be represented by the vertical ordinate of a parabola whose vertex is over the centre of span while the end of each branch is at one end of the span. It is assumed that the greatest bending moments in the plate girder, already computed, vary by the same parabolic law. This is not quite true, but suf- ficiently near for ordinary purposes. Then, as will be shown in the next Article, r 7 pi 7- 7 /«l+«2. J 1 jai -\-a2-\-a2, A In this case / = 68 feet and A =45.3 square inches. ai=a2=az=g sq. ins. Making these numerical substitutions, there will result Li =30.7 feet; L2 =42.9 feet; L3 = 52.5 feet. These lengths are clearly the minimum permissible. In actual construc- tion it is desirable to have the end of the plate from i to 1.5 feet further from the centre, making the total length of the plate 2 to 2.5 feet greater than the length computed above. This lengthening of the cover-plate is essential in order that the cover-plate metal may be taking stress at the point where the plate is computed to begin. Also Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 697 as will be seen a little further on, the pitch of rivets in these ends of the cover-plates is made less than in the body of the plate for greater effectiveness where the plate begins to take its stress. The lengths of cover-plates then, beginning with the shortest, will be 33.2, 45.4, and 5 5, feet. Another method of procedure, more accurate than the preceding, is to draw a moment curve on the effective span, which can readily be done by laying down as vertical ordinates the resultant or total moments as given in Table I. These moment ordinates would be 5 feet apart except at the centre of span. The lengths of cover-plates must be such as to give resisting moments of the flange stresses at least equal to the external bending moments shown on such a diagram. The moments of the flange stresses will require the centres of gravity of parts of the flange sections to be computed at each moment point. The following tabulation shows the elements of this method of procedure for the centre section of the girder: Section. One-eighth web plus flange angles First cover-plate Second cover-plate Top cover-plate Sq. Ins. 18.3 9 9 9 Stress per Sq. In. 16,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 Lever Ai Ft. 6.41 6.77 6.83 6.9 Moment. Ft.-lbs. 1,875,000 976,000 984,000 994,000 This operation must be repeated at each m^oment section of the girder, but the numerical work need not be repeated here, being precisely like that for the centre section. The net lengths of plates found by this method are 32.8, 42.9 and 53.8 feet, a substantial agreement with the lengths found by the shorter procedure. In the compression flange the cover-plate lying on the angles should run the entire length of the girder, especially 698 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. if the girder be of the deck type, i.e., with ties resting upon the upper flange. That flange being under compression, it is advisable that the horizontal legs of the angles be supported throughout their entire length by riveting them to a cover-plate. This will add to the stiffness and carrying capacity of the flange. If ties rest directly upon the upper flange, their deflection tends to bend one side of it out of its horizontal position, but this tendency will be materially lessened by the added stiffness gained in riveting the horizontal angle legs of the flange to the cover- plate. Although this process of design has been used in con- nection with the tension flange, under the specifications the compression flange is to be made like the tension flange, i.e., a duplicate of it. Pitch oj Rivets in Flanges. Arts. 5 and 31 of the specifications relate to the rivets required to join the vertical legs of the flange angles to the web plate. Art. 31 requires that "The flanges of plate girders shall be connected to the web with a sufficient number of rivets to transfer the total shear at any point in a distance equal to the effective depth of the girder at that point combined with any load that is applied directly on the flange. The wheel loads where the ties rest on the flanges shall be assumed to be distributed over three ties." The chief function of these rivets is to transfer hori- zontal shear from the web plate to the flanges, as it is in this way that the flanges receive their stresses. If the rivets take the direct load of the locomotive driving wheels, as in the case of a deck girder like that being designed, they must resist the resultant stress due to both vertical and horizontal loads. Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 699 Strictly speaking the number of rivets required between two moment sections, as shown in Fig. i, should be just sufficient to give the increase of flange stress in passing from one section to the next one toward the centre of span. Art. 31 of the specifications, therefore, requires more rivets than are needed except at the end of the span. It is always necessary, however, to introduce more rivets near the centre of span than is required by actual computa- tions, for the general stiffness of the girder. Indeed even more rivets are generally provided than those prescribed in Art. 31 of the specifications. If d is the effective depth of the girder at the end of the span and if the end shear or reaction is R, and if tA is the flange stress at the distance d from the end of span, then will the following equation of moments be found, neglecting the negative moment of any load within the distance d from the end of the span: Rd = tAd, Hence R=tA, This shows that an amount of stress equal to the end shear must be given to each flange within the distance d from the end. The number of rivets required by this computation is a little more than necessary if any load rests upon the girder between the end and the section at the distance d from it. It will be clear that the general provision of Art. 31, quoted above, is based upon this end shear requirement, and it is analytically incorrect, but the excess of rivets which it calls for adds to the general stiffness and capacity of the girder. The weight of one driving wheel is 30,000 pounds, and it is to be distributed over three ties or 42 inches. As 700 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. the prescribed impact is loo per cent., the vertical load per horizontal inch of girder will be: Tr 2 X 3.0,000 1, V = ^-^ = 1430 lbs. 42 ^ It is obvious that the flange stress taken by one-eighth of the sectional area of the web is received directly by the latter and does not affect the rivets through the vertical legs of the flange angles. If Ai is the actual net flange section of cover-plates and angles and A 2 the total flange area, including one-eighth of the web section, and if 5 is the total shear at any moment section, while d is the effective depth of the girder, then the horizontal flange stress H to be taken up per linear inch by the rivets between two sections the distance d apart will be H =--r^. d A2 The values of Ai and A 2, beginning at the end section of the girder, are as follows : Section A A End 22.88 sq.ins. 27 .26 sq.ins sft. 22.88 '' 27.26 " 10 " 22.88 '' 27.26 '' 15 " 31.88 '' 36.26 '' 25 " 40 . 88 ' [ 45.26 '' Centre 40.88 '' 45.26 '' The unit (inch) increments H of horizontal flange stress found for the various sections by the preceding formula are: End H 5 ft. 10 319,500^22, 80.5 27.26 H = H = = 3330 lbs. = 2920 ^' =2510 " Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER, 701 15 ft. H = = 2170 lbs 25 '' H = = 1560 '' Centre H = = 954 " Each of the above results gives the horizontal stress H in pounds per linear inch, over each 80.5 inches of girder flange for each moment section and to be taken up by the rivets. The rivet pitch p at any section will then be determined by the following formula if K is the working value of one rivet in shear or bearing: PVV^-\-H^=K. Each rivet bears against the web plate as well as against each vertical leg of the flange angle, and as the web plate is much thinner than the sum of the thickness of the two angle legs, the bearing value against the web plate will be much less than that against the angle legs. Furthermore each rivet is subjected to double shear, the two shearing sections of the rivets coinciding with the two faces of the web plate. K, therefore, must be taken as the least of the double shearing value and the bearing value against the web plate. The rivets to be used are |-inch diameter before being driven and the bearing value of such a rivet against a ^^-inch plate at 24,000 pounds per square inch is 9190 pounds and 14,430 pounds in double shear at 12,000 pounds per square inch, both of these working stresses being in accord with the specifications. Applying the numerical results thus established to the formula for the pitch, there will result : 702 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. At end p=-^= ^ ^ r =^2.55 ins. Vi43o2+332o^ 5 ft. point p = 9i9 ^_^ ^^ 83 '' V 1430^ + 2920^ 10 " p= =3.18 '' 15 " P- =3-53 " C i 25 P= =4-34 Centre ^= =6.26 •' If desired a curve can be drawn at the various points with the corresponding pitch as a vertical ordinate at each point. Such a curve will give the rivet pitch at g^ny point in the span, but such detail is not usually required. The above values of the pitch may be used, with judgment, without further computations for any part of the girder. Fig. I shows the pitch used at the different girder points; it is frequently adjusted to the position of the intermediate stiff eners. Pitch of Rivets in Cover-plates. The number 0/ rivets required in a cover-plate is at once determined from its net section. In the present case the net section of each cover-plate is 9 square inches, which, at 16,000 pounds, gives 144,000 pounds as the stress value of the plate. The rivets in the cover-plates are subjected to single shear and the single-shear value of one J-inch rivet is 7220 pounds. Hence the number of rivets required to develop the full value of one cover-plate is -^^ = 20 7220 rivets. Between the end of the cover-plate, therefore, and the point at which the next cover-plate outside of it begins, there must be at least 20 rivets. As a matter of fact considerably more than that number will be found, Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 703 as the pitch must not exceed 6 inches in any case and it should not be more than 3 inches for a distance of 12 to 18 inches from the end of the plate. It will be seen upon examining the drawing that these conditions are fulfilled. Top Flange. As this flange is in compression, gross areas may be used. If the provisions of Art. 30 and other Articles of the specifications be scrutinized, it will be found that they are fulfilled by the compression flange made up as shown in the figures, and they need no further detailed attention. End Stiffeners. The end stiffeners must be heavy members of their class and rigidly riveted to the girder, as they take the severe impact or pounding at the points of support due to rapidly moving heavy locomotives and trains. Art. 79 of the specifications provides that " There shall be web stiffeners generally in pairs, over bearings, at points of concentrated loading, and at other points where the thickness of the web is less than one-sixtieth of the unsupported distance between flange angles. . . . The stiffeners at the ends and at points of concentrated loads shall be proportioned by the formula of paragraph 16, the effective length being assumed as one-half the depth of girders. ..." This provision makes it necessary to treat the end stiffeners as a column, the working stress to be: ^ = 16,000 — 70—. The column load in this case is the maximum end shear including impact allowance as given by Table II, i.e., 319,000 pounds. 704 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. If two pairs of sXslxH-inch angles be assumed for trial with the 3|-inch legs against the web plate, remem- bering that they will be separated by the thickness of the plate, the radius of gyration of their combined section about an axis lying in the centre of a horizontal web section and parallel to the web will be 3.13 inches. The length o ^ of the column is — ^=40.25 inches =/. Hence the pre- scribed formula will give a working stress of 15,100 pounds per square inch. On this basis . . J siQ,ooo Area required = '^—^ = 2 1 sq.ms. 15,000 The actual sectional area of four of the assumed angles will be 23.24 square inches, which is sufficiently close to the area required to be accepted as satisfactory. The entire load is carried to the end stiffeners by the I -inch rivets which bind them to the web plate. The rivets are in double shear and bear on the web plate. It has already been seen that the bearing value on the wxb plate, 9190 pounds per rivet, is much less than the double shear value. Hence the number of rivets required is ^—^ =35 9190 rivets. This computed number of rivets distributed throughout the length of the 3|-inch angle legs would make the pitch too great. The pitch should not exceed about 4 inches, which would make the number of rivets about 40. It is essential, as already indicated, that the end stiff eners be made exceptionally stiff and rigid. End stiff eners are not bent, but are riveted onto filling plates having the same thickness as the flange angle legs. These filling plates enhance the stiffness and resisting capacity of the end stiff eners as they, in fact, form a part of the latter. Art. no.] THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 705 Intermediate Stiff eners. By referring to Art. 79 of the specifications there will be found an empirical formula giving the maximum dis- tance between intermediate stiffeners, providing, however, that that distance in no case shall exceed the clear depth of the web. Intermediate stiffeners are sometimes regarded as being equivalent to the vertical compression members of a Pratt truss, but as a matter of fact there is no rational system of basing their design on computations. They are almost invariably made of angles, but sectional areas are determined by experience. Inasmuch as the total transverse shear at the centre of span is small, they are sometimes omitted there. As a rule they are never placed farther apart than the depth of web plate. As this girder is to carry a heavy railroad load pre- sumably at high speed, 5X3^Xf-inch steel angles will be used with the 3 J inch leg placed against the web plate. As the transverse shear increases toward the end of the span, the distance apart of these intermediate stiffeners will correspondingly be decreased. In the central part of the span this distance is seen to be 5 feet if inches, but near the ends it is reduced to 3 feet 5 J inches. The pitch of the rivets in these intermediate stiffeners may vary from 3 inches to 5 or 6 inches, the greater pitch being near the mid depth of the web. Splices in Flanges. It will be found that cover-plates and flange angles may be purchased of full lengths required on this plate girder. When, in general, the girders are so long as to require splicing of the parts of flanges, those joints for the tension flange must be so designed as to leave the net section as large as practicable, as the entire stress must be 7o6 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. carried by the net section. It is good practice and cus- tomary not to have two joints in adjacent parts concur, i.e., there should be breaking of joints so as to have a joint in one part only of the flange at the same section. In this manner the net section at each joint may attain its maximum value. In the splicing of angles both legs should be spliced. In compression, riveted joints can scarcely be expected to transfer stresses by abutting sur- faces in those joints. They should be spliced about as effectively as tension joints, although the question of net section does not arise, the gross section being available. Splices in Web Plates. As one-eighth of the gross web-plate section is considered as resisting bending as a part of the flange area, the rivets at a web-plate splice must be suflicient to resist the cor- responding bending moment. This web-plate moment is, therefore, 16,000^, 7 >.yO 9 r • 11 • — - — X-tX8o.5^ = 5,670,000 m.-lbs. 8 , 10 There must be two splice- plates, one on each side of the web, each of which need not be as thick as the main plate, but in this case f-incli splice-plates have been used so that the intermediate stiff ener need not be bent. For this size of girder there should be three rows of rivets on each side of the joints. If it be assumed that the pitch be 4 inches in each row, there will be nine rivets in each of the three rows between the mid depth of the web and the back of the flange angles. If the loads carried by these rivets in resisting bending vary directly as the distance from the neutral axis at mid depth, their resultant will act at 1X40 = 26.7 inches from that line. The bearing Art. iio.l THE DESIGN OF A PLATE GIRDER. 707 value of a |-inch rivet against the i^-inch web is 9190 pounds. Hence the resisting moment of the 54 rivets on one side of the joint is: M = ^^^-^X2 X26. 7 =6,600,000 in.-lbs. As this is greater than 5,670,000 in. -lbs., the proposed arrangement of the joint is satisfactory. The two splice- plates will, therefore, each be 19 X f inches by 5 feet 8| inches, as shown in Fig. i. In general every joint splicing should be tested for the transverse shear which it must carry. In this instance it is clear that the splice-plates will carry more shear than the web. General Considerations. The girder proper with its flanges, web, and stiff eners has been designed in this article without indicating the manner of connecting such lateral or cross bracing as would be required in the complete design of a railroad plate-girder span. The design of such bracing would be supplementary to the actual design of the girder as made, and it is the purpose here to illustrate only those principles belonging to the design of the girder proper. The design of the bracing and the details of its connection with the girder belong rather to bridge construction than to the subject treated here. Fig. 2 has been introduced, however, as an illustration to indicate the general features of the complete structure. Large plate girders are not always built complete in the shop, although girders nearly 100 feet in length are frequently and perhaps usually so completed at the present time. When it is necessary to build them in portions 7o8 PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. and rivet the portions together in the field, the general principles governing the construction of the necessary field-joints are precisely the same as those illustrated in this article. They are simply adjusted or adapted to the exigencies of each particular case. The bill of material and estimated weight of a single girder as designed is as follows : Pounds. Two 80" Xi^" web plates, 21' \i\" long 5,236 One 80" Xi^" web plate, 26' |" long ; . . 3,094 Four 6"X6"Xf" angles, 70' long 8,036 One 14" X I" cover-plate, 70' long 2,499 One 14" Xf" cover-plate, 55' 5I" long 1,981 Two 14" Xi" cover-plates, 47' 6^" long 1,696 Two 14" X I" cover- plates, 33' 3" long 1,190 Eight ^"XzV'XW angles, 6' 7" long 1,037 Twenty-eight 5" X3I" X I" angles, 6' 7" long 1,917 Four 10" Xf" filler-plates, 5' 8|" long 581 , Four 19" Xf" splice-plates, 5' 8|" long 1,106 Twenty-four 3^"Xf " filler-plates, 5' 8|" long 1,222 Two 14" XI" sole-plates, i' 6" long 107 Rivets 800 Total for one girder 30,502 The weight of girder per linear foot therefore is: ^-^ — =436 lbs. 70 If the plate girder were of the through type, there would be no change whatever in the procedures of design which have been followed, but in order to give a better appearance to the ends they would be formed as shown in Fig. 5. The latter figure shows the same end stiffness, depth of girder and the same flange angles as Fig. i. Art. III. — ^Length of Cover-plates. There are various methods of determining the lengths of cover-plates of plate girders involving simple compu- Art. III.] LENGTH OF COVFM-P LATHS. 709 tations only, which are well illustrated by the following procedures : The first of these procedures is based on the assump- tion that the depth of the girder is uniform and that the bending moment throughout the length of girder varies as the ordinate of a parabola as in the case of uniform loading. The following notation is required: / = effective length of span either in feet or inches ; L= length of cover-plate required in the same unit as /; A = total net flange area; a = net cover-plate area required. Since the flange and cover-plate areas vary directly as the flange stresses, and as the latter vary as the ordi- nates of a parabola when the depth of girder is constant, the following equation will result: P~A' or , a (i) ='^g A Eq. (i) will give the length of the cover-plate whose area of section is a. Any convenient unit may be taken for a and A , but the square inch is ordinarily employed. If there are several cover-plates, a is to be taken suc- cessively the area of the first, second, third, etc., cover- plates in summation, i.e., it will first be taken as the net sectional area of the top cover, then as the net sectional area of the top cover added to that of the cover-plate below it, and so on. The second method is the following, and is applicable 7IO PLATE GIRDERS. [Ch. XV. to the case of a girder with varying depth, the notation being as follows : Let Z£;= uniform load per linear foot, or "equivalent uniform load" per linear foot; d and d' represent the effective depths of girder in feet at the centre of span and at the end of the cover-plate respectively; A — a = a'= area of flange section at the end of cover-plate ; r = permissible flange stress per square inch; the bending moment at the end of the cover-plate will then be M=w^-~[~] =AdT-w^=d'a'T. . . (2) 8 2 \2 / 8 ^ ^ By solving the second and third members of the pre- ceding equation there will result L = 2\/\ {Ad-a'd')T ^ ^^ [{Ad-a'd')T ^■83\^ " :^ . . (3) w ^ -^ w It must be remembered that the application of either of the two preceding methods will give the net length of the cover-plate. There must be added 12 to 18 ins. at each end with rivets closely pitched so that the cover- plate may certainly take its stress at the points where its effectiveness should begin. Art. 112. — Pitch of Rivets. A simple method of finding the pitch of rivets piercing the vertical legs of the flange angles and the web plate of a Art. 112.] PITCH OF RIVETS. 711 plate girder at any section of the beam may readily be found by using the general but elementary expression for the bend- ing moment, IPx=M. By differentiating this equation, IP.dx = Sdx=dM; .:> representing the total transverse shear. If dM is the change of bending mom.ent for the distance along the flange represented by the pitch of rivets, p, the change of flange stress for the same distance will be found by dividing dM by the effective depth of the girder, d. If the pitch of rivets, p, be placed in the preceding equation in place of dx, the corresponding change of flange stress will represent the amount of stress transferred to the flange by one rivet. Representing that variation of flange stress by V, the last of the preceding equations may be written Sp=dv; :. P=^' : In this equation v represents either the bearing capacity of one rivet against the web plate or against the two flange angles, or the double shearing value of the same rivet, i.e., the least of those three values. Ordinarily the bearing of the rivet against the web plate will be less than either of the two other quantities; hence that bearing value would then be substituted for v. In general the least of the three pre- ceding values for one rivet is to be substituted for ^' in an actual computation. The total transverse shear 5 is always known at any section or may readily be determined. The preceding formula for the pitch, therefore, is a very simple one and is much employed. .__„__. CHAPTER XVI. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. Art. 113. — Curved Beams in Flexure. If beams are sharply curved, i.e., if the radius of curva- ture of the neutral surface is comparatively small, the for- mulae expressing the common theory of flexure for such beams will contain the radius of curvature and corre- sponding variations from the formulae for straight beams. Let Fig. I represent part of a curved beam subjected to flexure, AC representing the radius of curvature at the Fig. point A before flexure while CA' represents the radius of curvature of the same surface after flexure takes place. OAO^ represents the neutral surface. A^f is the continu- ation of C'A\ Similarly A'b is the continuation of CA'. Finally, A'b' is drawn parallel to CA. def represents the normal section of the beam and AA^ is supposed to be a differential of the length of the neutral surface. 712 Art. 113.] CURBED BE^MS IN FLEXURE. 713 The ordinate dzy is measured from A as an origin toward B or D, respectively, z is the varying width of the normal section of the beam and hence it is measured normal to y and x, the latter being measured along 0A0\ A differential of the section of the beam is zdy. As the normal sections of the beam are assumed to remain plane after flexure, let the rate of strain, i.e., the strain per unit of length of fibre at any point distant y from the neutral surface be uy, u being the apparent rate of strain at unit distance from the neutral surface. By referring to Fig. i there may at once be written: ■ b'b=da^; hh" = (dx-^do^uyi. By similarity of triangles, do(^+dx{i^-'^' '"^ dx (i) This equation gives at once : r r-r' 7"' , , U=-, r-, = (2) {r-^yy r+y ^ ^ If the beam were originally straight, in which case the radius of curvature r = 00 , eq. (2) would take the form u=-, the usual expression for the rate of strain at unit distance from the neutral surface of a straight beam. If again the radius of curvature is sufficiently large, so that r may be written for r-\-y without sensible error: "=/-7- ^3) 714 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. This expression for m may be used for curved beams if the curvature is not too sharp. If the radius r is infinitely great, u = -, which is the value for a straight beam. Eq. (2) shows that the rate of strain u at unit distance from the neutral surface and corresponding to the rate of strain at any distance y is variable, as y appears in the denominator in such a way as to make u smaller the greater the distance of the fibre from the neutral surface. This is in consequence of the curvature of the beam and results from the assumption that normal sections plane before flexure remain plane after flexure. With the increase of length of fibre due to curvature as its distance from the neutral axis increases, a less rate of strain is required to keep the section plane after flexure. This assumption is not strictly true, and it may be a matter of doubt whether it is necessary or advisable even in the interests of correct analysis. If k is the fibre stress of tension or compression at any distance y from the neutral axis, there may be at once written : k=Euy=E(^-,-ijy^^ (4) The stress on an element zdy of the section will then be : «,=£(^,^.)sg (s) Let k' and k'^ he the intensities of stress at the distances y' and -y" from the neutral surface. Then by eq. (4): k' ^ y' r-y" . k" r+y ~y"' Art. 113.] CURBED BEAMS IN FLEXURE. 715 From this equation: liy'=y", eq. (5a) becomes: k" = -k''-±^, (5fa) r —y Eq. (55) shows that the intensity of stress at a given distance from the neutral axis will be greater on the concave side of the curve than on the convex, and that this relation holds until the radius of curvature becomes infinitely great. In order to locate the neutral axis the integral of the two members of eq. (5) between the limits of y and —y must be placed equal to zero, giving eq. (6) : X>==^&-C ^^=0. ... (6) Again, the bending moment formed by the direct stresses of tension and compression in the section may be written in the usual manner as follows, M representing the moment : -&-)x: r-\-y ^=^ir,-)i f5f (7) Eq. (6) shows that the neutral axis will not pass through the centre of gravity of the section. As the intensity of stress on the convex side of the curve will be less than if the beam were straight, the neutral axis will be on that 7i6 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. side of the centre of gravity of the section toward the con- cave surface of the beam. Eq. (7) shows, again, that the integral is not the moment of inertia of the section about the neutral axis, but it will reduce to that if the radius of curvature r be supposed infinitely great. The integrations shown in the second members of eqs. (6) and (7) can at once be made when the form of cross- section is known. Inasmuch as this analysis for curved beams finds one of its important applications in connection with the design and carrying capacity of large hooks, a trape- zoidal cross-section shown in Fig. 2 will be assumed by way of illustration, and from that the rectangle section at once results. In that figure the larger end CD of the trap- ezoid will be considered to lie in the concave or inner surface of the hook and at right angles to the plane of the hook. As the trapezoid is symmetrical, a = \FH, and the angle of inclination of a sloping side as HD to the centre line will be taken as a. Then z will represent one-half of the width of the trapezoid at any point: Fig. 2. z=a + {yi —y) tan a. (8) If z be inserted in eqs. (6) and (7) there will be required the following integrations in which yi-\-yo=d: /- '' ydy _^ yo^+y rlog r+yi r-yo . (9) /: Art. 113.] CURBED BEAMS IN FLEXURE. 717 r'^^=d(yi^-r)+rUog'±y-\ . . do) J-y,r+y \ 2 / r-yo " t^ =rH-hrd{y, -yo) +id(d' -syiyo) -^,og(^;). . . („) If these values of z and the integrals given in eqs. (9), (10) and (11) be substituted in eq. (6), there will at once result : log'-±yi= l^ '^ I. . . . (12) r — yo r\ ir +yi) tan a -\-a] As known quantities let r-\-yi=R and r—yo=Ro, then eq. (12) may take the form: r log -^(R tan a -\-a) = rd tan a -\-d[ - tan a +a ) . Kq \2 / Hence : J(-tana+a) (r log — -d\ tan a+a log — After r is determined by eq. (13) there w^ll at once result : yi=R-r and yQ=d-yi. . . . (14) If the section is rectangular, Q:=tan a=o, hence, ^ = ^ and yi^R- — — . . . (14a) log^ logf- 7i8 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. If the section is triangular, a=o and the second member of eq. (13) will be correspondingly simplified as follows: r=-i -5 \ (15) (i?log|-.) As this expression is independent of o:, yi and yo remain unchanged whatever may be the value of that angle. Having thus found yi and >'o, the position of the neutral axis of the section is determined and the expression for the bending moment can now be written by the aid of eqs. (4) and (7), 'the latter being the general expression for the bending moment. By the aid of eq. (4) the in- tensity of stress in the extreme fibre at the distance yo from the neutral axis may be written as follows : ybo=-£(-,-i)-^ (16) \r Jr-yQ Hence, 4.-) = -^- • ; • • <■" By introducing the second member of eq. (17) in eq. (7) as w^ell as the value of z from eq. (8) and the integrals given in eqs. (10) and (11), the following value of the moment M will result : -M=^M!:^:^P'((a+3;,tan«)^^-tana^l , (i8) I \ \U, -r/1 tdii UI.J ; tail ex ; > yo J-yoi r+y r+y] 2ko{r-yo){.^.^^,.^_ .(d yo I (a + (r -^yi) tan a) (-{yi -yo) .dr+rnog'-±y^)y-^^{d^-iyryA . . (19) r-yo/ 3 J Art. 113.] CURl^ED BEAMS IN FLEXURE. 719 As is evident, the factor 2 appears in the second members of eqs. (18) and (19), for the reason that the section taken is symmetrical and the varying ordinate z is half the width of section at any point. If a were taken as the extreme width of section on the narrow side instead of half that width and if a were to be so taken that (yi—y) tan a added to a represents the full width of the section at the point located by y, the factor 2 would be omitted from the second member of the value for M. If the section is rectangular a = tan a=o and the expression for the moment M then becomes : _M ^ ^feo(r-yo) f p(^^ _^^) _^^^^, 1 r±n\] (^^^ yo i \2 r-yo/ J If the section were triangular a = o in the second member of eq. (19). These equations may be employed in the design of curved beams of any form of cross-section or degree of curvature when those based on the common theory of flexure for straight beams are not applicable. As a general statement it may be said that the formulas for straight beams may be used without essential error in all cases except those of such special character as hooks and other structural or machine members in which the curvature is sharp. The applica- tion of the preceding formula to the case of hooks will be illustrated in the next article. Art. 114. — Stresses in Hooks. The diagram of a hook shown in Fig. i illustrates the conditions of loading to which hooks in general are sub- jected. The material to the right of the point of applica- tion of the load is subjected to no stress whatever except in a secondary way near that point. On the left of the 720 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. load, however, the arc of the hook, supposed to be circular in this case, is subjected to direct stress, shear and bending, the bending moment increasing as that part of the hook parallel to the loading is approached, but it decreases in passing on to the shaft of the hook supposed to be in line with the load. The section of miaximum bending AB is subjected to the combined direct pull of the load and Art. 114. STRESSES IN HOOKS. 721 the bending moment equal to the load multiplied by the normal distance from its line of action to the centre of gravity of the section. This cross-section of greatest bending moment will first be treated as if subjected to., pure flexure. The necessary simple analysis required to determine the greatest intensity of stress in the section will then be made. In the section of greatest bending moment there is no shear. The cross-section of the main part of a hook maybe taken as .approximately trap- ezoidal, as shown in Figs, i and 2. In the present in- stance the greatest dimension of this cross-section lying in the central plane of the hook will be taken as 5 inches and the corners will be rounded approximately as shown. Obviously the integrations of eqs. (9), (10) and (11) of the preceding article do not rep- resent accurately the approx- imate trapezoid of Fig. 2 . This integration or its equivalent, however, may be accomplished with sufficient accuracy by a number of approximate processes, i.e., by transformed figures and by dividing the section into a sufficient number of small parts. A simpler method and one giving reasonably accurate results is to draw two lines F^C and FD in such a way as to make a true trapezoid whose resist- ing moment will be essentially the same as the approx- imate trapezoid. This will be accomplished if the two X 2V4- > Fig. 2. 722 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. lines indicated be drawn in such a way that each area between a broken line as F'C and the inclined full line of the actual section be three times the combined area between CB and the curved end of the section and between AF' and the other curved end of the section. This rela- tion results from the fact that the bending stress between the tw^o lines indicated varies in intensity from zero at the neutral axis to nearly the maximum in the extreme fibre of the section and has its centre at two-thirds of the distance from the neutral axis to the extreme fibre. The relation indicated, therefore, makes the bending moments of the two parts inside and outside of the actual section equal. This construction will give for one-half the modified figure: AF' =AF = .^^ inch=a; BC = 1.1 inches; a =S° 30'; tan a' = .148; i? = 5+2.2 =7.2 inches; R = 2.2 inches. d = s inches. Fig. I shows that R and Rq are the interior and exterior radii respectively of the arc of the hook where the section of greatest bending moment exists. By introducing these numerical quantities in eq. (13) of the preceding article there will at once result : r =3.87 inches. Hence, yi =R-r = s-33 inches; yo=d—yi=i.6j inches. By inserting the same numerical values together with yi and yo in eq. (19) of the preceding articles, the value of the bending moment becomes : M =4. 88^0 (i) Art. 114.] STRESSES IN HOOKS. 723 This moment obviously can be expressed in terms of the intensity of stress in the extreme fibres on the opposite side of the section, i.e., 3.33 inches from the neutral surface. By eq. (4) of the preceding article: ki =ko (r-yo)yi yoir+yiY After substituting' the values of the quantities already determined there will be found ^i=.6i/^o. Or there may be written from the same eq. ^0 = 1.64^1. The bending moment expressed in terms of the greatest intensity of stress in the extreme fibres is obviously the form desired for practical purposes. Let the hook shown in Fig. i be supposed to carry a load of 20,000 pounds. The centre of gravity G of the actual cross-section is 2.13 inches from the side CD of the cross-section. Fig. 2. Hence the load assumed will cause a bending moment about the line GH equal to 20,000 X(2. 13 -1-2.2 =4.33) =86,600 inch-pounds. It is to be observed that inasmuch as the 20,000 pounds is taken as uniformly distributed over the cross-section the lever arm of the load is the normal distance from its line of action to the centre of gravity of that section, although the resisting moment of internal stresses has the axis deter- mined by eq. (14) of the preceding article, the two axes being parallel to each other. The greatest intensity of tensile bending stress in the section therefore takes the following value: , 86,600 11 . , X ^0 = 5^- = 17^40 lbs. per sq.m. . . (2) 4.00 The uniformly distributed tensile stress equal to the load will act upon the entire actual area of section, which 724 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. is 7.9 square inches. Hence, that tensile intensity will be — '■ =2530 pounds per square inch. The resultant 7-9 greatest intensity of stress in the entire section will be: 17,740 + 2530 =20,270 lbs. per sq. in. . . (3) The resultant intensity on the opposite side of the sec- tion at A, Fig. 2, will be, since ki =.6iko\ — 17,740 X.61 +2530 = —8291 lbs. per sq.in. . (4) The minus sign is used because the bending stress is compression throughout that part of the section indicated It is commonly observed in actual experience that hooks or other similar bent members break at the inside of the section where the curvature is the sharpest. The eqs. (4) and {s^) of the preceding article indicate clearly the reason for such failures as the intensity of stress k in the extreme fibre is shown to vary inversely with the radius of curvature r-\-y. When, therefore, the curvature is sharp, i.e., the radius of curvature is small, the fibre stress k increases rapidly, especially on the inside of the curve where the radius of curvature is r—y. This example shows the general method of treating the stresses in hooks by the common theory of flexure based on the assumption that normal sections plane before flexure remain plane after bending. It is well known that this assumption is not strictly correct, and it is further known that the ordinary or com- mon theory of flexure is not accurately applicable to such short beams as are contemplated in the theory of hooks. Art. 114.] STRESSES IN HOOKS. 725 Comparison with the Theory of Flexure for Straight Beams. It is indicated above that the assumptions on which the preceding analyses are based are not strictly correct. If it be assumed that the intensity of stress varies directly as the distance from a neutral axis passing through the centre of gravity of the section, as for straight beams, and if k\ is the greatest intensity of stress in the extreme fibres {FF', Fig. 2) the bending moment will be: M=^-^ (5) yc In this equation I is the moment of inertia about an axis through the centre of gravity G, Fig. 2, while yc is the distance of that axis from the most remote fibre at A. The moment of inertia I of the actual section shown in Fig. 2 about a neutral axis through the centre of gravity G Sit the distance 2.87 inches from A is 14.9. Hence, the bending moment on the preceding assumption is: M=^k\=s.2k\ (6) r 2 As the fraction ^^=1.07 this assumption is seen 4.88 to give a result only 7 per cent, greater than that of the analysis for curved beams if the extreme fibre stress is the same in amount in both cases. It is true that the result has the apparent defect of placing the greatest intensity of stress on the wrong end of the section. Art. 115. — Eccentric Loading. The analysis of stresses produced in a column or other structural member by eccentric loading has already been 726 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. discussed in preceding articles, but it is desirable to con- sider some further and more general features of that analysis. A column or structural member is said to be eccentric- ally loaded when it carries a force or load acting parallel to its axis but not along that axis. The perpendicular Fig. I. distance between the axis of the piece and the line of action of the load is called the eccentricity of the latter. Let Fig. I represent the normal cross-section of such a member when the load P acts at any point Q in that cross- section. The load P will then act parallel to the axis of the piece, but at the distance CQ from it, C being supposed to be the centre of gravity of the section. The ellipse Art. 115.] ECCENTRIC LOADING. 727 drawn with C as its centre is the elHpse of inertia, the semi- axes ri and r2 being the principal radii of gyration of the normal section. Any semi-diameter as CQ' represents a radius of gyration r\ If the force or load P acts at any point whatever, as Q, and parallel to the axis of the piece, it will create a bending moment equal to PxQC. If x' and y^ are the coordinates of Q the components of that moment will be Px' and Py\ the former about the axis Y, the latter about the axis X. 1 1 and 1 2 being the principal moments of inertia, as already indicated, the intensities of bending stresses produced by these two component moments at any point, whose co- Px' PV ordinates are x and y, will be —j—x and ----y, respectively. i 1 J-2 Furthermore, the load P will produce a uniform normal stress over the entire cross-section of the member, if A p is the area of that cross-section, represented by — . The resultant intensity of stress k therefore at any point of the section will be : At the neutral axis the intensity of stress is equal to zero, hence, x'x y'y , s. — j+^=-i. ...... (2) Eq. (2) is the equation of a straight line, i.e., the neutral axis, along which the intensity of stress is zero, x and y being the variable coordinates. It is obvious from eq. (2) in connection with the general considerations respecting 728 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. the action of the load P that the position of the neutral axis will depend upon the magnitude of that load and the distance of its line of action from the axis of the member. If X and y are zero, there will be no bending, and the section of the member will be subjected to uniform compression only. If the point of application Q of P is on the curve its coor- dinates x' and y' must satisfy the equation of the ellipse: ^'2 r^f2 ^+2^ = 1 (3) The equation of a straight line tangent to the ellipse at a point whose coordinates are x' and y' is: "-^+2^ = 1 (4) When the point of application of P is on the ellipse, x' and y' have the same values in eqs. (2) and (4). Hence in that case -p- also has the same value in the two equations, ax showing that the neutral axis is parallel to the tangent to the ellipse at the point where P acts. If in eq. (4) —x' and —y' be substituted for -\-x and -\-y, that equation will become identical with eq. (2), i.e., for this case the neutral axis is tangent to the ellipse at a point diametrically opposite to the point of application of the load P ; in other words, the load is applied at one extremity of a diameter and the neutral axis is tangent to the curve at the other extremity of that diameter. In Fig. I if the load P is applied at Q' (on the curve) the neutral axis N'B' will be tangent to the ellipse at B' , the other extremity of the diameter Q'B'. If the point of application of the force P moves along Art. 115.] • ECCENTRIC LOADING. 729 the indefinite straight line BQ, the coordinates x' and y' x' will vary in the same proportion, making — a constant. (s) From eq. (2) : dy dx x'r2^ y' ri2 X Hence, as — is constant, all neutral axes will be parallel y while the point Q moves along a straight line. Again, the coordinates x and y of the points of inter- section of the line QB with the neutral axes must neces- sarily be opposite in sign from x' and y' , as the origin C lies between them. If therefore —x and —y be inserted in eq. (2) : ^^+^^1 (6) By similarity of triangles, a being a constant: XX II I / \ — : = -=a .. XX =ayx=ayy. ... (7) y y y yy n// Eq. (7) in connection with eq. (6) shows that each of the quantities x'x and y'y is constant, and that is equivalent to making the products of the segments of the line QB on either side of C constant: QCy.CB=Q'C^CB' ^Y"'=Q"Cy.CB". . . (8) As the point of application of P will always be given, the quantity to be found will be the distance from the centre C to the neutral axis, which may be called v. The semi- diameter y' =CQ' at once becomes known after the ellipse of inertia is constructed. In general, therefore: y'2 '=QC (5) 730 MISCELL/INEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. In some cases the reverse problem is given, i.e., v is known and the distance of the point of application of the load P is required. Hence, ■ QC=- do) V Rotation of the Neutral Axis about a Fixed Point in It. One feature of eq. (2) remains to be considered before the actual application of the preceding results can be made to form a complete graphical construction. If the co- ordinates X and y of the neutral axis be considered constant, while the coordinates x' and y' of the point of application of the load Pvary, eq. (2) shows that the path of the move- ment of the point of application of P will be a straight line, since the equation is of the first degree in respect to x' and y' . This is equivalent to a movement of rota- tion of the neutral axis about the fixed point whose coor- dinates are x and y, while x' and y' determine the path through which the line of action of P moves. The same result can be shown by treating eq. (i) in precisely the same manner for a fixed or constant value of k, that constant being zero for the neutral axis. The preceding procedures may be applied to a number of problems, one or two of which will be illustrated. It is sometimes desired to determine that part of the cross-sec- tion of a member of a structure, or sometimes of the struc- ture itself, within which a resultant load may be applied anywhere without any change in the kind of stress induced, usually compression. Application of Preceding Procedures to Z-har and Rectangular Sections. Let it be required to ascertain within what part of a Z-bar section an axial compressive force may be applied without any part of the section being subjected to tensile Art. 115.] ECCENTRIC LOADING. 731 Stress. The Z-bar section is shown in Fig. 2, the depth of bar being 6 inches and the thickness of metal f inch. As this section is unsymmetrical the axes for the principal moments of inertia passing through the centre of gravity C of the section will be incHned to the central plane of the^ web. The ellipse of inertia MVNU has MN for its major axis and UV for its minor axis, the former representing a moment of inertia of 52 and the latter a minimum moment of inertia of 5.7, the corresponding radii of gyration being ri=2.55 inches and r2=.8i inch. If no part of the cross-section of the bar is to 'be sub- jected to tension, the outer Hmits or Hnes of that section such as TS, SO, OL, etc., may be neutral axes for different positions of the load^, but in no case must the neutral axis He in any part of the metal section, even to cut across a corner of it. This means that TS, SO, OL, LH, HE, and ET will be successively considered neutral axes.' Let ET be the first neutral axis considered or, rather, ET and OL may be considered concurrently, as they are parallel to each other and at the same distance from the centre of the ellipse. First draw tangents to the ellipse parallel to ET and OL as shown in the figure. The points of tangency will fix the diameter DA, which is then extended to R and W in the assumed neutral axes. As shown in the preceding demonstration, the square of half the diameter represented by AD will be equal to CR multipHed by CA the distance from the centre of the ellipse to the point of apphcation A of the force P. The distance CR is the V of eq. (10), while CA is the distance QC desired, / is half the diameter determined by the two points of tangency Dividing the square of half the diameter by CR locates the point A, one of the points desired. In precisely the same manner D is located by dividing the square of half the same diameter by CW = CR. 732 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. Tangents to the ellipse parallel to TS and HL are then drawn as shown, one at A^, as indicated, at the lower extremity of the ellipse and the other at the upper extremity, thus locating the diameter NCF. Squaring half the diam- eter so determined and then dividing by the distance from the centre of the ellipse to TS or HL along the diameter NF, the points B and F are found. In a precisely similar way the vertical tangents indicated are drawn parallel to SO and EH, determining the corresponding diameter. By the use of that diameter in the manner already indicated, the points G and K are located. The points A and B are points of application of the force P when ET and TS respectively are neutral axes. In the preceding sections of this article it has been shown that if a neutral axis such as ET be revolved about a point in it, as T, to the position TS, the corresponding path of the point of application of the load will be a straight line, and in this case AB will be that straight line, since the two points A and B correspond to the neutral axes ET and TS. By similarly connecting the other points, the closed figure ABKDFG is found. So long as the force P acts within this area no part of the section can be subjected to tension, but if the point of application is outside of this figure some part of the section will be in tension The closed figure thus established is called the '' core section." Although it possesses much analytic interest, the ordinary operations of the engineer are such as to make it of comparatively little value in actual structural opera- tions. If any line such as Z'L parallel to a tangent to the ellipse at g be drawn through a corner L of the Z-bar sec- tion, and if a line dgZ' be drawn through the same point of tangency and the centre C, cutting the side of the core at d, it is shown in the preceding section of this article Art. 115.] ECCENTRIC LOADING. 733 that the product of dC by CZ' is equal to the square of the semi-diameter Cg of the elHpse of inertia For any other position of a Hne Z'L the same general observation holds, the line always being parallel to a tangent to the ellipse Fig. 2.* at a point through which is drawn the line extending through the centre and cutting the side of the core. Probably the most usual section to which the core * A number of construction lines shown in this figure are drawn for use in the next article. 734 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. procedure may be applied is the simple rectangle. A masonry structure having such a horizontal section must be designed so that compression only may always be found in it. A simple diagram of pressures will show that the resultant force or load must act within the middle third of the section, but Fig. 3 shows the core procedure appHed to the same axis. AB \s the length of the section and BD is the width. AB is usually taken as one unit. The ellipse OLMN is drawn with its semi-major axis LC representing the greatest radius of gyration of the rec- tangle and the semi-minor axis OC is laid off equal to the least radius of gyration. Two lines drawn tangent to the ellipse at M and N parallel to BD and ED will determine the axes of the ellipse, in fact already known, then dividing the square of each semi- axis by the normal distance of C from BD and ED, respectively, the dis- tances CF and CK will be found, thus fixing the points F and K. The points H and G are found in precisely the same manner, using the sides AE and AB respectively. As already indicated, the distance of H from BD will be one-third oi AB, while K will be one-third oi BD from AB. Fig. 3. General Observations. The preceding results show that bending combined with uniform stress induced by a load normal to the section will prevent the neutral axis from passing through the centre of gravity of the cross-section. Furthermore, in this general case the neutral axis or neutral surface will not be at right angles to the plane containing the axis of the piece and the Art. ii6.] GENERAL FLEXURE TREATED BY CORE METHOD. 735 line of action of the force unless that plane contains one of the principal axes of inertia. Manifestly the neutral axis for any section will be on the opposite side of the centre of gravity of that section from the force P. Eq. (8) shows that if the force acts at C, making QC equal zero, CB will be infinitely great, which means that the stress will be uniformly distributed, i.e., there will be no bending. On the other hand, if the force P is at an indefinitely great distance from C, making QC infinity, then will CB be equal to zero, i.e., the neutral axis will pass through the centre of gravity. This is the ordinary case of flexure and it is equivalent to taking all load on the member at right angles to its axis. Art. 116. — General Flexure Treated by the Core Method. The procedures given in the preceding article may be used for the general problem of flexure for straight beams of any form of cross-section carrying any parallel loads at right angles to their axes, the loads supposed to be acting in a plane which contains the axis of the beam in each case. Under such conditions there will clearly be no direct uni- form compression on any normal section of a beam. This is equivalent to assuming that the flexure is produced by an indefinitely small force acting parallel to the axis (or at right angles to a normal section) of the beam and at an infinite distance from the latter. It is clear, since the product of the distance of the point of application of a force normal to the cross-section from the centre of gravity of the latter multiplied by the dis- tance of the neutral axis from the same point, but on the opposite side from the point of application of the loading, must be equal to the square of half the diameter of the ellipse of inertia, that if that square be divided by 736 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS, [Ch. XVI. infinity, the distance of the point of appHcation of the load from the centre, the quotient will be zero, i.e., the neutral axis must pass through the centre of gravity of the section. This condition is further equivalent to taking any finite loading at right angles to the axis of the beam, as in the ordinary cases of engineering practice. The stresses found in the normal section in such cases will be the direct tension and compression with intensity varying directly as the normal distance from the neutral axis with the accompany- ing shears, as in the common theory of flexure. The preceding investigations show, however, that with unsymmetrical sections the neutral axis, while passing through the centre of gravity of the section, is not at right angles to the plane of loading, unless that plane happens to contain one of the two principal axes of inertia of the section. Let the Z-bar section shown in Fig. 2 of the preceding article be considered and suppose that the loading acts in the vertical plane ZZ' , the latter line passing through the centre of gravity C of the cross-section. It may be con- sidered that the Z-bar is supported at each and on the lower surface HL of the lower flange. Inasmuch as the bending moment acts in the plane ZCZ' the neutral axis will be drawn through the centre C parallel to the tangents to the ellipse "where the line ZZ' cuts the latter, as shown at g and at the opposite end, not lettered, of the vertical diameter. The diameter A'B' is then the neutral axis desired. The line Ch drawn at right angles to ZZ' may be considered the axis of the external bending moment to which the beam is subjected. The angle between Ch and the neutral axis is a, as shown. If the coordinate x be taken as at right angles to the neutral axis A'B' , and if dA represent an element of the Art. 1 1 6.] GENERAL FLEXURE TREATED BY CORE METHOD. 737 normal section of the beam, then the distance of that element from the neutral axis measured parallel to ZZ' will be X sec a. If k is the maximum intensity of stress at any point of the section, that stress will occur at L or T, where the value of x=n is the greatest for the entire section. The distance of that point parallel to ZZ' will be n sec a. If M is the value of the external bending moment acting in the plane ZZ' , dM may be written : dM = xsec a-dA'Xsec a. . . . (i) n sec a . If / is the moment of inertia of the section about the neutral axis, M = CdM =-I sec a- =-/A sec a. . . (2) J n n In Fig. 2 the line ZZ' cuts at d the side DF of the core. Let the distance dC be represented by /. Then, as shown in the preceding article, jCZ'^Cg. But the radius of gyration of the section about the axis A'B' has been shown in Art. 81 to be equal to the normal distance r' between the neutral axis and the parallel tangent to the ellipse drawn at g. Cg = / sec a. ■ It has already been seen that CZ' is equal to n sec a. r'^ sec a = nj. If this value of r''^ sec a be substituted in the third member of Eq. (2) there will result, M=kAj (3) 738 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. Eq. (3) is the expression for the external bending moment in terms of the greatest intensity of stress in the section, the area of that section, and the distance j from the centre of the section to the side of the core as constructed by the methods explained in the preceding section. Although the construction has been made with the Z section the method of procedure is precisely the same for any form of section whatever. Component Moments. By again referring to Fig. (2) of the preceding article it will be seen that M cos a is that component of the external moment whose axis is parallel to the neutral axis, while the component M sin a has an axis be at right angles to the neutral axis, but lying in the plane of the normal section of the beam. The former component produces the bending stresses about the neutral axis, the maximum intensity of which is k and a deflection normal to it; the latter compo- nent moment tends to produce an oblique movement of the beam in consequence of its unsymmetrical section.. This tendency in oblique flexure, especially marked with unsymmetrical sections, is always toward that position in which the least radius of gyration of the section (repre- sented by the least semi-axis of the ellipse of inertia) is found in the plane of bending, i.e., that plane in which the bending moment acts. , In Fig. 2 of the preceding article ZZ' is the plane in which the vertical loading acts, and it is clear that the plane in which the resultant bending compression on one side of the neutral axis A'B^ and the resultant bending tension on the other side act is not the plane in which ZZ' lies, but inclined somewhat to the right of CZ. Inasmuch as these two planes are neither the same nor parallel, there must be combined with the couple producing pure flexure such a Art. 117.J PLANES OF RESISTANCE IN OBLIQUE FLEXURE. 739 couple as to make the resultant external moment equal and opposite to the internal resisting moment, and the component of M represented by be is such a couple, Ce representing the couple producing pure flexure about These analytic considerations show how essential it is to give careful consideration to the principles governing oblique or general flexure for loads not in a plane of symmetry of a beam and for unsymmetrical sections. The method of finding the location of the plane of resistance of the bending stress existing in any normal section of the beam will be given in the next article. Art. 117. — Planes of Resistance in Oblique or General Flexure. The preceding treatment of general flexure has shown that the plane of action of the external bending moment will not in general coincide with the plane in which the internal resisting couple acts. The plane of the external bending moment is supposed to pass through the axis of the beam assumed to be straight. If this external bend- ing couple is to produce pure flexure it must be in equilib- rium with the internal moment produced by the stresses in any normal section, and that requires that the two planes of action shall either coincide or be parallel. Let it be supposed that the 6X3jXf-inch steel angle section shown in Fig. i represent any unsymmetrical sec- tion, and let it also be supposed that G^F is the neutral axis of the section, G being the centre of gravity; then let GX and GY be the axes of rectangular coordinates negative when measured to the left and downwards. The stresses above GY will be supposed compressive, and those below, tensile. The intensities will be assimied to vary directly as the normal distances from GY as in the ordinary theory 740 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. of flexure. The centre of all the compressive stresses will be taken at C and at T for the tensile stresses. The plane whose trace is CT will be called the plane of resistance, while AB^ will be taken as the plane of action of the external bending moment. In other words, if the angle were to carry vertical loading as a beam AB should be vertical with the lines of cross-section correspondingly inclined. If xi and a'l are the coordinates of the centre C of the compressive stresses in the section and if a is the intensity of stress at a unit's distance from the neutral axis GY, eqs. (i) and (2) will immediately result: r Cyaxdxdy j Cxydxdy j^ C ( axdxdy C fxdxdy Qi ( j xaxdxdy \ \ x~dxdy j'^ \\ axdxdy ( j xdxdy Qi The quantities /i and I'l sue the so-called ''product of inertia " and the moment of inertia of that part of the cross-section lying above GY, while Qi is obviously the statical moment of the same part of the cross-section in reference to the same axis. If the subscript 2 be used for the corresponding quanti- ties relating to that part of the section below GY, eqs. (3) and (4) will at once result, the negative sign being used in the second member because the coordinates are negative : ^2=-^, (3) ^2=-^^ (4) Art. 117.] PLANES OF RESISTANCE IN OBLIQUE FLEXURE. 741 Q, I and / represent quantities belonging to the whole cross-section, then, since G is the centre of gravity of that section, Qi=Q2=Q\ I\+I'2=I\ Jl+j2=J. Fig. I. It is desired to find the straight line joining C and T, and in order to do that the general equation of a straight line may be written as follows: x+by—c. (s) 742 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. If yi and Xi taken from eqs. (i) and (2) be first written in eq. (5) and then >'2 and X2 from eqs. (3) and (4), and if the second of the equations so formed be subtracted from the first, there will result: b = — j. Then eq. (5) will take the form x=jy-\-c (6) In Fig. I suppose a line parallel to CT drawn from G to B. If the ordinate xi be produced upward, the line BC = Gc' will be determined. If in eq. {6) y =0, x=c = Gc' = BC. The triangles with the bases yi and >'2 will then be similar and that similarity will be expressed by the following equation, remembering that x and y are negative: X\—C —X2 + C f . — ^= — - (7) Substituting the values of x\, yi, X2 and y2 established above there will result the following value of c: JQ • Placing this value of c in eq. (6), "^'f JQ ' .^^^ This is the equation of the line CT, Fig. i, drawn through the centres of the tensile and compressive resisting stresses acting in the normal section, i.e., it is the trace of the plane in which the resisting couple acts. The tangent of the Art. 117.] PLANES OF RESISTANCE IN OBLIQUE FLEXURE. 743 dx I angle which it makes with the neutral axis GY is -r- =-. dy J If GY is one of the principal axes of inertia of the section dx J =0 and -:- becomes infiniteiy great, i.e., in that case the line GT is at right angles to 6^y and it will presently be shown that it will pass through G, the centre of gravity of the section. If :v=o in eq. (8), ^0= -^ ^ =Gc (9) The distance Gc' is on the negative side of G. Again if x=o, there will result : y= _jQ =G^ (10) These coordinates Ge and Gc' shown in Fig. i give two points e and c' in the desired line CT, which must agree obviously with the points C and T as found by computa- tions. If Ge should be zero, eq. (11) will result: ja'2-I\j2=o (11) Inasmuch as the moments of inertia I\ and I' 2 will always have real values for an actual section, in general if eq. (11) holds true, then must Ji=j2=o. That condi- tion will of course exist for the principal axes and for the case where at least one of the coordinate axes is an axis of symmetry of the section. Although the figure used for the establishment of the preceding formulae is the normal section of a steel angle, those formulae are completely general and are applicable 744 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVL to any form of cross-section whatever, as indicated by eqs. (i) and (2) and all the equations following. It is thus seen that if the plane of action AB oi any external loading producing flexure of a beam with unsym- metrical cross-section is parallel to the plane whose trace is CT, there will be pure bending only as the external bend- ing moment has the same axis as the couple formed by the internal stresses. The planes of the external bending moment and that of the internal resisting stresses may in some cases coincide. If the steel angle shown in Fig. i is to act as a beam under vertical loading in pure flexure, the end supports should be so formed as to make the lines AB and CT verti- cal. In general, whatever may be the cross-section of a beam, the latter should be so held at its points of support that the loading will produce pure flexure. If the section of the beam has an axis of symmetry, the plane of loading may be taken through the axes of symmetry of the cross- section. Example. The application of the preceding formulae may be illustrated by using the 6 X si-inch, 22.4-lb. steel angle shown in Fig. i. The thickness of each leg is .75 inch. By using eqs. (i) and (2) there will at once result: 7'i=9.4i; r2 = i3.94; Ji=5-47\ 72=3-04; 7=8.51; = 5-484 Inserting these values in eqs. (i), (2), (3) and (4) there will result: yi=i in.; ^^1=1.72 ins.; j2 = -.555 in.; :;t:2 = —2.54 ins. ; :ro =— 1.02 ins. ; 3/0 = .372 in. These coordinates are laid off in Fig. i, as shown, so as to locate the four points C, e, c' and T. In making these Art. ii8.] DEFLECTION IN OBLIQUE FLEXURE. 745 computations it should be remembered that I'l and I' 2 are moments of inertia of areas, one of whose sides coin- cides with the axis of y and that the same observation is also true of the quantities, /i and J2, as well as Q. Art. 118. — ^Deflection in Oblique Flexure. The general case of deflection of a beam with unsym- metrical cross-section, or of a beam with symmetrical cross-section but loaded obliquely, may readily be found by the aid of the ordinary formulas for flexure used in connection with the preceding investigations. The requisite treatment may be well illustrated by considering the case of a 6 X3i Xf-inch steel angle, the section of which is shown in Fig. I to be same as that used in the preceding article. Such an angle may be considered to be used as a beam in roof work or for some other similar purpose with the 6 -inch leg placed in a vertical position. It will be assumed that the span length is 15 feet = 180 inches and that the angle is to carry as a beam a uniform load of 200 pounds per linear foot. The data given in an ordinary handbook on steel sections will show the position of the centre cf gravity G of the section and enable the ellipse of inertia to be constructed as in Fig. i. The maximum radius of gyration represented by the greater semi-axis of the ellipse is 1.97 inches, while the least radius of gyration at right angles to the preceding and represented by the smaller axis is .75 inch. The load acts in a vertical plane passing through the axis G. The various dimensions of the cross-section required in the computations are" all shown in Fig. i. By drawing vertical tangents on opposite sides of the ellipse, the neutral axis A'B' drawn through the points of tangency and the centre G of the ellipse is determined. 746 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. This neutral axis of the section makes the angle, 46° 30', as carefully measured on the diagram, with the horizontal axis of Y. By drawing a tangent to the ellipse parallel to A'B^ the radius of gyration about the neutral axis is found to be i.i inches, i.e., the normal distance between, the neutral axis and the parallel tangent to the ellipse. The greatest deflection of the angle beam will be found at the centre of span at which the moment of the external forces is ^^ 200X225 ^^^ =67,500 in.-lbs. . . . (i) 8 The component moment, as shown in the preceding article, with axis parallel to the neutral surface, is M cos a = .6884^=46,467 in.-lbs. ... (2) The component moment having an axis at righ^" angles to the neutral axis is, similarly, M sin q: = . 7 2 5471^ = 48,964 in. -lbs. ... (3) The actual flexure is produced by the first of these com- ponents M cos a. The deflection produced by it will obvi- ously be normal to the neutral axis, and it can be computed by the ordinary formula for the deflection at the centre of span of a beam simply supported at each end and loaded uniformly throughout its length, the uniform load to be taken in this case as 200 cos a = 138 pounds per Hnear foot. If g is the load per linear foot of span, the usual expres- sion for the centre deflection is w= ^ -r^-r - Substituting 3S4EI 138X15 for g/ in the form.ula, / = i8o inches, £=30,000,000, Art. ii8.j DEFLECTION IN OBLIQUE FLEXURE. 747 and 7 = 7.94 (moment of inertia of section about the neutral axis) there will result: w =0.66 inch. (4) As- cos a = .6884 and sin a = .7254, the vertical deflec- tion =.66 X. 6884 =.454 inch; and the horizontal deflec- tion = .66 X.7254 = .479 inch. Fig. It is thus seen that the horizontal deflection slightly exceeds the vertical, in consequence of the major axis of the ellipse of inertia being slightly inclined to a vertical 748 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS [Ch. XVI. line, thus causing the inchnation of the neutral axis of the section to be relatively large. Precisely the same general treatment would be followed for any form of cross-section or any other amount or dis- position of loading. In the preceding article where the same angle was so held as to make the plane of loading parallel to . that of the resisting couple, the horizontal diameter of the ellipse drawn through G is the neutral axis corresponding to the conjugate diameter DF, parallel to the trace of the plane of the resisting internal couple as determined in that article. The normal distance, 1.95 inches, between the hori- zontal diameter through G and the horizontal tangent at F is the radius of gyration corresponding to the horizontal neutral axis through G. As the area of cross-section of the steel angle is 6.56 square inches, the moment of inertia corresponding to the horizontal neutral axis through G is J =6.56 X 1.95" =24.93, "the moment of inertia of the cross-section about the neutral axis A'B\ Fig. i, is 7 = 6.56X1.1^ = 7.94. The distance from the horizontal neutral axis through G to the extreme fibre is 3.82 inches, while the corresponding distance of the extreme fibre from A^B'' is 2.3 inches. Hence, the resisting moment for the horizontal neutral axis through G is 3.82 . For the neutral axis A'B^: 2.3 Hence —p = i.g. In other words, the same angle placed Art. 119.] ELASTIC ACTION UNDER DIRECT LOADING. 749 SO as to take the vertical loading in a plane parallel to the resisting internal couple will offer nearly twice as much bending resistance with the same extreme fibre stress as when placed with the longer leg vertical. Economic use of the metal as well as avoidance of unnecessary deflection, therefore, requires that the beam of unsymmetrical section shall be so held at its supports as to make the plane of loading parallel to the resisting plane and as nearly parallel to the greater axis of the ellipse of inertia of the cross- section as possible. Art. 119. — Elastic Action under Direct Loading of a Composite Piece of Material. Let it be supposed that a combined straight or cylin- drical piece of material with length L is subjected to the direct stress of either tension or compression. If the total area of cross-section is A, it may be assumed to be composed of the following parts : A I =area of cross-section with modulus of elasticity Ei; A 2 =area of cross-section with modulus of elasticity E2', A3 =area of cross-section with modulus of elasticity E3; etc., etc. Then will A=Ai-\-A2-\-A3-\-etc (i) Let the total load P act parallel to L and let / be the strain per unit of length of the piece, i.e., the unit strain, then will IL be the total lengthening or shortening of the piece. Under these conditions every part of the piece will be subjected to the same rate of longitudinal strain and the following equation may be at once written: 7SO MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. EilAi-\-E2lA2-\-E3lA3-]-etc.=P=ElA. . . (2) Hence, 1 = CO Also the first and third members of eq. (2) will give eq. (4) : ^ £iAi+£:2^2+£3^3+etc. , . E=- J . . . (4) Eq- (3) will give the lengthening or shortening of each unit of length of the piece under any assigned load P, the moduli of elasticity of the areas of the different parts of the section being known. The modulus of elasticity E given by eq. (4) may be considered a mean or average modulus or an equivalent value for the actual moduli, as the same longitudinal strain would be yielded by a piece of uniform material having that modulus of elasticity and the same area of cross- section as the composite piece. Art. 120. — ^Helical Spiral Springs. A spiral spring like that shown in Fig. i takes its load at the ends as indicated at A and B. In the general case there may be applied at each end a single load P and a couple, or either a force or a couple alone may act. The analysis will be so written as to include concurrent force and couple or either one separately. The following nota- tion will be employed: R = radius of spiral, Fig. i ; (j) = pitch angle of spiral, Fig. i ; z = axial elongation or compression of spring under load- ing; Art. 120.] HELICAL SPIRAL SPRINGS. 751 / = length of spiral ; r = radius of spiral wire ; P = axial load, Fig. i ; M = moment of applied twisting couple or torque, as- sumed to be a right-hand moment ; u — unit strain at unit distance from, the neutral axis in bending or flexure ; a = angle of torsion (unit strain at unit distance from axis of piece in torsion) ; T = total twist or rotation of spring measured on central cylinder of spiral ; T T =—= angle of twist of spring in radians. The force P will be considered positive when it stretches the spring as shown in Fig. i. If the force P compresses the spring it must have the negative sign in all the following analysis. The moment M will be considered a right-hand moment when it twists the spiral so as to bring the helical parts near together, i.e., tightens the spiral. It should be re- membered that all parts of the spiral are uniformly stressed or bent. The cross-section of the spiral rod will be con- sidered circular, although the general analysis is adapted to any form of cross-section. The load P produces a moment Mi about the centre of any section of the spiral rod given by Mi=PR (i) The axis of this moment is a horizontal line through the centre of the section and tangent to the central cylinder of the spiral shown by a broken-line circle in the lower part of Fig. i. li A, Fig. 2, be the centre of the section 752 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. considered, KL may be taken as the axis of the moment PR. If AK, therefore, represent by a convenient scale, the moment Mi=PR, AG and GK (drawn perpendicular to AG) will represent by the same scale the component mo- ments of Ml about those lines as axes passing through the centre of the section. As the axis ^G* is the axis of Fig. I. Fig. 2. the -spiral rod, it represents a torsion moment. Similarly GK represents a bending moment as it lies in the section and, in fact, is a neutral axis. Hence, if the subscripts t and h mean torsion and bending, And, AG=M\=Mi cos (f>. GK=M\=-M sin ct>. (2) (3) Art. I20.] HELICAL SPIRAL SPRINGS. 753 The moment — M sin has a negative sign because the triangle AKG, Fig. 2, shows that it will tend to untwist the spiral of Fig. i, which is opposite to a positive effect. The right-hand moment M will act at the centre of section of the spiral rod about an axis parallel to AC, Fig. I, i.e., about BD, Fig. 2, and AB may represent that moment. Its two components will be: BF = M'\=M sin cf>, .... (4) AF=M",=M cos d, (5) The resultant moments of torsion and bending at the section considered will therefore be: Mt=Mi cos +M sin (j>, ... (6) M^=M cos 0-Afi sin 0. ... (7) By the common theory of torsion (correct for a cir- cular section only) if G is the modulus of shearing elasticity, the angle of torsion, or unit strain a, is moment Mi cos (/)+-M'sin 4) ,„s «= -j-= ■ y. . ... (8) Evidently, Q=G — (for circle); and Q=G— (for 2 6 square) . If the exact theory of torsion is used for other sections of the spiral rod than circular, the corresponding value of a must be introduced, but no other change is needed. In the same manner, if E is the modulus of elasticity for direct stress, I the moment of inertia of the section 754 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. Hadl cos about its neutral axis, and if Q' =EI =E^^ (for circular 4 section) or Q' =E — (for square section), the unit strain, 12 Uy for bending is, moment M cos 0— Mi sin , . «=^^= Q, .. . . (9) The quantities a and u are unit motions giving to the spiral spring corresponding motions of rotation and axial lengthenings or shortenings. The torsion moment Mt will cause one end of an indefi- nitely short length dl of the Radi sin4> spiral rod to rotate through the angle adl, inducing a movement of that end, rela- tive to the axis of the spiral, perpendicular to the axis of the rod, equal to Radl, as shown by Fig. 3. The hori- zontal component of this -Budi cos movement tangent to the- spiral cylinder is, Radl sin 4>, or for each unit of length of the rod, Ra sin 0. As the state of stress is uniform throughout the spiral rod, the total circumferential twist of the spiral spring due to torsion is Fig. 3. •Jtotdi sin ' -Rudl Fig. 4- r=Rla sin =Rt And the angle of twist is Ml cos (/)+Msin Q sm (/>. (10) r=^=/ Q sm<#.. (loa) Art. 120.] HELICAL SPIRAL SPRINGS. 755 The axial component of the same movement, as shown by Fig. 3 is, Radl cos . Hence the total axial movement due to torsion is , „jMi cos . 2 = -Rl ^, sm 4>. . . (13) 756 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. The angle of twist of the spring under loading will be the sum of the second members of eqs. (loa) and (12a): 71/r 7 • , , /i I \ , Ti/Tz/sin^ , cos^ (t>\ f N T=Mi/sm0cos0(^^-^j+M/(^-^+--Q7^j. (14) The circumferential motion of the spring will be T-Rr (15) The axial extension or compression of the spring will be found by the aid of eqs. (11) and (13) : +Msin0cosc/)(^-^M. (16) Eqs. (6) and (7) will enable any spiral spring to be designed to perform a given duty such as to carry a pre- scribed load or serve the purposes of a dynamometer, while eqs. (14) and (16) will give the distortions of the spring, either angular or axial. If 5 is the greatest intensity of torsive shear in a normal section of the spiral rod at the distance r from the centre, while /p is the polar moment of inertia of the section, . M,='-U. ...... (17) r irr For a circular section, 1^ = '^^. 2 54 For a square section, Ip =—(£» = side of square). 6 Eq. (17) gives: s=^. ■ (x8) Art. I20.] HELICAL SPIRAL SPRINGS. 757 When 5 is given, r=\ ^ (circular section). , . . (i8a) \ tS In both eqs. (6) and (7), Mi and M are known quanti- ties, as they are the given loads. Again if k is the intensity of stress in the most remote fibre at the distance di from the neutral axis, and if I is the moment of inertia of the section about the neutral axis, ^=—J- (^9) When k is given, c^i =f =x/^-* (circular section). . . (loa) The two intensities 5 and k exist at the same point, and they are to be used to determine the greatest intensities of stress in the cross-section of the spiral rod precisely as was done in Art. 10. By eq. (2) of that article, the greatest and least inten- sities of stress (principal stresses of opposite kinds) will be : k I k^ max. intensity =-+a| 52 H — (tension) 2^4 min. intensity = — \/^^H — (compression). 2 ' 4 At the opposite end of that diameter of section of the rod normal to the neutral axis where k is compression, the above " max. intensity " will be compression also, and the " min. intensity " will be tension. 758 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. The planes on which these principal stresses act are given by eq. (3) of Art. (10) : , 25 tan 2a = — —. k The greatest shear at the same point is given by eq. (6) of Art. (9) ; i.e., its intensity is half the difference of the principal intensities, or, max. — min. P,= — - — . There are a number of special cases which may easily be developed from the preceding general analysis. Small Pitch Angle. ' If the pitch angle is so small that sin <}> may be con- sidered zero without essential error, sin 0=0 and cos = i. Eqs. (6) and (7) then give: Mt=Mi=PR\ ..... (20) M6=M . (21) From eqs. (14) and (16): PRH ( X Art. 120.] HELICAL SPIRAL SPRINGS. 759 Rotation of Spring Prevented. In this case twisting of the spring is prevented, or r =0. Eq. (14) then gives: T\/r M sin (jy cos (Q' -Q) - .. ^=-^^Q'sin^0+Qcos^0- • • • ^^4) Substituting this value of M in eq. (16) : ^_7^P2/f cQS^ ^ I si^^ ^ (sin cos cf>Y{Q' -QY \ /a '"1 Q ^ Q' (0^sin^0+Qcos^c/>)QQt ^ ^^ The torsion moment Mt, eq. (6), and bending moment Mb, eq. (7), are to be computed by using the value of M given in eq. (24). Axial Extension or Compression Prevented. By making 2 =0 in eq. (16), ■ M.= -Mj^^^|fcg. . . . (.6) Qcos2 0+Qsm2(/) The angle of twist then becomes: sin2 , cos2 4> (sin 4> cos0)2(Q' -Q)2 " ^\ Q ^ Q' (Q^cos2c/>4-Qsin2 0)Q^Qr ^'^^ For circular or square sections Q'— Q = ( 6^)(— or—) and the square of the latter alternative factor is common to {Q' —QY and Q'Q in the second number of eq. (27), thus canceling and simplifying the numerical application of that equation. In computing Mt and Mb, eqs. (6) and (7), the value of Ml given by eq. (26) is to be used. 76o MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. This form of helical spring is employed in the transmis- sion dynamometer. Work Performed in Distorting the Spring. The work performed in producing the angular and axial distortions r and z by the moment M and force P is easily found by the aid of eqs. (14) and (16) or corresponding equations for special cases. The couple whose moment is M performs work in twisting the spring through the arc T (measured at unit distance from the axis of the helix) expressed by , w,=Mi. ...... (28) The force P performs work in extending or compressing the spring the distance z given by the equation W^=^ . (29) 2 The total work done in the general case will then be : W = WtVW^=^{Mr+Pz). . . . (30) For special cases, as already indicated, the corre- sponding value of T and z must be used in eq. (30). In wTiting the preceding equations it has been assumed that both M and P are gradually applied. If they were suddenly applied, the distortions would be 2t and 2Z and oscillations having those amplitudes would be set up. The periods of the amplitudes would depend upon the' masses moved. • Art. 121.] PLANE SPIRAL SPRINGS. 761 Art. 121. — ^Plane Spiral Springs. A plane spiral spring may be represented by Fig. i. The outer end is fastened at B, but the inner end is secured to a rotating post or small shaft at C. The spring or coil is " wound up " to an increasing number of turns by apply- ing a couple to the shaft C, as in winding a clock. As a couple only is applied at C, every section of the spring is subjected to bending by the same couple, i.e., there is a uniform bending moment throughout the entire spring. This uniform condition of stress makes the analysis of this spring exceedingly simple if the thickness of the metal is small. , As the spring is a spiral beam subjected to uni- form bending, the analysis, to be perfectly correct, should be based on that for curved beams. That procedure would introduce much complexit}^, and as the thickness of the strip of metal constituting the spring is small compared with its radius, no essential error is committed in neglecting the effects of curvature. The usual cross-section of this type of spring is a much elongated or narrow rectangle, the greater dimension of the rectangle being parallel to the axis of the couple or perpendicular to the plane of the spring. If u is the unit strain at unit distance from the neutral axis of a section of the spring, I the moment of inertia of the same section about the neutral axis, and E the modulus of elasticity, while M is the moment applied at C, Fig. i, W//////////////M M=EJw= constant. . . (i) Fig. If / is the total length of the spring and /S the total angular distortion for that length, then will udl be the 762 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. change of direction or angular distortion for each element dl. Hence, Mdl=EIudl=EIdl3. ...... (2) Integrating : Ml^EI^; and ^^g. . . . (3) With the thin metal used / is small and 13 may be a number of complete circles, perhaps sufficient to wrap the spring closely around the shaft C. If the moment M is applied gradually, the work done in producing the total angular distortion /3 is This is the same as the expression for the work performed in bending a beam by a moment uniform throughout its length. In fact the plane spiral is simply a special case of flexure, the bending moment being uniform. If the moment M should be applied suddenly, the total angular distortion would be 2/3, and oscillations having that amplitude might be set up. Art. 122. — ^Problems. Problem i . — A helical spring having a diameter of helix of .3 inches and composed of twelve complete turns of a f-inch round steel rod sustains an axial load of 45 pounds. Find the axial deflection of the spring and the greatest intensities of torsive shear and bending tension and com- pression in the rod. P = 45 lbs. ; ^ = I • 5 ins. ; = 15°; 1 = 117 ins. ; £^ = 30,000,000; (7 = 12,000,000; • r=i^in. Art. 122. PROBLEMS FOR ARTS. 120 AND 121. 763 Mi=PR=6S,s in.-lbs.; ,7rr Q=G — = 23,373; 2 M=o] Q =E — = 29,217. 4 Substituting these quantities in eq. (16): .=3Xii7(^^^+^^^^)68.s=..746m. \23, 373 29,217/ By eqs. (6) and (7) : Mt=Mx cos 0=66.2 in.-lbs.; and M6= -Ml sin 0= —17.74 in.-lbs. Trr TTf^ Since 1^ = '-^-^ and 7= — , eqs. (18) and (19) give: 2 4 5 =9460 lbs. per sq.in. torsive shear; k =3432 lbs. per sq.in. greatest bending stress. Problem 2. — Design a helical spring for a transmission dynamometer for 8 H.P., at 90 revolutions per minute. Axial distortion of the spring is prevented, or z=o. Let low working stresses and other data be taken as follows* Iz = 16,000 lbs. per sq.in. i? = 3 ins. ; = 11° G = 12,000,000; MX9oX27r=8X33.ooo Q=G— and 2 5 = 12,000 lbs. per sq.in. ; .*. sin (/) = .i9i and COS0 = .982; E =30,000,000. M=466.8 ft.-lbs. =5602 in.-lbs. Q'=£^. Eq. (26) then gives: Ml = — 212 in.-lbs. 764 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. By eqs. (6) and (7) : M/ = 862 in. -lbs. ; and Ms = 5541 in. -lbs. Solving eqs. (18) and (19) for the radius of the rod: By eq. (i8a), r = .s6 in.; and by eq. (19a), r = .'j6 in. Bending of the rod, therefore, requires the- greater radius, and r = .'/6 in. will be taken. Eq. (17) gives the greatest torsive shear in a section: 5 = 1250 lbs. per sq.in. The equations following eq. (19) now give: max. intensity = -f 16,097 lbs. per sq.in.; min. intensity = —97 lbs. per sq.in. The spring will be assumed to have twelve complete turns, so that its length will be: / = 27r3 X 12 Xsec = 230.5 ins. The twist r at unit distance from the axis of the helix now becomes : r = .i59in. At the distance of 10 inches from the axis the twist would be 1.59 inches, but the spring is too stiff to be very sensitive. A higher working stress k may properly be taken. If in the same problem there be taken 120 revolutions per minute and an alloy steel for which the working stresses /^ =40,000 pounds per square inch and 5=30,000 pounds per square inch may be prescribed, then by using the results already established : •M=-^X 5602 =4200 in. -lbs.; 120 Art. 122.] PROBLEMS FOR ARTS. 120 AND 121. 765 Mi = -JX2i2 = — 159 in.-lbs. ; Mr = f X862 =647 in.-lbs.; -^6 = 4X5541 =4156 in.-lbs. For shear: r =^/-X— X.36 =.67 X.36 =.24 in. \4 2.5 For bending: r =a/-X— X. 76 =.67 X. 76 =.51 in. y A 2.^ 4 2.5 159 (.67)^ 795. At the distance of 10 inches from the axis of the helix the twist would be ioX.795=7.95 inches. Problem 3. — What will be the angular distortion j8 of a plane spiral spring i inch by -^-^ inch in section and 20 inches long if the distorting moment is 10 inch-pounds. Eq. (3) of Art. 121 gives: 10X20 10 X20 X12 Xi2i;,ooo ^=- — =. ^ =10 30,000,000 Xi 30,000,000 (about 1 1 complete turns). The fibre stress is 10 X-- k = = 1 50,000 lbs. per sq.m. 12 X 125,000 Art. 123.— Flat Plates. The correct analysis of stresses in loaded fiat plates even of the simplest form of outline has not yet been made suf- ficiently workable for ordinary engineering purposes, either for plates simply resting on edge supports or with edges of plates rigidly fixed to their supports. It is necessary, 766 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. fCh. XVI. therefore, to combine simple, but approximate analysis based on reasonable assumptions, with experimental results so as to obtain workable formulae. The following pro- cedures, due chiefly to Bach and Grashof, are commonly employed in treating flat plates: Square Plates — Uniform Load. In Fig. I let A BCD represent a square plate simply resting on the edges of a square opening. Tests of such y plates by Bach have shown that when increasingly loaded they will ulti- mately fail along a diagonal, as AB. Let the plate be uniformly loaded with p pounds per square unit, then let moments be taken about the diag- onal AB. If & is the side of the Pjg. I. square, the load on the triangular half of the square is - — , and the distance of its centre 2 from AB is ^^ sin 45° =.23 6^. The upward supporting forces or reaction on the sides AD and DB will also be half the load on the plate, — , and its centre will be at the 2 distance ^=.3546 from AB. Hence the moment 2 about AB will be: M=^(.SS4b-.236b)=.oS9pb^. . . . (i) If h be the thickness of the plate, the moment of inertia I about its neutral axis will be: J b sec 45° h^ ^..^ , X /= !t^ =.iiSbh^ (2/ 12 Art. 123.I SQUARE PLATES. 767 The ordinary flexure formula then gives for the greatest intensity of bending stress k, assuming it to be uniform throughout the diagonal section, ^^~T^IW V ^^^ Or, if the thickness is desired, k^h^^. ....... (4) Eq. (4) gives the thickness of plate required to carry the unit load p when the working stress is fe. Square Plates — Single Centre Load. If a single load P rests at the centre of a square plate, using Fig. i and following the same method as in the preceding section, the moment about the diagonal AB will be: 7,, Ph sin 45"^ „, , . M=- ^ ^^ =.i77Pb. .... (5) The moment of inertia I is the same as befoie and it is given by eq. (2). Hence, assuming a uniform intensity k throughout the extreme fibres : ,, _ .i7yPbh _sP ,. ' ii~-4/? ^^^ Or, h = .S66yj^. (7) 768 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. Rectangular Plates — Uniform Load. Fig. 2 shows a rectangular plate with sides a and h. With a much oblong rectangle the indications of tests are not so well defined as to the section of failure, but tenta- tively the diagonal section AB may be taken as a close approximation for usual proportions. DF is a normal to AB drawn from D. The uniform load on the triangular half ABD of the plate is - — and its centre of action is at 2 n the normal distance - from AB. The centre of the sup- 3 porting forces or reaction along the edges AD and DB is - from AB. Hence the moment about AB is M pah In n 2 \2 3 pabn 12 (8) Fig. 2. Referring to Fig. (2) : n=b sin (f) and AB =b sec <]). . . (9) Therefore the moment of inertia of the diagonal section is J _b sec (t)h^ ^ . pab^ sin _ .b sec (ph^ 12 12 Art. 123.] Hence, CIRCULAR PLATES. 769 7 ah sin cos k=p -— -\ or P sin cos 0. (10) 2/r ' \2k As is obvious, P=pab is the total load on the plate. Rectangular Plate — Centre Load. If a single load P rests at the centre of the plate, the moment about the diagonal AB, Fig. 2, is produced by the reaction, only, of the supporting forces along the edges AB and BD, and its value is 2 2 Consequently, (11) k = 3P sin cos 4> or, h -4 iP sm cos 0. (12) Circular Plate — Uniform Load — Centre Load. The circular plate with radius r is shown in Fig. 3. The same general assumptions are made as in the preceding cases, i.e., uniform condition of bending stress throughout the section of failure and uniform support along the edge of the plate. It is clear that the latter assumption is strictly correct for the circular outline. Any diam- eter, as AB, may be taken for the section of failure. It will be convenient to sup- pose the uniform load to be ap- plied on a circle of radius ri, as shown in Fig. 3. Then the load on half of the plate is p and its centre is at 770 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. AT 1 the distance - — from AB. The edge-supporting force or reaction, equal to the half load on the plate, has its centre 2T at the distance of — from AB. The moment about the TT latter diameter is, therefore, 2 \ TT 37r/ \ 3 / If h is the thickness of the plate, as in the preceding cases, the moment of inertia 7 is r 2rh^ rh^ , . 1 = =— -; . . , , o , . (14) 12 o Hence, Or, M=prMr~ri)=k— (15) \ 3 / 3 k=pri^ U • •••... (16) h=ri VK-'t) <■'> If the load is uniform over the entire circular plate, r=ri, and M = i--; ^ = ^J; and, h = r^^. . . (18) If the load is concentrated at essentially a point, ri =0, but 2^^Il- must be displaced by — ; -^ ' i|; and, h=M. irh^ \ irk These formulae for circular plates are more nearly M=P-\ ^=^; and, h=J^. . . (19) TT irh^ \ irk Art. 123.] ELLIPTICAL PLATES. 771 correct in analysis and give results more nearly in agree- ment with tests than those derived for other cases. Elliptical Plates — Centre Load — Uniform Load. An elliptical plate is shown in Fig. 4. The approximate formulae for this case may be conveniently established by first considering two axial strips of the same (unit) width, the length of AB being 2a and of CD, 2b, a single load being placed at their intersection. The centre deflec- tions of the tw^o strips as parts of the plates must be the same. Let Pi be the centre load for the strip AB, and P2 the centre load for CD. The desired centre deflection for each strip acting as a beam is given by eq. (28), Art. 28. The equality of the two de- fl.ections gives the equation, 2a being one span and 2b the other : Pia^ P2b\ _ Pi^b^ P2~a^' Fig. 4. 6EI 6EI or (20) h^ As each strip is of unit width, I = — , h being the thick- 12 ness of plate. Hence the greatest fibre stresses are b . Mh „ a and, k2=zP'. h^' Eqs. (21) and (20) then give: ki _Pi a k'2~¥2~b 62 (21) (22) Eq. (22) shows that ^2 is the greatest fibre stress and, hence, that the major axis of the ellipse will be the line of failure, as would be anticipated without the analysis. 772 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. If the ellipse of Fig. 4 be elongated by lengthening the major axis 2a to infinity, the result will be a corre- spondingly long rectangular plate of 26 width or span. Hence, the greatest fibre stress for this case of uniform load will be for a unit cross strip of plate : , Mh p{2hY hi2 ^b^ This is the greatest intensity of stress for an ellipse whose major axis 2a is infinity. The other extreme is the circle for which the greatest intensity of stress is, eq. (18), ^=^g • • • (24) For ellipses in general, in the absence of a satisfactory analysis, it is tentatively proposed to wTite: -(3-!)f («) When b=a, eq. (25) gives the correct value for a circle, and when ^ = o the result is correct for the extreme ellipse. The thickness of plate for a given uniform load p is = ^V(3 -._')! (.6) a/ k Flat Plates Fixed at Edges. Grashof and others have partly by analysis and partly empirically deduced a number of formulae for plates fixed at their edges, i.e., encastre, instead of simply supported. The following have been used and may be considered fairly satisfactory, using the same notation as in the preceding parts of this article. I. Circular plate with radius r and uniform load p. The greatest intensity of stress is, if h is the thickness, Art. 123.] PLATES WITH FIXED EDGES, 773 ^=^Jp; and, ^='-Jj|- • • • (27) II. Stayed flat surfaces, stay bolts being the distance c apart in two directions at right angles to each other. Each stay carries the uniform load pc^. The greatest intensity of stress may be taken: k=p-^-, and, h=-J^. . . . (28) III. Rectangular plate a long, b wide, supporting uniform unit load p. The greatest intensity of stress may be taken : k=pTnT-r^^h:^ and, h=a^h^^-j-^y^^. (29) If the plate is square, a = b'. k=p^,- and, /.=-^^|. . . . (30) All these plates with edges either fixed or simply sup- ported are supposed to be truly fiat, as any arching or dishing changes materially the conditions of stress. Problem i. — What thickness of steel plate is required to carry a load of 200 pounds per square inch over a rect- angular opening 24 by 36 inches. Eq. (10) gives the expression for the thickness h of the plate when simpl}^ supported along its edges. The total load isP = 2ooX36x 24 = 168,800 pounds. tan (/) =11 = .667 .•. =33° 40' and sin cos (^ = .461. If the working stress ^ = 16,000 pounds per square inch; h=\— — '- X. 461 =1.56 inches. A plate iye inches \2 X 16,000 thick, therefore, meets the requirements. Problem 2. — Design a circular steel plate, simply sup- ported on its edge, for an opening 30 inches in diameter 774 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. to carry a load of loo pounds per square inch, if k =-15,000 pounds per square inch. r = i5 inches and P = iooXTrr^ = 100 X 706.9 = 70,690 pounds. Eq. (18) then gives: h = is\ = 1.22 inches. A >i 1500 plate I J inches thick will therefore be satisfactory. If the plate were rigidly fixed along its edge^ eq. (27) shows that the thickness would be: h = i. 22V^ = i inch thick. Art. 124. Resistance of Flues to Collapse. If a circular tube or flue be subjected to external normal pressure, such as that of steam or water, the material of which it is made will be subjected to compression around the tube, in a plane normal to its axis. If the following notation be adopted, / = length of tube; d = diameter of tube ; t = thickness of wall of the tube ; p = intensity of excess of external pressure over internal ; then will any longitudinal section It, of one side of the tube, pld be subjected to the pressure — . But. let a unit only of length of tube be considered. This portion of the tube is approximately in the condition of a column whose length and cross-section, respectively, are nd and t. The ultimate resistance of such a column is (Art. 35) As this ideal column is of rectangular section, 12 Art. 124.] RESISTANCE OF FLUES TC COLLAPSE. yji and But P=pd, hence i2d'' (i) is the greatest intensity of external pressure which the tube can carry. But the formulae of Art. 35 are not strictly applicable to this ideal column. The curvature on the one hand and the pressure on the other tend to keep it in position long after it would fail as a column without lateral support. Hence p will vary inversely as some power of d much less than the third. Again, it is clear that a very long tube will be much more apt to collapse at its middle portion than a short one, as the latter will derive more support from the end attachments; and this result has been established by many experiments. Hence p must be considered as some inverse function of the length /. Eq. (i), therefore, can only be taken as typical in form, and as showing in a general way, only, how the variable elements enter the value of p. If x, y, and z, therefore, are variable exponents to be determined by experiment, there may be written f='M^ (^) in which c is an empirical coefficient. Sir Wm. Fairbairn (" Useful Information for Engineers, Second Series") made many experiments on wrought-iron tubes with lap- and butt-joints single riveted. He inferred 776 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. from his tests that y=z = i. Two different experiments would then give pld = ct-, (3) p'Ud'=ct'' (4) Hence log {pld) =log c-\-x\ogt, \og{p'l'd')=\ogc-^x\ogt'\ in which "log" means "logarithm." Subtracting one of these last equations from the other, the value of x becomes , pld log' _ log ipld) - log {p'Vd') --S \p'Vd', ^ \ogt-\ogf ~ /t^ ' ' ' ^^^ log[j^ As p, I, d, t, p',V,d\ and f are known numerical quantities in every pair of tests, x can at once be computed by eq. (5) ; c then immediately results from either eq. (3) or eq. (4). By the application of these equations to his experimental data, Fairbairn found for wrought-iron tubes: ^ = 9,675,600-^, (6) in which p is in pounds per square inch, while t, I, and d are in inches. Eq. (6) is only to be applied to lengths between 18 and 120 inches. He also found that the following formula gave results agreeing more nearly with those of experiment, though it is less simple: /^■'9 d ;^ = 9, 675, 600-^-0. oo2y (7) Art. 124.] RESISTANCE OF FLUES TO COLLAPSE. 777 Fairbairn found that by encircling the tubes with stiff rings he increased their resistance to collapse. In cases where stick rings exist, it is only necessary to take for I tlie distance between two adjacent ones. In .1875 Prof. Unwin, who was Fairbairn' s assistant in his experimental work, estabHshed formulae with other exponents and coefficients (" Proc. Inst, of Civ. Engrs.," Vol. XL\^I). He considered x, y, and z variable, and found for lubes with a longitudinal lap-joint: t-' /? = 7,363,000^^^^^6 (8) From one tvibe with a longitudinal butt-joint, he deduced: /2.21 ^ = 9>6i4,ooo ^o.9^x.x6 .(9) For five tubes with longitudinal and circumferential joints^ he found: :^ = 15, 547, 000^57^7776 (10) By using these same experiments of Fairbairn, other writers have deduced other formula, which, however, are of the same general form as those given above. It is proba- ble that the following, which was deduced by J. W. Nystrom, will give more satisfactory results than any other: ^.692,800^ (") At the same time, it has the great merit of more simple application. From one experiment on an elliptical tube, by Fairbairn, it would appear that the formulas just given can be approxi- 778 MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI . mately applied to such tubes by substituting for d twice the radius of curvature of the elliptical section at either extremity of the smaller axis. If the greater diameter or axis of the ellipse is a and the less 6, then, for d, there is to be substituted -r. Art. 125. — Approximate Treatment of Solid Metallic Rollers. An approximate expression for the resistance of a roller may easily be written. The approximation may be con- sidered a loose one, but it furnishes a basis for an accurate empirical formula. The following investigation contains the improvements by Prof. J. B. Johnson and Prof. H. T. Eddy on the method originally given by the author. The roller will be assumed to be composed of indefinitely thin vertical slices parallel to its axis. It will also be as- sumed that the layers or slices act independently of each other. Let E' be the coefficient of elasticity of the metal pver the roller. Let E be the coefficient of elasticity of the metal of the roller. Let R be the radius of the roller and R^ the thickness of the metal above it. , Let ze; = intensity of pressure at A ; . (( ({ (( a at /i; '* any other point Art. 125.] TREATMENT OF SOLID METALLIC ROLLERS. 779 Let P = total weight which the roller sustains per unit of length. X be measured horizontally from A as the origin ; d=AC; e = DC, From Fig. i : E E •. d = AC = AB + BC = w{^^-^ . . . (i) and A'C=A'B^^B'C=p(^^~}j, ... (2) Dividing eq. (2) by eq. (i), But P = jydxJI^£'A'C'dx. If the curve BAR be assumed to be a parabola, as may be done without essential error, there will result: C^' A'Cdx^ ^ed. Hence P=-we (3) 78o But MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. [Ch. XVI. e = V2Rd-d'^ = ViRd, nearly. By inserting the value of d from eq. (i) in the value of e, just determined, then placing the result in eq. (3), liR-^R^ p=-^V-^^ This is the desired equation of the line, in which r is measured normal to the axis of the cylinder or jet, while y is measured along that axis from the extremity of the jet. When the material is wholly expelled, y = —D, and r = o. Eq. (2) is applicable to the jet only. For the line hF or Gk, resort will be had to the equation d(d) _ 2R,' dr d ~R'-R^' r' Again integrating between the limits d and D, or r and R^, and reducing, d\ '^^' This value of r is the radius of that portion of the primi- tive central cylinder which remains over the orifice when D is reduced to d. Art. 136. — Positions in the Jet of Horizontal Sections of the Primitive Central Cylinder. That portion of the primitive central cylinder below ab, in Fig. I of Art. 13 3 will be changed to ahKH in Fig. 2 of the same article. 8i6 THE FLOIV OF SOLIDS. [Ch. XVIII. If, in the latter Fig., y is the distance from HK to ab, measured along the axis, then the volume of HKab will have the value . rv J If d' is the distance ciF^bG, in Fig. i, the equality of volumes will give r r'dy^R^'{D-d'). Eq. (i) of Art. 125 gives R^-Rx^ R2 If A/" is the number of horizontal layers required to com- pose the total thickness D, and n the number in the depth d', Hence ?U"&) J' y'-^A ^-{m) \d (2) Art. 137.] FINAL RADIUS OF HORIZONTAL SECTION. 817 Tresca computed values of y' for some of his experiments and compared the results with actual measurements. The agreement, though not exact, was very satisfactory. Within limits not extreme, the longer the jet the more satisfactory was the agreement. Art. 137,. — Final Radius of a Horizontal Section of the Primitive Central Cylinder. Let it be required to determine what radius the section situated at the distance d^ from the upper surface of the primitive central cylinder will possess in the jet. It will only be necessary to put for y in eq. (i) of Art. 135 the value of y' taken from eq. (i) of Art. 136. This operation gives Hence ^/\ .R^ r'=RAD) (i) If R^ is small, as compared with R, there will result ap- proximately /d'\y^ Art. 138. — Path of Any Molecule. The hypotheses on which the theory of flow is based enable the hypothetical path of any molecule to be easily established. 8i8 THE FLOIV OF SOLIDS. [Ch. XVIII. In consequence of the nature of the motion there will be three portions of the path, each of which will be represented by its characteristic equation, as follows: First, let the molecule lie outside of the primitive central cylinder. Let R' and H be the original co-ordinates of the mole- cule considered, measured normal to and along the axis of the cylinder, respectively, from the centre of the orifice HK (Fig. I, Art. 133) as an origin, while r and h are the variable co-ordinates. The first hypothesis, by which the density remains con- stant, then gives the following equation: 7t{R'-R'')H = -{R''-r'')K or hR'~hr' = {R'-R")H (i) This is the equation to the path of the molecule, in which r must always exceed R^. As this equation is of the third degree, the curve cannot be one of the conic sections. ■ Second, let the m^olecide move in the space originally occu- pied by the central cylinder. While h and r now vary, the volume 7:r^(D~h) must remain constant. When r^R^^ let h=h^. Hence r\D-h)=R^'(P-\), ..... (2) But if h=\ and r = R^ in eq. (i), Placing this value in eq. (2). r\D-h)=R,'[D-H^^-^^,y . . . (3) Art. 138.] PATH OF ANY MOLECULE, 81Q Third, let the molecule move in the jet. After the molecule passes the orifice, its path will evi- dently be a straight line parallel to the axis of the jet. Its distance r^ from that axis will be found by putting h=o m eq. (3). Hence APPENDIX 1. ELEMENTS OF THEORY OF ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. CHAPTER I. GENERAL EQUATIONS. Art. I. — Expressions for Tangential and Direct Stresses in Terms of the Rates of Strains at Any Point of a Homogeneous Body. Let any portion of material perfectly homogeneous be subjected to any state of stress whatever. At any point as Oy Fig. I, let there be assumed any three rectangular co- ordinate planes; then consider any small rectangular par- allelopiped whose faces are parallel to those planes. Finally let the stresses on the three faces nearest the origin be re- solved into components normal and parallel to their planes of action, whose directions are parallel to the co-ordinate axis. The intensities of these tangential and normal compo- nents will be represented in the usual manner, i.e., p.,3, signi- fies a tangential intensity on a plane normal to the axis of X (plane ZY), whose direction is parallel to the axis of y, while pxx signifies the intensity of a normal stress on 820 Art. I.] TANGENTIAL AND DIRECT STRESSES. 821 a plane normal to the axis of X (plane ZY) and in the direction of the axis of X. Two unlike subscripts, there- fore, indicate a tangential stress, while two of the same kind signify a normal stress. Fig. I. From eq. (3), Art. 2, and eq. (7), Art. 5, there is at once deduced 5 = 2(i+r) ^=Gcl>. (i) Now when the material is subjected to stress the lines bounding the faces of the parallelepiped will no longer be at right angles to each other. It has already been shown in Art. 2 that the angular changes of the lines from right angles are the characteristic shearing strains, which, multi- plied by Gs give the shearing intensities. Let ^^ be the change of angle of the boundary lines parallel to X and Y. Let (^2 ^^ "t^^ change of angle of the boundary lines parallel to Y and Z. Let ^3, be the change of angle of the boundary line parallel to Z and X. 822 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. Eq. (i) will then give ^he following three equations: E ^ ^^y^TiTTr)'!'^'^ (2) E ^ ^^^==7(rT7)^2^ ...... (3) E ^ ^-=7(7T7)^3 (4) In Fig. I let the rectangle agfh represent the right pro- jection of the indefinitely small parallelepiped dx dy dz. If u, V, and w are the unit strains parallel to the axes of x, y, and z of the original point h, the rates of variation of strain -;-, -r, -T-i etc., may be considered constant throughout dx dy dz this parallelopiped ; consequently the rectangular faces will change to oblique parallelograms. The oblique parallelo- gram dhck, whose diagonals may or may not coincide with those of agjh, therefore, may represent the strained con- dition of the latter figure. Then, by Art. 2, the difference petween dhc and the right angle at h will represent the strain ^^. But, from Fig. i, ^^ has the following value: cl)^=dhe-\-bhc. ....... (5) But the limiting values of the angles in the second mem- ber are coincident with their tangents ; hence de be .^. Art. I.] STRESSES IN TERMS OF STRy^INS. 823 But, again, de is the distortion parallel to OX found by moving parallel to OY only; hence it is a partial differential of w, or it has the value '^=^'^y (7) In precisely the same manner be is the partial differential of V in respect to x, or bc = ^-dx. dx By the aid of these considerations, eq. (6) takes the form du dv 'i'^-Ty+d^-- • • • ■ ■ (8) If A^y be changed to YZ, and then to ZX, there may be at once written by the aid of eq. (8) dv dw . '^-=dz"'dy\ (9) dw du . . ^'=5;f+5?- • (^°> Eqs. (2), (3), and (4) now take the following form: ^(dii dv\ . . ^/dv dw\ , ^ ^/dw du\ . . ^-=^5^+^; <'3) 824 ELASTICITY IN AMORRHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. The direct stresses are next to be given in terms of the displacements u, v, and w. Again, let the rectangular par- allelopiped dx dy dz be considered. Eq. (i), on page 3, shows that the strain per unit of length is found by dividing the intensity of stress by the coefficient of elasticity, if a sin- gle stress only exists. But in the present instance, any state of stress whatever is supposed. Consequently the strain caused by p^^, for example, acting alone must be combined with the lateral strains induced by pyy and p^.. Denoting the actual rates of strain along the axes of X, Y, and Z by /j, l^, and Z3, therefore, the following equations may be at once written by the aid of the principles given on pages 9 and 10 : ^'=k+(Pyy + Pj^'^ .... (14) ^=h+(p..+PJ^'^ .... (15) Eliminating between these three equations, ?»«=rf,[u^(^.+4+^3)]; . • (17) ^w„ yy i+^l 2 r^z I +rL ^ I — 2f^ ^ ^ J But if ti, V, and w are the actual strains at the point where these stresses exist, the rates of strain l„ l^, and l^ will evi- Art. I.] STRESSES IN TERMS OF STRAINS. 825 dently be equal to j^,j-^ and T7, respectively. The volume of the parallelopiped will be changed by those strains to dx{i+l^)dy(i+l^)dz{i+l^) =dx dy dz{i +1^ + 1^^-!^) if powers of l^, l^, and l^ above the first be omitted. The quantity (l^-hl^ + h) is, then, tJie rate of variation of volume, or tlie amount of variation of volume for a cubic unit. If there be put ^ dti dv dzv ^ ^ E = :t-, + -j-+-j-, and G = dx ' dy dz' 2(1 +r)' eqs. (17), (18), and (19) wih take the forms 2Gr . ^du . .. P^^-T^r^+'^dx' • • • • (2°) 2Gr „ ^dv 2Gr dw p ,= d^2G-T- (22) The form in which eqs. (14), (15), and (16) are written shows that if p^^, pyy, or p^^ is positive, the stress is tension, and compression if it is negative. Consequently a positive value for any of the intensities in eqs. (20), (21), or (22) will indicate a tensile stress, while a negative value will show the stress to be compressive. The eqs. (14) to (19), together with the elimination in- volved, also show that the coefficients of elasticitv for ten- sion and compression have been taken equal to each other, and that the ratio r is the same for tensile and compressive strains. 826 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. Further, in eqs. (ii), (12), and (13), it has been assumed that G is the same for all planes. Hence eqs. (11,) (12), (13), (20), (21), and (22) apply only to bodies perfectly homogeneous in all directions. It is to be observed that the co-ordinate axes have been taken perfectly arbitrarily. Art. 2. — General Equations of Internal Motion and Equilibrium. In establishing the general equations of motion and equi- librium, the principles of dynamics and statics are to be applied to the forces which act upon the parallelopiped repre- sented in Fig. I , the edges of which are dx, dy, and dz. The notation to be used for the intensities of the stresses acting on the different faces will be the same as that used in the preceding article. Let the stresses which act on the faces nearest the origin be considered negative, while those which act on the other three faces are taken as positive. The stresses which act in the direction of the axis of X are the following: On the face normal to X, nearest to 0, — p^^ dy dz ; " ''isiTthestiTomO,(p^^ + -~^dxjdydz; * dy dx nesLvest to 0, —p^^dydx; it (i farthest from 0, (p.^ + ~T^^^ ]dy dx ; dz dx nearest to 0, —p y^ dz dx ; ** ** farthest from 0, ipy^ + -j^dyjdzdx. Art. 2.] EQU/tTIONS IN RECTANGULAR CO-ORDINATES. 827 clz dx dy The differential coefficients of the intensities are the rates of variation of those intensities for each unit of the variable, which, multipHed by the differentials of the varia- bles, give the amounts of variation for the different dz edges of the par allelopiped . |d^ Let Xq be the external dx force acting in the direc- tion of X on a unit of vol- ume at the point consid- ered ; then X^dxciy dz will be the amount of external force acting on the paral- Fig. i. lelopiped. These constitute all the forces acting on the parallelo- piped in the direction of the axis of X, and their sum, if un- d'^u balanced, must be equal to m-rr^dx dy dz ; in which m is the mass or inertia of a unit of volume, and dt the differential of the time. Forming such an equation, therefore, and drop- ping the common factor dx dy dz, there will result dx ^ dy ^ dz ^^'>- "^dt^- (i) Changing x to y, y to z, and z to x, eq, (i) will become + -zJ7f+-^nr+yo = nt:Tr^' ... (2) dx ^ dy ^ ^- ^^' "^ d'. Again, in eq. (i), changing x to z, z to y, and y to x, dx ^ dy '^ ^7 _ ^ dz ^"^'-"^dt'' (3) 828 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. The line of action of the resultant of all the forces which act on the indefinitely small parallelopiped, at its limit, passes through its centre of gravity, consequently it is sub- jected to the action of no unbalanced moment. The parallelo- piped, therefore, can have no rotation about an axis passing through its centre of gravity, whether it be in motion or equilibrium. Hence, let an axis passing through its centre of gravity and parallel to the axis of X, be considered. The only stresses, which, from their direction can possibly have moments about that axis, are those with the subscripts (yz), {zy), {yy), or {zz). But those with the last two subscripts act directly through the centre of the parallelopiped, conse- dp quently their moments are zero. The stresses ~r^^dy .dx dz dpz and — T^ dz . dx dy are two of six forces whose resultant is directly opposed to the resultant of those three forces which represent the increase of the intensities of the normal, or direct, stresses on three of the faces of the parallelopiped; these, therefore, have no moments about the assumed axis. The only stresses remaining are those whose intensities are pzy and pys. The resultant moment, which must be equal to zero, then, has the following value: py^dx dz.dy + pzydx dy .dz = o\ ... (4) ' .*. Pyz=-Pzy (5) Hence the two intensities are equal to each other. The negative sign in eq. (5) simply indicates that their moments have opposite signs or directions; consequently, that the shears themselves, on adjacent faces, act toward or from the edge between those faces. In eqs. (i), (2), and (3), the tangential stresses, or shears, are all to be affected Art. 2.] EQUATIONS IN RECTANGULAR CO-ORDINATES. 829 by the same sign, since direct, or normal, stresses only can have different signs. The eq. (5) is perfectly general, hence there may be written : P.y=Py.^ and p,,=p,, (6) Adopting the notation of Lame, there may be written: P..=^\^ Pyy-^\^ P..-^\\ Pzy^^v Pxz = T^2^ Pxy-^z\ by which eqs. (i), (2), and (3) take the following forms: dN, dT, dT, ,, dhi dT, dN, , dT, ^^ dT, dT, dN, ^ 'd^ + ^^-df+^^-'^ The equations (11), (12), (13), (20), (21), and (22) of the preceding article are really kinematical in nature ; in order that the principles of dynamics may hold, they must satisfy eqs. (7), (8), and (9). As the latter stand, by themselves, they are applicable to rigid bodies as well as elastic ones; but when the values of A^ and T, in terms of the strains u, v, and w, have been inserted, they are restricted, in their use, to elastic bodies only. With those values so inserted, they form the equations on which are based the mathematical theory of sound and light vibrations, as well as those of elastic rods, membranes, etc. In general, they are the equa- tions of motion which the different parts of the body can ' dt' ' * . . (7) d'v ' df' ' . . (8) d'w . . (9) 830 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. have in reference to each other, in consequence of the elastic nature of the material of which the body is composed. If all parts of the body are in equilibrium under the action of the internal stresses, the rates of variation of the d'^u d^v . d^w -11 1 i strams -77^, -7tf» and -7-^, will each be equal to zero. Hence, eqs. (7), (8), and (9) will take the forms dN, dT, dT, ^ -57 + ^ + ^+^0 = 0;. . . . (10) dTo dN^ dT. ^_ , ^ itt+ify+-dr+^'-°'- • ' ' (") dT, dT, , dN, ^ , ^ -dt + ^ + lk+^'-° (-) These are the general equations of equilibrium. As they stand, they apply to a rigid body. For an elastic body, the values of N and T from the preceding article, in terms of the strains n, v, and w, must satisfy these equations. The eqs. (10), (11), and (12) express the three conditions of equilibrium that the sums of the forces acting on the small parallelopiped, taken in three rectangular co-ordinate directions, must each be equal to zero. The other three con- ditions, indicating that the three component moments about the same co-ordinate axes must each be equal to zero, are fulfilled by eqs. (5) and (6). The latter conditions really eliminate three of the nine unknown stresses. The remaining six consequently appear in both the equations of motion and equilibrium. The equations (7) to (12), inclusive, belong to the interior of the body. At the exterior surface, only a portion of the small parallelopiped will exist, and that portion will be a Art. 2.] EQUATIONS JN RECTANGULAR CO-ORDINATES. 831 tetrahedron, the base of which forms a part of the exterior surface of the body, and is acted upon by external forces. Let — be the area of the base of this tetrahedron, and let 2 . p, q, and r be the angles which a normal to it forms with the three axes of X, Y, Z, respectively. Then will da cos p =dy dz, da cos q=dz dx, and da cos r -=dx dy. Let P be the known intensity of the external force acting on da, and let tt, /, and p be the angles which its direction makes with the co-ordinate axes. Then there will result : Xq=P da. cos 7z, Yq=P da.cos Xy and Zq=P da. cos p. The origin is now supposed to be so taken that the apex of the tetrahedron is located between it and the base; hence that part of the parallelopiped in which acted the stresses involving the derivatives, or differential coefficients, is wanting ; consequently those stresses are also wanting. The sums of the forces, then, which act on the tetra- hedron, in the co-ordinate directions, are the following: — (A\ dy dz -{- T.^ dz dx + T^ dy dx) + Pda cos 7t=o\ — (Tg dz dy + N, dz dx 4- T^ dy dx) -h Pda cos ^ = o ; — ij^ dz dy + T^ dz dx + A^g dy dx) + Pda cos ^ = o. Substituting from above, A^j cos ^+ Tg cos g + 72 cos r = P cos tt; . . (13) T^cosp\N^cosq^T^co?>r=P cos i\ . . (14) r^ cos ^ + r^ cos (7 + A^g cos r = P cos ^. , . (15) These equations must always be satisfied at the exterior surface of the body; and since the external forces must always be known, in order that a problem may be determi- nate, they will serve to determine constants which arise 832 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. from the integration of the general equations of motion and equihbrium. Art. 3. — Equations of Motion and Equilibrium in Semi-polar Co-ordinates. For many purposes it is convenient to have the condi- tions of motion and equilibrium expressed in either semi- polar or polar co-ordinates ; the first form of such expression will be given in this article. The general analytical method of transformation of co- ordinates may be applied to the equations of the preceding article, but the direct treatment of an indefinitely small portion of the material, limited by co-ordinate surfaces, pos- sesses many advantages. In Fig. i are shown both the #^ K X ^ dx h >--^^ ^iv y e ; 1 \ 1 1 Y s N 1 > '^ nM- Fig. I. Y small portion of material and the co-ordinates, semi-polar as well as rectangular. The angle made by a plane normal to ZY, and containing OX, with the plane XY is repre- sented by (f) ; the distance of any point from OX, measured parallel to ZY, is called r; the third co-ordinate, normal to Art. 3.] EQUATIONS IN SEMI-POLAR CO-ORDINATES, 833 r and ^, is the co-ordinate x, as before. It is important to observe that the co-ordinates x, r, and (f>, at any point, are rectangular. The indefinitely small portion of material to be con- sidered will, as shown in Fig. i , be limited by the edges dx, dr^ and r d(j). The faces dx dr are inclined to each other at the angle d(f). The intensities of the normal stresses in the directions of X and r will be indicated by A^^ and R, respectively. The remainder of the notation will be of the same general char- acter as that in the preceding article; i.e., T^^ will represent a shear on the face dr .r dcj) in the direction of r, while N^ is a normal stress, in the direction of ^, on the face dx dr. The strains or displacements, in the directions of x, r, and (j), will be represented by ti, p, and w ; consequently the unbalanced forces in those directions, per imit of mass, will be d^u d^p ^ d^w , ^ "^w^ "^w^ ^^^ ""'w (') Those forces acting on the faces hf, fe, and he, will be considered negative ; those acting on the other faces, posi= tive. Forces Acting in the Direction of r. — R.rdcpdx, and -\-Rr dcj) dx+l-^ — dr = r-^dr + R drjdcf) dx. — T^rdr dx, and + T^rdrdx + —T^d(l).drdx. ^T^r-'f d(j) dr, and 7'X-' '\-Txr-fd(l)dr + -j^dx.rd(j)dr, 834 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. On the face dr dx, nearest to ZOX, there acts the normal stress ( N^^dr dx + -j-^d^ .drdx\=N'\ and A^' has a com- ponent acting parallel to the face fe and toward OX, equal to N' sin {d(f)) =N'^—^=N'd(j). But the second term of this product will hold ( dx, — Tx^.r dcf) dr, and + Tx^.rd(f)dr + —-T^dx.rd(f)dr, As in the case of A/",^, in connection with the forces along r, so the force T^j. dr dx has a component along ^ (normal to fe) equal to T^rdrdx. sin {d ^dP ' * ^"■' dT„dRdT,R--N^ d^p_ dT,^ dTr4, dN^^ Tr^ + Tr^ _,«^ dx '^ dr ^ rd4,- r + '""-^^df (4) These are the general equations of motion (vibration) in terms of semi-polar co-ordinates ; if the second members kre made equal to zero, they become equations of equilibrium. Eqs. (2), (3), and (4), are not dependent upon the nature of the body. Since x, r, and ^ are rectangular, it at once follows that ^ rx — -^ xrj J- r4> = ^ 4>r^ 2-M i x4>^ J- X' • * (5/ 836 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. In order that eqs. (2), (3), and (4) may be restricted to elastic bodies, it is necessary to express the six intensities of stresses involved, in terms of the rates of variation of the strains in the rectangular co-ordinate directions of x, r, and (j). Since these co-ordinates are rectangular, the eqs. (11), (12), (13), (20), (21), and (22) of Article i, may be made applicable to the present case by some very simple changes dependent upon the nature of semi-polar co-ordinates. For the present purpose the strains in the co-ordinate directions of x, y, and z will be represented by ti\ v', and w\ Since the axis of x remains the same in the two systems, evidently du^ du dx dx' From Fig. i it is clear that the axis of y corresponds exactly to the co-ordinate direction r; hence dv^ dp dy ~dr' From the same Fig. it is seen that the axis of z corre- sponds to ^, or r(j). But the total differential, dw\ must be considered as made up of two parts ; consequently the rate dvu^ of variation -j- will consist of two parts also. If there is no distortion in the direction of r, or if the distance of a mole- cule from the origin remains the same, one part will be div dw -TT—TT =~-n' If, however, a unit's length of material be re- d{r(l)) rdcf) moved from the distance r to r + ^ from the centre 0, Fig. i, while (j) remains constant, its length will be changed from I to (i-f-l, in which p may be implicitly positive or Art. 3. J EQUATIONS IN SEMI-POLAR CO-ORDINATES, negative. Consequently there will result 837 dw' dz dw p rdcbr' For the reason already given, there follow dii^ du dv^ dp i—=~r~ and T~^ = -r-. dy dr ax ax In Fig. 2 let dc be the side of a distorted small portion of the material, the original position ^ of which was d'e. Od is the distance r from the origin, ad=dr and ac = dw, while dd' = w. The angular change in position of dc is —, = -,- ; ^ ah w , but an amount equal to —3 = - is due to the movement of r, and is not a movement of dc relatively to the material immediately adjacent to d. Hence dp Fig. 2. dw' _dw w dv' d^^d^~^' ^^^^ di rd(j)' There only remain the following two, which may be at once written dw' dw dx dx . du' du and -r=—Ti, dz rd(j> The rate of variation of volume takes the following form in terms of the new co-ordinates: ~^^ dy dz ~dx^dr'^rd4~^r' dx (6) 838 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES, [Ch. I. Accenting. the intensities which belong to the rectan- gular system x, y, z, the eqs. (11), (12), (13), (20), (21), and (0.2^. of Art. I, take the following form: », -'V,-^,«+.^£: (rt ^ 1-2V dr* ^ ^ 2Gr - r^( dw p\ (9) ^-^.'= '■..=n'=<^+.T-r)^ <■■> n-'-.'=K£+^*)- • • • • • ■("> If these values are introduced in eqs. (2), (3), and (4), those equations will be restricted in application to bodies of homogeneous elasticity only. The notation t is used to indicate that the r involved is the ratio of lateral to direct strain, and that it has no rela- tion w^hatever to the co-ordinate r. The limiting equations of condition, (13), (14), and (15) of Art. 2, remain the same, except for the changes of nota- tion, shown in eqs. (7) to (12), for the intensities N and T. Art. 4,J EQUATIONS IN POLAR CO-ORDINATES. 839 Art. 4. — Equations of Motion and Equilibrium in Polar Co-ordinates. The relation, in space, existing between the polar and rectangular systems of co-ordinates is shown in Fig. i . The angle is measured in the plane ZY and from that oi XY; Fig. I. while (p is measured normal to ZY in a plane which contains OX. The analytical relation existing between the two sys- tems is, then, the following: .x = rsin0, y =r cos ([' cos, 6, and z=--r cos (p sin 6. The indefinitely small portion of material to be considered IS ah e d. It is limited by the co-ordinate planes located by (j) and 0, and concentric spherical surfaces with radii r and r -h dr. The directions r, (p, and (p, at any point, are rectangu- lar ; hence the sums of the forces acting on the small portion of the material, taken in these directions, must be found and put equal to m 'dp ' m dt' and m dt' 840 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. in which expressions, p, 7;, and co represent the strains in the direction of r, ^, and ^ respectively. Those forces which act on the faces ah, bd, and cd will be considered negative, and those which act on the other faces positive. The notation will remain the same as in the preceding articles, except that the three normal stresses will be indi- cated by Nr, N^, and N^. Forces Acting Along r. — Nr.r d(ff r cos 4f dcf), i-Nr.r^ cos (l^dil^dcj) /d(N r^) dN \ "^ ( dr '^ ^ ^'^^^+ 2rNrdrj cos (p dip d, -T^r-rd([fdr. + T^r .rdilfdri- jt^ d .r dip dr . sin aOc = — A^^ .r dip dr . cos ip d-r'^ COS ip dcp dip + ( '^^y^ ^r= r''^dr + 2r Tr^dr) cos

.r d(p dr. + N4>.rdiljdr + -j^d^rd([fdr. — T^^.r cos (p dcj) dr, -{jT^^cos (p.r dcf) dr \ d'' — ^^^^^^ 4^~^7d4'-T^^s\n (pdipjrd^dr. + T^rf' d 4^ dr. cos i[f dcj), on face c^. — T^^ r dip drl sin akc = — y— ) = — T^^ r dip dr. sin if' d(f)y on face ce. The lines ak and ck are drawn normal to Oc and Oa, Forces Acting Along (p. — Tr^.r cos ip d(j).r dip. ■\-Tr4,r^ cos ip dcp di[} 'dr+2rTr^drj cos (pdipdcp. — T^^.rd.i/' dr. + T^4. r dip dr + -j-^dcp .r dip dr. — N^.r cos ip dcj) dr. ■\-N^.r cos ip dcp dr ' ./d(N^cosiP),^ dN^ . \ + I ^. d ip = cos ip-T-fdip — N^sm ip dip j r dcp dr. \-T^.r cos ip dcp dr .dip, on isice be. f A^,^ .r dip dr. sin akc = + N^f, r dip dr. sin ip dcp, on face ce. -^^-^^''^' -dr 842 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. The volume of the indefinitely small portion of the material is (omitting second powers of indefinitely small quantities) r cos (Jf d(j).r d(fi.dr = AV , and its mass is m multiplied by this small volume. The latter may be made a common factor in each of the three sums to be taken. The external forces acting in the directions R, (j), and (p , will be represented by RJV, 0JV, and WJV, respectively. Taking each of the three sums, already mentioned, and dropping the common factor J F, there will result d^ dT^r ^ dT^,r ^ 2 Nr - N^ - A^^ - T^, tan dr r cos (p.d^ rdip r . d^p 'df + Ro=^^^M^> (i) dTrj dN^_ dT^^ dr r cos (p .dcp r dip ,^tan<^-r^^tan(/; ^^^ „.. dt 2Tr^ + T4>r-T^^tEin(l>-T^^tan(p d^-q + + <^o = ^«Tri^; (2; dT,, ^ dT,^ ^ dN^ dr r cos (l^d(\) r d(p 2 Tr^, + T,, - N^ tan y^ + A^^ tan ^^ _ d^ Since r, -/>, and ^ are rectangular at any point, Art. 4. J EQUATIONS IN POLAR CO-ORDINATES, 843 Hence r r ' 2 Tr^ + T^r - tan yA ( jV^ - A ^^) _ 3 r,^, - tan <^ (.V^ - .V^) r r ' These relations somewhat simplify the first members of eqs. (2) and (3). Eqs. (i), (2), and (3) are entirely independent of the nature of the material ; also, they apply to the case of equi- librium, if the second members are made equal to zero. The rectangular rates of strain, at any point, in terms of r, (j), and (/^ are next to be found. As in the preceding article, the rates of strain in the rectangular directions of r, (j), and (p will be indicated by dv^ dw' du' dv^ du' Sy' 57"' d^' d^' 57' ^^^• Remembering the reasoning in connection with the value dw^ of ~7— , in the preceding article, and attentively considering Fig. I, there may at once be written, dtt^ doj p dx' r d if) f In Fig. I, if ac = I and ah = uj, while ak =r cot. (p (ak is perpendicular to aO), the difference in length between ac and bh will be CO CO tan (p rcot d) r This expression is negative because a decrease in length takes place in consequence of a movement in the positive direction 1 of nl). 844 ELASTICITY IN AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. Again, a consideration of Fig. i, and the reasoning con- nected with the equation above, will give dw' drj _ p coicHKp rcoSil>d(j) r Without explanation there may at once be written: dv^ _dp d^'~dr' Fig. I of this, and Fig. 2 of the preceding article, give du' doj CO . dv' dp dy' dr r and rd(lf' Precisely dr r dx' These are to be vised in the expression for T^ the same figures and method give dv^ dp dw' df] T) dz' rcosil^dcj) " dy dr r' which are to be used in finding T,^;.. The expression for -r-j- will be composed of the sum of two parts. In Fig. 2, ah is the original position of r d(^>, and after the strain t] exists it takes the position ec. Consequently ac (equal and parallel to bd and perpen- dicular to ak) represents the strain tj, while ed represents drj. vSince, also, fc is perpendicular to ck, the strains of the kind Tj change the right angle fck to the angle fee; or the angle eck is equal to dw' d^=''^- df) . - ed ca dck = -1- + — r do ak Fig. r dil) r cot (^' In Fig. 2, the points a, 6, and k are identical with the points similarly lettered in Fig. i. The Art. 4. J EQUATIONS IN POLAR CO-ORDINATES. 845 expression for tt ^^^Y be at once written from Fig. i. There may, then, finally be written, dw^' df] 7) tan ^ . du' _ dco dx' ~~rd(j) r dz' r cos ^ d(j)' These equations will give the expression for T^^, The value of du^ dv' dw' ^^M^d^^'^W now takes the following form: ^ do df] dii) 2p 6; tan

l) rj ^" ^** = ^(nft. + r cos "i d^ + ^L^j . .... (8) ( dp df) r)\ ^ '*^'^\r cos ^d4>^d~r 7)' ^^°> 846 ELASTICITY OF AMORPHOUS SOLID BODIES. [Ch. I. If these values are inserted iii eqs. (i), (2), and (3), the resulting equations will be applicable to isotropic material only. As in the preceding article, V is used to express the ratio between direct and lateral strains, and has no relation what- ever to the co-ordinate r. It is interesting and important to observe that the equa- tions of motion and equilibrium for elastic bodies are only special cases of equations which are entirely independent of the nature of the material, of equations, in fact, which express the most general conditions of motion or equilibrium. CHAPTER IT. THICK, HOLLOW CYLINDERS AND SPHERES, AND TORSION. Art. 5.— Thick, Hollow Cylinders. In Fig. I is represented a section, taken normal to its axis, of a circular cylinder whose walls are of the appreciable thickness t. Let p and p^^ represent the interior and exterior intensities of pressures, respectively. The material will not be stressed with uniform intensity throughout the thickness /. Yet if that thickness, comparatively speaking, is small, the variation will also be small; or, in other words, the intensity of stress throughout the thickness t ma}^ be considered constant. This approximate case will first be considered. The interior intensity p will be considered greater than the exterior p^, consequently the tendency will be toward rupture along a diametral plane. If, at the same time, the ends of the cylinder are taken as closed, as will be done, a tendency to rupture through the section shown in the figure will exist. The force tending to produce rupture of the latter kind will be F^7:(pr^'-p,r,') (i) 847 848 THICK, HOLLOIV CYLINDERS. [Ch. II. If N^ represents the intensity of stress developed by this force, If the exterior pressure is zero, and if r' is nearly equal to r, + r' 2 TV— ^^ = ^ r\ ^"^^ 2(r,-/) 2t ^^^ In this same approximate case, the tendency to split the cylinder along a diametral plane, for unit of length, will iDe If A/"' is the intensity of stress developed by F\ ^ =T^. — t — • (4) xV is thus seen to be twice as great as N^ when p^ = o. If, therefore, the material has the same ultimate resistance in both directions the cylinder will fail longitudinally w^hen the interior intensity is only half great enough to produce trans- verse rupture, the thickness being assumed to he very small and the exterior pressure zero. N^ and N' are tensile stresses, because the interior pres- sure w^as assumed to be large compared with the exterior. If the opposite assumption were made, they would be found to be compression, while the general forms would remain ex- actly the same. AjL 5.] THICK, HOLLOIV CYLINDERS. 849 The preceding formulas are too loosely approximate for many cases. The exact treatment requires the use of the general equations of equilibrium, and the forms which they take m Art. 3 are particularly convenient. As in that article, the axis of x will be taken as the axis of the cylinder. Since all external pressure is uniform in intensity and normal in direction, no shearing stresses will exist in the material of the cylinder. This condition is expressed in the notation of Art. 3 by putting T^x = Tfx = Tf.^ = o. Again the cylinder will be considered closed at the ends, and the force F, eq. (i), will be assumed to develop a stress of uniform intensity throughout the transverse section shown in Fig. i. This condition, in fact, is involved in that of making all the tangential stresses equal to zero. Since this case is that of equilibrium, the equations (2), (3), and (4) of Art. 3 take the following form, after neglect- ing Xo, Rq, and 0q'. ■5^ = °^ (5) f +5^=0. (« -VT4>''° (7) These equations are next to be expressed in terms of the strains u, p, and w. In consequence of the manner of application of the exter- nal forces, all movements of indefinitely small portions of 850 THICK, HOLLOIV CYLINDERS. [Ch. II. the material will be along the radii and axis of the cylinder. Hence ti will be independent of r and (p; p ^ ^; The rate of change, therefore, of volume will be (eq. ^6) of Art. 3) du dp p dx dr r ^ '' * . • 1 1 ^ dd dhi 1 ' r As p IS mdependent of x, ~^^ =TT2 i hence if the value of N^ be taken from eq. (7) of Art. 3 and put in eq. (5) of this article, dK\ 2GX dhi ^dhi_ dx ~i-2Vdx'^^^"dx'~^' d'u .*. -J— 2 = and ti---^ax + a. But the transverse section in which the origin is located may be considered fixedt. Consequently if x-~=q, u=q and thus a' =0. The expression for u is then u =ax. The ratio u-'rx is the / of eq. (i), on page 3, while the p of the same equation is simply N^ of eq. (2), given above. Hence Art. 5. J THICK, HOLLO JV CYLINDERS. 851 Again, eq. (8) of Art. 3, in connection with eqs. (8) and (6) of this, gives 2GV /d'p dp _p\^^Jd^ j^Ap._(!\ =0 i.— 2X\dr'^ r dr r^J ' " \dr^ r dr r'y d(^' ^ d'p ^ dp _p _d"y V, _^ ' * dr^ r dr r^ dr"^ dr dp p ,\ ~ + -=c, or dr r r dp + p dr^dypr) ^-cr dr. cr"^ ^ cr b , ^ .*. pr=— + b, or P = j+-- . . . (10) This value of p in eqs. (8) and (9) of Art. 3 will give iV(a + c) c b) At the interior surface R must be equal to the internal pressure, and at tlie exterior surface to the external pressure. Or since negative signs indicate compression, If r =/.... , R=~p, li r=r^ . . . . . R=-p^. Either of these equations is the simple result of applying eqs. (13), (14), and (15) to the present case, for which cos /? = cos r = cos ;r = cos ,0 = o, cos q = cos X = I , and P -= — p or — p^. 852 THICK, HOLLOIV CYLINDERS. [Ch. II. Applying eq. (11) to the two surfaces, Subtracting (14) from (13), r'^ — r^ Inserting this value in eq. (13), ( I — 2t 2' The general expressions of R and A^,^^, freed from the arbitrary constants of integration, can now be easily written by inserting these last two values in eqs. (11) and (12). By making the insertions there will result The stress A^,^<^ is a tension directed around the cylinder, and has been called "hoop tension." Eq. (16) shows that the hoop tension will be greatest at the interior of the cylinder. An expression for the thickness, t, of the annulus in terms of the greatest hoop tension (which will be called h) can easily be obtained from eq. (16). Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM, 853 If r =r' in that equation, h = •• / \2p,-p + hJ ' .■..-=.H(;?r^)'-!----" Eq. (17) will enable the thickness to be so determined that the hoop tension shall not exceed any assigned limit h. If p^ is so small in comparison with p that it may be neg- lected, t v/ill become H(?7^)'-l '■« If p^ is greater than p, N' becomes compression, but the equations are in no manner changed. The values of the constants b and c may easily be found from the two equations immediately preceding eq. (15). It is interesting to notice that the rate of change of vol- ume, 6, is equal to (a + c) and therefore constant for all points. Art. 6. — Torsion in Equilibrium, The formulas to be deduced in this article are those first given by Saint -Venant, and established in substantially the same manner. It will in all cases, except that of the final result for a rectangular cross-section, be convenient to use those equa- tions of Art. 3 which are given in terms of semi-polar co- ordinates. 854 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. Let Fig. I represent a cylindrical piece of material, with any cross-section, fixed in the plane ZY, and let the origin of co-ordinates be taken at 0. Let it be twisted also by a couple P.ab=Pl, the plane of which is parallel to ZY. The material will thus be subjected to no bending, but to pure torsion. The axis of the piece is sup- posed to be parallel to the axis of X as well as the axis of the couple. Normal sections of the piece, originally parallel to ZOYy will not remain plane after tor- sion takes place. But the tendency to twist any elementary portion of the piece about an axis passing through its centre and parallel to the axis of X will be very small compared with the tendency to twist it about either the axis of r or r ■''* ^rd4> ' dr r o; (1) (2) (3) (4) Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. . 855 After introducing the values of T^x and T^x, from eqs. (10) and (12) of Art. 3, in eqs. (2), (3), and (4) of the same article, at the same time making the external forces and second members of those equations equal to zero, and bear- ing in mind the conditions given above, there will result dr rd^ r /dJu d^p d^w d^u dii ^^p\ _ ^^\dr^'^dFdx'^rdJdx'^?d4''^7dr^7^)^'^' *^5^ dTrx / d'u d'p\ /M dTxd. ^/d\v d^M ^(7u^2 +r;7x^- =0 (7) dx \dx- rd(j)dx Also by eq. (6) of Art. 3, dx dr rd(j)^r ^ ^ The cylindrical piece of material is supposed to be of such length that the portion to which these equations apply is not a.ffected by the manner of application of the couple. This portion is, therefore, twisted uniformly from end to end; consequently the strain u will not vary with any change in x. Hence du Tx^° (9) Eq. (i) then shows that ^ = 0. This was to be antici- pated, since a pure shear cannot change the volume or 856 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. 11. density. Because ^ = 0, eqs. (2) and (3) at once give dp dw p -/ = — r7 + -=o (10) dr rd(j) r ' ^ As the torsion is uniform throughout the portion con- sidered, — = =— (11) Eq. (11), in connection with eq. (10), gives d'^w , . , ^, -0 (12) rdxdcj) Eqs. (11) and (12), in connection with eq. (10), reduce eq. (5) to the following form: % K'5?) d^u ,d^u du d .. \ "• / ^^^dj''^d?'^7dr^''"^d^''^^ dr ' ' ' ^'^^ Both terms of the second member of eq. (6) reduce to zero by eqs. (9) and (11), and give no new condition. The second term of the second member of eq. (7) is zero by eq. (9) ; the remaining term therefore gives d^w As the stress is all shearing, p will not vary with (f). Hence dp Alt. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 857 Eqs. (10), (11), and (15) show that ^=0, and reduce eq. (4) to div w ' Eq. (10) now becomes ^ =0, and shows that w does not contain 9^; while eq. (14) shows that w does not con- tain x' or any higher power of x. The strain w, in connec- tion with these conditions, is to be so determined as to sat- isfy eq. (16). If a is a constant, the following form fulfils all condi- tions : w = arx (17) Eq. (17) shows that the strain w, in the direction of cf), i.e., the angular strain at any point, varies directly as the dis- tance from the axis of X, and as the distance from the origin measured along that axis. This is a direct consequence of making Tr=o. The quantit}^ a is evidently the angle of torsion, or the angle through which one end of a unit of fibre, situated at unit's distance from the axis, is twisted ; for if r=x = i, w = a. An equation of condition relative to the exterior surface of the twisted piece yet remains to be determined ; and that is to be based on the supposition that no external force what- ever acts on the outer surface of the piece. In eqs. (13), (14), and (15) of Art. 2, consequently, P -=o. The conditions of the problem also make all the stresses except T^ = T^r and T^ = T^^ 858 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. equal to zero, while the cylindrical character of the piece makes p = go°; .'. cos p=o. If cos / be written for cos r, cos t -= sin q. Eq. (13), just cited, then gives Txr cos q + T^^, sin q=o (18) But since ^ = o and w = arx, and Eq. (18) now becomes du dr dr ^-=^^57 ^^9) Tx=Gl::^,+ar) (20) du --^^^^=-r7^' • • • ^''^ rd(j) in which r^ is the value of r for the perimeter of any normal section. Eqs. (13) and (21) are all that are necessary and all that exist for the determination of the strain u. Eq. (13) must be fulfilled at all points in the interior of the twisted piece, while eq. (21) must at the same time hold true at all points of the exterior surface. Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 859 After u is determined, Txr and Tx4> at once result from eqs. (19) and (20). The resisting moment of torsion then becomes M =ffT-4> ^' ^'t'-^^'^^ff^-^^^ dcj) + GaIp. (22) In this equation Ip= J J r^ .rdcfidr is the polar moment of inertia of the normal section of the piece about the axis of A^, and the dotible integral is to be extended over the whole section. According to the old or common theory of torsion M=GaIp. The third member of eq. (22) shows, however, that such an expression is not correct unless tt is equal to zero ; i.e., unless all normal sections remain plane while the piece is subjected to torsion. It will be seen that this is true for a circular sec- tion only. It may sometimes be convenient to put eq. (22) in the following form: M-GJ J rdr.-j^dcp + GaIp = Gj u.rdr + Galp. (23) In this equation u is to be considered as / 'f' du di'^'f'' while the remaining integration in r is to be so made that the whole section shall be covered. 86o TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. The preceding analysis shows that the old or common theory of torsion is correct in its expression for torsive strain, as it is identical with eq. (17) of Art. 6, i.e., w = arx ; but it will be seen later that the remaining formulae of the common theory are incorrect for all shapes of cross-section except the circle. Fortunately the torsion members prin- cipally used in engineering practice are shafts of circular section. Equations of Condition in Rectangular Co-ordinates. In the case of a rectangular normal section, the analysis is somewhat simplified by taking some of the quantities used in terms of rectangular co-ordinates. In the notation of Art. 2 all stresses will be zero except T3 and T^. Hence eqs. (10), (11), and (12) of that article reduce to dy dz ' ^=0; dT_ dx dT\ dx The strains in the directions of x, y, and z are, respec- tively, n, V, and w. Introducing the values of T^ and T.^ in the equations above, in terms of these strains, from eqs. (11) and (13) of Art. i, and then doing the sam/j.in reference to the conditions, Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 86 1 the following equations will result: df^d^^°' ^'^^ dv dw . ^ dz + d^''° (^7) The operations by which these results are reached are identical with those used above in connection with semi- polar co-ordinates, and need not be repeated. Eq. (27) is satisfied by taking V = OLXZ ; w= — axy ; in which a is the angle of torsion, as before. Eqs. (11) and (13) of Art. 5 then give ^.-KI+e)-<^")^ ■ ■ • <=»' The element of a normal section is dz dy. Hence the moment of torsion is M = ffiT,z-T^)dydz; .'. M =GJ {zu dz—yu dy) +Galp (31) Ip=ff{z'+y')dydz 862 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. is the polar moment of inertia of any section about the axis of A^. The integrals are to be extended over the whole section ; hence, in eq. (31), zu dz is to be taken as z dz. I -rdy J -yo dy ^ and yn dy as dy "°du dz"^'' in which expressions 3/0 and z^ are general co-ordinates of the perimeter of the normal section. Eq. (26) is identical with eq. (13), and can be derived from it, through a change in the independent variables, by the aid of the relations z=r cos (p and ;y=rsin^. Solutions of Eqs. (13) and (21). It has been shown that the function u, which represents the strain parahel to the axis of the piece, must satisfy eq. (13) [or eq. (26)] for all points of any normal section, and eq. (21) (or a corresponding one in rectangular co- ordinates) at all points of the perimeter ; and those two are the only conditions to be satisfied. It is shown by the ordinary operations of the calculus that an indefinite number of functions u, of r and 0, will satisfy eq. (13) ; and, of these, that some are algebraic and some transcendental. It is further shown that the various functions u which satisfy both eqs. (13) and (21) differ only by constants. Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 863 If u is first supposed to be algebraic in character, and if Cp ^2, ^3, etc., represent constant coefficients, the following general function will satisfy eq. (13): .( c.r sin 6 + c^r^ sin 2(h + cs^ sin 26+ . . .) , , ( +c'jrcos ■}- c/^ cos 2^ + ^3r^ cos 3^+ . . . — c^rsin — c'/^sin 2(j) — c\r- sin t^cJ)— . . . =C. {^^) C is a constant which changes only with the form of section. If -J- and —1-7 be found from eq. (32), w^hile j, be taken from eq. (33), and if these quantities be then intro- duced in eq. (21), it will be found that that equation is satisfied. The only form of transcendental function needed, among those to w^hich the integration of eq. (13) or eq. (26) leads, will be given in connection with the consideration of pieces with rectangular section, where it will be used. Elliptical Section about its Centre. Let a cylindrical piece of material with elliptical normal section be taken, and let a be the semi-major and b the semi-minor axis, while the angle is measured from a with the centre of the ellipse as the origin of co-ordinates, since the c^dinder will be twisted about its own axis. The 864 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. 11. polar equation of the elliptical perimeter may take the following shape: 7+7*;?T^^°'"^=^MT^- • • • (34) By a comparison of eqs. (33) and (34), it is seen that c^= / 9 , 7 9x and C = and that all the other constants are zero. Hence eq. (32) gives ^ = <^ 2{a' + b'f ^^^ ^"^'^^^ ^^^ ^^' • • (35) The quantity represented by / is evident. By eqs. (19) and (20) r;,;.=6'a: ^2_^^2 ^sin 2^; (36) Tt.6=' xq> ""^^(omt^^^^^^^'^v* * • • (37) Since "' ^ =dA, A being the area of the ellipse, or 2 7ra6, the second member of eq. (22), by the aid of eq. (37), may take the form M^Gaj dJ^ (^^^,r' cos 2 ct> + r'jdr; r/b'^ — a^r* r*\ Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 865 Then using eq. (34), If Ip is the polar moment of inertia of the elHpse (i.e., about an axis normal to its plane and passing through its centre), so that nabja^ + b^) ^P- 4 ' then A* M=Ga^,-j- (39) 4^'Ip ^-^^^ Using / in the manner shown in eq. (35), the resultant shear at any point becomes, by eq. (24), T=Gar\/p + 2f cos 2^ + 1. dT gives sin 29^ = 0, or (56 = 90° or o®. Since / is negative, T will evidently take its maximum when (j) has such a value that 2/ cos 2^ is positive, or = 90° and r ^b in the value of T, [Ch. 11. Taking Ga from eq. (40) and inserting it in eq. (38), (40) in which m 2 "* rrab' 4 (41) or the moment of inertia of the section about the major axis. Equilateral Triangle about its Centre of Gravity. This case is that of a cyhndrical piece whose normal cross- section is an equilateral triangle, and the torsion will be sup- posed about an axis passing through b the centres of gravity of the different normal sections. The cross-section is represented in Fig. 3, G being the h centre of gravity as well as the origin of co-ordinates. Let GH = l,GD = a. Then from the known properties of such a triangle, FD=DB-=BF^2aV~i,. Hence the equation for DB is ; r sin — Hence the equation for BF is ; Fig. 3. 2a — r cos V3 r cos f a = o XT 1 . r r-^ • • 2a — r cos 6 Hence the equation for FD is; r sm <^ + ,- =0 Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 867 Taking the product of these three equations and reduc- ing, there will result for the equation to the perimeter — — ^COS^(/)-- — (42) 2 6a ^ ' 3 ^^ ^ Comparing this equation with eq. (33), I . ^ 20^ Hence c, = — ^ and C= — •• 3 6a 3 r^ sin S(^ «=-«-^^ (43) A.nd by eqs. (19) and (20) r^sin^^ T^r=-CfOL — — ; (44) , r^cos 3(/) 2 a ') (45) Eq. (22) then gives M=GaI,-Gaf p^^^drd^; ^GaU-Gaf'^dr; = Ga\Ip—aW~^ =0.6 GaIp = i.S Gaa'Vs; . (46) since 7^= polar moment of inertia = 3a ^^3. 868 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. Ch. II. By eq. (24) ^ ^ I , r^ cos 30 r* dT . or = 0°, 60°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 300°, or 360°. The values 0°, 120°, 240°, and 360° make cos30=+i; hence, for a given value of r, these make T a minimum. The values 60°, 180°, and 300° make, cos 3(/) = -i; hence, for a given value of r, these make T a maximum. Putting cos 30 = — I in eq. (47), {-?) T=Ga[r + ~j. ..... (48) This value will be the greatest possible when r is the greatest. But = 60°, 180°, and 300° correspond to the nor- mal a dropped on each of the three sides of the triangle from G. Hence r = a, in eq. (48), gives the greatest intensity of shear T.^, or m> T^--G<^a (49) Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 869 Or the greatest intensity of shear exists at the middle point of each side. Those points are the nearest of all, in the perimeter, to the axis of torsion. The value of Ga^ from eq. (49), inserted in eq. (46), gives M=o.4-r^= — -. .... (50) a "* 20 ^ in which 1= side of section = 2a\/3. Rectangular Section about an Axis passing through its Centre of Gravity. In this case it will be necessary to consider one of the transcendental forms to which the integration of eq. (13) [or (26)] leads; for if the polar equation to the perimeter be formed, as was done in the preceding case, it will be found to contain r*, to which no term in eq. (33) corresponds. If e is the base of the Napierian system of logarithms (numerically ^ = 2.71828, nearly) and A any constant what- ever, it is known that the general integral of the partial differential eq. (13) may be expressed as follows: -ii=^4^«''cos^ ^nVsin^^ . . . . . (51) when w^ + w'^ = o; for d^u d^u du ^ , , ,,, J. , .L dr^ r^ d(j>^ rdr - ^ But the second member of this equation is evidently equal to zero if (w^4-n'^)=o or n'=V — 870 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. 11. These relations make it necessary that neither n or n' shall be imaginary. It will hereafter be convenient to use the following no- tation for hyperbolic sines, cosines, and tangents : sih i = ; coh t = ; and tah t = -— : 2 2 e^-\-e~^ By the use of Euler's exponential formula, as is well known, and remembering that n''^=—n^^ eq. (51) may be put in the following form: n = i'e^'^cos.^ |-^4^ sin (nr sin ) . sih (nr cos ) — ar^ sin cj) cos 0. (53) Fig. 4 represents the cross-section with C as the origin of co-ordinates and axis. The angle (p is measured positively >^ ^iC Fig. 4. from CN toward CH. At the points A^ H, K, and L, in the 872 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. equation to the perimeter, dr^ will be zero. Hence at those points, by eq. (21), du -J- = ^[A „ sin (nr sin ^) . n cos . coh (nr cos 0) 4- A „ . w sin <^ . cos {nr sin (j>) . sih (nr cos 9^)] — 2ar sin ^ cos =0. At the points under consideration 873 for n in that equation. Eq. (53) will then become <» ^ . (2n—i . ,\ ., /2W— I \ u = 2A^sm. I nr sm ^ I . sih I nr cos I — ar- sin cos 2 dr and — ?i will be the tangent of (—) , or r^d dr^ . , .. , . • — —-77 = — tan ( .-9 )=U Hence eq. (2 i) becomes du ' dr = tan 4>, du rd^j) or du ar sm 4^ = -r- cos 4>- du rdcf> (56) sin (j). Substituting from eq. (55), then making r cos =-, 2 ^^ 2fz-i . (2n—i \ . /2n—i sin 0j 874 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. If r sin m(j) and z=r cos cj) be introduced, that equation will become u= — azy + © ac^Z ^ , ; . (57) ( 2n— 1 \ {2n-iyQoh \—^-b) This value of u placed in eq. (31) will enable the moment of torsion to be at once written. c c The limits +3^0 and -y^ are +- and , and the limits + ^0 and -Zq are +- and — -. Hence 2 2 abc .. 271—1. {2n — \Y coh =^J = Q, for brevity; -H := ahc / 271 I 2n — I ny (2W— ij^eoh \ 2C -.R. J 876 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. For the next integration [Ch. II. f. Qz dz = abc 12 • + 'WFf 2bc , 2W— I , 4C" ., /2n—i .\ _ 7 r-.coh- 7:6—7 ^T~2Sih( — ^ — nb) (2W— i)^ coh (^•') /: Ry dy = abc ■2 /sVc °° 12 \7tl b c" (2yc_^{2n-iyn T-^ sih I 7zb 2C (2n— i)^ coh 2n— I 2C / ^ Thus the integrations indicated in eq. (31) are com- pleted. Hence M=G'^fQzdz + fRydy + aIpi. . Remembering that M (58) But it is known that 2 n^ I (2W— l)* I . 2 .3 ' 2 5" Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 877 Hence eq. (58) becomes r 64. , tah(i^.6) -[ M=Gabc'\ --^j:I ,!_,,, ' |. . (59) Since I — tah TT I— tah ^TT i— tahs^r tah 7z tah ^tt tah t;;r ■) and since 64 ^-g- = 0.209137, and remembering that T\2W-i/ ~^~^3^ 5'"^* • * "V 2V295.1215' ^q- (59) becomes M =GabA - - 0.2 10083^ /i-tah— i-tah^^— \ + 0.209137^1 ^ + 5 + . . . / 1. (60) Eq. (60) gives the value of the moment of torsion of a rectangular bar of material. 878 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. 11. If z had been taken parallel to b, and y parallel to c, a moment of equal value would have been found, which can be at once written from eq. (60) by writing b for c and c for b. That moment will be M--Gacb'\ --0.210083^ J. (61 , / 1 — tah^ I — tah^ b\ 20 20 + 0.209137 -\^ J + ^1 + Eq. (60) should be used when b is greater than c, and eq. (61) ivhen c is greater than b, because the series in the paren- theses are then very rapidly converging, and not diverging. It will never be necessary to take more than three or four terms and one, only, will ordinarily be sufficient. The follow- ing are the values of I — tah — for a few values of n: 1 ^^^\ I —tah — 1 =0.083 : 0.00373 : 0.000162 : 0.000007 ; n= I : 2 : 3 : 4 Square Section. If c =b either eq. (60) or eq. (61) gives M^Gab^ I -- 0.2 101+ 0.209(1 -tah- j ; 44 /. M =0.1^06 Gab^-=Ga — ^, . . (62) Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 879 in which .4 is the area ( = 6^) and Ip is the polar moment of mertia i ^^^ )• Rectangle in which b = 2C. If b = 2C, eq. (60) gives M =^Ga. 2C^(- — 0.105 +0.1046 (i — tah k) \; I 3 A' :. M^o.AS! Go^c'---Ga-~-^, . . . (63) in which A is the area ( = 2c'^) and /^ = polar moment of in- ertia J)c' + h'c ^Sc' 12 6 ■ Rectangle in which b = 4.C. If 6 ^ 4c, eq. (60) then gives M =^Gabc^l — 0.0525 j =1.123 G^ac*; A' '. M=Ga ^, (64) 40.2 Ip ■ ^ ^^ in which A =area = 4C^ and Ip = polar moment of inertia _hc^-\-b^c _i']c^ 12 .^ 88o TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. fCh. 11. If b is greater than 2C, it will be sufficiently near for all ordinary purposes to write M -^Ga—[i -o.6sj^) (65) Greatest Intensity of Shear. There yet remains to be determined the greatest inten- sity of shear at any point in a section, and in searching for this quantity it will be convenient to use eqs. (28) and (29). It will also be well to observe that by changing z to y, yto — z, c to b, and 6 to c, in eq. (57), there may be at once written . / 2n—i \ .. /2n— I \ u^azy-[-) .ab-I -~ (2n— i)^coh 26 - ncj .(66) This amounts to ttirning the co-ordinate axes 90^ Since the resultant shear at any point is it will be necessary to seek the miaximum of du V idu V T' The two following equations will then give the points desired : Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. i?) du \d^u (du \/ d^u \ ,. , + a.).-. + (rf,-«3'j(5^-«j=o; (67) dy \dy jdy dz du \ dhi \ (du \d^u ,^„. It is unnecessary to reproduce the complete substitu- tions in these two equations, but such operations show that the points of maximum values of T are at the middle points of the sides of the rectangular sections, omitting the evident fact that r = o at the centre. It will also be found that the great- est intensity of shear will exist at the middle points of the greater sides. This result may be reached independent of any analytical test, by bearing in mind that an elongated ellipse closely approximates a rectangular section, and it has already been shown that the greatest intensity in an elliptical section is foimd at the extremities of the smaller axis. By the aid of eqs. (28), (29), (57), and (66), it will also be foimd that T^^o at the extremities of the diameter c, and T^=o at the extremities of the diameter h. The maxi- mum value of T will then be r„ = -r,= -ff(|-ay)^^^. . . . (69) y= By the use of eq. (57) du n . /2n—i \ ^ (2n—i \ {^-j)n-x_^^^ ( ny\ .coh( tcz\ {2n-iyQ.oh ^-^^^^j TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. Putting z=-o and y =~ m. this equation, there will result T„^Gacr^-^ i_^^__^-|.. (70) I '' ' (2W— i)"-^ coll ^ -r.b] I If h is greater than c the series appearing in this equation is very rapidly convergent, and it will never be necessary to use more than two or three terms if the section is square, and if h is four or five times c there may be written T^=Gac . (71) Square Section. Making h=c in eq. (70), and making ;z = i, 2, and 3 (i.e., taking three terms of the series), there will result T T^^ =0.6"] 6 Gac; .'. 6^0: = 1.48— ^ Inserting this value in eq. (62), M = o.2ib'T^=^^^^^ (72) M M •*• '^rn-O.S-ra^-S^S. .... (73) in which J b' be I = — and a =- =- 12 22 Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 883 Rectangular Section; h = 2C. Making h^2C in eq. (70), and making w = i, only, there will result T T,„-= 0.93(70:^; :. Ga^i.o^-^, Inserting this value in eq. (63), in which i¥ = o.49^^r,„ = i.47-^ (74) M M .'. r^-=o.68ya-2-3, .... (75) ^ be' e' ^ c I -= — -=7- and a == -. 126 2 Rectangular Section; h=/[C. Making h = /[c in eq. (70), and making n=-i, only, 7 ^,« =0.997 Gac; :. Ga = i.oos-^. Inserting this value in eq. (64), IT M = 1.126 r^r,„ -= 1.69 — -. . . . (76) m ^ a ' . ., M M in which •. T„,-o.6ya=^o.9^, (77) ^ be" c^ , c y= — =— and a=- T2 3 2 884 TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. [Ch. II. Circular Section about its Centre. The torsion of a circular cylinder furnishes the simplest example of all. If ro is the radius of the circular section, the polar equa- tion of that section is — = C (constant). Comparing this equation with eq. (33), it is seen that ^1=^2 = ^3== ••• =^1'=^/= ••• =o- By eq. (32) this gives u=o. Hence all sections remain plane during torsion. Eqs. (19) and (20) then give Txr=o and T^4,=Gar (78) Eq. (23) gives for the moment of torsion M=GaI, (79) or A ^G M =o.K TirQ^ .Ga=- ' 27- Q^> .... (80) in which equation A is the area of the section and r _^ Art. 6.] TORSION IN EQUILIBRIUM. 88$ The greatest intensity of shear in the section will be ob- tained by making r = ro in eq. (78), or T^=Gar,; .\Ga=^^ (81) r. Eq. (80) then becomes i\/ = o.5;rVr^ = 2^ (82)' .. ^m =0-64— 3=0. 5-j-ro, (83) in which / = — ^• 4 It is thus seen that the circular section is the only one treated which remains plane during torsion. General Observations. The preceding examples will sufficiently exemplify the method to be followed in any case. Some general conclu- sions, however, may be drawn from a consideration of eq. (33)- If the perimeter is symmetrical about the line from which ^ is measured, then r must be the same for + c6 and — ^; hence c/ =c^^ =c/ = ... =0. If the perimeter is symmetrical about a line at right angles to the zero position of r, then r must be the same for 0=9o°+0' and go^-gS'; 886 TORSIONAL OSCILLATIONS. [Ch. II. hence ^1=^3=^5... =^2'=^/=^/= . . . =0. In connection with the first of these sets of results, eq. (32) shows that every axis of symmetry of sections repre- sented by eq. {^^) will not be moved from its original position by torsion. If the section has two axes of symmetry passing through the origin of co-ordinates, then will all the above constants be zero, and its equation will become J 4-^2^' COS 2c^ + ^/'cos 4 can, then, vary with cj) or ([/. By the aid of these considerations, and after omitting R^, ^0, ^0, and the second members, the eqs. (i), (2), and (3) of Art. 4 reduce to dNr ^ 2Nr-N^-N^ -5r+ r =^', •.•.(!) -A^^ + A^^=o (2) By eq. (2) N^=N^. Eq. (i) then becomes dNr Nr-N^ -5/ + ^— r-=- (3) On account of the existing condition of stress which has just been indicated it at once results that lfj = CO=0, and that ^ is a function of r only. Eqs. (4) to (10) of Art. 4 then reduce to '-i-'i-' (4) "'-^r'-"^!--- • • • . . (5) Nt=Nt = ^^d + 2G^. I-2C ■ r (6) 894 THICK, HOLLOW SPHERES. [Ch. II. After substitution of these quantities, eq. (3) becomes 2Gt ((Pp 2rdp—2pdr\ d^p dp p T^^ [d^ + ?~dF~) + '^dr^ + ^^'7d~^^? '-^""^ or d'p K'^'r — o. dr^ dr One integration gives dp 2p ^ Hence 6, the rate of variation of volume, is a constant quantity. Eq. (7) may take the form r dp-{- 2p dr = cr dr. As it stands, this equation is not integrable, biit, by in- specting its form, it is seen that r is an integrating factor. Multiplying both sides of the equation, then, by r, r^dp+ 2rpdr =d(r^p) =cr'^dr; T ^ CT b :. r'p = c-+b; .-. P=- + ~2' ... (8) Substituting from eqs. (7) and (8) in eq. (5), __ 2GV 2Gc 4bG , ^ A^r=7z:^^+— - 7f; .... (9) It is obvious what A represents. Art. 8.] THICK, HOLLOIV SPHERES. . 895 When / and r^ are put for r, A^^ becomes —p and —p^. Hence and These equations express the conditions involved in eqs. (13), (14), and (15) of Art. 2. The last equations give ip,-p)ry\ r'^ — r^ • • -^ ^/3 ^ 3 • 4^^=~^3_^3 » These quantities make it possible to express A^^ and .Y^ independently of the constants of integration, c and 6, for those intensities become _ P/ ,'-pr'' _ (p,-p)ry' I . ^^r — ^3_^ 3 /3_^ 3 '^31 • V-tO/ Thus it is seen that N^=N4, has its greatest value for the interior surface ; that intensity will be called h. It is now required to find r^ — r'=tin terms of h, py and /?j. If r =r' in eq. (11). 896 THICK, HOLLOfV SPHERES. [Ch. II. Dividing this equation by r'^ and solving, /3 2(h + p) 2h-p + 3Pi' ^- ,3 2{h+p) -/. . . (12) If the intensities p and p^ are given for any case, eq. (12) will give such a thickness that the greatest tension h (sup- posing p^ considerably less than p) shall not exceed any assigned value. If the external pressure is very small com- pared with the internal, ^^ may be omitted. The values of .4 and 4Gb allow the expressions for c and b to be at once written. If p^ is greater than p, nothing is changed except that A^^ =A^^ becomes negative, or compression. CHAPTER III. THEORY OF FLEXURE. Art. 9. — General Formulae. If a prismatic portion of material is either supported at both -ends, or fixed at one or both ends, and subjected to the action of external forces whose directions are normal to, and cut, the axis of the prismatic piece, that piece is said to be subjected to " flexure." If these external forces have lines of action which are oblique to the axis of the piece, it is subjected to combined flexure and direct stress. Again, if the piece of material is acted upon by a couple having the same axis with itself, it will be subjected to '' tor- sion." The most general case possible is that which combines these three, and some general equations relating to it will first be established. The co-ordinates axis of X will be taken to coincide with the axis of the prism, and it will be assumed that all external forces act upon its ends only. Since no external forces act upon its lateral surface, there will be taken retaining the notation of Art. 2. These conditions are not strictly true for the general case, but the errors are, at most, excessively small for the cases of direct stress or flexure, or 897 898 THEORY OF FLEXURE. [Ch. III. for a combination of the two. By the use of eqs. (12), (21), and (22) of Art. i the conditions just given become r /du dv dw i — 2r \dx- dy dz '- + ^+=^)+| = o; ... (I) r /du dv dw \ dw T=^VS + 5^+^/+5F^°' • • • ^^^ dv dw , . dF + d^^°- (3) Eqs. (i) and (2) then give dv dw d^-d^=° (4) In consequence of eq. (4) eqs. (i) and (2) give dv _dw du dy dz dx ^^^ By the aid of eq. (5) and the use of eqs. (11), (13), and (20) of Art. I, in eqs. (10), (11), and (12) of Art. 2 (in this case Xq = Yq=Zq = o), there will result d'^u d^u d^u .^. d^u d^v d^^d^' ^''' ••••••• (7) d^u d^w . d^z^di^^"" ^^^ Eqs. (3), (5), (6), (7), and (8) are five equations of condition by which the strains u, v, and w are to be deter- mined. Art. 9.] GENERAL FORMUL/E. 899 Let eq. (6) be differentiated in respect to x: dhi d^u d^u dx^ dy^ dx dz^ dx From this equation let there be subtracted the sum of the results obtained by differentiating eq. (7) in respect to y and (8) in respect to z: d^u d^v dhv dx^ dx^ dy dx^ dz In this equation substitute the results obtained by differentiating eq. (5) twice in respect to x, there will result .3 HP d^u \dx^ "3J'=^S^ =°- W This result, in the equation immediately preceding eq. (9), by the aid of eq. (5) will give d'v o. dx^ dy After differentiating eq. (7) in respect to y, and substi- tuting the value immediately above, d^u _ \dxi dy'Tx 57" =° ('°) Eqs. (9) and (10) enable the second equation preceding eq. (9) to give ^du" d^u _ \dx^ dz^x dz' ^° ^^'^ goo THEORY OF FLEXURE, [Ch. III. Let the results obtained by differentiating eq. (7) in respect to z and (8) in respect to y be added : d^u ■ d^v d^w dx dy dz dx^ dz dx^ dy The sum of the second and third terms of the first mem- ber of this equation is zero, as is shown by twice differentiat- ing eq. (3) in respect to x. Hence d^u \dx, , . = 0. .... . (12) dy dz dx dy dz Eqs. (9), (10), (11), and (12) are sufficient for the d'VL determination of the form of the ftinction -j-, if it be assumed to be algebraic, for Eq. (9) shows that x"^ does not appear in it ; " (10) - - f " ^,2 << <■<■ (11) (( <( 2:^ <( (< (( (' (12) (< (( yz (< (( (( ii The products xz and xy may, however, be foimd in the fimction. Hence if a, a^, a^, b, h^, and h^ are constants, there may be written du — =a + a^z-\-a^y + xib + b,z + b^y). . . . (13) "Eq. (5) then gives dv div jy = :^ = -r{a + a,z + a^y + x(b + b^z + b^)], . (14) Art. 9.] GENERAL FORMUL/E. 9°! Substituting from eq. (13) in eqs. (7) and (8), ^2 ==-a^-h^\ (15) ^ = -a,-b,x (16) The method of treatment of the various partial deriva- tives in the search for eqs. (13) and (14) is identical with that given by Clebsch in his " Theorie der Elasticitat Fester K or per." It is to be noticed that the preceding treatment has been entirely independent of the form of cross-section or direction of external forces. It is evident from eqs. (13) and (14) that the constant a depends upon that component of the external force which acts parallel to the axis of the piece and produces tension or compression only. For (pages 9, 10) it is known that if a piece of material be subjected to direct stress only, du ^ dv dw -J- =-a and t~ = j~ = — ^^ ; dx dy dz the negative sign showing that ra is opposite in kind to a, both being constant. Again, if z and y are each equal to zero, eq. (13) shows that du . -T~ =a-\-bx. dx Hence hx is a part of the rate of strain in the direction of x which is uniform over the whole of any normal section of the piece of material, and it varies directly with x. But such a 902 THEORY OF FLEXURE. [Ch. III. portion of the rate of strain can only be produced by an external force acting parallel to the axis of X, and whose intensity varies directly as x. But in the present case such a force does not exist. Hence h must equal zero. The eqs. (13), (14), (15), and (16) show that a^, h^ and Oj, 62 are symmetrical, so to speak, in reference to the co- ordinates z^indy, while eqs. (13) and (14) show that the nor- mal intensity A^^ is dependent on those, and no other, con- stants in pure flexure in which a = o. It follows, there- fore, that those two pairs of constants belong to the two cases of flexure about the two axes of Z and Y. No direct stress N^ can exist in torsion, which is simply a twisting or turning about the axis of X. Since the generality of the deductions will be in no man- ner affected, pure flexure about the axis of Y will be con- sidered. For this case a=a^ = h^ = o =b. Making these changes in (13) and (14), du ^=a,z + b,xz; (17) dv _ dw du ^~5F = -'•5^ = -''(«.« + V^)- • • • (18) . . du dv dw ■■ ^^Tx+d^ + d^-'(^^ + b^^^(^-^r)-- ■ (19) Also, ^ i~2r dx N, = 2G{r-\- i)(a^ + b^x)z=E(a^+b,x)z, . (20) Art. 9.] GENERAL FORMUL/E. 903 since 2G{r-^i)=E, Taking the first derivative of N^^ ^'=£(a, + V) (21) This important equation gives the law of variation of the intensity of stress acting parallel to the axis of a bent beam, in the case of pure flexure produced by forces exerted at its extremity. That equation proves that in a given nor- mal section of the beam, whatever may be the form of the sectiCfn, the rate of variation of the normal intensity of stress is constant ; the rate being taken along the direction of the external forces. It follows from this that A^^ must vary directly as the distance from some particular line in the normal section considered in which its value is zero. Since the external forces F are normal to the axis of the beam and direction of A/'j, and because it is necessary for equilibrium that the sum of all the forces N^dy dz, for a given section, must be equal to zero, it follows that on one side of this line tension must exist, and on the other compression. Let A^ represent the normal intensity of stress at the distance unity from the line, h the variable width of the section parallel to 3/, and let i = hdz. The sum of all the tensile stress in the section will be [ NzA=n\ Jo J c zJ. The total compressive stress will be Np zJ. J -zi 904 THEORY OF FLEXURE. [Ch. III. The integrals are taken between the limits o and the greatest value of z in each direction, so as to extend over the entire section. In order that equilibrium may exist, therefore, Fig. I. n\\ zA^r za\ =0. ■•■1: zA =0. (22) Eq. (22) shows that the line of no stress must pass through the centre of gravity of the normal section. This line of no stress is called the neutral axis of the section. Regarding the whole beam, there will be a sur- face which will contain all the neutral axes of the different sections, and it is called the neutral surface of the bent beam. The neutral axis of any section, therefore, is the line of intersection of the plane of section and neutral sur- face. Hereafter the axis of X will be so taken as to traverse the centres of gravity of the different normal sections before flexure. The origin of co-ordinates will then be Art. 9 GENERAL FORMUL/E. 90^ taken at the centre of gravity of the fixed end of the beam, as shown in Fig. i. The value of the expression {a^ + h^x), in terms of the external bending moment, is yet to be determined. Con- sider any normal section of the beam located at the distance x from 0, Fig. i, and let OA =1. Also, let Fig. 2 represent the sec- tion considered, in which BC is the neutral axis and d^ and d^ the distances of the most remote fibres from BC. Let moments of all the forces acting upon the portion (/ — x) of the beam be taken about the neutral axis BC. If, again, h is the variable width of the beam, the internal resisting moment will be Fig. rd' rd' NJjzdz=E(a^ + b^x)\ z\hdz, J —di J —di But the integral expression in this equation is the moment of inertia of the normal section about the neutral axis, which will hereafter be represented by I. The moment of the external force, or forces, F, will be F{l — x), and it will be equal, but opposite in sign, to the internal resisting moment Hence F l-x)=M=-E(a^ + b^x)L (23) (a^ + b^x) = K EF (24) Substituting this quantity in eq. (16), dhv_M_ dx' "EF (25) 9o6 THEORY OF FLEXURE, [Ch. IIL It has already been seen (page 38) that eq. (25) is one of the most important equations in the whole subject of the "Resistance of Materials." An equation exactly similar to (25) may of course be written from eq. (15); but in such an expression M will represent the external bending moment about an axis par- allel to the axis of Z. No attempt has hitherto been made to determine the complete values of ti, v, and w, for the mathematical opera- tions involved are very extended. If, however, a beam be considered ^vhose width, parallel to the axis of Y, is indefi- nitely small, u and w may be determined without difficulty. The conclusions reached in this manner will be applicable to any long rectangular beam without essential error. If y is indefinitely small, all terms involving it as a factor will disappear in ti and w ; or, the expressions for the strains u and w will he functions of z and x only. But making u and w functions of z and x only is equivalent to a restriction of lateral strains to the direction of z only, or to the reduction of the direct strains one half, since direct strains and lateral strains in two directions accompany each other in the un- restricted case. Now as the lateral strain in one direction is supposed to retain the same amoimt as before, while the direct strain is considered only half as great, the value of their ratio for the present case will be twice as great as that used on pages 9 to 12. Hence 2r must be written for r, in order that that letter may represent the ratio for the unre- stricted case, and this will be done in the following equations. Since w and u are independent of y, dw du dv 1— =-3- =0, and I^=G-r-' dy dy ' ^ dx But, by eq. (14), V = — 2r(ai + h^x)zy + f{x, z). Art. 9.] GENERAL FORMULy^, 907 By eq. (3), since dw ^ = -2ria^ + \x)y + ^J(x, z) =0. This equation, however, involves a contradiction, for it makes f(x, z) equal to a function which involves y, which is impossible. Hence f{x,z)^o. Consequently ^^ / 7 s which is indejfinitely small compared with ^=-2r{a^ + b,x)z, and is to be considered zero Because f(x, z) = o, dv . This quantity is indefinitely small; hence Tg = — 2Grh^zy is of the same magnitude. Under the assumption made in reference to y, there may be written, from eqs. (17) and (18), u = a^xz + h^-z-\-f{z); .... (26) w=-r{a^z^-\-h^xz'')-[-f{x), . . . (27) 9o8 THEORY OF FLEXURE. [Ch. III. Using eq. (26) in connection with eq. (6), By two integrations, f'{z)^-^-c'z + c" ' (28) Using eq. (27) in connection with eq. (8), By two integrations, The functions u and w now become u = a^xz + b^-—z '—-c'z + (/^; . . . (29) ^ 3 w= — ra^z^ — rb^xz^ — b^~ ^ — + c^x + (7^. . (30) The constants of integration c' , c" , etc., depend upon the values of u and w, and their derivatives, for certain reference values of the co-ordinates x and z, and also upon the manner of application of the external forces, F, at the end of the beam, Fig. i . The last condition is involved in the application. of eqs. (13), (14), and (15) of Art. 2. Art. 9.1 GENERAL FORMULA. 909 In Fig. I let the beam be fixed at 0. There will then result, f or :^; = o and z=o, (du \ 2 = 0< x = o (u = o, and w = o) In virtue of the last condition, c =^11=0- In consequence of the first, After inserting these values in eqs. (29) and (30), du ^ x^ . . dz dw = — rh^z^ — 6j — — a^x + c^. ^^=^Gt+S = -^^(^+^>^+^'^.- • (31) The surface of the end of the beam, on which F is applied, is at the distance I from the origin and parallel to the plane ZY . Also, the force F has a direction parallel to the axis of Z. Using the notation of eqs. (13), (14), and (15) of Art. 2, these conditions give cos^ = i, cosg = o, cosr=o, C0S7r=0, COS/ = 0, COS|0 = I. 9IO THEORY OF FLEXURE, [Ch. III. Since, for x = l, M = F(l-x)=o, eqs. (24) and (20) give N.^=o for all points of the end sur- face. Eq. (15) is, then, the only one of those equations which is available for the determination of q. That equation becomes simply For a given value of z, therefore, any value may be as- sumed for 72- For the upper and lower surfaces of the beam let the intensity of shear be zero; or iov z= ±d let T^ = o. Hence, by eq. (31), c,=b,(i+r)d\ Fh .-. T,^^{d'-z^). ...... (32) The constants a^ and b^ still remain to be found. The only forces acting upon the portion (/ — x) of the beam are F and the sum of all the shears T^ which act in the section x. Let Jy be the indefinitely small width of the beam, which, since z is finite, is thus really made constant. The princi- ples of equilibrium require that r T,.Jy.dz=Gb,(i+r)r {d\ Ay .dz-z\ Ay .dz) =F. The first part of the integral will be 2 Ayd^, and the second part will be the moment of inertia of the cross-section (made Art. 9-1 GENERAL FORM UL/E. 911 rectangular by taking Ay constant) about the neutral axis. Hence 77 77 2Gh,{i+r)I=F, or ^ - ,g(i +^)/ °gj- • '^H) .: T.^Yl^d'-^') (34) If «; = o in eq. (24), ^^.= -£7 (35) Thus the two conditions of equilibrium are. involved in the determination of a^ and h^. The complete values of the strains u and w are, finally, F I x^ _z^ 2 3 ^ = gjUT"T-^^^)' • • (36) w F / :r^ Z:r^\ F(Px = -(^lr,^-rx,^--+-)+-^. . . (37) These results are strictly true for rectangular beams of indefinitely small width, but they may be applied to any rectangular beam fixed at one end and loaded at the other, with sufficient accuracy for the ordinary purposes of the civil engineer. It is to be remembered that the load at the end is supposed to be applied according to the law given ^y ^q.- (34) » ^ condition which is never realized. Hence these formulas are better applicable to long than short beams. 912 THEORY OF FLEXURE, [Ch. III. The greatest value of T^, in eq. (34), is found at the neutral axis by making z = o\ for which it becomes ^^="2r=f^- • • • • • (38) —J is the mean intensity of shear in the cross-section; hence the greatest intensity of shear is once and a half as great as the mean. In eq. (36), if 2 = 0, u = o. Hence no point of the neu- tral surface suffers longitudinal displacement. In eq. (37) the last term of the second member is that part of the vertical deflection due to the shear at the neu- tral surface, as is shown by eq. (38). The first term of the second member, being independent of